Home

This Manual - Lemke Software GmbH

1. Display Allow extensions leave empty to ignore this list separated by a space Function Keywords Misc Open Preview i Tool bar y Default Undo If the Redirect doubleclick to Finder option is enabled each graphic is opened as if it were double clicked in the operating system Graphics saved in Photoshop are now opened in Photoshop and graphics saved with GraphicConverter are opened in Graphic Converter For a better overview it is useful to display the path in the window title bar The Open folders in same browser option allows you to open folders in the middle section of the same browser window by double clicking them You can only create new browser windows when this option is enabled by clicking Open File Browse Folder If you select Drag amp Drop handling Act as the Finder files are moved as long as the target destination is in the same volume If the destination is in another volume the files are copied This means that they remain in their original location and are copied to the target destination 273 Select Move by default and copy with option key to apply the same logic to copying and moving to another volume as to working within a single volume When files are mo ved the original files are deleted If the Option key is held down the file is copied to the target destination and the source file remains in the original location Enable Add complete image to drag if you want to insert pictu
2. Display text below image Q Display text above image Open Save Cancel 0K 83 Select the background color of the Internet pages to be created with Color Click the color sample to change the color You will find information about the color models on page 230 For the Internet we recommend selecting a color from the HTML model as this is displayed in the Internet exactly as in the picture editor program Cellspacing allows you to define a value for the spacing between images or text and the table cell lines Set the size of the preview pictures and the linked images in the middle section with Width and Height All landscape format preview pictures are calculated with the set width for example 150 pixels The height value is not taken into account as it specifies the height of the portrait pictures All portrait pictures get a preview with this height We therefore recommend to always select the same sized values The pictures will not be the same size when the values are different The Relative Width allows you to specify a percentage for the width that the linked pic ture should be scaled to by the browser 100 will scale it to the width of the browser window The file size remains the same Select Absolute Width to display the linked images in their actual size Large pictures may however be larger than the visible area of the browser window First find out how large the preview pictures should be wi
3. Full Screen Preview Before Median f Cancel fox Unfortunately the median filter reduces the sharpness Therefore select a smaller value Slight sharpening afterwards increases the suppressed faults again but can sometimes improve pictures The dialog shows an overview of the picture and an enlarged detail that can be zoomed before and after the filter is applied Use Reset to return the sliders to their original posi tions On slow computers the Radius slider may seem difficult to move because the pre view picture has to be recalculated In this case simply enter the new value using the key board Picture Information Picture Pixmap Information displays the technical picture information size resoluti on color depth colors used and memory requirement Width Height Resolution Horizontal Vertical Depth Colors Used Memory 186 Pixmap Information 2272 31 6 80 2 1704 PER 60 1 72 0 72 0 32 136421 15513216 Pixels inch cm Pixels inch cm ppi ppi Bit s Bytes If you define a selection the details will only refer to the selection You can also call up this dialog using the Help key Histogram Picture Histogram displays the histogram for the current picture The frequency of the color black in the picture is indicated by the height of the peak at the left hand end of the diagram The color white is at the right hand end All o
4. Cancel Eo Click OK to create the Internet pages and pictures GraphicConverter now creates one or more HTML pages and two folders for the pre view pictures and the originals If several overview pages are created GraphicConverter inserts links at the bottom of the pages so you can switch to the next or previous page Copy the files and folders created on your Web server and set for example a link to the first catalog page of your homepage An example can be found at http www hoch zich de Uploading and Downloading Documents You will also find the Upload File s option in the Internet menu accessed via the globe on the far right of the menu bar that allows you to copy files onto a Web server using the ftp protocol First select the files in the browser If you also want to upload HTML files you 90 first need to remove the file types HTML and HTM from the list of files to ignore under Preferences Open with so that they are displayed in the browser Preferences EXIF m Browser Misc Multi page Save pe Select default Open with application General m Custom Icon _ Redirect double click to Finder Settings v Show path in window title rei Open folders in same browser Effects Mi Use lossless JPEG rotation mirroring Mise Reopen last browser window after startup Move Folders Move Folders 2 Drag amp Drop handling Move Folders 3 Act as the Finder C t A z a Text IPTC J Move by default and
5. Change size proportional Size 33 f Y OCT You can use View as Non Proportional to display a picture distorted by just chan ging one of the two values for example You can use this function to try out distortion ef fects The distortion is only saved when you select Picture Size and then Burn In and then save the picture The Zoom Selection option is only available if a selection has been defined and zooms the picture so that the displayed picture section is about as big as the current selection The top left hand part is displayed not the selection area If necessary scroll with the sli ders or move the picture section with the mouse while you hold down the spacebar There are two icons in the window frame to the right of the zoom level depicting a magnification glass with a plus respectively a minus Clicking the small mountains switches to the next zoom level down and accordingly clicking the large mountains switches to the next zoom level up You can use the magnifying glass to zoom in two ways Click the magnifying glass in the toolbox you may need to select Window Show Toolbox If you click the picture with the magnifying glass it will be zoomed to the next level up If there is not enough space for the picture on the screen the section of the picture that you clicked will be displayed as centered as possible If for example you want to enlarge a person s face click the face until it is displayed large en
6. The Dither option can always be enabled for changing the color depth to grayscale in the Picture Colors submenu Dither optimizes the picture with a special dither algo rithm Click Dither in the menu to enable the option The option will be marked as en abled next time you open the menu If necessary you can disable dithering again by cli cking Dither 171 Reducing the color depth is above all useful when you are creating GIF pictures for use on the Internet as the GIF standard allows saving with 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 co lors Palette pictures are a relic from the early days of color pictures since memory space was still precious back then Today almost all Macs and PCs can cope with 32768 or 16 7 milli on colors Picture Mode Indexed Color allows you to quickly create a palette picture with 256 colors If your computer is set to 256 colors in the Monitors color panel higher resolution pic tures cannot be displayed in their actual quality If a picture appears to be very grainy check the settings in the Monitors control panel and make sure that at least 32768 thousand colors are selected Games sometimes change the monitor settings If display of 256 colors is selected in the Monitors control panel the system color table needs to be replaced with the picture index to display a picture with 256 colors The co lors in the backgrounds of dialogs will therefore change The control elements and other pictures wi
7. v No Batch 300 dpi ohne Umrechnen 370 Breite 72 dpi s 100 370 Breite 72 dpi s 80 384 breite 72 dpi s 80 768 breite 72 dpi s 80 Aktion Ausschnitt HP Scan Aktion Ausschnitt HP Scan 2 Aktion Ausschnitt HP Scan HK Ausschnitt HP Scanner Scharfzeichnen 75 Convert to subfolder v Convert to same folder maybe overwrite original Convert to same folder and format will overwrite original Convert to other folder Define Batch Convert to subfolder automatically creates a subfolder called Converted Files in the source directory where the converted pictures are saved Convert to same folder maybe overwrite original overwrites the source files if they have the standard ending and if the source format is selected as the format If the source images are in JPG format and are being saved in TIF format the source files are kept along with the converted files Convert to same folder and format will overwrite original always overwrites the source files The format selected in the Format pop up menu is not valid 240 Convert to other folder allows you to specify your own destination folder Define Batch is available at the bottom of the Batch pop up menu The same dialog as in Convert amp Modify opens In the chapter Batch from page 302 you will find all details on how to use this dialog and use the individual batches Important The batch needs to be saved before it can be used Edit selected Batch is only available when a
8. Exporting Slide Shows as Films If you want to create a movie in QuickTime format from your slide show select File Ex port Slide Show to Movie The file selection dialog will open where you can select the pictures for the slide show or a picture folder The file selection dialog will then open 287 again Now enter a name for the movie file and click OK A dialog for other settings will open Additional Movie Settings Make a movie from each source picture movie Make one movie from all source pictures with Name Slideshow mov Width 320 Use dimension of Height 240 first image Depth 32768 Colors 16 Bit FA Palette System Color Table Show names Text Color Font Lucida E l Back Color Size 9 l Antialias text only Mac OS X Position Use transition effects Select Effect QuickTime settings compression frame rate etc Flatten Movie l Dither Ignore every 2 image after the 1 image in multiimage _ Background sound Select sound file Current file Show images for 2 0 seconds Add every 1 image enter 1 to add all Cotman Cancel E Only select Make a movie from each source picture movie if need the pictures or films as a QuickTime film for compatibility reasons Select Make one movie from all source pictures if you want to create a film from all pictures You can specify the size of the film with Width and H
9. In both cases first select the transparent area The transparency tool is at the top of the right hand column of the toolbox you may need to select Picture Show Toolbox If 154 you click a pixel with the transparency tool all other pixels with the same color will be set to transparent and displayed with a chessboard pattern The picture areas do not have to be connected to be set to transparent By double clicking the icon in the toolbox you can make transparency settings If the display of the transparent color causes a problem du ring your further work with a picture you can clear the Display chessboard pattern for transparency option The transparent areas will then be displayed as they appeared be fore Transparent Selected Color Set Back Color _ Make Color Transparent This field is empty because the color table is only available for pictures that use 256 colors or less colors v Display chessboard pattern for transparency Cancel Cok Single click Set Back Color to set the current background color to transparent You can click the picture to set another color to transparent while the dialog is open The color you select then appears in the Selected Color box in the dialog All parts of the picture with this color are selected Edit Make Selection Transparent allows you to also make a normal selection trans parent For example drag open a rectangular selection and select Edit Make Selectio
10. Layers The layers can be displayed in a palette with Window Show Layer Imagine layers as plates of glass that are placed on top of each other and can have different content A se parate layer is added for each new text object if the Automatically create layers for new text option is selected in the preferences under General Edit The images need to be in 223 RGB or CMYK mode If you want to edit the text select the text tool and click the required text You do not need to select the corresponding layer in the layer palette in this case 009 IMG_1712 tiff RGB Alpha A A 4 Kennels on banks of Elbe Gabriele des Layer Is Background 25 5MB p Layer2 8 8MB Kennels on banks of E o Layer3 2 9MB Gabriele Rost Flatten Layers with Alpha Flatten Layers without Alpha le The original image is always on the Background layer that is the only one that cannot be deleted via the pop up menu opened by clicking the black triangle Flatten Layers with Alpha allows you turn a layered image back into a normal image The text contained can then no longer be edited however as it is incorporated in the image The text remains in an alpha channel that can for example be used by layout pro grams Select Flatten Layers without Alpha if want to create a normal image Click the red ball on the left of the Layer palette to hide and display the respective layer The layers can currently not be
11. Layout Summary In the submenu under File New you can create a layout page with Layout on which pictures can be positioned and scaled freely for print out To print large numbers of pictures use the File Print Catalog or Print Folder options see p 95 8 Layout Kirche Prarrhaus Kirche Lok Sappubnserte 1 Mein Patenkind Jessica Susan bastelt You can choose between Content and Only frame under Special Layout Options to display the pictures on screen and print them out Displaying just the frames allows 211 you to work faster Save a layout with File Save or Save as so you can call it up again with File Open Layouts can only cover one page The picture files are also found again if they are moved on the hard drive but may not already be open when a layout containing pictures is opened To insert a picture you first need to open it as normal in GraphicConverter You can in sert open pictures in a layout using the context menu Click the white area of the layout to open the context menu If you hold down the Control key and click a picture that has already been inserted the context menu will be different in some cases Help Insert IMG_18104 jpg Insert IMG_18438 JPG Options Build image from layout The context menu contains all open pictures Click the corresponding entry to insert a picture Options opens the dialog with the basic settings for the layout described be lo
12. Select the Information Available Texts Selected Texts Name a EXIF ISO speed rating Name without Extension i File Modification Date Compression Req Time for Decompression Comment IPTC Title IPTC Caption v Use custom colors for Text and Background allows you to change the appearance of the browser The Redirect Open button to Open with setting allows you to specify that the Open button opens in the default Open with application that you set in the Browser Misc section Disable Show tools to hide the tools in the top of the browser window Enable Overlap one line during page up down to prevent the last line of pictures being displayed again when you scroll in the browser Show visible dividers for areas displays silver bars next to and below the left hand column with the folders These make it easier to change the width and height of this area Show folders on desktop in left pane shows all folders that are on the desktop Maximum preview count in preview area specifies the maximum number of pre views that are displayed on the right hand side of the browser or enlarged in the freely positioned preview window if you have selected several pictures The right hand area or the preview window can be displayed by clicking the icon with the magnifying glass at the bottom of the window or via the context menu with View Options Show Preview Pane Show iPhoto albums in left pane displays albums of iPhoto f
13. Creator 286 Crop Batch Function 309 Crop region Batch Function 309 Cut 216 Cycle Windows 235 D Darken Linear 167 Datafork Size 214 date and time stamp 184 Date Created 43 Default 297 Delete Batch Function 302 Delete All Slices 79 Delete Row in Storyboard 195 Delete Slice 79 desktop background 188 Destination 37 destination format 32 Detail 60 deutan color blindness 341 Diagonal Sharpen Edges 126 digital cameras 105 114 directory structure 245 Disable Grid 230 disclabel 262 Display Content 377 Display Content from Low to High Resolution 66 Display Name 84 Display Picture from Top to Bottom 65 Display Windows 378 dither 163 167 171 Do not export Batch Function 309 Don t alert before overwrite 33 DOS filenames 33 dot gain 129 450 Drag amp Drop handling Act as the Finder 273 DRIMaker 325 drop area 246 Duplicate 129 duplicating files name in Storyboard 195 duplicating with the keyboard in Storyboard 195 E Edit 379 Edit Comment 253 Edit Slice URL 79 Effects Slide Show 294 ellipses 227 Else Batch Function 303 309 e mail 15 E Mail send image to e mail program 243 Enable Grid 230 Endless 193 Enlarge small ones 268 Environment Save current settings as 372 EPSF format 346 Eraser 229 Error Correction Batch Function 312 Error Correction Rotate 124 Escape 118 Eudora 5 74 Even Field 209 EXIF Shift Set the EXIF timestamp 255 E
14. Flat Folder View opens a new browser window like for a search in which all images from the folder selected on the left hand side of the browser are displayed All subfolders are taken into consideration You can for example display all pictures from a month or year folder if you sort your pictures chronologically If you open the File menu while holding down the Control key the Browse Folder in Flat View option will appear instead of Browse Folder Move Item s into Trash allows you to recover files until you empty the Trash Remove Resource Fork allows you to delete the resource in images to make them smaller for Internet use or compatible for editing in Windows The resource fork contains previews in various sizes among other things The following options are available in the View Options submenu Hide Tools hides the top toolbar Hide Footer hides the toolbar at the bottom of the win dow frame As long as the toolbar is hidden Show Footer appears as an entry in the con text menu so that you can display it again Show Preview Window opens a window that displays the selected image with the EXIF information Show Preview Pane opens a third column in the browser window in which the se lected image with the EXIF information is displayed Show IPTC Window opens a window displaying all entries from the IPTC information for JPG and TIF images under the mouse cursor in the browser window You do not have 264 to click
15. Include extension in filename search can be enabled if extensions like for example tif should be seen as part of the name Match if all criteria are met results in a smaller search result because when there are several search criteria they all have to be met Match if any criteria are met results in a larger search result because all files are found that meet at least one of the criteria 277 In the left hand pop up menu select the area which you want to search If you enter keywords yourself we recommend always saving them with File Edit File Info IPTC in the Keywords section You can use the button on the right of the dialog to add further criteria that have to be fulfilled at the same time to find a file The search results are shown in the browser window To return to the normal start folder view click it on the left hand side of the browser Hold down the Ctrl key and click a folder on the left hand side of the browser to open the following context menu Help Refresh and Collapse New Folder Rename Folder Open Folder in New Browser Print Catalog Print Folder Open Folder in Convert View Item s in Slideshow Reveal in Finder Hide Tools Hide Footer Show Preview Window Show Preview Pane Show IPTC Window Preferences Refresh and Collapse updates the folders and shows new folders that have been crea ted in the Finder since it was opened for example New Folder creates a new folder and
16. Name DSCNO144_JPG Size 2272x1704 pixel Resolution 300 0x300 0ppi Colors 16 7 Mill Colors RGB 32 Bit Frames Memory File Format JPEG JFIF File Length 1 1 MB A a 2 at Show Preview Pane displays a column on the right hand side of the browser window with a preview of the selected picture The height of the lower section can be modified by clicking and moving the separating line The size of the preview picture can be changed to 50 or 100 via the context menu Show IPTC Window opens a window displaying the IPTC information for the image un der the mouse cursor You do not have to click the picture see p 264 280 Pictures on your iPod You cannot export pictures on an iPod with photo functions like the iPod Touch directly from GraphicConverter Select the iPod in iTunes and click the Photos tab 08e Tunes A A FUNE Loa D gt re 4am eee 4i o Prance lalam A A PER AN mc 735 n Cena can Musie Montes Photos TV Stores P rosee O S Syne photos from hi A far iPod Y tae J All photos 57 photos STORE A EA Tunes Bore Selected folders 25 photos K ta E tien M Henkes 14 3 2008 25 v OSVKIS w Henkes 2004 2007 21 mm Steven Tom Marz 2008 11 Meee bd uee GV Sows J Morcheeba Ji Morcherda The Aqndote wnes will feyt copy ail of the other content onto your iPod ures wii then capy your photos onto your Pod in the Onder shown in the fer vacii the iPod
17. No matter what you set for transparent copying at the bottom of the same dialog on the Selection tab you have the option of defining a selection more precisely than with the mouse Selection Transparency Selection Preferences left Width Top Height M Type Width amp Height Type Right amp Bottom Note You can access the tabs from keyboard with command 1 3 Cancel Cok K Enter the top left corner and the width and height of the selection Alternatively you can enter the distance of the right hand edge of the selection from the left edge or the distance of the lower edge of the selection from the top edge with Right and Bottom in stead of the width and height You can drag and drop from one picture to another If you select the Drag into top left of new window option in the General Edit section of the Preferences the selected pic ture section will always be pasted in the top left corner of the target picture no matter where you let go of the selection over the target picture This is useful for example if you want to add a copyright note to several pictures Lossless JPEG cropping If you just trim a JPG image without editing it and then save it again in JPG format you will lose a slight amount of picture quality as the picture is compressed again You can avoid this loss in quality by selecting the selection tool for lossless trimming of JPEGs at the bottom right of the toolbar Now if you drag open
18. The area of the page that the picture should be printed on can be selected in the print di alog with Position In the Printer pop up menu select the printer profile for the printer you are using The selection only has priority over the setting in the File Color Profile dialog for this print job On simple printers the setting None may produce better results than the profiles in stalled with the printer driver as the profiles often do not match the paper used Force 32 bit printing means that grayscale and bitmap images are printed as RGB images too Use this option if you have problems printing grayscale and bitmap images with older printer drivers When you print a list for example only the regular print dialog will appear 94 Tip If manufacturer of your printer cannot supply a driver for your Mac OS version you can try using a free driver from Gutenprint http gimp print sourceforge net Ma cOSX php Print Catalog Print Catalog in the File menu allows you to print a catalog of all pictures contained in a folder enor meee st Levey pr pate Any subfolders contained are taken into account when the Include Subfolders option at the very bottom of the dialog is enabled Select a folder with the file selection dialog The print dialog opens Under Classic Mac OS select GraphicConverter in the second pop up menu from the top Under Mac OS X select GraphicConverter in the third pop up menu from the top and click Graph
19. The picture size is dealt with in the chapter on page 80 66 File Format and Compression Rate You can achieve particularly high compression rates with LuraWave LWF format see p 359 However you cannot use this in the same way as JPEG format on the Internet as not many of the latest browsers support LWF format Use JPEG GIF or PNG formats for the Internet and select the Save web ready without resource option in the file selection option This option is only available if you use the Navigation Services from Mac OS 8 5 File Format TIFF TIF TIFF FA Options O Create LOWSRC M Set Format from Extension Save web ready without resource Make filename ready for the web Merge color profile into image for web usage Save all pages of multipage files FT Preferences New Folder Cancel Save The resource contains for example the preview picture that is displayed by the Mac OS but does not have a function on the Internet Files without a resource are approximately 40 kB smaller than the same file with a resource When you are working with small pic tures about 40 kB for example saving with a resource would double the size of the file If you check the file size in the Finder it may often show the old value from before editing because the Finder even tends to be very slow on the fastest computers One trick to up date a Finder window is switching back and forth between the list and the icon
20. You can use Effect Red Eye to set the pupils to their normal black Often the pupil is very wide due to the dark environment and looks odd because the rest of the picture has been illuminated by the flash In this case it is a good idea to use the Effect Red Eye Pro option that will be explained after the normal Red Eye option In the UB version of GraphicConverter there is also a tool at the bottom of the toolbox that you can use to simply paint over red eyes However when you use this tool you may paint over any reflections on the eye This tool is particularly suited to painting over red white or other eye colors on animals as the other options in GraphicConverter only recog nize red eyes You can adjust the size of the tool with the slider on the bottom edge of the image window or by pressing Shift and using the scroll wheel Click the red or other colo red eye to make it black If you have installed the USB Overdrive system extension you cannot change the size of the tool with Shift and the scroll wheel as this function is blo cked by USB Overdrive 149 Using the regular Red Eye option Click the elliptic selection tool which is second from top in the left hand column Just select the red pupil with the slightly red pixels at the edge and then select Red Eye GraphicConverter blackens the pupils with soft edges and keeps the reflection You can set the Darken Level selecting Effect Red Eye Settings For brighter red tones
21. ber in the PDF version of this manual If you bought this book as a hard copy the PDF file is included Please register by sen ding an e mail to hagen henke gmx de Type in your full mailing address and the pass word Angel We will e mail you the download link for the PDF file 18 MB Starting the Program and Opening a Picture Double click the program icon to start GraphicConverter A splash screen will appear Click it to close it immediately If you do not click the splash screen it will disappear after a few seconds If you do not want to see the splash screen in the future you can disable it in the Preferences under General Misc GraphicConverter X Universal Binary V6 0 se Prc Copyright 2002 2007 Lemke Software GmbH Copyright 1992 2001 Thorsten Lemke This copy is registered to All Rights Reserved Worldwide 4ll Commercial Distribution Prohibited unless Hagen Henke permission is obtained in writing from the author 16 When the program is started for the first time a dialog with installation options will open Initial Setup 1 of 2 M install GraphicConverter Finder contextual menu extension MacOS 10 4 x 10 5 x l As submenu only 10 5 or later The contextual menu extension let you access commen GraphicConverter functions like opening a browser directly from the Finder The extension is installed into User your name Library Contextual Menu Items M install GraphicConverter Services MacOS
22. split function added to convert amp modify support for import and export of JPEGs with lossless compression added support for import of JPEGs with 12 16 bit added medical JPEGs support for import of a lot of JPEG2000 variants added batch white correction added iptc Mac gt UTF8 batch function added continue slideshow checks the file list for removed files GraphicConverter will go back into watch folder mode if you quit the app in that mode you can define the frame of a movie that should be used for preview creation set desktop image stores the image now as png 448 Index A Acquire 109 Acquire again 109 Add Batch Function 302 Add Alpha Channel Rotate 124 Add Alpha Mask Channel 208 Add Remove Margins 106 Add XMP file 48 Add XMP record 50 Add delete margin Batch Function 307 address 15 Adobe Bridge 250 allowing search engines to find your site 89 alpha channels 206 Alpha Mask Channel to Picture 208 Amiga formats 6 Anti alias 222 228 AOL 75 AppleScript 418 Arrange left to right 235 Arrange Pictures depending on Resolution 97 Arrange Pictures with fixed Size 97 Arrange top to bottom 235 ASCII format 343 attachments e mails 71 Auto Convert 32 Auto Levels 160 Auto arrange window 64 automatic color correction 129 Automator 267 421 B background color 155 224 Batch Function 302 BMP format 344 brightness and contrast 128 Brightness Contrast Batch Function 308 Bring To
23. 416 Save a Copy as 30 Save all Items as in Storyboard 194 195 Save as 24 Save for web 69 Save only selection 28 Save Slices as 79 Save web ready without resource 67 save without selection 28 saving 30 saving a picture without a selection 28 saving a selection 28 Saving EPSF Graphics 350 Saving multi page file as individual images 371 Scale Batch Function 312 Scale with last Values 107 scaling 103 104 scaling picture size 103 104 scanning with GraphicConverter 108 Search Color 174 Select all 140 Select All in the browser 249 selecting appropriate picture format 65 Selecting Colors 230 selection 139 selection tool 140 Set Alias folder 293 Set Format from Extension 25 29 453 Set Last Values 129 SGI format 367 Sharpen Edges 124 Sharpen Edges Batch Function 312 Shift 336 Shortcuts 423 Shortcuts in Layout Windows 425 Shortcuts in Picture Windows 423 Show all Items in Slide Show in Storyboard 195 Show Alpha Channel Batch Function 312 Show Alpha Mask Channel 207 208 Show errors 292 Show hidden files 34 Show Invisible Files 21 Show Movie Options 191 Show path in title 64 Show path in window title Browser 273 Show picture name in Layout dialog 213 Show Preview 20 Show Size in KB 214 Show total Size 214 Sides 118 Slices 71 78 Slide show 282 Slide Show with Find 286 SnapsCleaner 318 solarisation 175 Sort Color Table Batch Function 312 sorting in the brows
24. Default C Undo gt General y o C C QD Open multipage files with page pop up menu adds a menu at the bottom left of the window frame for multipage images for example faxes so you can display the other pages Open only first middle last page of multipage files specifies that only the respective page is displayed with multipage images Open only the following page of multipage files allows you to specify a page to be displayed when a multipage image is opened Open always best icon of Windows ICO family makes sure that the preview is opti mized by using the icon with the highest resolution and greatest depth 403 Open PCD Preferences EPSF EXIF FITS General GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page PCD PDF Photo Raw PICT PSD QuickTime TIFF WMF Save Custom Icon General Settings O Base over 64 64x96 O Base over 16 128x192 O Base over 4 256x384 Base 512x768 O 4 Base 1024x1536 16 Base 2048x3072 O 64 Base 4096x6144 v Show dialog on opening f X ae Default Undo Cancel E0 Select a default resolution from the seven provided to be used when opening PCD files Select Show dialog on opening to display a dialog where you can select the resolu tion of the PCD file and if necessary a section when opening a PCD file PCD Base over 64 64x96 O Bdse Uver 10 193010 Base over 4 256x384 Base 512
25. Default b Undo Cancel 0K Click the required tools in the left hand list and select Add or remove a tool by clicking it in the right hand list and clicking Remove Disable Show conversion option to hide the pop up menus on the right next to the tools The Back and Forward arrows that page back and forth as in web browsers are particularly useful The shortcuts Command Option 5 and Command Option 6 are also available for this purpose and can be checked in the Edit Navigation submenu at any time If you want to make the tool icons smaller hold down the Ctrl key and click the browser toolbar Then select Show small icons without Text from the pop up menu This is parti cularly useful with small monitors for example on laptops The Up icon opens the parent folder in a new browser window IPTC opens the dialog for document information that you can open with Command l The IPTC information al lows you to use the GraphicConverter browser like a database for indexing and searching You will find detailed information on this in the chapter IPTC Document Information from page 314 Crop starts the Crop for Photo Service for several pictures in sequence You can also call up this option via the context menu Export Make Preview or Option Escape recreates the preview This option is called Create Preview in the context menu In the Browser Display General section Redirect Open button to Open with al l
26. F Pad Byte RGB OBGR Cancel fo You can use the Header settings to specify whether Width Height and Depth are sa ved and if so how Word saves as a 16 bit integer and Long Word as a 32 bit integer When Motorola format is enabled the high byte is saved first and then the low byte When Intel format is selected the exact opposite happens Color Table saves a color ta ble in the graphics file Under True Color you can specify how graphics with 16 7 million colors should be sa ved If you save with Pad Byte a blank byte is saved in front of each data triple For this option each point takes up exactly 32 bit An alpha channel can replace a pad byte Use RGB and BGR to specify the order of the color pixels When you open a RAW file that contains a movie you can choose the method for im porting the pictures in the dialog that opens Set RAW as the import filter in the file selec tion dialog when you open the file Use Save as to save a RAW Movie as a movie Click Options in the file selector box and choose the corresponding option SGI SGI format offers the following options sci Compression B W Verbatim B W RLE RGB Verbatim RGB RLE f Cancel EN 367 If you select B W Verbatim the graphic is saved uncompressed with 8 bit grayscale Verbatim means literally If you select B W RLE the graphic is compressed with Run Length compression and saved with 8 bit grayscale lf you select RGB Verbatim
27. GraphicConverter Preferences Browser Miscel laneous and then select the Preview Always temporary option You can delete any 29 unwanted previews from the picture files by selecting the regarding files in the browser and choose Remove Resource Fork from the context menu This function is also availa ble in File Convert amp Modify dialog Saving and Closing The current picture is saved with File Save From Mac OS X 10 1 you can give filenames extensions that are not displayed in the Finder such as tiff Enable the Hide Extension option in the Save Settings section of the Preferences The corresponding flag is then also set in the file if you work with Mac OS 9 but only appears when the file is displayed under Mac OS X 10 1 or newer You can also save to UFS partitions under Mac OS X The current window is closed with File Close Close All closes all windows and Save All saves all windows Force Save All saves all windows with the settings that you se lected for the first picture This option is useful for example when you have scanned ina large number of individual pictures and want to save them Save a Copy as Save a Copy as allows you to save a copy of the picture in a different format while you are still editing it The format of the open picture is not changed only the saved file has another format Convert amp Modify Summary You can use File Convert to convert and modify several pictures
28. Layout Options Layout Typeface Font Lucida Grande E Size 12 E Style Display Bold Only frame O Italic Content Underline Show picture name C Outline n O Shadow TENEW Misc Sample wv Print Mark f Cancel fox gt If large numbers of pictures are to be printed as a catalog it is practical to print the filen ames automatically under the pictures The font settings in the Layout dialog are related to the filenames that appear under the pictures The Typeface size and style can be se lected A preview at the bottom right shows how the text will look If you do not want to print the picture name clear the Show picture name option You can also display just the picture frames instead of the pictures Select Only Frame or Content under Display accordingly On slow computers it is useful just to display the frames The picture is always printed 213 Under Misc you can place a Print Mark in the middle of the left hand margin to help you punch holes if your printer supports this List Summary Under File New you can create a list of all files in a folder with file details using List from Files First a file selection dialog opens containing options for display of the file size New Folder X 4 Add to Favorites D Go to l f Show only Datafork Size Show total Size Show Size in Bytes Show Size in KB If you are not interested in technical details such as the Datafork Size and the exa
29. M www Ready Options Prefs Eject New Folder Oper In the list on the right open a target directory where the converted files should be sa ved Use the pop up menus above the lists or drag and drop the required folders from the Finder to the list sections to select the directories Click the arrow above the buttons to set the source path as the target path This is useful when the target folder is a subfolder of the source folder In this case you only have to open the target folder The desktop should not be selected as the target If you hold down the Option key you can swap the source and target folder The button has a double ended arrow If you press the Command key the direction of the arrow will change and turn the target folder into the source folder From version 5 9 2 of GraphicConverter more than 32766 files per folder can be edited Only the Mac OS limits the maximum number to around 4 million If you want to convert a large number of files you should make sure that your hard drive has enough space for the files being written In addition approximately 3 gigabytes space should be left for the operating system files to be on safe side If more space is needed than available the file system on your hard drive can become damaged meaning all files are unreadable 31 Data rescue programs like DiskWarrior or Data Rescue can make the data readable again in some cases To avoid loss of data you should therefore al
30. PCD i PDF M Add resource fork FLI FLC FLH to movie Photo Raw v Create custom icon _ Save ring frame PICT Create preview PSD a p Default destination file format dulce ine pee O Format of picture ictu TIFF Use QuickTime P WMF A Last format Custom Icon width he ight Color table General Settings __ Compress as JPEG C Add pitt resource Slide Show Quality 50 _ Add clut resource Effects General M Sharpen preview Misc Move Folders C pnot with nil Move Folders 2 v Info string Copy original resources Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC 4 Default Undo X Errors Time v Add resource fork adds a resource fork to each graphic when saving This resource fork can contain very different types of information Click Create custom icon to create an icon that is displayed by the operating system If you select Create preview a preview can be displayed in the file selection dialog and for example in the GraphicConverter browser The preview is a miniature of the graphic just like the icon The icon is smaller than the preview and is therefore also less sharp A graphic with a preview and an icon contains itself so to speak four times the original and the three smaller versions Usually there are even more as the icons should be availa ble in special versions for the various color depths because different screen displays can be selected in the Mac OS in black and white in
31. The FireViewer PDB format is used by Palmtops with the Palm OS such as the Visor or the IBM Workpad The following Variants and options are available PDB Variant FireViewer Options TealPaint Options FireViewer Colors Compression Tiny Viewer Black amp White None O TealPaint 4 level grayscale O RLE MonkeyLogo 16 level grayscale O MonkeyCard 256 colors TinyViewer Opuans C Photo JPEG Thousands of colors Compression None v Dither ORLE Compression 3 None RLE O Type 2 Cancel Select the number of colors and grayscales you want under Colors Dither improves the picture quality Run Length Compression RLE can be switched on When transferring graphics to your Palmtop they are transferred in binary format GIF This acronym stands for Graphic Interchange Format This format was introduced by CompuServe for the Internet It compresses graphics with single color surfaces and sharp edges such as comics and pictograms particularly well Graphics saved as GIFs can have a maximum of 256 colors 8 bit 353 Both options allow you to select which version of the GIF format is created 87a is the first version of the GIF format This version can be imported by all programs that can pro cess GIFs GIF Version Movie Options on M Create Movie 89a Delay 0 000 s Tip 0 000 Transparency and Comments are only supported by GIF 89a Behaviour after frame change No disposa
32. You can download Stufflt Expander at http www allume com expander If the decompressed file has a crack in its icon try again or under Mac OS 9 refresh your computer s desktop file by holding down the Com mand and Option keys during restart After unpacking the GraphicConverter program appears You can drag this folder into your program folder for example If a file with the extension dmg appears proceed as described above under Mac OS X Possibility 2 You received GraphicConverter on CD Double click the CD to open it A window will open where other software is available in addition to GraphicConverter CADintosh is a program for professional technical drawings which you can test and license separately FontBook shows all installed fonts in tables If you decide to use these programs on a regular basis you will need to pay a license fee to the respective software producer You may find further products from Lemke Software GmbH on the CD eS ee gt 2007 07 26 f webdav macbay de 3 Crion E Backup 500 a E Media A Renate Henkes iPod gt BD Schrribtisch A hagenhenke IA Programme D Dokumente i i Filme Musik Bilder _ Websites gt terminarum Projekte LA Preferences Lo Rechnungen 2007 Ls CADintosh a bibsand Publishers GraphicConverter gnapsCleaner 5 Olsiekte O KE verfagbar A FontBook Open the GraphicConverter folder a
33. folder to your Photo Service via the Internet or on a CD If the photolab offers you the option of white edges or trim ming it will not matter what you decide in most cases as their machines will recognize the aspect ratio of your pictures The images will be positioned correctly so they fill the photo paper If in doubt you can call the photo service hotline Picture Size The picture size can be displayed and changed using Picture Size Scale You can set the picture size very accurately in pixels in the top section of the Scale dialog You can also make the setting using a percentage value Scale Dimension Height s 1360 Pixel E Memory 10 6MB Size Width 28 900 cm by 3 Height 19 191 ce FH X Resolution 180 00 Pixel in E Y Resolution 180 00 Pixel in PA v Keep Proportions M Scale Picture Scale complete Movie Algorithm QuickDraw Quartz EH vw Dither only for standard QuickDraw scaling qerer A In the bottom section of the dialog you can also change the size of the picture using the Width and Height boxes When you enter a new value the second value is automatically recalculated You can change the picture resolution to 72 dpi for example using the X and Y Resolu tion see p 104 103 Enlarging adds pixels Reducing lowers the number of pixels The picture is recalculated as best as possible in both cases The picture quality is reduced especially if you make ex cessive adjustments We t
34. lets you move selected items from the middle section of the browser into the new folder In the browser if you select several pictures whose names start in the same way the identi cal part will be suggested as a name for the folder New Folder Name DSCN6 __ Move selected items into new folder arn 278 Rename opens a dialog where you can rename the folder clicked in the left hand sec tion of the browser Rename Folder Old Name 08 Lorenzkirch New Name fos Lorenzkirch Cancel Ok Open Folder in New Browser opens the folder selected in the left hand column in a new browser window Print Catalog prints all pictures from the clicked folders together with the subfolders as a catalog Print Folder prints all pictures from the clicked folder as a catalog Open folder in Convert opens the Convert dialog in which the content of the clicked folder is displayed in the left hand list View Items in slide show shows all pictures from the clicked folders as a slide show Reveal in Finder opens a window containing the folder in the Finder Hide Footer hides the footer Preferences opens the Preferences dialog Hide Tools hides the top toolbar Hide Footer hides the footer 279 Show Preview Window opens a window with the preview as an alternative to the right hand column You can make this window a lot bigger with the bottom right corner The EXIF information is displayed under the picture 000 Preview
35. points so that the proportions remain the same because the pixels in the source image are not square Atari 4 Colors displays Atari images with for example 640x200 points with 640x400 points so that the proportions remain the same because the pixels in the source image are not square Correct aspect ratio Graphics are automatically scaled with this option directly after being imported if the horizontal and vertical resolution are different This option is useful if you are converting a fax TIFF to a GIF because the GIF format does not support resoluti on information Interpolating is always to the higher resolution Set resolution to 72 ppi opens all pictures in 72 ppi This setting is useful when you are editing pictures for the Internet 390 Calculate best color table applies the current profile to each picture when opened The picture is modified Merge color profile into image data applies the current color profile to every image when it is opened This changes the image Remove transparent color s will remove the transparent color s on opening a file Change file type creator changes the file type to that of GraphicConverter when ope ning the file and not when saving it Select this setting if you want to open all graphics that you open with GraphicConverter next time by double clicking You should enable Correct movie type creator if you want the creator of movies to be changed to Quick Time Open IPTC see p 321 on
36. v 3 Select the required target format in the Format pop up menu If you need an unusual format select Show All and open the pop up menu again Now all export formats will be shown If you have a small monitor you may need to scroll to reach the upper or lower entries as the list is very long To scroll position the cursor without clicking the 24 black triangles at the very top or bottom in this pop up menu The further the arrow is positioned over the end of the list the faster it scrolls In the Preferences in the Save File Formats section you can choose the formats to show on this pop up Preferences ne Show the following file formats in the save dialog Save Name and standard extension Extension General Custom Icon C_I SWF Shockwave Flash Image SWF 4 L System 7 Clipping CLP clp Settings C TCL Image DAT dat Slide Show General TGA TGA tga Effect P i F TIFF TIF TIFF tif Move Folders hr Move Folders 2 TRS 80 HR Move Folders 3 C_ VPB QUANTEL VPB vpb Convert Convert Text IPTC WBIN MacWavelet DAT dat 0 Errors Time n Icon Preview WBMP WBMP wamp Index Windows Cursor CUR cur Misc Browser Select All Select Most Used Upper Lower Display Misc a ee Open yg Default Undo Cancel 0K Professional tip lf you are using Mac OS 8 5 or newer you can enable the Set Format from Extension option
37. when saving the icons created meet the icl8 icl4 ICN standard and can be displayed on a Mac OS 7 0 or higher The Create new icon suite icns for MacOS 8 5 or later option creates additional icons that meet the new standard for display on a Mac OS 8 5 or higher The new icon also contains a version with 16 7 million colors and as a result looks very good Add huge icons 48x48 pixel always creates icons with 48x48 pixels for optimum dis play for example in the dock of Mac OS X Add thumbnail icon 128x128 pixel creates preview icons with 128x128 pixels as used in the icon display of the Finder Add larger icon 256x256 pixel for 10 4 x or later creates preview icons with 256x256 pixels for Cover Flow These large icons are not compatible with Mac OS 10 1 and 10 2 Therefore disable this option if your files should be compatible with these versions of the Mac OS Add very large icon 512x512 pixel for CoverFlow in 10 5 x or later creates preview icons with 256x256 pixels for Cover Flow These large icons are not compatible with Mac 413 OS 10 1 and 10 2 Therefore disable this option if your files should be compatible with these versions of the Mac OS Ignore transparency creates icons without transparency A resource fork may not be written to NTSC volumes which is why no previews can be created Volumes from other operating systems can also cause problems Save General Preferences Multi page m Save General Settings
38. you will notice the lines of dots in the almost white areas while with standard dither the dots are distributed evenly The dither functions in the Effect menu return the results in a new window You can quickly switch back to the original picture if you are not happy with the results and want to try a different dither option Atkinson dithering is even better with most pictures With Picture Mode Bitmap you create a 1 bit picture with standard dithering 165 Ordered Dither in the Effect Black amp White menu forms a pattern made up of squares You need to select the size of the squares in pixels from a submenu Here is an example of squares with 2x2 pixels 166 With 6x6 pixels the squares are so large that their structure enters the foreground gre atly This impression only goes away when you look at the picture from a great distance a Fid Fid T You can dither a picture correctly with the Effect Black amp White Dither option Va rious dither options are available As the dither types have a different effect on each pic ture you should try out several variations if you are not sure Dither Type A g m m Darken Linear T nee CJL LaLa O Triangle PERE ECL Random Matrix Matrix Size 4x4 300dpi rey Each pixel in the source picture is displayed by a field made up of 4x4 black or white dots for example The size of the field can be selected in the bottom part of the dialog The more
39. 10 6 x or later The services menu extension let you access common GraphicConverter functions like opening a browser directly from the Finder The extension is installed into User your name Library Services m Install GraphicConverter Automator actions The automator actions let you access common GraphicConverter functions from the Apple Automator application The extensions are installed into User your name Library Automator Install RCWebColorPicker The RCWebColorPicker let you easily select HTML colors in the color picker from every application The extension is installed into User your name Library ColorPickers M install SmartCrashReporter The SmartCreshReport forwards GraphicConverter crash reports 2s an option directly to us So you can help us to improve GraphicConverter and fix any bugs The extension is installed into User your name Library InputManagers ET gt ee Install GraphicConverter Contextual Menu Item Plugin allows you to make basic GraphicConverter functions like the slide show available in the Finder context menu From Mac OS 10 5 you can install the context menu extension for the Finder as a sub menu Apple has dropped the context menu extensions in Mac OS 10 6 Snow Leopard because the related crashes could also cause the Finder to crash Services can now be used instead of the context menu extensions see p 10 Install GraphicConverter Automator actions is only important if you want to
40. 256 colors Change Bit Depth dynamic Picture Before Zoom 7 Maximum number of colors 2 256 256 v Dither m Reserve current foreground n and background color Cancel The dialog shows the whole picture with a rectangle that you can move around to se lect the area for the Before and After windows You can enlarge and reduce the section with the Zoom slider The Maximum number of colors slider allows you reduce the color palette until you see an obvious loss in quality When you reduce the number of colors Reserve current foreground and back ground color will keep these two colors You can use this option to keep the most impor tant colors of the image that for example are used for lettering or in a large area Set the foreground and background color accordingly with the eyedropper You can switch to the pipette by holding down the Option key or via the toolbar Click a corresponding point in the image Swap the foreground and background colors by clicking the right angled double arrow next to the color samples in the toolbar As calculating the preview for the After window is a very complex process the slider may seem to get stuck on slower computers In this case continue moving the mouse cursor up to the required position on the slider track and wait until the slider catches up It may be easier to enter the number of colors using the input box The current color pa lette is shown in the lower section of the dialog
41. 7120 Default Cancel ECKA Under Font you can specify the font to use for displaying HPGL texts Command LB The Scaling factor option corrects the size of the font This is necessary because most Mac fonts are smaller than HPGL fonts when converted to mm Using the Default rotation options the entire graphic can be rotated by the angle you selected when it is opened If you select HPGL 2 scaling Use IP and SC the scaling instructions within an HPGL file are analyzed if necessary Scaling can be performed using parameters P1x and P1y indi cate the top left hand corner of the paper format P2x and P2y the lower right hand cor ner 398 Open JPEG Preferences Plug ins Open JPEG Settings Print na Open J Use QuickTime DICOM Use JPEG 6 0 zai O Open from file EXIF Open from memory may be faster FITS Version 6b 27 Mar 1998 General Copyright Copyright C 1998 Thomas G Lane GIF HPGL JPEG T displ f k Lotus Pic Display content of unknown tags Metafile _ Always display compression settings when saving Movie z 7 Multipage v Show Notification for incomplete JPEGs PCD PDF Fhoto Raw PICT PSD QuickTime a f Default X r4 Undo X TIFF y ee JPEGs can either be opened with QuickTime or JPEG 6 0 QuickTime is slightly faster but it cannot decompress all JPEGs You can still set the preference to open with QuickTime because the GraphicConverter automatically uses JPEG 6 0 if there is an error
42. Formats Save General Custom Icon Formats IPTC EXIF Settings Slide Show General Effects Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Preferences General Edit Additional margin after Select existing 0 points ran e Copy selection only from image Erase selection from image v Show anchor boxes v Show selection frame _ Move image parts up after erasing selection _ Reposition windows after change v Drag using translucent selections _ Drag into top left of new window v Use selected colors for all open images v Remember last selected tool for new windows v Remember last settings for new windows l Show pixel bounds Swap rotate 90 clockwise counterclockwise shortcuts Disable toolbox shortcuts v Swap move selection with without content shortcuts Set focus of scroll wheel zoom to mouse position Disable double click for cropping selection Mi Automatically create layers for new text Convert Text IPTC Errors Time aig Default Undo J J Additional margin after Select existing allows you to define a margin in points that is selected in addition to the existing one The existing margin is the core of a picture without a single color border that often appears after scanning Copy selection only from image copies a selection when it is moved with the mouse Erase selection from image deletes a selection from the original location when it is mo ved with the mouse Pr
43. GIF HPGL FA Show alert before opening files with same name ae vi Show alert before opening more than 10 files ee v Use QuickTime to display previews of file if one is not available Movie Multi page Ignore extensions separated by a space PCD Hr PDF PSD Photo Raw PICT PSD QuickTime TIFF WMF P S XFIG v Default Undo lt Cancel Cok Verify color table integrity The wrong color table is often used for black and white graphics created in DOS programs As a result you may have problems printing these graphics Select this option to eliminate the problem because the color table is checked and if necessary corrected each time the graphic is opened The Notify loss of information option generates a warning when you want to open a graphic with vector data that would be lost upon opening The graphic is converted to a standard pixel image without vectors Detect only clear formats prevents you from accidentally opening for example a text file as a graphic If you cannot open a graphic but you are sure that the file is a graphic you can switch this option off and try again To be on the safe side save all open docu ments because your computer may crash Remember 10 recent items lists the graphic most recently open under File Open Re cent in the submenu so that you can open them more quickly this way If you open a graphic that is already open GraphicConverter notifies you and suggests opening the graphic wi
44. H Hides GraphicConverter The slide show continues Hold down Shift Alt and click picture Zoom picture to 100 The cut section can be moved with the mouse Hold down Alt and click picture Zoom picture to 200 The cut section can be moved with the mouse and Enlarges and reduces the picture The cut section can be moved with the mouse B Darkens the screen while you answer a question during a presentation Click the pause button beforehand PageUp Next image useful for remote control PageDown Previous image useful for remote control Control period or ESC End slide show The following key combinations can be changed in the Browser Function section of the preferences 298 Key Combination Result Command 0 9 0 is 10 Moves the picture to defined folders 1 to 10 Ctrl Command 0 9 0 is 10 Moves the picture to defined folders 11 to 20 Alt Command 0 9 0 is 10 Moves the picture to defined folders 21 to 30 1 5 or Ctrl 1 5 depending on Set 1 5 stars to rate JPEG and TIF images the preferences in the Browser Function section You can also call up this table via the GraphicConverter Help menu Similar to a slide show when a picture is opened in the normal way with Edit Navi gation you can switch to the next or previous picture in the folder where the opened picture is saved using Next Previous Image in folder in the submenu The
45. If there is no area in the image that should actually be white the correction will not work in most cases In critical situations we therefore recommend taking the picture with an unobtrusive piece of white paper somewhere in the shot We have provided a short video to demons trate this tool on the Internet at http www lemkesoft com content 213 videos html Fill Pattern allows you to select a fill pattern For more details see page 234 Switch to black and white sets black and white as the foreground and background colors Swap foreground and background color swaps the colors over Copy Mode allows you to select another copy mode For more details see page 225 59 Aspect ratio for selection allows you to select a specific aspect ratio like 10x15 to cho se a ideal section for printing photos on photo paper for example Clicking the area al lows you to select an aspect ratio from the pop up menu Define User defined opens the following dialog where you can enter the aspect ratios you use most User defined Aspect Ratios Ratio 1 am 3 Ratio 2 3 4 Ratio 3 1 eal 2 Ratio 4 2 Bl The aspect ratio of the image is particularly interesting as the selection automatically has portrait format for portrait format images Back to the palettes The Overview shows the complete picture This is helpful if only part of the picture can be seen in the picture window The visible part is indicated in the
46. Images can be exported in dcf format via the export submenu in the browser context menu for memory cards and playback on DVD players with card readers If you open a PowerPoint file with GraphicConverter the images contained will be 440 displayed in a multi page document In the Picture Size menu images can be trimmed centered to a specific aspect ratio With very large JPEG 2000 files a smaller version is opened if necessary that is as large as the available RAM Winmail dat files can be opened All readable images they contain will be opened in a multiple page document A transparency can also be used instead of an alpha channel with Flatten Alpha Channel When you search for duplicate documents the smaller larger newer or older file can be automatically deleted When you send pictures as an e mail attachment you can save to an automatically created folder on the desktop These files can be used for Web mail accounts like Hotmail New features in GraphicConverter 5 9 6 In the browser you can sort the files By Name starting at Position This is useful if for example different street names are given in the first eight characters In the Preferences specify how many places should be ignored at the start of the filename in the Browser Misc section If you use hexadecimal counting select By Hex in Name starting at Position Edit Paste Paste into Alpha Channel allows you to copy a mask into the alpha channel for
47. Maximum file size 100 KB Compression rate 1 10 1 1000 Scanmode Embedded Baseline Password protection Password Quality without password 78 1 100 Create backward compatible LWF file Cancel ox When compressing with A bit lossy you can enter a quality level a maximum file size or a compression rate The Scan mode can be switched between Embedded and Baseline The Password protection prevents a graphic with standard quality from being used if for example the licensing fee has not yet been paid To use this option select it and enter a password The Quality without password indicates the quality to display for a graphic when it is opened without entering a password Create backward compatible LWF file creates a file that is more compatible MooV QuickTime Movie When saving in QuickTime movie format the appropriate compression can be selected from a pop up menu The quality can be adjusted with a slider The higher the quality the 360 larger the file size The settings for movies are in the lower section You can set how many graphics are created per second and how often the base graphic should be displayed Compression Settings Compressor Video E re for sta Color r leves z Quality 1 t l Z Least Low Medium High Best Motion Frames per second 12 A wv Key frame every 24 frames Limit data rate to KBytes sec
48. Outline Preview _ The dotted black frame shows the printable area and the dotted red frame the set mar gins d Cancel aR Copy File into Resource This option allows you to copy a file that contains only a data fork to be copied into the resource fork of another with a particular type First select the source file and then the tar get file with the file selection dialog Then enter the resource type 4 characters in a dia log The index is selected automatically as you can change it with ResEdit Invert Black amp White GIFs This option inverts all black and white GIFs in a directory that you select with the file se lection dialog This option is useful as black and white pictures created in Windows using older programs are sometimes inverted 215 Copy Cut Paste Clear Macintosh computers have a clipboard that is used to copy data In the same way as text can be copied and cut in word processing programs pictures or parts of picture can be copied with Command C and cut with Command x in GraphicConverter Edit Copy or Cut The picture ends up in the clipboard in both cases and remains there until it is dele ted by another copy or cut action You can select the entry straight from the menu You do not need to use the submenu which contains further commands described on page 217 The clipboard contents can be displayed in a special window opened with Edit Show Clipboard This menu item changes to Hide Clipboard w
49. Preferences General all General Monitor Settings Clipboard Digital Camera Display Content Display Windows Edit Memory Misc Monitor Plug ins Print Open General Correct amp Change IPTC 7 YV Formats Display tool windows on Screen 2 He BMP Deltavision DICOM ECW EPSF EXIF FITS GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page o oro NIC Defaut ox Display main windows on Screen 1 HA 385 General Plug Ins Preferences General a General Plug ins Settings Fractal Saar Mac OS 8 5 to Mac OS 9 2 1 The plug ins are in the GraphicConverter Display Content subfolder in the Application Support folder in the System folder Display Windows Mac OS X Edit Global Plugins Library Application Support GraphicConverter Memory User Plugins Library Application Support GraphicConverter Isc Monitor Acquire plug ins settings M Support Acquire again rin Open M Scan multipage documents into one document General v Close TWAIN Source after end of scan t amp Ch z a sre v Support old Plug ins requires more memory gt Formats v Ask TWAIN driver for color table Save a l Invert 1 bit TWAIN images Custom Icon v Support Menu Sharing Frontier Formats l Ask for scanning a new page after end of scan Settings _ l Reset scan counter upon launch Slide Show __ Disable menu shortcut General p s Effects Install GraphicConverter Contextual Menu Item Plugin Misc Move Folders
50. Size Batch Function 308 Browse Folder 20 Browser 235 Burn In 107 159 Cc Calculate Mean 40 Calculate Mean Values 40 Cancel Batch Function 303 Catalog 81 Catalog HTML for WWW usage 35 Centric Involution 202 Change bit depth dynamically 71 170 174 Change extension 33 Change picture 295 Change to B W 1 Bit 163 changing filenames to lowercase characters 87 Chromatic Involution 200 circle 228 Claris E Mailer 75 Clear 216 Clear Frame 221 Clipboard 216 Close 30 CMYK 152 CMYK colors 231 Cold Warm Involution 203 color HSV model 199 color blindness 341 color correction 132 color depth 161 color palette 232 color permutations 199 color pictures 170 color profile with ColorSync 135 Color Rotation by 15 Degrees Clockwise 202 Color Usage 342 Colors 161 Colors Batch Function 308 ColorSync 135 Comment 63 Comment Function 309 Compare Pictures 70 compressing with Stufflt 29 Content of pictures in Layout dialog 211 Continue Batch Function 309 Continue Slide show 283 Control click 123 Convert Batch Function 312 Convert amp Modify 30 converting 24 Converting a Picture with Save as 24 Copy 216 225 449 Copy files 35 Copy as HTML 217 Copy EXIF as Text 219 Copy File into Resource 215 Copy with opacity 311 Copy with transparency 311 Core Image Filter 183 Create LOWSRC 29 Create Preview in the browser 247 creating an alpha channel from transparency 156 207
51. To create a new folder Ctrl click a folder on the left hand side of the browser and the context menu 81 allowing you to create a new folder will open Now hold down the Alt key and drag the pictures you require from any other folders to the new folder to copy them there Display the content of your picture folder in the browser and click a picture Select all pictures with Command A If you only want to use a few of the pictures in your album se lect the ones you want while holding down the Shift key Alternatively you can also make the selection in the left hand area of the File Convert amp Modify dialog In this case you should create and open the target folder for the Inter net data on the right hand side If you are using this method start automatic creation of the Internet data by clicking the Catalog button between the selection areas You will find information on the other settings in the following sections Back to simple selection in the browser Once you have selected the pictures click the Catalog Icon in the browser or open the Internet menu by clicking the globe on the far right of the GraphicConverter menu bar Select HTML Catalog in this menu No mat ter which way you go the following dialog opens Catalog General File HTML Basic HTML Meta HTML Text Batch Name bells _2007 html Creator R ch Set from program file Thumbnail file format GIF and JPEG depending on color depth
52. Vodate A Preset Qj ar i ar mem image Open bover X Please note that the demo version of LensFix adds a watermark to your image and overwrites the original Therefore only work with copies of your image files while you are using the demo 330 Center Brightness Correction Effect Center Brightness Correction allows you to correct the brightness of 360 de gree photographs which normally decreases towards the edges aoe Ea new le JPG ce oO mrad The following dialog opens where you can define a curve The X axis is the distance from the centerpoint and the Y axis is the extent of brightening Center Brightness Correction Note Mouse click with option key on a point moves the complete curve in vertical direction A You can click and move existing points in the curve Set new points by clicking the re quired position Make sure that the curve does not start rising too far to the left as this will also brighten the center of the picture Hold down the Option key when moving or inserting a point so you can move the whole curve vertically Save your curve so that you 331 can use it for other pictures In the following picture you will see the effect and a white cross that was inserted as a helper for the next step e a Dieu le JPG RGD o ms vanis We recommend marking the image with a round selection as the corners will otherwise be given an unsightly gray shading Select the elliptic selection tool and
53. X you copy your scripts into the folder Library Application Support Gra phicConverter Scripts or if scripts should only be available to one user into the folder User Library Application Support GraphicConverter Scripts You can open the folder with the scripts in the Finder with Open User Scripts Folder from the script menu Window Help enhenke Docum Open Scripts Folder pzkircl pin Open User Scripts Folder ig we Display as Slideshow app Other Abii erica 418 Open AppleScripts using the menu that displays a piece of paper as an S This menu contains all the AppleScripts that were in the Scripts folder when the program was laun ched If you want to see which options can be used with an AppleScript open the Script Edi tor program that you will find in the directory Applications AppleScript Select File Open Dictionary After a brief wait a list of all programs is displayed Select Graphic Converter to display all options that can be called up via an AppleScript ena GraphicConventer 2 a A Was a hiForward Test Size Standard Suite Common terms for most appications date size v f data size se as type ch integer the sue delete v Osista an element fom an otject delete reference the cement to soete duplicate Duplicate objects duplicate reference the objectis to duoteste to location reference the new location for the ebject s retere gt Hotfolder A hotfolder is
54. a selection it will include all 8 pixels in the width and height You cannot change the size or position of this selection This is necessary to fulfill the definiti on for a JPEG image with optimum compression If you want to drag open the selection again you will have to close the picture and open it again 144 Do not trim the image as usual with return or by double clicking the selection instead select File Save As The Save only selection will already be enabled at the bottom of the file selection dialog that opens Format JPEG JFIF JPG Options Q Split Save only selection O Save picture with selection l Create LOWSRC TA Set Format from Extension _ Save web ready without resource Make filename ready for the web Merge color profile into image for web usage Preferences New Folder Cancel Save ave Click Options The following dialog opens JPEG with lossless croping Copy all existing metadata Rebuild metadata Embed if available C Comments XMP _ EXIF ICC profile _ Don t embed sRGB profile EXIF Preview _ EXIF Maker Note EXIF User Comment If you select Copy all existing metadata there will be incorrect size specifications in the EXIF information and the EXIF preview will not be updated We therefore recommend selecting Rebuild metadata In the area below you can enable and disable individual areas of the metadata Disabled are
55. a video camcorder this problem will not occur very often due to the high video quality More of ten a moving object can be seen twice in pictures from a running television program Effect Even Field replaces the uneven field with the even field by replacing each odd line with the subsequent even line With Effect Odd Field it s exactly the other way around The lines from the even field are replaced with the odd lines above them This also increases the sharpness slightly but a line structure is formed that is normally even more annoying You can see this effect better when the picture is enlarged In our example the source picture is at the top and the same section after reduction to the even field is below The Effect Swap Fields option is useful if you want to add professional effects to a backwards running digitized video sequence for example in Adobe Premiere 209 Video pictures are normally relatively unfocussed as the objects or the camera are mo ving You should therefore use the Effect Sharpen Edges and Picture Brightness Contrast options to improve the picture quality Video Tips Even before the arrival of digital camcorders and fast G3 computers with FireWire inter faces you could save individual pictures from videos as picture files using video in cards As these pictures are relatively small and only have a resolution of 72 dpi even with the la test technology they are not really suitable for prin
56. an additional module to save a graphic in EPSF format Click File Save as to open the file selection dialog and select EPSF as the format in the Format pop up If you click Options the following message appears EPSF Compression Preview None None ORLE epsi JPEG O Pict Quality O TIFF gt Minimum Line ending O Low Macintosh Normal J DOS Windows O High UNIX gt Maximum Cancel Cok Under Compression select None RLE or JPEG for the type of compression to use The quality level can be selected for JPEG compression Low or minimum quality results in artifacts Artifacts are slightly noticeable errors in the picture for example the creation of single color surfaces in sections that used to contain different levels 350 RLE compression is only useful for graphics that contain larger single color sections You can specify under Preview whether a 72dpi preview of the graphic is created in the resource fork of an EPSF file The preview option allows other programs such as Microsoft Word to display EPSF files because the PostScript format can only be interpre ted by a few programs The EPSI option saves a preview in the EPS dataflow It can be interpreted and display ed in all operating systems if the software used supports it The PICT preview is located in the resource fork and is only available on Macintosh computers There is also a TIFF pre view in the resource fork and can be used under any
57. and then vectorize it so it can be printed with sharp edges and be enlarged if necessary Unfortunately the result of vectorization with scanned pictures is often useless even with programs specializing in vectorization To solve this problem we recommend only using the scan or insufficiently vectorized version as a basis and redrawing the logo on a higher level in Freehand Alpha Channels Summary An alpha channel can be displayed deleted made for the current picture and created from a transparency or selection under Picture A selection cannot be made from an alpha channel Information on a picture that should not be visible can be saved in alpha channels An alpha channel is an additional channel to the red green and blue channels that contain the primary colors in RGB pictures and are mixed to create the colors in the picture Pic tures can also contain several alpha channels GraphicConverter shows just the first and informs you if further alpha channels are contained in the picture Alpha channels can only be used in pictures with a color depth of 32 bit and with Photoshop PNG TGA BMP and PICT formats Some picture editing programs allow you to save selected areas in an alpha channel These areas are also called masks and are used for example to make a picture area lighter 206 or appear transparent in a layout program Alpha channels are also used for other purpo ses To check what information is contained in an alpha chann
58. are displayed in the middle section The size of the middle section with the smaller images can be changed by clicking the scrollbar on the right border of the middle section and then moving it to change the size of the overall image Because the small previews are sorted in a grid the window also dis plays this format when the previews are larger or smaller in size The width of the left section can also be changed by moving the scrollbar This is neces sary for deeply layered directory structures You can change the size of the right section with the handle in the bottom right hand corner of the window frame sizer The size of the large preview in the right section depends on the image itself and the width of the section After you change the width of the section the image automatically adjusts to the new size The filename size and date are displayed below each image Click a picture to select it and then click the name to edit it You can use all characters from the Unicode standard Unicode is a standard that allows a large number of characters in a font End the entry with Return or by clicking another picture Click a graphic to open a large preview in the right section The size of the preview de pends on the width of the right column but cannot be any larger than the standard dis play at 100 Detailed graphic information is displayed below the preview Switch to the other images using the arrow keys or the Tab key and Shift Tab C
59. at http www ellert se twain sane Intel Macs If a Twain scanner does not work with the universal binary version of Gra phicConverter i e a driver does not appear in the scanner selection window the Twain driver is still configured for PowerPCs and will therefore run under Rosetta the PowerPC emulator It can then be controlled only from the normal X version of GraphicConverter Alternatively you can select Start the program under Rosetta in the Info window in the Finder If you have a multi function device that copies faxes and scans the scanner may in some cases not be recognized In this case download the latest drivers from the manuf acturer s Web site and install them Then restart Open the printer services program that 11 you will find in the Utilities folder in the Applications folder Click Add and select an entry corresponding with your printer If there are several variants you may have to try each of them out For example if you have an Epson CX3200 you should select the entry CX3200 USB Receiving Faxes under Classic Mac OS You should only follow these installation instructions if you want to receive faxes with an e mail program or the AOL software This is because faxes are received in TIFF or GIF for mat and are automatically converted by some add ons for example MacLink Plus for more information on faxes see also page 12 If the fax files are converted to PICT format all pages after the first
60. automatic conversion see p 32 The filenames for multiple conversion or copying can generally be changed with the In dex options that can be selected in the preferences under Convert Index You can also 51 use the Rename option for this You can convert files at the same time more easily if you change the index in the filename using the Index Settings in the Preferences Preferences fae 4 gt Formats m Save _ Index conversion General Min digits omet _ Index sorting Formats IPTC Settings _ Use name Slide Show General l Start index 1 step 1 Effects Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time Icon Preview Index Misc Browser General Context Menu Display General Display Thumbnails Function Keywords Misc Open Preview ML Default Undo This is useful when pictures that may have been saved as individual pictures from a vi deo using a grabber program are the source material These pictures may have unsuitab le filenames for further editing For example Name_001 jpg or similar Name stands for any part of the filename The number is increased by one for each of the subsequent pic tures For example Name_002 jpg etc The numbering should for example be at the start of the filename if these pictures are to be put together for a movie with Adobe Premiere Enable Index conversion to automatically move the numbering to the start
61. be displayed with its name at the bottom of the submenu under Picture Alpha Channel Select this path to convert it into an alpha channel If you draw a line a circle or a rectangle in a picture it is also drawn in the alpha chan nel Disable the Draw in alpha channel too option if you do not want to draw in the alpha channel Open the options dialog by double clicking one of the tools The prefe rences apply to all drawing tools Rectangle Size from Center valid for all tools l Anti alias valid for all tools wv Clip to image size v Draw in alpha channel too Cancel Co 208 Video Pictures Summary Individual pictures from videos can be reduced to their Even Field or Odd Field using the Effect when the content of the two fields differs greatly To use effect fil ters from other programs for backwards videos select Swap Fields Videos contain individual pictures like Super 8 film or 35 mm cinema film These indivi dual pictures are made up of 512 lines incl videotext that are divided into two fields The first field contains the odd picture lines 1 3 5 etc and the second field the remaining picture lines 2 4 6 etc This mode is called interlaced Very fast moving objects like cars passing by in the foreground often cause the two fields in a video picture to have very different content because the object moved further while the first half picture was constructed If you take individual pictures from
62. by drag and drop Move the graphics from the middle of the preview section to the target folder on the left or to another brow ser window If you don t want to select all of the graphics select the ones you want while holding down the Shift key Deselect unselects all selected items Create Preview creates a preview for graphics that do not yet have one You can also use this option to create a larger preview 249 Add Image as Folder Icon sets the selected image as a folder icon so that the folder in the Finder shows the selected image Click Label to assign a label to graphics These are operating system labels used to iden tify for example project files by color The label is also written to the XMP metadata so that it can be displayed by Adobe Bridge under other operating systems If you are creating a book for example you can assign a label to all files you already used You can do this particularly fast with the spacebar that assigns the label Orange Press the spacebar again to remove the label You cannot assign a different label using the keyboard This function helps you quickly select the best pictures when working with large numbers of images The label is displayed over the picture in the browser and the background of the picture shows the color of the label In the lower left hand corner of the browser window you can choose Sort By Label amp Name to group the labeled pictures on the screen This al lows you to
63. can make the sky as blue as you want with this option Increasing the saturation is normally worthwhile with scanners which produce pictures with little color If your scanner software has an automatic color correction option you should en able it As a rule your eye is the best judge Full Screen Preview allows you to display a preview of the whole picture if you have a fast computer Black and white pictures which are printed using the offset method should be set slightly brighter as the printing ink soaks into the paper and spreads widthways As a re sult the pixels become larger and the picture darker To avoid this effect set the bright ness about 4 7 higher than the best screen display The value depends on the dot gain of the paper used and should be discussed with the printer s shop The dot gain also needs to be taken into consideration with color pictures Black and white pictures are more sensitive however and even professionals sometimes make them too dark or too light 129 Operator It is fastest to edit images with the operator Click the oval button at the top right of the window when a picture is open to display the operator epe Bic orc ace oaeoi e a H a O aun Otesan eo gt e App resa i If you want to process several pictures in a folder one after the other correct the image with the sliders and click Save amp Next You can use the left and right arrow keys to fine tune a
64. circle mean value see p 58 All variants of subsampling are available in the JPEG format options The background can be set to transparent for a new image In the slideshow images can optionally be displayed justified to the left or top etc Preferences Slideshow General Settings The sound effects for example when you delete a file can be disabled Preferences General Misc New features in GraphicConverter 6 0 1 Option for slide show to ignore the Originals and Thumbs folders from the iPhoto Library Preferences Slide Show Files JPEG option not to write JFIF head or copy to EXIF Swap foreground and background color with x key Additional simplified preferences dialog showing just some of the preferences New features in GraphicConverter 6 0 2 e complete UNICODE support for IPTC metadata added function to export complete iPhoto database added see p 328 import of ArtRage PTG added import of Sinclair screenshots scr added HyperDither Atkinson function added red eye tool added UB only 442 ODF import added YUV import with dialog for different frame sizes added remove resource fork option added to context menu text font selection improved via menu in the menu bar UB unskew works now with grayscale images option to export only each second third image to a movie added speed of import with cardreader improved UB line rectangle and ellipse tool uses now Quartz UB button to go fro
65. click to any position in the pic ture This option is useful for example for removing scratches when you are touching pictures up The caliper rule allows you to make different measurements in an image Click the tool to open a pop up menu Calibrate Length and Unit Measure Line Measure Rectangle Measure Circle Measure Min Max and Mean in a Rectangle First select Calibrate Length and Unit to specify whether you want to measure in pixels or in a measuring unit like centimeters or inches The mouse cursor will turn into a crosshair with which you can draw a line across the picture If you hold down the Shift key you can drag the line perfectly horizontal or vertical If your picture originates from a microscope and contains a scale drag a line across the scale at zoom level 100 As soon as you let go of the mouse button a dialog giving you the length of the line in pixels will open Overwrite the value for example with a 1 and select the required measuring unit to specify for subsequent measurements that the number of pixels originally displayed 57 should represent one millimeter for example If you want to measure in pixels leave the displayed value and select Pixel as the unit if it is not already set After calibrating you can immediately start measuring distances with a line The result is shown on the Information palette on the Comment tab There you can copy the values to use them in a word processor or in an Excel tab
66. compression The following options are available for TIFF format TIFF Compression Format None Big Endian Motorola O PackBits RLE Little Endian intel O Lzw LZW with Prediction O CCITT 3 O CCITT 4 CCITT Fill Order High Bit to Low Bit Low Bit to High Bit Photometric Interpretation of B amp W images 0 White is Zero usual on MACs Embed Metadata if available 1 Black is Zero usual on PCs M IPTC v EXIF v Export 16 bit gray if possible mi xMP v ICC color profile v Paths n ama Mi other comments _ Cancel l Stripe Stream If compression is set to None the uncompressed graphic is saved This type of TIFF can generally be opened by any program that imports TIFF graphics The disadvantage however is the file size PackBits compression RLE is particularly good with respect to file size for black and white graphics In addition it compresses and decompresses graphics quickly For LZW graphic data are compressed with the LZW process Depending on the con tent LZW compression reduces graphic files by about half Graphics with colors that run or with pixels not often repeated can also be compressed to be considerably larger than the original It takes about four times longer to open the uncompressed version because decompression is relatively intensive For LZW with Prediction the graphic files are compared before the actual compressi on This results in even better compression
67. copy with option key Icon Preview Errors Time IgngserEXteristeas separated by a space Misc E DLL P C PAS CC ASM COM SYS LST Index INI PPT INF SIT ZIP TAR MIM GZIP ARJ Browser General Display a Default a i efault Undo Misc v See Cancel Ex Connect to the Internet then enter a URL your user name password and if necessary the path Click Upload to copy the files onto the Web server Upload URL l ftp Username Password Path If you want to download a picture from the Internet onto your computer you can start the download with a Ctrl click or a held click on the picture depending on your Internet browser The picture is saved to the desktop on your computer or to your download fol der You can open it in GraphicConverter from there If you know the path to a picture you can also enter it directly in GraphicConverter to save the picture to the desktop and open it in GraphicConverter Select File New and then Image from URL from the submenu The following dialog opens Open Image from URL 91 Enter the URL and click OK The picture is automatically downloaded to the desktop and opened in GraphicConverter You can for example easily copy the path to a picture by Control clicking the picture in the Internet Explorer to open the context menu and se lecting Copy Shortcut On Paper Digital pictures can be printed relatively cheaply on color printers GraphicConve
68. current pic ture is closed and the next or previous picture is opened The keyboard shortcuts Com mand PageUp or PageDown are very useful here Find duplicate files If a browser window is open you can use Edit Find compare and replace Find dupli cate files to search for duplicates in the folder currently displayed including all subfol ders You can then delete any files you do not need A dialog opens where you can specify whether only completely identical files should be found or whether similar files should also be displayed as identical If you decide to search for similar files you can use the slide to specify how tolerant GraphicConverter should be Select the more tolerant setting to display versions that differ more greatly as duplicates Duplicate file search Find exact matching files only fast C Find similar files slow 9 i i less tolerant more tolerant 299 During the search GraphicConverter will display the progress The process may take a while if you search your whole picture folder Duplicate file search v Reading file list 75 v Comparing files step 1 50 Comparing files step 2 18 Comparing files step 3 Press Command and Period or esc to cancel GraphicConverter will compare the file size first then the file content When GraphicConverter finds duplicate pictures it will display them in a dialog Check duplicate Files Number of duplicate items 2 Current item 1 Number
69. edit them and then save them in TIFF format without losing EXIF infor mation The EXIF information is then also kept when you save the pictures in JPG format again In addition to the EXIF information the IPTC data an ICC color profile and the com ment can be saved in the TIFF file This feature needs to be disabled in the Options dialog 394 for TIFF format for it to work You can open this dialog in the file selection dialog with the Options button when you save a picture with Save As TIFF Compression Format None MAC Motorola PackBits RLE O IBM intel O zw O LZW with Prediction O CCITT 3 O CCITT 4 CCITT Fill Order 0 High Bit to Low Bit O Low Bit to High Bit Photometric Interpretation of B amp W images 0 White is Zero usual on MACs Stripe Stream O 1 Black is Zero usual on PCs Embed Metadata if available M IPTC M Export 16 bit gray if possible F EXIF m xMP Vv ICC color profile v Pathes other comments _ Cancel Ew Assign ICC profile depending on the Color Mode tag should only be disabled if you edit JPEG pictures and save them for the Internet as this makes the file even smaller When Recognize thumbnail for display is enabled GraphicConverter first shows the preview from the EXIF information which is particularly fast Due to the low quality of these previews GraphicConverter will make its own previews as fast as possible While the preview from the E
70. file with the same name and the extension txt is created for each image file listing the field name and value separated by tabs JPEG lossless cropping allows you to cut a section out of pictures without a loss in quality as GraphicConverter does not need to compress the images again if the values for the top left corner of the selection rectangle as well as the width and height are a factor of 16 With some JPEGs it is enough if the values are a factor of 8 We recommend howe ver selecting values that are a factor of 16 since lossless trimming will then always work You can also enter zero as a value You can use this option if for example you want to trim the edges ona series of pictures Convert vector PICT to vector PDF converts PICT images with vector content into vector PDFs without dithering them You can use Convert Photo RAW to 16 Bit TIFF respectively Convert Photo RAW to EXR to convert RAW files from Canon cameras in CR2 format to 16 bit TIFF or Open EXR files used in movie industries to achieve high dynamic range HDR effects The converted files contain the unchanged RAW data without gamma correction or white ballance as re corded by the sensor These features are available in the UB version of GraphicConverter only Image files in Photo Raw format may also contain a JPEG version of the image that you can export with Extract JPG from Photo Raw PhotoRAW only Convert to Photostrip compiles all pictures in a horizo
71. for S and V are not changed this is not the same as invert which would create a color negative 202 Complete inversion is available in the Picture menu Centric involution corresponds with a color rotation of 180 degrees Cold Warm involution swaps all cold colors for warm colors and vice versa Yellow green and purple colors are unchanged the results are similar to chromatic involution The involution axis is turned clockwise slightly but starting from yellow violet unlike chromatic involution 203 Isothermal Involution Isothermal involution keeps cold colors cold and warm colors warm Orange red and turquoise blue colors the sea are not changed Yellow green colors are replaced with violet hues however Involution around the Red Green Axis Involution around the red green axis swaps the yellow and violet colors oT AP a Red and turquoise colors are not changed in this involution 204 Color Rotation allows you to define your own angle for involution Vectorize Summary Special Vectorize allows black and white pictures to be vectorized Pixel pictures lose quality when enlarged The loss in quality is particularly noticeable with lines as they seem to fray at the edges when you enlarge pictures greatly They look stepped To prevent this effect create graphics that are needed in various sizes as vector graphics for example with Freehand Vector graphics are made up of lines and surfaces that
72. for readers who are inte rested in the technical side Normal users will not need this list Images with EXIF orienta tion 8 need to be rotated 90 counterclockwise for example The image orientation viewed in terms of rows and columns Tag 274 112 H Type SHORT Count 1 Default 1 1 The Oth row is at the visual top of the image and the Oth column is the visual left hand side 2 The Oth row is at the visual top of the image and the Oth column is the 375 visual right hand side 3 The Oth row is at the visual bottom of the image and the Oth column is the visual right hand side 4 The Oth row is at the visual bottom of the image and the Oth column is the visual left hand side 5 The Oth row is the visual left hand side of the image and the Oth column is the visual top 6 The Oth row is the visual right hand side of the image and the Oth column is the visual top 7 The Oth row is the visual right hand side of the image and the Oth column is the visual bottom 8 The Oth row is the visual left hand side of the image and the Oth column is the visual bottom Other reserved Back to the settings If you want to always display pictures as they are physically without evaluating the EXIF information you can disable the Rotate image depending on EXIF orientation option in the Open section of the Preferences by clicking Formats and EXIF in the list that opens This rotation method is only related to th
73. foreground and background colors Clicking the small black and white icon above the background color resets the foreground and background colors to black white Copy Copy or a different mode is listed at the bottom of the toolbox If you click Copy a pop up menu will open where you can select a drawing mode Copy Or Xor Bic Not Copy Not Or Not Xor Not Bic The effect of the drawing modes on new picture elements can be seen best in a picture in which a sample a line and a font from the various models have been inserted 225 Copy overwrites everything under new pictures elements such as a line in this case the red background Or only draws over the red background with the blue foreground The bricks in the pat tern are not filled with the yellow background color but are transparent so the picture s red background can be seen XOr is the area of the sample that would be filled with the background color in copy mode also more or less transparent and the background red can be seen through it In Bic mode the area of the sample that would be filled with the background color in copy mode is also more or less transparent and the background red can be seen through it The lines that are drawn with the foreground color in Copy mode are drawn with the background color in this mode The four modes can be inverted with a preceding Not and are then more or less rever sed New Picture You can open a new picture by sel
74. format instead We recommend deleting unnecessary colors from the color table to save memory space again under Picture Colors with Minimize Color Table see page 172 Pictures in E mails If you want to send a picture as an e mail attachment to a Windows user limit the file ex tension to three characters for example name jpg Select the Save web ready without resource option provided in the modern file selection dialog in Mac OS 8 5 and above when saving Resource saving can be disabled under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences in the Save General section The file is then saved without resource as this can cause problems under Windows Files without resource do not have a thumbnail in their icon 71 If you receive an e mail from a Windows user that has a compressed file named Win mail dat attached you will be able to open this file with GraphicConverter All readable images it contains will be opened in a multiple page document You should compress images in CMYK mode before sending by e mail as e mail pro grams cannot show CMYK mode images correctly The file is transferred correctly but appears completely black or with the wrong colors in the e mail program preview If the recipient opens this kind of file in GraphicConverter or another program that supports CMYK mode the colors will be displayed correctly again Alternatively you can convert the pictures into RGB mode before sending by e mail The pict
75. have used this option for a picture with EXIF information you can open the clipboard under the Edit menu to view the EXIF information The EXIF information can be pasted into a text editor and then printed or archived You can change the size of the clip board window using the handle at the bottom right UNIX users often add an X Face to e mail texts This X Face is a small portrait of them selves or a picture of their pet cat for example as a pen name This picture has a special format X Face format You can create this by selecting Edit Copy and then Copy as X Face from the submenu The picture created is placed on the clipboard and can then be pasted into your e mail text with Command V Even version 5 of Microsoft s Outlook Ex press is not compatible with this system Copy Path Mac copies the file path of the current image in Mac format into the clip board Colons are used as separators between the folder levels Copy Path UNIX uses a slash instead of the colon The IPTC information can be copied with Copy IPTC and pasted into another picture with Edit Paste Paste IPTC You do not have to open the pictures You just need to click the required picture in the browser Copy EXIF for paste copies the EXIF information so you can paste it into another pic ture Paste inserts the clipboard contents at the mouse position centered You can move the pasted picture section around In the Preferences under General Edit you can
76. how many Pixels your picture should have in total you can enter the total number of pixels in the dialog for this option Scale to pixel count Pixels 200000 Algorithm QuickDraw Quartz H Not all numbers are possible as the picture is scaled proportionally After scaling open the dialog again to display the number of pixels used to scale your picture Algorithm allows you to specify which subprogram algorithm should be used for sca ling Aspect ratio Crop to 3x5 like the other aspect ratios immediately trims centered to the selected as pect ratio The aspect ratio 1 2 is the aspect ratio of DIN paper sizes like DIN A4 or DIN A5 If you want to specify the section yourself you can use the Export Crop for Photo Service option from the browser context menu You will find a detailed guide in the chapter Cropping for Photo Prints from page 99 Scanning with GraphicConverter Summary You can call up your installed scanner software via File Acquire TWAIN Ac quire If a scanner plug in has been installed will be available in the File Acquire sub menu The picture is available in GraphicConverter after scanning GraphicConverter supports TWAIN technology and can use alternative plug ins There are now several scanner plug ins for Mac OS X Version 5 1 of the professional scanning software SilverFast from Lasersoft can also be used as a plug in with Photoshop http www lasersoft imaging com Y
77. in the file Use Set Creation Date depending on EXIF if only the creation date should be set to leave the correct modification date unchanged This option also al lows you for example using Command A to set the creation date and if necessary the modification date for several selected graphics to the only photo date that makes sense 254 Incorrect file dates can also be corrected if this option is selected in the settings under Browser General Set EXIF Date to File Creation Date sets the EXIF date to the date when the document was Created Shift the EXIF timestamp opens a dialog where you can change time and date from the EXIF information This makes sense if you forgot to change the time in the camera or if the clock battery was low while you were traveling To raise the value for year month etc enter positive numbers To decrease the values enter negative numbers like 5 Shift the EXIF timestamp Add or substract to the EXIF timestamp the following amount Months Days Hours Minutes Oo Oo O 090 O Seconds a Use Set EXIF Date if you want to set the date and time directly Set EXIF timestamp Date YYYY MM DD 2004 2 24 Time HH MM SS 12 0 10 Rotate depending on EXIF rotates the selected pictures as specified in the file EXIF in formation if this data is provided Some digital cameras have an internal position sensor and note when the camera is held sideways to take a picture The
78. in the file selection and simply add the format extension when writing the filename For example tif Make sure there is a period in front of the format extension GraphicConverter then saves in the required format without the format having to be selected from the pop up menu The format extension is automatically attached to the filenames according to the preference You can change the extensions and switch between uppercase and lowercase letters under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences in the Save Settings section 4 Save the picture under the required name The file is then converted to the selected format With Save as the folder containing the source file is selected If you would rather be offered the folder last used disable the Suggest as save position source option in the Preferences under Save General There are other options available in the Save as file selection dialog The Options button is particularly powerful as the corresponding parameters can be selected with this option for the selected format A completely different dialog appears depending on the 25 format The options are explained in more detail in the chapter Important Formats from page 343 and from page 371 File Format TIFF TIF TIFF B O CsSpiit l Create LOWSRC M Set Format from Extension C Save web ready without resource Make filename ready for the web Merge color profile into image for web usag
79. in the middle a preview with for example 100x100 is scaled to 200x200 We do not recommend using this option as the image quality of the preview is not ideal It is better if you create larger previews with Create Preview via the context menu If you save the preview in the cache using the Cache in memory option the preview is displayed slightly faster when the browser window is reopened for example from the background Create THM for RAWS accelerates the display in the browser with RAW images for which a THM file with preview has not yet been created The THM files are not shown in the browser Enter the extensions of the file formats for which you do not want previews to be crea ted under Ignore extensions for automatically preview creation Videos are often displayed in the browser with a black preview This is because the first frame is used for the preview and this is dark or black due to a fade in In order to set a suitable picture for the preview enter for example frame 30 for the preview of a movie next to Frame offset for movie preview 268 Additional settings can be made under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Prefe rences in Browser Display Under Display you can select whether Name file size with separate fork details with count of files in directories creation date modifi cation date with time are displayed in the preview Move Folders 3 Convert Comert Text PTC Errors Time icon Preview in
80. in the selection are not sufficient for a proper 10x15 cm photo print There will be just enough pixels once the color changes to yellow as you enlarge the selection It is better to enlarge the selection so that the color changes to green of H Pixel Db gija 3661259 i Ratio 1 00 You can select the zoom level at the bottom left of the window On the right you can switch to the next zoom level down or up using the minus or plus magnifying glass The zoom level is shown on the left and can be overwritten with a different value Single cli cking the triangle opens a pop up menu where you can select a specific zoom level If your mouse has a scroll wheel you can hold down the option key and zoom with the wheel If you want to center the point under the mouse cursor during zooming select the Set focus of scroll wheel zoom to mouse position option in the General Edit section of the Preferences i Pl If a picture contains several pages you can switch to the other pages with the 1 1 pop up menu The i button opens the information pallet and the circle with four colors indi cates whether ColorSync is enabled Simply click this button to enable and disable Color Sync This option is also available via File Edit Color Profile Enable and disable Use ColorSync color matching in the dialog that opens to display pictures with or without a color profile 54 Directly to the right of the picture is the most important palette the Tool
81. is shown in the Naming box The n stands for the file name of the source file and should not be changed The letter c stands for column and r stands for row You can then determine the position of each individual picture using the filen ames The x at the end of the name is automatically replaced by the respective format extension You can also specify in the file selection dialog whether just the current selection should be saved The two additional Save only selection and Save picture with selec tion options are only available in the file selection dialog if you have made a selection Save only selection saves a picture containing just the selection 28 If the selection is not rectangular a picture is created in which the selection fits Save picture without selection saves the picture as if there were no selection A selection that is simply an outline without content cannot be saved Format JPEG JFIF JPG ey Options Split A Save only selection Save picture with selection _ Create LOWSRC v Set Format from Extension Save web ready without resource __ Make filename ready for the web Merge color profile into image for web usage Preferences New Folder Cancel Save Compress with Stuffit is only available when Stufflt or DropStuff is installed and the Stufflt Engine is therefore installed as a system extension The picture file is automatically compresse
82. lose any picture information after reduction multiply the resolution by the same factor as you reduce In our example the original resolution was 300 dpi Multiplied by 4 this gives you 1200 dpi You should enter this first in the Picture Size Scale dia log Then enter a quarter of the picture height or picture width The Random Matrix normally creates relatively balanced results with less prominent structures This option is preset with a matrix size of 4x4 pixels Here is an example with a random matrix and 4x4 pixels 169 Grayscale Pictures As soon as you set 2 bit as the data depth for a picture you can display four different co lors Two digits need to be saved for each pixel As only the numbers 0 and 1 are available in the computer 00 01 10 and 11 can be displayed Each value stands for one of the four colors that can also be grayscales Black and white pictures of landscapes for example are grayscale pictures In terms of color depth color pictures are not technically different to grayscale pictures 256 grays are required to display a normal black and white picture Using Pictures Co lors Grayscale you can for example reduce or increase the number of grays for effects or pictures with a low number of grayscales Increasing does not change the picture noti ceably it can now display more grayscales after further changes however 4 Grays N37 16 Grays E8 256 Grays 39 Reducing the grayscales makes the pi
83. name Install GraphicConverter see p 6 and start the program Click Enter Code and enter your name and license key Enter your name first writing it exactly as you told us Possibility 2 f you have already registered GraphicConverter then you may have to purchase an update serial number You will find more informati on at www lemkesoft de If you already have the latest update serial number you do not need to register and enter the license key for the update since your serial number is sto red in the preference file in the Preferences folder in the system folder Copy just the Gra phicConverter folder on your hard drive and under Classic Mac OS copy any plug ins for example your scanner software and place them in the Plug Ins folder of the update Also copy any old scripts into the Scripts folder of the update Under Mac OS X the path for the Plug Ins and Scripts folders is Library Application Support GraphicConverter This why you can swap the GraphicConverter folder when you Carry out an update unless you have saved your own files there Under Classic Mac OS the license key is saved in the GraphicConverter Preferences preference file in the Preferences folder in the System Folder Under Mac OS X the com lemkesoft graphicconverter plist preference file has the following path Users Library Preferences The tilde character stands for the name of the respective user If you are using the universal binary ver
84. name of the hard drive Enter the path of your destination folder in place of Merlin destination Save the script using a name like for example Batch Script to the folder Startvolume Library Scripts Folder Action Scripts Open the program Configure Folder Actions which is also located in the AppleScript folder Select the Enable Folder Actions option and click the plus button at the bottom left Now select the folder that should start the batch We recommend a name like Start Batch You will then be asked to select a batch In our case this will be the script Batch Script scpt The extension scpt is added automatically when a script is saved e686 Folder Actions Setup FA Enable Folder Actions On Folders with Actions On Script M Aktion Skript scpt Show Folder Yi C i 420 Now you can drag picture files to the Start Batch folder to automatically process them with the selected batch and save them in the destination folder Automator From Mac OS X 10 4 you can use the program Automator to automate repeated actions in GraphicConverter like with an AppleScript You do not need any programming know ledge for this a Search _ OO aaea PES o aeai LS Applications P 2S Create Preview and icon fe Address Book 2 Remove Resource Fork iy Automator 7 Rotate PEC Lossless DVO Player amp Finder Font Book DB GraphicConverter fF ica 6 ovo amp Image Capture _ Drag of acd actions here
85. of companies use banners to advertise on the Internet These banners are normally GIF animations The fade in effects between the individual pictures give you the impression you are watching a small film or a slide show This is why this kind of advertisement is so effective The animated banner always catches your eye The constant change awakes your curiosi ty Banners normally contain a link to the company s page The link can be set up in an HTML editor as with any other picture 189 You can use GraphicConverter to create open and edit GIF animations The fade in ef fects can be displayed but not created Use GifBuilder by Yves Piguet for this You can download it from www versiontracker com You can create a GIF animation with GraphicConverter using Convert amp Modify or Sto ryboard Select the files to be combined on the left hand side of the Convert amp Modify di alog by pressing the Command key and clicking Shift click selects all files between the one you previously selected and the one you click If you haven t selected a file you can pick out a group of files by holding down the Shift key eA Convert amp Modify Function Rename e Go Banner zehnpu i i S GIF Animations B D zehnpunkt Banner A 1 D zehnpunkt Banner B 1 D zehnpunkt Banner C 1 D zehnpunkt Banner D 1 D zehnpunkt Banner E 1 Filter All available Hy Dest Format GIF GIF HA _ Use Batches
86. of duplicates of this file 2 Delete this one Delete this one Name Beyonce Users hagenhenke Pictures 2004 05 Name Beyonce Users hagenhenke Pictures 2004 05 Mai 20 Jugendtag Scans Mai 20 Jugendtag Scans Jugendtag_Spansberg_02 tif Jugendtag_Spansberg_02 Kopie tif Pixels 1737x1170 Pixels 1737x1170 Fie Size 5 9MB Fie Size 5 9MB Creation Date 09 06 2004 Creation Date 10 06 2004 Modification Date 10 06 2004 Modification Date 10 06 2004 Go Back Do not delete any and continue Go Forward A Read dimensions for info cd Move into trash instead delete if possible SSS yep Automatic mode for all items Cancel Number of duplicate items indicates how many duplicates of original pictures have been found You yourself decide which picture is actually the original by looking through the duplicates and then deleting one of the versions 300 Current item indicates the number of the original displayed Number of duplicates of this file indicates how many versions of the displayed picture there are in total If there is a 2 here you can decide which one of the displayed pictures you want to delete You can also keep both versions and continue to the next original with Do not delete any and continue If more than 2 versions are found you can display the other pictures with Go Forward The newly added version is displayed on the right The picture that was previously shown on the right is move
87. often do not match up and make the results worse We recommend using the ScanPrint program from Calibr8 www calibr8 com which comes with a color sample template to calibrate scanners and printers Create your own printer profile for each paper type We advise only using original ink cartridges If you use inks from other manufacturers you will have to create separate profiles for them in addi 138 tion Enter the name of the printer ink and the paper in the filename of the profile Do not use paper with chemical bleaches as the colors will be perceived by the human eye diffe rently to a scanner The scanner is involved in the creation of the printer profile as it has to scan in a printout of a second color sample template The ScanPrint AUTOPILOT program then calculates the profiles using the two scans ScanPrint is a professional product with which you can also calibrate low cost equip ment If you are having problems with the color differences between the scan template ScanPrint is the right program for you ScanPrint is not exactly cheap but it is among the best basic programs for color profiles and is easy to use Under Classic Mac OS select the profile for the monitor in the ColorSync control panel and under Mac OS X in the ColorSync section of the System Preferences which you can reach via the Apple menu Select the profile from your print shop as the standard profile for CMYK see p 152 on wards This profile is not simpl
88. option is useful because it can take a long time to create a preview for large graphics Don t create if EXIF preview available can be enabled if the previews from the EXIF in formation are sufficient for your work You should leave Don t create in memory cards enabled because this allows the con tent of a memory card in a digital camera to be displayed without modifying the files on the card Temporary if ppi value is equal or less than is the best setting if you are working al ternately with pictures that are prepared for the Internet or for printing A resource of ap proximately 40 kB is then not created for pictures destined for the Internet as it could double the file size Use quick existing preview check allows you to speed up the preview in the browser considerably as GraphicConverter only checks whether a resource is present and does not need to open the file If for example you display a folder with 5000 images the pre views will appear almost immediately when this option is enabled This can take around three minutes if the option is disabled However if you have selected for example 400x400 pixels for the previews and the files only contain small previews they may appear pixelated since they are scaled in this case If you re create the previews using the context menu they will be displayed normally again The Enlarge small ones option enlarges a small preview If 200x200 is set as the size for the browser display
89. orientation is written in the EXIF information This option allows to you to select all pictures after importing new shots and automatically rotate the portrait pictures If you import the picture with Gra phicConverter using the File Acquire Download images from connected camera option the portrait format pictures containing the corresponding information will be ro tated immediately and without losses You should use Remove double orientation tags and reset them if you receive an er ror message about orientation tags when you open images Images should only contain 255 one orientation tag Some pictures from iPhoto have this problem due to a bug in Quick Time Updating QuickTime can solve the problem for iPhoto Change orientation value allows you for example to change an orientation that has been set incorrectly by the scan program If you want to rotate an image normally use the Rotate option from the context menu Rebuild EXIF preview creates a high quality preview with 200x200 pixels as an EXIF preview If you forward data to PC users you can use this option to add a high quality preview to all pictures in a browser window and delete the resource using the Convert amp Modify dialog The files can then be read by all programs in Windows or other operating systems without any problems You can also use the option if the EXIF preview is too poor or if it was not rotated for portrait pictures Remove EXIF Preview deletes
90. overwrite the old file with the new one You may not change the names Classic Mac OS You will only need to use the Install TWAIN Support 1 7 program to install TWAIN data and then restart your computer if you want to use GraphicConverter in the Classic Mac OS to scan via the TWAIN interface see page 11 Alternatively a scanner plug in can be copied into the Plug Ins folder or installed with the scanner software In this case you will only need to close and restart GraphicConverter if it was already run ning instead of the computer If you are using the carbon version of GraphicConverter in the Classic Mac OS from Mac OS 8 5 with the respective latest version of Carbon Lib the plug ins should be in the Sys tem Folder Application Support GraphicConverter Plug Ins folder In Mac OS X plug ins are copied to the Library Application Support GraphicCon verter Plug ins folder User plug ins are copied to the Users Library Application Support GraphicConverter Plug ins folder The tilde character stands for the name of the respective user User plug ins are only available to the respective users One very easy way to install plug ins is to drag them onto the GraphicConverter program icon Af ter a query they will be automatically copied into the correct folder Step By Step Installation You may have downloaded GraphicConverter from the Internet or received it on a CD or GraphicConverter may already have been installed
91. page are deleted The installation method depends on the opera ting system used If you are using Mac OS 8 5 or above follow the installation instructions in the next paragraph If a Mac OS before System 8 5 is installed on your computer please follow the instructions in the next section but one Under Mac OS 8 5 or later Select Control Panels from the Apple menu and open the File Exchange control panel Click the File Translation tab and disable the Convert Documents Automatically opti on Any faxes received will now no longer be converted automatically and can be opened with GraphicConverter and saved in a different format Under Mac OS versions before System 8 5 Select Control Panels from the Apple menu and open the Mac OS Easy Open control panel Disable the Convert Documents Automatically option Any faxes received will no longer be converted automatically Now you can open them with GraphicConverter and save them in a different format To help display any multiple page faxes you receive on your computer you can use the Next Page Previous Page and Goto Page options in the Edit Navigation menu To read the fonts more easily you should enable the Use high quality zoom anti aliasing option under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences General Display Con tent see page 12 Update GraphicConverter is constantly being revised You can quickly check whether the version on your CD is the latest at www lemkesof
92. pixels you select for the matrix the larger the resolution of the picture in dpi The different possibilities for the field can be set in the dialog using Darken Linear and Triangle to display the different lightness values of the pixels from the source picture as best possible The box on the top left has a black dot at the bottom left Four of these dots fit next to each other and above each other to fill the box This box is used for a white or almost white source pixel White areas therefore have a slight grid pattern The edges of the picture are quadrupled as 4x4 dots are placed for each source pixel 167 A totally black source pixel will be represented by a square made from 4x4 black dots in our example In between values are assigned the closed field As a comparison here is a greatly enlarged section from a source picture showing an eye followed by a 8x8 dithered version of this section using the Triangle option d d d d al dl d d al a d Dithering makes pictures larger as several dots are set in place of each source pixel The edges are four times as long with a matrix of 4x4 The size of the matrix indicates the en largement factor To avoid this you can reduce the picture before dithering After dithe ring pictures can only be scaled with considerable quality losses 168 Here is our example picture dithered with Darken Linear a matrix of 4x4 and reduced to quarter size beforehand So you don t
93. rates via the LZW algorithm The disadvan tage of this process is that graphics created this way can only be opened by a few pro grams When CCITT 3 is selected graphic files are compressed in accordance with the CCITT 3 Standard FAX This option is only available for 1 bit graphics 369 If you select CCITT 4 the graphic files are compressed in accordance with the CCITT 4 Standard This option is only available for 1 bit graphics The CCITT 4 process achieves very high compression rates The Fill Order option is used to determine the placement of the bits for CCITT 3 and 4 Some TIFF readers can only interpret one option Clear Stripe Stream if TIFFs cannot be opened correctly by the recipient Embed Metadata if available allows you to not save individual parts of the metadata by clearing the corresponding check box The Format option allows you to specify whether the values within a TIFF file should be saved in Big Endian Motorola or Little Endian Intel format You should select Intel if you frequently exchange files with DOS users because some DOS programs can only read In tel TIFFs You can use both variants for Intel Macs Select 1 Black is Zero standard on PCs under Photometric Interpretation of B amp W images if a TIFF does not display correctly on another computer Export 16 bit gray if possible is useful if for example an FITS file is converted into TIFF to optimize the quality If want to convert multi page Ti
94. recommendation as a large number of computers that could only display 256 colors were still in use The remaining 43 colors were reserved for Microsoft Windows The RGB Model uses the so called additive colors red green and blue When these three colors are added together the result is white Monitors display all colors according to the RGB system Use this model to produce pictures for a multimedia CD ROM for exa mple OQO Colors JEE o E RGB Sliders i Red A color palette from which you can select a color opens for pictures with 8 bit color depth or less The color palette for the foreground color is a tear off menu If you move the mouse cursor away from the toolbox while the palette is open the palette is separa ted and can be left open for easy access O Foreground Color E a Hl EC BERENE OEE eae Senn E a 232 The current foreground color is framed with a white line bottom right in our screenshot The color number is displayed under the mouse cursor when you run over it with the mouse Click the required color to select it Eyedropper If you want to select a color from a picture click the corresponding point in the picture with the eyedropper 4 from the toolbox The color of the pixel under the tip of the eyed ropper becomes the foreground color and can be used to paint fill or for shapes like the rectangle Hold down the Alt key to switch to the eyedropper when you are using an
95. red green and blue color channels opens when you open an image in Deltavision format Deltavision Import Red minimum Red maximum 500 Green minimum 117 Green maximum 973 Blue minimum 144 Blue maximum 716 These values are used to calculate the normal RGB valves with 8 bit per channel The di alog also opens once before the first picture when you perform multiple conversion with batches so that the same values are used for all pictures All pictures will then have the same brightness after conversion The old values in the files will be overwritten with the values that you enter or confirm in the dialog ECW ECW format compresses files using the Wavelet method and can therefore compress very large files to an acceptable size without much loss in quality If you have enabled the 345 Show dialog on opening option under Preferences Open Formats ECW the fol lowing dialog will appear when you open an ECW file Define ECW import area and scale 19909 Downsample 8 Range f 29009 f Full 37748 Required memory 2 00 MB 24324 tE t Note Click into the preview to define an import area ma Cory You can open the whole picture or just part of the picture so you just have to deal with smaller amounts of data Select a rectangle with the mouse or enter the values for the top left hand corner and for the bottom right hand corner as the Range Downsample al lows you to select a factor by which the image shou
96. scanning process This option also needs to be available in the scanning software and enabled often in the preferences This option should be disabled in the scanning software before the last picture is scan ned however as the scanning software will be started again for nothing at the end and has to be quit normally with Command Q All acquire plug ins which have been installed and are located in the GraphicConverter Plug Ins folder are displayed in the File Acquire submenu Acquire plug ins for impor ting pictures are supplied with scanners and digital cameras GraphicConverter supports most Photoshop 3 0 compatible acquire plug ins Command T calls up the first scanner plug in If you cannot find the installation software for your scanner you can copy the plug in required from the Plug Ins folder of another graphics program into the GraphicConverter Plug Ins folder In some versions of Adobe Photoshop the scanner plug ins are located in the Plug Ins folder by default If you update your operating system on a regular basis we recommend downloading the latest version of your scanner software from the manufacturer s Web site TWAIN With the TWAIN system the scanning software for your scanner only needs to be instal led once and can be started from different programs Under Classic Mac OS GraphicCon verter needs a system extension and a TWAIN folder The word TWAIN is not an abbrevia tion and has no real meaning TWAIN i
97. set as the background color as the edge If you want to delete a white edge white needs to be set as the background color and black accordingly if the edge is black The foreground and background colors can be set by clicking the color are as and using the eyedropper J You will find detailed information on this in the chapter Foreground and Background Color on page 224 If a picture contains an alpha channel it will be used for trimming If a single color mar gin is then left over it will also be trimmed away if it corresponds with the trim color By selecting Edit Trim Options you can specify under Sides whether all four edges of the picture should be trimmed If for example you leave the bottom edge out the ty pical scanner edge will remain there Trim Tolerance 0 0 255 Sides check all for normal behavior M Top wv Left v Right v Bottom Only for images with millions of colors l Additional trim color i l Additional trim color pee If the scanned edge is not quite one color you can increase the Tolerance The larger the entered value the more lenient GraphicConverter will be about patches in the scan ner edges for example The correct value will have to be determined a few times by trial and error However before you spend a long time doing this just use a selection rectan gle 118 When you use different colors in the edges two Additional trim colors can be defined for the current backgr
98. slideshow ae a a Move to trash requires command and backspace key Convert Toggle rotate shortcuts permanent not permament Comert Text PTC gt Errors Time _ Go to next image after change of label or rating Icon Preview index Misc Browser General Context Menu aie Default Undo Show time since start of slide show displays the time that has passed to help you for example keep track of the time when giving presentations Search for sound file with same name as the image during the slide show to find au dio files that have the same name as the displayed image file but a different ending In this case GraphicConverter only plays WAV files as created by some digital cameras that record sound when taking pictures Playback stops once the next picture is displayed We therefore recommend selecting the After mouse click setting for the Change Picture Enable Cursor up pause the slide show if you are working with a Kensington Pocket Presenter or would like to assign pause to the cursor up key for any other reason The Kensington Pocket Presenter is a wireless remote control and only has the four cursor keys that are also available on the keyboard It does not have its own pause button with which you can display a picture for a longer period When the Cursor up pause the slide show option is selected you can use the cursor up key as a pause button Toggle rotate shortcuts permanent not permanent swaps the funct
99. specify whether the pasted section should be translucent while it is being moved If you want the inserted section also to be transparent so you can position it accurately with the cursor 219 keys you should enable the Copy with other Opacity option in the selection tool dialog and enter a value around 50 Double click the selection tool in the toolbox to open the dialog Selection Transparency Selection Preferences Transparent Color a Set Back Color _ Copy Selection Transparent a m Copy with other Opacy 50 This field is empty because the color table is only available for pictures that use 256 colors or fewer l Save to Preferences Note You can access the tabs from keyboard with SA command 1 3 Cancel GOK The Edit Paste submenu contains the Paste at Position option that inserts the clip board contents at a specific position Paste PICT X Position Y Position 288 v Suggest copy offset Cancel Cok X Position indicates the distance from the left hand edge in pixels Y Position the dis tance from the top edge Suggest copy offset allows you to transfer the values from the copy procedure This is particularly useful when the pictures have the same size In the Preferences under General Display Windows you can specify whether the first pixel in the top left hand corner should have the values 0 0 or 1 1 The two versions are not diffe rent technically Experts prefer 0 0 no
100. the EXIF preview which is no longer necessary after Gra phicConverter has created a normal preview with a better quality Edit or add EXIF data allows you to change the EXIF data for the manufacturer of the camera the model the software or the date Edit Add EXIF Data Make Model Software File Date Date format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Cancel Eo You can use Delete Host amp Software correct File Date to delete useless data in JPEG images that were written in the files by other programs Other programs sometimes set their name in the EXIF data When you import images using the program Image Capture the file date is set to the date of the import It is more useful however to use the date when the picture was taken As this does not appear at any other point in the EXIF data GraphicConverter can correct the date If you have imported images with the program Image Capture you should also use the Rotate depending on EXIF option from the same submenu so that portrait pictures are not only displayed correctly in GraphicCon verter but also in screensavers etc Export EXIF data into text file creates a text file in the same folder that lists the EXIF data You can use these files for imports into databases Delete EXIF tags opens a dialog where you can enter the Hex code of the EXIF fields that you want to delete if for example you do not want to pass on the information about the white balance 256 Remov
101. to 200 for example and then you can still change the proportions using the size In the second step select Size for Priority as only the value se lected in the Priority box can be adjusted If you change the resolution using this func tion the size will also be changed If you want to obtain the output size you need to proceed differently Copy the selec tion as normal with Command C and select File New and then Image with Clipboard from the submenu The copied selection is now a normal picture and can be modified with Picture Size Scale and Picture Resolution If the resolution is changed with this option the output size is kept Use this option to place a scaled selection on the clipboard using the Scale option without losing resolution 218 Copy EXIF as Text in the Edit Copy submenu copies the technical details of a picture to the clipboard Digital cameras write the exposure time for example in pictures as EXIF information 0 99 Clipboard Exposure Time 1 250s F Number 9 510 Exposure Program ISO Speed Rating Date 1999 11 27 15 32 57 Comp Bits per Pixel 2 4 Shutter Speed 8 0 Aperture Value 6 5 Exposure Bias Value Unknown Max Aperture Value 3 0 Subject Distance 100 0 Metering Mode CenterWeightedAverage Light Source Unidentified Flash Focal Length 8 Omm Scanner KODAK DIGITAL SCIENCE DC260 VO1 00 Manufacturer Eastman Kodak Company Software Clipboard contents text Once you
102. to find it quickly While you are typing do not stop as the system will immediately jump to the matching file Your entry is displayed at the bottom in the window frame If only two pictures are selected both are displayed at the same time on the right hand side so that you can compare them if they are similar 237 The picture details such as the file size and the format are displayed under the picture on the right hand side If you open the context menu by Ctrl clicking the right hand side below the preview you can copy the whole text to the clipboard with Copy Text allowing you for example to paste it in a word processing or spreadsheet program Double click a preview image in the middle or right hand section to open this picture in GraphicConverter If several pictures are selected all of them are opened In this case the Shift key may not be pressed down when you double click Folders that are in the selected folder are displayed as folders Only after you double click the subfolder are the contents displayed in a new Browser window To display the contents of a different folder in the current Browser window single click the correspon ding folder in the left section or select Open folders in same browser under Prefe rences Browser Misc Aliases are indicated by a bent arrow in the bottom left hand corner so they do not acci dentally overwrite the original file with the alias when copied You can copy selected files in t
103. to lose your overview even when there are only several pictures open Graphic Converter helps you to view and sort these graphics with the browser and the slide show This way you can maintain your overview and achieve your goals The Browser Summary GraphicConverter has a powerful browser function that allows you to oversee manage sort and edit larger numbers of graphics and movies You can also send your images to an e mail program so you can mail them to a friend To open a Browser window click File Browse Folder Then select a folder that con tains pictures from the file selection dialog that opens and click Select You can also drag 235 a folder to the GraphicConverter icon in the operating system In the Browser window that opens small previews of the pictures in the folder are displayed eee J Bidder 1 A 2003 08 August 11 Segeln Grofenheidorn Auswahl oO Batch No Batch Go a 6 amp S e E i back Forward Open Rotateleft Rotate right Sidevhow Catalog Adail Other Recreate Format JPEG JFIF JPG JPEG iS Options h If there is not yet a preview of the pictures GraphicConverter creates one automatically or you can Control click and then select Create Preview in the context menu For gra phics for the Web create a temporary preview so that no unnecessary data is written into the files making them larger Select Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences Browser Preview and
104. to move it to a different location first Delete the GraphicConverter folder afterwards Drag the GraphicConverter folder into the Applications folder of your hard drive The update has been fully installed Sources for Updates You cannot order updates through the mail Please download the latest version from our Web site www lemkesoft com or install it from the CD ROM supplied with a recent issue of Macworld magazine for example The latest browsers such as Safari expand the downloaded files automatically If the data is not automatically unpacked you can decompress it with the latest version of the Stufflt Expander freeware program You can download Stuffit Expander at http www allume com expander License Key and Registration GraphicConverter saves the serial number in the preferences file You therefore do not have to enter the serial number again for updates The registration for all users of a com puter under Mac OS X is different however The serial number is written in the program 13 file in this case After an update you therefore have to enter the serial number again Please read the paragraph which applies to you below Possibility 1 f you a have purchased a license for GraphicConverter from Lemke Software GmbH together with this book you will receive your license key by e mail If you ordered the GraphicConverter CD ROM you will find your license key on the CD ROM packaging It will only work with your
105. version Cropping for Photo Prints If you want to order prints from your digital photos you will face the problem that most digital cameras produce pictures with an aspect ratio of 4 3 like most monitors and televi sions Photo paper in 4x6 inch format for example has an aspect ratio of 3 2 If you redu ce the digital photo so it fits the photo paper at the top and bottom you will get white edges on the left and right Some photo services offer the option of prints with white edges and in some cases you can order the prints with the edges already cut off 99 If you enlarge the digital photo so the photo paper is filled completely part of the image will be cut off at the top and bottom The following picture shows how a photo service would trim the image If you decide on this method you may want to position the selection yourself and trim off parts of the picture that are not so important In our example it would be nice to see the whole of the boy s hand while the upper part of the picture is less important GraphicConverter has an excellent option for cropping pictures to an aspect ratio of your choice Open the desired folder in a browser window and select the pictures you wish to crop with Shift or Command click Choose Export Crop for Photo Service from the context menu A dialog opens where you can enter the aspect ratio of your photo paper This is always 3 2 for 4x6 inches and other standard sizes Alternatively y
106. with the mouse The visible window contents can be moved with the mouse in the window The file is not changed rather you are only scrolling through the contents Option key on the picture surface The current tool is changed to the eyedropper when you hold down the Option key You have to press the mouse button to change the foreground color to the color under the mouse Arrow keys If a rectangular selection is defined this is moved on a point by point basis If no selection is defined the window contents are scrolled in the corresponding direction Shift Arrow keys If a rectangular selection is defined it is reduced in size or enlarged horizontally on the right margin using the left and right arrow keys or vertically on the lower margin with the up and down arrow keys 423 Key Combinations Command Up arrow key Result A browser window opens displaying the folder containing the current picture Shift Control Arrow keys Moves the selection boundary Option Arrow keys Shifts the complete image The part that is pushed out of the image is inserted at the other side PgUp PgDown on most keyboards these are slanted arrows The contents of the window are scrolled either up or down by a full page Home End on many keyboards these are represented as arrows with two lines through them The contents of the window are scrolled all the way to the top or the b
107. with the ellipse tool gives you a circle and with the rectangle tools a square The shapes are filled with the foreground color You can choose further settings for most tools in a dialog by double clicking the icons You can specify for the empty and filled rectangle and the ellipse variants whether the shape should be formed from the center and the edges should be softened with the Anti alias option Both options apply to all tools once enabled and can be disabled again via most tools x Rectangle Size from Center valid for all tools Anti alias valid for all tools Use the Anti alias option only if you are creating pictures for onscreen publishing for example Internet or CD ROM and the normal variant results in stepped edges Anti alia sing does remove the steps along the line but these areas are then very unsharp The anti alias option also smoothens colored areas You can set the corner shape and size for rectangles with rounded corners Double click one of the corresponding icons in the toolbox and the following dialog will open Filled rounded Rectangle X Radius 5 Y Radius 5 Size from Center valid for all tools F Anti alias valid for all tools Cancel E OK 3 If both values are equal the rounded corners will have an even shape The curve beco mes larger as you increase the value If the values are different each corner will be split into two parts in the middle X Radius defines the sha
108. woke O PC SVGA 65536 colors General GIF J Atari Falcon 65536 colors HPGL JPEG Biorad conversion Leus Pie Import three frames or less as RGB etarile AN Movie J Always import as movie Multi page PCD PDF Photo Raw PICT PSD QuickTime TIFF WMF Save Default X 4 Undo X Custom Icon y oe The type of color information for FLH files is not saved in the file Modify the type here if the FLH files cannot be opened correctly Biorad is a format for microscope pictures Unfortunately the format specification is problematic because it is not clear whether the three images contained in the single gra phic file are three sequential images or whether they are the red the green and the blue parts of a single image If you select Biorad conversion Import three frames or less as RGB the three images frames are combined into a single RGB graphic when imported If you select Import always as movie images are always interpreted as three sequential images in a movie 402 Open Multipage Preferences EW EPSF EXIF Open multipage files with page popup menu FITS Open only first page of multipage files salad O Open only middle page of a multipage files HPGL O Open only last page of multipage files JPEG M EPE J Open only the following page of multipage files Metafile Movie v Open always best icon of Windows ICO family Multi page PCD PDF Photo Raw PICT PSD QuickTime TIFF WMF Save Custom Icon
109. www kekus com LensFix allows you to for example correct image distortions caused by the lens or reduce the vignetting Install LensFix in you pro grams folder and open General External Editors in the Preferences Click Set and se 328 lect the required program in the file selection dialog that opens in our example this is LensFix Preferences a Clipboard Digital Camera Set Applications LensFix Cl LensFixCI 4 2 app Display Content u Display Windows Set Edit External Editors Set i EES Monitor gt Plug ins Set Print gt Open Set General _ _ _ _ Correct amp Change Seti IPTC ee gt Formats Set Save n General Set Custom kon o Formats Set IPTC EXIF Settings Slide Show General Effects Files Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Car B 329 As soon as you have selected at least one program the App entry also appears in the menu bar as an abbreviation for application program You can transfer an open image to the external editor via this menu e99 lensa image EXIF inte Camera manulatturet Canon Focal length wam Correction petunge Database No maten found Select mansay lem Focal Length 000 Chromatic Aberranen fix Red Oyan triage gt Fux Dhue Vethow fringe a Vignetre Ameer Medcont oe Perspective Auto scale m por Rer Aap gt Seale GF Revew 4 Rever
110. you should choose a far higher value Repeat this for all other red eyes Removal of red eyes is only available for pictures with a color depth of 32 bit You change the color depth to 32 bit if your pictures have a lower color depth using Picture Colors If you want the pupils to remain light gray use the op tion again If the person is depicted from the side it may be easier to define the selection with the lasso You will find the lasso at the top left of the toolbox The pupils of the people in the photograph are wide open because the room is dark Once you have removed the red eye the results may still not be very satisfactory We the refore recommend avoiding this problem when you take the picture It is easiest to use a flash that is as far away from the camera as possible The flash will then illuminate a diffe 150 rent part of the retina than picked up by the camera Heavy flash guns ensure the best re sults but because of their weight are not even used by press photographers today A flash fitted on top of the camera is normally enough to avoid the red eye effect As the red eye effect occurs more often at greater tele ranges we recommend setting the flash indirect by pointing the front part of the flash upwards The Red Eye Pro option darkens the pupil and reduces its size at the same time Select the red pupil and choose Red Eye Pro from the Effect menu Nothing will happen at first GraphicConverter switches to a spec
111. you to increase the quality when the pictures are reduced You can use Ignore every image after the image in multiimage if there are ex tra images in a regular sequence that should not be included in the film For example you can leave out the odd frames from video picture sequences Background sound allows you select background music Enter how long each picture should be displayed in Show images for Add every image enter 1 to add all allows you for example to export only every third image from the source folder 289 Settings for Slide Show There are many parameters that can be set for the slide show Select Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences Slide Show General PTC gt Formats Save General Custom Icon Formats IPTC EXIF Settings Slide Show General Effects Files Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Errors Time icon Preview index Misc Browser General Context Menu Display General Comert Text PTC Preferences Slideshow General Settings M Fullscreen Display Files v Darken all screens TA Sort Mi Show next image on second Name Hy Dai M Sort Top Down Name Jeo v Sort folder separately __ with path wv Subfolders _ Scale M index Depth _ Erase text background Mi Show tool icons M Shadow text Show move folders Original size B gj Open files reduced Justify Center HH faster but no zoom Select Information Alias
112. 0 4 and higher This is because part of the Mac OS is used to import from digital cameras with this method and it erroneously imported the EXIF data twice in previous versions This bug was corrected in Mac OS X 10 4 Importing via the toolbox has the advantage that the import is not can celled before the last picture is imported Enable logfile debug mode allows you to create a log file called capture_log txt in which problems during import are documented The file is saved in the GraphicConverter program folder Please e mail us this file if you have problems importing from your digital camera 374 Rotate depending on EXIF rotates pictures from digital cameras upon import if the ca mera is equipped with a position sensor and has written the orientation in the EXIF data Rotate Thumbnail will rewrite EXIF data should be left enabled so that the preview is also rotated The following information is only interesting for pictures taken using ex pensive cameras with position sensors When images are rotated automatically according to the EXIF data they are calculated so that the top line of the image is also the top line in the file Therefore this kind of rota tion is called physical rotation If you import a portrait format image from the camera using the Finder it will not be rotated physically by the Finder Logical rotation is the opposite The image data is not modified in this method Graphic Converter recognizes the ori
113. 0em 5 1mi s Page Dott In the file selection dialog click the folder whose contents are to be listed The folder must contain pictures Now click Choose to create the list Lists can cover several pages Use the plus and minus buttons at the bottom left of the window to navigate from page to page Lists can be saved This creates a text file that you 214 can open in text programs like SimpleText TextEdit and BBEdit Light The width and height of the pictures is also given in mm in saved lists e8e Pht gt 5 I o Last Saved 10 02 27006 105 27 Lr p 3 1 20 B File Path Orion Users hagentohe Desktop Ut _ ura forwat idtrthei ght ude resolution eweergsize filesize widtiv em gt bwight em gt resolution InG IOM aT won An If Tsen 1A MiL fo TENA heth Cae Srl 7 1 a 4 tim ING 10081 JPG JPEG JFIF 32072 2048 16 7 MILL RGB 180 0x18 Cop 24 06 2 416 423 5 259 0 129 0 12018682 JPG JPEG JFIF 3072 2048 16 7 MILL ROG 180 0x180 dpi 24 ere Ne be 39 188 08 1 10 amn WODAN It Po aa res 16 7 Mit non TOD the TR eas m ma 1 a mo 0 7 You can make settings for the appearance of the list under Special List Options Spe cial Open List Window reopens a previously opened and closed list window List Typeface Margins Font Helvetica tA Left Size f18 IA Top 2 00 cm Right 2 00 cm Style Where Bottom 2 00 cm W Bold Title gt Print Mark B Italic Table g A Underline Footer
114. 536 ip9 IMG_7537 Jpq H IMG 7554 jp9 IMG_7877 Jpq amp 1MG 8702 jpq 1NG_8934 jpg img 8966 jpq 1Os lokale Volumes 4 Anderungsdarum 28 Mai 2005 20 54 Gestern 21 09 Gestern 21 09 Gestern 21 09 Gestern 21 09 Gestern 22 05 Gestern 21 09 Heute 05 43 Gestern 21 09 Gestern 21 10 Gestern 21 09 Gestern 21 09 Gestern 21 56 Gestern 21 09 Gestern 21 50 Gestern 21 09 Gestern 21 09 Gestern 21 09 F wider a i 1MC_9694 jpg Gestern 21 09 A Websites IA MEMSTICK IND 23 Septem 2004 06 51 Y Lup 1 Juni 2005 27 50 a terminari 03 You Had Me mp3 L Juni 2005 22 50 J Projekte gt 2 MSSEMC Gestern 2144 v D MSSONY 23 Mai 2005 22 12 E Preferences o To transfer a picture from a mobile phone with Bluetooth select it in the phone and send it using the option for sending via Bluetooth Activate the Bluebooth option on your Bluetooth compatible Mac In a Sony Ericsson S7001 you select More Send Via Bluetooth After a security query the message that a picture is being received will then appear in the Finder The picture will be saved in your document folder eeo Incoming File Transfer amp S700i File Name Transferring IMG_5858 jpq Status 17 7 KB of 150 8 KB Time Remaining 20 seconds at 6 KB s 76 The aspect ratio of images being transferred to the phone should correspond with the display aspect ratio as much as possible You may have to trim the image Enter
115. Always JPEG Always PNG Set JPEG Quality Set PNG Quality Image file format JPG GIF PNG or TIF depending on source Always JPEG Save Cancel E Open Enter a filename with the extension html For photos we recommend selecting the Al ways JPEG option under Thumbnail file format If you have comic strips mixed up with photos select GIF and JPEG depending on color depth Always PNG makes sense only if you want to work with the larger PNG Files The advantage of PNG files is the flexible Gamma value that makes the brightness of the pictures under Windows and Mac sys tems always the same 82 Set the quality of preview pictures with Set JPEG Quality The higher the quality the larger the file Specify the settings for PNG format pictures with Set PNG Quality see p 364 Image file format allows you to set the format of the linked large images You can leave JPG GIF PNG or TIF depending on source enabled if for example the source images are in TIF format and you want to put the large pictures online in TIF format Select Always JPG if the source images are in a different format to JPG format and if the large images should be crea ted in JPG format You can also incorporate QuickTime movies in a catalog These movies can be played on the Web site The format of movies is not changed Select which creator should be entered for the HTML file with Creator If you select Ma
116. Apply white balance depending on camera type and file settings This option perfor ms the white balance on the basis of default camera related data that is saved in Graphic Converter The camera type is determined automatically from the EXIF information You should try Interpolate RGBG as four colors if the results do not turn out as you ex pected RGBG stands for Red Green Blue Green as the camera chips store these colors You should leave Rescale to EXIF width and height enabled so that the size of the image is defined Disable this function if your camera does not supply the image size you expect Don t scan files for previews in the browser thumbnail pane speeds up browsing because the search for previews is not carried out 406 Don t show preview dialog suppresses the following dialog where you can also make settings for RAW images The dialog will appear when you open RAW images in bee mee Open PICT Preferences Genera GIF M Bi HPGL _ Big color test JPEG C Change scaling Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page PCD PDF Photo Raw PICT PSD QuickTime TIFF WMF Save Custom Icon General Settings Slide Show General v Cancel GOD Big color test Please enable this option if you want to open PICT graphics with vector information without colors Caution if you do this PICT graphics compressed as JPEGs are considerably larger when opened The color test identifies how many colors the image has Use
117. C JPEG v Use faster interpolation Lotus Pic nile Open only with half resolution a lot of faster Movie The photo raw import is based on Dave Coffin s Raw Photo Decoder at repens http www cybercom net dcoffin dcraw PDF v Scan images for lowres version to display a preview Raw Open always JPEG from RAF files PSD _ Open always JPEG from CRW files guiekTime v Apply automatic white balance WMF Apply white balance depending on camera type and file settings Save j Interpolate RGBG as four colors Custom Icon M Rescale to EXIF width and height Fie Formats l Don t scan files for previews in the browser thumbnail pane Settings _ Don t show preview dialog Slide Show e e General v Default Undo When you import photo RAW images you can select a separate value for Gamma Brightness It is also possible to choose a Red and Blue Scale Try different values if the results are what you expected Enable Open always JPEG from RAF CRW files if you prefer to always open the JPEG image contained in RAF CRW documents RAW files normally also contain the picture as a JPG image at half resolution Opening becomes unbelievably fast making this option very useful for slide shows The quality of the images is reduced however Apply automatic white balance is the standard setting as the data for the white balan ce are normally contained in the file If the results are not satisfactory select the option
118. Convert Comert Text PTC Errors Time icon Preview index Misc Browser General Context Menu Display General Display Thumbnails Function Keywords Misc Open Preview d Default Undo If the IPTC information contains special characters like the German umlauts and you want it to be readable on a PC we recommend leaving the setting Unicode UTF8 enabled If a program you are using for further processing on a Mac or a Windows PC does not show the special characters correctly select Apple MacRoman or Windows accordingly You can convert files that have already been saved by enabling the required option opening the files and saving them again Always add IPTC as XMP also writes the IPTC data in the XMP section This allows the data to be read by programs that only search the XMP section for IPTC data If you want to copy the IPTC data to the XMP section without saving the picture again select Copy EXIF to XMP from the browser context menu If you require special characters from Unicode fonts for example for Japanese texts you need to write the IPTC in the XMP section as the normal IPTC standard does not sup port these characters You should enable Keep EXIF maker note and user comment if you want to keep the maker note and the user comment Some cameras do not write standardized information in these sections of the EXIF information This sometimes leads to problems when you 320 open files with other progr
119. Defaut 4 Undo X Move Folders 2 v Select Ignore interpretation value to open TIFF graphics that are damaged The gra phic is then displayed inverted Click Picture Invert to remove the inversion Display content of unknown tags displays all text information from the table of con tents in the TIFF file that cannot be interpreted in the comments table The Import 8 bits starting at bit x from 16 bit grayscale files allows you to specify at which bit to start for 16 bit grayscale graphics Enter the starting bit in the input box 410 Open Formats UNIX Preferences General 7 Correct amp Change Path to UNIX tool xfig mE sw bin DICOM ECW Path to UNIX tool ImageMagick EPSF P EXIF sw bin FITS GIF HPGL The pathes are normally JPEG usr local bin if you installed a normal distribution Lotus Pic sw bin if you installed the fink distribution Metafile Multi page Movie PCD PDF Photo Raw PICT PSD QuickTime TIFF UNIX WMF XMP v Default Undo Cancel Co The UNIX formats XCF from Gimp FIG and SVG can be opened with helper programs If you install these additional programs with the Fink package the preset paths will be cor rect If you have installed the helper programs in a different location you can enter the paths here 411 Open WMF Preferences DICOM Open WMF ECW j i EPSF v Ignore black amp white outlines EXIF FITS Gener
120. E T A E E EEA EAS 209 Layout ccrto nata Aa e na Ova e Ea head a Neils A A EAE EE EEEa A 211 bistea ene u e E E A ape A E E T S ie ENR che EAS 214 Copy File into Resource ssssssseunsssseseserrressesrrrressrsrerrrrressrereree 215 Invert Black amp White GIFS vssissNsecaescasevedeodsbiaaswead e a ea e aa ea nah 215 Copy C t Past Clear neran cit a TE E E E ATA E AS OE A 216 Textinn Pictures iaire aai tiae eels ed ces A EAE A A E NE temas A A RNA 221 Painting with GraphicConverter 0 ccc c cece eee e nee n ence tence tent eenenee 224 WINDOWS Beterana entei eare a toy we haatadiot ee tudrededutanwead sate awe 234 Viewing amp Sorting The BrOWSEl perecer eeeri ted inaa eget nedddes aerial ental Sedu setud eaunntacesnadeeeevede 235 Pictures On youri Pod osisssa cas oed Ae etear ie hetew seus tank E 281 SWE SNOW Ginna wba Sow ts Oa ceo weet Sede hae se weak eve wee RIO Set Rinses 282 Find auplicatetilesc vavcieesty ott T a uue wl andere carne a shi AE one aed ele dole ees 299 Special Batch FUNCTION kesre oe SoeseieatdeveSareen ete seeebetasindeaestenaten ates eee ia 302 IPTC Document Information 0 ccc cece cence eee e nen ene eee en tent enennes 314 Geo Coordinates 2tecacrai ee tire ce ee ee ee ile Mads 322 Set or xport GPS datas eas ls Ss a A a e e Si a 324 DRIMaker instead of HDR 0 cece cece cece nen een een ene e eee ee eee nennenes 325 Recording Points for Determining Measurements e cece ce
121. EG pictures Data reduction is carried out again every time a JPEG picture is saved and the loss of quality is increased repeatedly Therefore all changes such as the basic settings for brightness should only be made in the master file This master file remains in TIFF format in all editing stages and versions while 70 you keep on saving new derivatives for your Web sites in JPEG format You should only open a JPEG picture to check its quality A JPEG picture should not be edited and saved If a picture is sent to you in JPEG format open it and then save it in TIFF format This kind of a file is the best possible master in this situation Minimizing GIF Pictures The file size can be decreased for GIF pictures by reducing the color table You can Optimize Colors under Options in the Save as dialog The color table is then reduced to the minimum without a loss of quality The optimum color table would be 128 colors for 91 used colors GIF Version 9 87a 89a Tip Transparency and Comments are only supported by GIF 89a Row Order A Normal Interlaced Colors Optimize Tip Creates smaller files r x It is possible to reduce the color table further using Picture Colors Change bit depth dynamically if a greater degree of quality can be sacrificed The picture quality is always reduced by this option It should therefore only be used if you want to reduce the file size greatly Try a low quality JPEG
122. Edit Batches WWW Ready Options Prefs Eject New Folder The files do not have to be listed one after the other in the dialog However you do need to select the filenames from top to bottom in the order that they will be played in the animation In the right hand part of the dialog select a target folder and set the desti nation format to GIF 190 Click Options to open the following dialog GIF Version Movie Options 87a Create Movie 89a Delay 0 000 s Tip had Behaviour after frame change No disposal Do not dispose Transparency and Comments are only supported by GIF 89a Row Order Orde _ Restore to background Normal _ Restore to previous J Interlaced User Input Color ordering of B amp W images A Transparenk 0 Mac OS O Windows Loop 0 l Endless A v Center small frames Optimize Tip Creates smaller files Select the Create Movie option and select a reasonable delay for picture switches This will apply to all pictures It is better to wait and set the other options for each individual picture later on You can however enable the Loop option at this stage as the banners should always run repeatedly and not just once Endless makes the animation run infini tely All other GIF format options are supported by GIF animations Close the dialog with OK Start the multiple conversion with Convert A single picture is now created from the selected or
123. F data This is useful if you want to keep the original EXIF data with thumbnail undocumented camera settings v Write JFIF header You can uncheck the options to save some bytes in the filesize J Store JFIF after EXIF Some old JPEG readers may require this option to see the EXIF data Special filesize options will overwrite quality setting from top Enable special filesize use carefully Y Resize to reach filesize 512 KB Y Reduce quality to reach filesize 512 KB Click Options under Save As to reactivate automatic display of the quality dialog Make sure that the target format is set to JPEG In the dialog that opens automatic dis play of the quality preview can be reactivated 357 The QuickTime Library or the JPEG Library can be used for JPEGs If the JPEG Library is used the Progressive option can be selected When Progressive is selected JPEG gra phics displayed in an Internet browser start off covering the total surface of the screen and gradually become sharper You should only select Lossless if you are sure that recipients of the picture can open this variant of the JPEG format because a large number of programs cannot open images in lossless JPEG format Save your pictures in TIFF format if you want to save without losses as almost all programs can open TIFF format In the Subsampling pop up menu you should select 4 4 4 if you want to avoid picture faults artifacts caused by the compression
124. GB in the RAM In this case GraphicConverter will inform you that the file is dis played so greatly reduced that the data will use the full available RAM 355 The higher the compression level is the lower the quality To find a satisfactory quality level a section of the graphic is displayed in the Options dialog as a before and after pic ture Try several quality levels using the slider If you can t move the slider it is because your computer is too slow In this case switch off Calculate File Size and Show Preview The quality slider can also the moved using the plus and minus keys Because the quality level is very important this dialog appears automatically when sa ving a JPEG unless this option is disabled in this dialog JPEG JFIF Quality Before low medium high Library O QuickTime JPEG 6 0 Progressive Subsampling 4 2 2 default B f Calculate File Size Original Size New Size The calculated file size is only Show Preview correct if you save the file without a resource fork o Show this dialog before saving lt JPEG files _ Resize to reach filesize 512 KB i write JFIF header _ Store JFIF after EXIF Embed if available M iPTC _ Comments I XMP A EXIF v ICC profile v Don t embed sRGB profile I EXIF Preview Note DCF compatible The EXIF Maker Note and User Comment may contain personal deta s like the g EXIF Maker Note owner name and serial number of the digital camera So m
125. Geo menu B The flight speed can be selected in the Preferences under Browser Context Menu Add or edit GPS values opens the following dialog where you can enter and edit the GPS values Pipette Latitude l0 0000 North x Longitude 0 0000 East B Cancel Eo Set or export GPS data UB only Not many cameras have a built in GPS receiver that allows your exact position to be writ ten to the EXIF data of the image file when you take a photograph There are additional devices for some camera models that can be connected to the camera and add this func tion GPS trackers provide a good alternative and are often no bigger than a USB stick They write your current position at a selectable time interval to a file without a connection to the camera At the end of a vacation you then transfer this file to the computer and apply the position data to the image files Select the image files in the browser and open the Geo menu Bi from the menu bar Select the GPX CSV or NMEA file using Open GPX NMEA file Show GPX NMEA data displays the data in a list so that you can check it Some GPS trackers write a new file in a folder every hour In this case open the folder with Ordner mit GPX NMEA Logs ffnen Use Apply GPX NMEA file to selected images to set the GPS data from the GPX file suitably for the selected images GraphicConverter sets the matching GPS data from the GPX file for the selected images A dialog opens allowing you to s
126. GraphicConverter after scanning and can be edited and saved If scanning via the TWAIN interface ever happens not to work use the corresponding scanner plug in or install the TWAIN software again Editing pictures is worthwhile even with good scanners Please refer to the chapters on sharpness brightness and contrast Note Older versions of GraphicConverter do not support TWAIN Please always use the latest version of GraphicConverter which you can download from www lemkesoft com 111 If you want to start the next scan procedure immediately after scanning in an image you can specify this in the preferences in the General Plug Ins section with Ask for scanning a new page after end of scan Digital Camera Display Content Display Windows Edit Memory Misc Monitor Plug ins Print Open Genera BMP DICOM ECW EPSF EXIF FITS GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page PCD General PDF Preferences 4 General Plug ins Settings Mac OS 8 5 to Mac OS 9 2 1 The plug ins are in the GraphicConverter subfolder in the Application Support folder in the System folder Mac OS X The general plug ins are under Library Application Support GraphicConverter The user plug ins are under Library Application Support GraphicConverter Acquire plug ins settings v Support Acquire again v Scan multipage documents into one document v Close TWAIN Source after end of scan v Support old Plug ins requires more
127. IF User Comment wa a lea E Lock Files Folders makes files and folders read only Select Unlock Files Folders to disable this option This does not affect Mac OS X rights A lock is shown above the pre view when documents and folders are protected 251 Change Type and or Creator opens a dialog where you can change the document type and creator Change Type and or Creator l Change type to JPEG Change creator to 77 Use values of first file Type and creator of first selected file JPEG GKON Cancel Enable the required option and enter the type or creator you want to set Clicking Use values of first file inserts the values shown below from the first selected file in the brow ser window in the boxes Reveal in Finder shows the selected files in the Finder Edit filename selects the filename of the selected file so that you can change it You can also click the filename to edit it or simply press Return Rename opens a dialog where you can rename files systematically see p 43 You can also open the rename dialog by selecting Edit Find compare replace rename Rena me selected Files If all or several graphics are selected at the same time you can deselect them by pres sing any button other than the control keys Command key etc View Item s in slide show launches a slide show of the selected graphics against a black background To exit the slide show click the square Stop button in the lower l
128. KON Use default creator inserts 4 question marks as the creator which is useful on Mac OS X if graphics are to be opened with the default graphic program by double cli cking If you select Use you can enter a creator in the input box that is then used when saving The files created are opened by the program assigned to the selected creator when dou ble clicked in the operating system Select Don t Set Type Creator File Name Extension only if you do not want to save a type and creator This prevents a ds store file being created The Finder may however create a ds store file for other reasons Save Saves as with original date leaves the file date unchanged This is useful if you need the original date to sort files 416 Delete original file after save as deletes the source file after the edited file has been saved with Save as using the same name but with a different extension The path for the new file can be freely selected Allow save for unmodified files is useful when for example you want to change the Creator to GraphicConverter with a save procedure Secure save on external disks always saves a file as a temporary file on the start volu me of your computer first and then copies it to the external drive whenever you save files to an external drive Use this option to avoid the problems that can occur when writing to remote network drives Hide Extension active with Mac OS X 10 1 or later hides the fi
129. MP2 files can only be displayed if you purchase the MP2 add on for QuickTime from www apple com MPO MRC mrSID Mac OS X only with a plug in you can download from http www lemkesoft com en plugins htm MSP 1 bit graphics from Microsoft Paint Windows 2 0 MSX MSX2 MSX MSX2 NAA IPTC NASA Raster Format with or without several frames of the Metafile NASA missions NEO Format of the Atari NeoChrome program Supports 320 x 200 pixels for16 colors NGG NCG Nokia cellphone format NIF NIST PCT Nokia pict Export via the logo format NOL Nokia cellphone format NV12 Format for single images of a Microsoft video format ODF Format for multipage documents ONCOR Supports 256 grayscale ORF 431 Format Import Export Comment OTA PAC STAD Black and white graphics with 640 x 400 pixels of the Atari STAD program Palette Color table Palm image Format of the Palm organizer stream stream PAM Open Source Format Paperport max Format of scanners with automatic feed PBM PGM Standard UNIX file format for easy exchange of PPM graphics Supports 1 8 or 24 bit per pixel The file can be coded as binary or ASCII PCD Kodak PhotoCD format PCX PC Paintbrush file format Supports 1 4 and 8 bit per pixel The new version also supports 24 bit per pixel PDB FireViewer Palm Pilot format In the UB version of GraphicConverter PDB FireViewer im
130. Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC w Default Undo Me J CCancel_ E Under Acquire plug ins settings you can select whether Acquire again is supported If this option is selected in your scanning software the scanning software is immediately relaunched after a picture is scanned Scan multipage documents into one document is useful for scanners with an auto matic paper feed The scanned images or documents are scanned into one multipage file Save this file as a TIFF GIF or PDF as only these formats support multipage images If you want to combine several pictures in a multi page image file open the Convert amp Modify dialog select the Convert option select the pictures in the left hand selection list select a destination folder and TIFF as the format Click Options and select the op tion Multi Page File in the dialog that opens Click Go to create the multi page file If you are having problems with TWAIN scanning select Close TWAIN Source after end of scan Enable Support old Plug Ins requires more memory if you want to use older plug ins that would otherwise not work Disable Ask TWAIN driver for color table if scanned images are displaying the wrong color tables 386 Select Invert 1 Bit TWAIN Images to display inverted 1 bit images via the TWAIN inter face after scanning Due to a bug in Mac OS X 10 5 the information which TWAIN Source was chosen cannot be saved Th
131. Multi page Photo Raw Preferences Open GIF Settings l Treat GIF animations with zero loops as ItsAGif v Enlarge animated GIFs with frames outside the image X Undo Default To open graphics that were saved with the ItsAGif program select Treat GIF anima tions with zero loops as ItsAGif Select Enlarge animated GIFs with frames outside the image to open graphics that would otherwise cause problems Open HPGL HPGL graphics contain lines as vectors whose thickness and color can be specified for when the file is opened There are eight Pens that can be used for creating eight different types of lines Enter the standard thickness you want and then select a standard color 397 Under Resolution Unit specify the resolution of the HPGL image The default unit is 0 25 mm If you select a coarser resolution the resulting image is smaller Pixmap allows you to select the resolution of the open graphic in ppi dpi Monitor Plug ins Print Open DICOM ECW EPSF EXIF FITS General GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page PCD PDF Photo Raw PICT PSD QuickTime a Preferences Open HPGL Settings Pen mm Color Resolution Default rotation 1 025 unit 0250 mm o 180 2 0 35 Ea Pixmap 102 Apri 0 ee 3 0 50 Ean HPGL 2 scaling C Use IP and SC 40 70 B ron ER x 5 100 B Geneva A Ply 0 6 1 20 Ea Scaling factor 1 00 ean th L P2x 9640 P2y
132. None H Default profiles will be used if the file doesn t contain a profile but requires one sRGB Select Change Orion Users hagenhen erter Profiles sRGB icc EXIF uncalibrated Select Change Orion Users hagenhen Adobe RGB 1998 icc RGB Select Change Orion Users hagenhen ed RGB Colors pace icc CMYK Select Change Orion Users hagenhen rter Profiles CMY K ice Ask if the image has no profile HA Conversion Priority Quick i The profile file takes the equipment used in the print shop into consideration and abo ve all the paper used You can obtain the profile file from your print shop Copy the pro file file into the folder User Library Application Support GraphicConverter Profiles The tilde stands for the name of the user 153 Separate the picture file with Picture Mode CMYK Color The selected profile file is attached to the image file The mode is displayed in brackets in the title bar of the picture window You can now save the file and use it in a program like QuarkXPress or InDesign or forward it to a print shop CMYK mode is only supported by the JPG JPEG2000 TIFF and Photoshop PSD formats The TIFF format with the extension tif just one f without LZW compression is used as the standard Separating is also available as an action For professional work you need to darken your work room and illuminate it with a stan dardized ceil
133. Not available SCANNER Scanner 272 Not available SCANNERMAKER Scanner Make 271 Not available SOFTWARE Software 305 Not available The numbers are the tag IDs in TIFF format A complete comment is always saved in the GIF JPEG and TGA formats The meta data may not be disabled in the format options that can be opened in the file selection dialog when you use Save As In addition the contents of the comments window are saved in the text section of the file resource if creation of the resource fork has been enabled in the preferences Further comments can be contained in the IPTC Documentation Information that you can open via the File menu see p 314 The Information palette displays all technical data for the picture You can quickly check the output size resolution color depth number of pictures contained for animati on memory requirements in RAM format document size on disk degree of compressi 61 on time for opening and comments such as information on compression for example LZW Information EXIF XMP Comment Size 4400x3300 pixel w Resolution 300 0x300 Oppi Colors 16 7 Mill Colors RGB 32 Bit Frames Memory File Format File Length Compression Req Time 55 4MB TEF R No corrpression Striped 1 Non Planar 41 5MB fet 0 45 You will find the EXIF information for pictures taken with digital cameras on the EXIF tab The EXIF information contains the exposure time as well
134. Open a source picture save it as a JPEG with a different name at medium quality for example and open the JPEG file created Now select Edit Find compare and replace Compare Pictures Compare Pictures Intensity of difference 1 00 Cancel oK Compare With DSCN1128 JPG 2272x1704 32 O DSCN1128 JPG 2272x1704 32 O DSCN1133 JPG 2272x1704 32 DSCN1133 JPG 2272x1704 32 All open pictures are listed in the lower section of the dialog Click the pictures to be compared The setting is automatically matched when only two pictures are opened The higher the value you select for Intensity of difference the clearer the differences are dis played Clicking OK creates a new picture where everything that is identical in both pic tures is displayed in black Differences are displayed with lighter colors You can also use this option as an effect filter It is best to assess the loss of quality by opening the normal view of the compressed pic ture and for example positioning it next to the opened source picture With GIF and PNG pictures we recommend deleting unnecessary colors from the color table to save memory space by selecting Picture Colors and then Minimize Color Ta ble see page 172 The file size of JPEG pictures does not decrease when you minimize the color table You should always create a master file of your picture in a format such as TIFF format that has not had data reduced when working with JP
135. Os 30 DAVE a CODY AS iia ie rie ara T EEE Gl a ARE SA Clea Oe AD aie ole Hare RSA ie are EAS 30 Convert amp Modify anasaini u ienei aaa as denen N a a a sedate 30 Work Environment sssssssssrrrsssssrererreesserrerressesrerrrreesrrrrererre 53 Internet Preparing Pictures for the Internet usssuusssenssernssresessrrssereserrses e 65 Saye for WC ih eS n a a E E OA EE ice al EENE A ES 69 Comparing PICCURES usitai ai an ee e bias tae ys E E ee ee a 70 Picturesin E Mails sssri reoi ina E E E E E a EE E E Se 71 Pictures in mobile PHONES ccc cece cence eee cent e teen eee eee een eenes 78 Slices oats cliaie er Medan siulea dena ese cull alia E NS E ona ea anal ei eee Mea 78 Optimizing Filenames for the Internet 0 ccc cee cece eee e teen e et een en eenee 80 Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog cece ccc ence cence ete e tent eneenees 80 Uploading and Downloading Documents cece eee e cen ec eet e ence eee eenees 90 On Paper Paper BON imasna ts sarc sh aa Rh NN A Le cee 92 Printing ean eaa Ses a late a el eid Bobi e tests poeta 92 Print Catalog eesis eaaa toons 15 Saas Han Aneel ie ney ho ago Ieee eae 95 Print Foldet oi 0tctenseteciescabahanudede ds ede howudeeceawectsnuuded wees T S 99 Cropping for Photo Prints 135 3 sae bse de fae seb ean oases ye euay oases anaes SA 99 Processing Pictures PretUre Size u sedan ayn NA S sawn oe awe ehG Mame A Baliga de sah ug nals le 103 Scanning with Graph
136. PICT PSD QuickTime TIFF WMF Save General Custom Icon Settings Slide Show General Effects Misc Move Folders n Move Folders2 w Default Undo Cancel OK GraphicConverter has its own initial routine for opening graphics If this doesn t work GraphicConverter calls up QuickTime for help because QuickTime can open many gra phic formats The graphic then opens normally in GraphicConverter once QuickTime has opened the graphic unseen in the background Because QuickTime sometimes crashes when trying to open faulty graphics files which then causes the entire Mac OS up to Ver sion 9 x to crash this option can be switched off Limit width prevents QuickTime from crashing when graphics are opened that are wi der than 4000 pixels known cause of crashes Use file settings reads the resolution from the image file The 72 dpi import is useful if you want to display a quick overview of the graphic s content without actually modifying the graphics Use allows you to select a resolution yourself for the pictures that are opened with QuickTime 409 Open TIFF Preferences JPEG Open TIFF Settings Lotus Pic 1 Metafile __ Ignore interpretation value Movie C Display content of unknown tags Multi page PCD Import 8 bits starting at bit fs from 16 bit grayscale files PDF Photo Raw PICT PSD QuickTime TIFF WMF Save Custom Icon General Settings Slide Show Effects General Misc Move Folders f
137. PTG ArtRage PWP Format of a developing service Pxx Degas Atari Degas program format 320 x 200 pixels 16 colors PI1 PC1 640 x 200 pixels 4 colors PI2 PC2 640 x 400 pixels 2 colors P13 PC3 QDV Giffer format Supports 1 4 and 8 bit per pixel QNT QTIF QuickTime graphic format QuickTime 3 or higher is required for opening these files 433 Format Import Export Comment QTL RAF e Can contain JPEG RAW e You can use the Raw filter to import raw data data types You must specify the width height and color depth when importing or saving There are many types of RAW files not documented by the manufacturers of digital cameras That is why GraphicConverter cannot open some RAW files Sony dsc f828 and bayer rggb are supported among others RIFF Format of the Painter program Contains color and black and white graphics RLA RLE e Utah Raster toolkits graphics RSB RTF e Rich Text Format RW2 SCR e Sinclair screenshots Please note that the file extension SCR is also used by the Capture Tool in Word for DOS SCR e e Graphics created by Capture Tools from Word for DOS This format is identical to the PCX format Please note that the file extension SCR is also used by Sinclair screenshots ScreenShot e Palm OS ScreenShots support for Handera and Hack PDB Sony CLIE V1 5 SCX ColoRIX format Supports 8 bit per pixel SFF Fax fo
138. Reset vi Full Screen Preview wi Small Preview Cancel OK The black point is at the left hand end of the diagram The white point is at the opposi te right hand end A purely black picture would have a maximum peak on the left hand side and would otherwise have a flat diagram You can use the Auto White Both Black to optimize the level of a picture that for example is too flat Automatic level adjust ments do not normally produce the required result Adjusting the Tolerance value allows you to suppress undesired noise faults If the results in the preview are not satisfactory you can undo all settings in this dialog by clicking Reset You can select a section of the picture for the Before and After win dows using the rectangle in the Picture window Move the selection rectangle with the mouse and zoom to an appropriate zoom level If you use the dialog frequently you can select the respective last value with the spacebar Select Apply to all frames if all pictures in a GIF animation should be optimized at the same time 160 If you are not an expert it is easier to correct a flat picture with the Picture Bright ness Contrast option see page 128 Increase the saturation and the contrast particu larly for flat colors Colors Mode and Colorize Summary Under Picture Colors you can change the color depth of a picture to save memory space convert color pictures into black and white pictures or to create
139. Select Effect gt Adjustments gt Blur Amount of embossing 1 least B y Filters Edge Detec Emboss General Co gt Sharpen gt Special Effects Load Save Cancel Ew Filters Edge Detection tries to find contrast edges and reduce the image to them The results are often too dark or totally black Filters General Convolution is the same as the user defined filter in GraphicConver ter Adjustments Alpha Gain We do not know what to use this filter for If you know please send a mail to hagen henke gmx de Adjustments Brightness and Contrast allows you to change the brightness and con trast This is faster using the Picture Brightness Contrast option however Adjustments ColorSync allows you to change the color profile Adjustments Balance HLS RGB allows you to correct the colors according to the respective model Special Effects Lens Flare adds reflections as caused by counter light in the lens if a lens hood is not fitted Set the angle by specifying from where and to where the reflec tion should go in the small preview picture on the right hand side You can also click the white area around the picture Special Effects Color Tint allows coloring with a sepia effect or with your own colors using Tint Type Other 182 Special Effects Color Style is in fact the popular solarization effect that has very inte resting results if you increase the brightness a
140. Sort documents by select Date and otherwise sort by Name It can take a long time to sort large folders by date such as the ones on graphic CDs The Sort folder separately option sorts folders in their own block instead of in a list of files Subfolders are included when Subfolders is enabled You can enter how many subfol ders to include in Depth 292 Select Show tool icons to show or hide the toolbar With move folders the first ten move folders that can be defined under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Prefe rences Slide Show Move Folder are displayed under the toolbar as icons Preferences Monitor ME Slideshow Move Folder Settings Plug ins iaa Set Folder shortcut 3 plus number Ey Open C1 Clear General f Correct amp Change lt _ Clear f P C3 Clear gt Formats A E Save C4 _ Clear General fe f Ss Custom icon Clear f Formats t6 Clear IPTC EXIF B _ Settings lt _ Clear Slide Show 8 Clear General Effects C9 _ Clear il fa ro 0 Clear Misc Move Folders Move files Move Folders 2 OC fil Move Folders 3 a CPyueS Convert Create alias amer eee Move files press option key to copy them Icon Preview Automatically rename if the file exists Index Misc Browser General Context Menu Display General _ ___ jad v6 Default Undo You can als
141. TC infor mation You can also select several pictures in the browser to set the keywords for all of them In this case drag the keywords onto one of the selected pictures The second column shows the sub keywords that were entered for the selected key word in the first column To add keywords to one of the columns click the plus sign at the bottom of the window You can delete the selected keyword with the minus sign You can rename a keyword by double clicking it GraphicConverter supports Unicode which means that you can use Asian fonts for example If you would prefer to use a double click to assign keywords you can specify this in the Browser Keywords section of the Preferences by selecting Double click on keywords applies the keyword to all selected item s Preferences Save al Browser Keywords Gi Eon icon v Double click on keywords applies the keyword to all selected item s Formats ae v Setting a keyword sets the group name as keyword too Settings v Setting a group sets the items too Slide Show General Change label of item s after setting a keyword Effects Mise Orange Move Folders 9 E Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time Icon Preview Index Misc Browser General Display Function Keywords Misc Open e er Preview v Default Undo Caneel 315 Enable Setting a keyword sets the group name as keyword too if you want to also autom
142. The example below displays 300x300 points which means that for smaller portrait pictures a border is added to the left and right so that they are 300 pixels wide For landscape pictures a border is added to the top and bottom so that they are 300 pixels high If pictures are not 300 pixels wide or high a border is added to all sides We recommend black as the background color for the slide show because it allows pictures to be seen most clearly Select Center for Width and Height Batch Possible Functions Batch Table Add delete margin s a Autolevel 0 Add Brightness Contrast Open bpd Open and Append Change Color Mode Save Continue y Delete All_ Cancel i Eo Bring to Size use batch function scale for normal resizing Width 300 Points Color gt Left Center Right za Height 300 Points Top 0 Center 3 Bottom This setting adds half of the border on the right and half on the left or half on the top and half on the bottom This batch function only modifies those pictures that are smaller than the target size you entered Smaller pictures can also be enlarged with the Scale function However we do not re commend this batch function as it results in very poor quality 2 All landscape pictures that are wider than 300 pixels should be reduced in size to this width All portrait pictures that are higher than 300 pixels should be reduced in size to 304 th
143. The fol lowing dialog opens Feathering Pixel so Add alpha channel Fill with background color Cancel E Select how wide the soft edge should be and leave the default setting Add alpha chan nel The value depends on the size of the image 50 is a good value for an image with 12 mega pixels aoe oa IMG 1573 jog RCE Aint e eo So that the background behind the edge can be seen in a print layout or on a website a transparent area is placed behind the edge Save pictures with soft feathered edges for 334 printing in a format like TIF that supports alpha channels You can also use the formats Photoshop PNG TGA BMP and PICT If you save pictures with feathered edges for the web you need to select PNG format which is supported by all current browsers Unfortunately the files are then considerably larger than JPG images If you also want to make the pictures compatible for older browsers select Fill with background color Instead of the transparency a soft edge running into the background color is now created You therefore need to determine the background color of the web site where the images are to appear beforehand If you cannot find the color code in the HTML code for the page you can also take a screenshot with Command Option 4 open the image in GraphicConverter and then determine the color with the pipette In the next step select this color as the background color in GraphicConverter before y
144. The high compression rate is achieved in JPEG images by saving one instead of four Y values for blocks of four pixels Use this opti on if you want to save an image with sharp edged subjects for example lettering in JPG format without serious picture faults The file size will increase however The settings 4 2 0 and 4 1 1 are mean values On slower computers it is particularly helpful to switch off Calculate File Size for larger graphics so that the before and after pictures can be displayed more quickly You can disable Write JFIF header to reduce the file size slightly more The JFIF header contains the resolution which is why you should only disable the JFIF header if this infor mation is not needed Enable Store JFIF after EXIF if you want to use images in a PHP environment where normal pictures are not recognized This option also ensures that all graphics transferred back to digital cameras can be displayed correctly Some models can otherwise not dis play graphics Embed if available inserts the IPTC document information the Comments the EXIF information and the ICC profile if this data is available in the image file and the option is enabled The sRGB profile is only embedded if you clear the check box If you leave ICC profile and Don t embed sRGB profile enabled the profile will never be embedded for sRGB images from digital cameras because it is sufficient when the color model informati on is included in the EXIF informat
145. User s Manual GraphicConverter 6 6 Programmed by Thorsten Lemke Manual by Hagen Henke Sales Lemke Software GmbH PF 6034 D 31215 Peine Tel 49 5171 72200 Fax 49 5171 72201 E mail support lemkesoft com In the PDF version of this manual you can click the page numbers in the contents and index to jump to that particular page 2001 2009 Elbsand Publishers Hagen Henke All rights reserved www elbsand de Sales Lemke Software GmbH PF 6034 D 31215 Peine www lemkesoft com This book including all parts is protected by copyright It may not be reproduced in any form outside of copyright laws without permission from the author This applies in parti cular to photocopying translation copying onto microfilm and storage and processing on electronic systems All due care was taken during the compilation of this book However errors cannot be completely ruled out The author and distributors therefore accept no responsibility for any program or documentation errors or their consequences This manual was written on a Mac using Adobe FrameMaker 6 Almost all software hardware and other products or company names mentioned in this manual are registered trademarks and should be respected as such The following list is not necessarily complete Apple the Apple logo and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc registered in the United States and other countries Mac and the Mac OS logo are trademarks of Apple Co
146. VD project As televisions normally have a brighter picture than computer monitors we recom mend darkening the images slightly with a batch before export We recommend also increasing the contrast slightly at the same time so that the pictures do not look flat disclabel is a program that helps you print inlays for a wide range of CD and DVD boxes You can also print blank CDs and DVDs disclabel provides numerous samples so that you can achieve interesting results with just a few mouse clicks You can download a demo from www smileonmymac com IPTC opens a dialog where you can select which fields should be saved with which separators in a single file or in several files JAlbum saves images and text files with the IPTC data for use in the program JAlbum that you can use to create Web catalogs Prepare for Picture Frame device allows you to optimise the size and aspect ratio of images for digital photo frames First select a target folder Then the following dialog 262 opens where you can enter the resolution of your photo frame You will find the resolu tion in the documentation for your photo frame or on the packaging Vorbereiten f r digitalen Fotorahmen Bitte geben Sie die physikalische Aufl sung in Pixeln ein Breite 1800 H he 600 Bitte w hlen Sie wie die Bilder beschnitten werden sollen Beschneiden Balken anf gen Vorschau Abbrechen K If your pictures have the aspect rati
147. Vertical joins the pictures together vertically i e one below the other For example with six source pictures you can set two pictures in each line resulting in three columns The first picture is the master picture and determines the size of the cells It is best to put pictures of the same size together If there are spaces left over they will be set to white The values for images per row and column must fit to the number of images chosen If you choose 10 rows and 5 columns for only 6 images a huge image is produced of which most is white GraphicConverter cannot create virtual reality panoramas in QuickTime format Use programs like DoubleTake from www http echoone com or the more professional PTMac from www kekus com Split splits large pictures into several small pictures see p 27 Convert text starts the text conversion that only works with ASCII texts and not for ex ample Word texts All text files selected in the source directory are converted using the converter selected under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences in the Con vert Convert Text section for example all CRs are replaced by CR and LF when conver 36 ting from Macintosh to MS DOS Special characters such as foreign characters are also converted Preferences gt Formats al Convert Text Conversion IPTC Settings Save General Source Destination Custom Icon 0 Macintosh O Macintosh ee Oms DOS MS Dos Settings O UNIX O UNIX Slide Sho
148. Web site you can check here whether the source picture in the clipboard has the correct resolution and if necessary set the target resolution to 72 dpi at the bottom left The Size and the Color depth or the Palette can be changed when you paste a picture from the clipboard 216 The current selection can be deleted with either Edit Clear or the Backspace or Delete keys The deleted picture parts are replaced with the current background color Professional Options for Copy Cut Paste and Clear There are further professional options available in the Copy Paste and Clear submenus Copy C Copy as HTML KHC Copy as HTML Options C Copy as X Face V XV Paste Paste at Position Paste centered Paste top centered Paste bottom centered Paste left centered Paste right centered Paste into Green Channel Clear EKE In addition to the normal Copy you can select Copy as HTML This option copies the HTML code required to add the picture to an Internet page to the clipboard This function is only useful if you program HTML pages by hand i e without a WYSIWYG editor that immediately shows the page as it will appear on the Web for example Dreamweaver from Macromedia Copy as HTML Options allows you to enter parameters for the HTML code created HTML IMG Tag Options Path Alignment Border HSpace VSpace T kal None 0 lo A f Cancel E 217 For the Path enter the relat
149. Write labels in XMP metadata Misc _ Write IPTC data into NEF files Open Preview a Sa vif Default Undo ee 9 Duplicate creates a duplicate of the selected file with Copy added to the name Set GPS from current Google Earth position adds the GPS data to the EXIF data of the selected image files see p 322 onwards Open GPX file allows you to set the GPS data from a GPX file for selected pictures see p 324 onwards Move to Folder opens a submenu listing all folders that have been defined as move fol ders for the slide show You can set these folders under Preferences Slide Show Move Folder You need to select at least one of these folders under Preferences Slide Show Move Folder for this option to appear in the context menu The following options are available in the Export submenu Crop for Photo Service opens a dialog where you can crop the selected pictures one after the other as with a specified aspect ratio Photo services use photo paper with an as pect ratio of 2 3 There is a separate chapter on this function Please see page 99 DCF compatible file system allows you to export to the memory card of a digital ca mera for example If your DVD player has slots for memory cards you can then show your 261 pictures on a television The export function automatically converts the pictures to JPG format and saves them in a compatible form E Mail file s as attachment lets you forward t
150. XIF information 62 Export 114 Eyedropper 233 F faxes 12 File Exchange 12 file format and compression rate 67 file selection dialog 19 File Translation 12 Fill Selection with foreground Color 148 fill tool 227 Filter Batch Function 310 Filter display files 20 Find and Replace 174 Find duplicate files 299 Finder Picture format 351 fixed tool windows 64 Floyd Steinberg 165 Folder Actions 274 foreground color 224 Format 24 frame 192 framing a picture 233 Full Screen 158 187 full screen 158 G Gamma Batch Function 310 Gamma Correction 195 General Memory 381 General Misc Settings 382 General Plug Ins 386 General Shortcuts 423 GIF format 353 GIF Transparent Batch Function 310 GIF98a transparency 155 GifBuilder 190 Global Color Table in Movie Options 192 GPS coordinates 323 GraphicConverter preferences 14 grayscale 161 Grayscale Batch Function 310 grayscale pictures 170 Grid 230 Grid Options 230 H Hide Alpha Mask Channel 208 Hide Preview 20 histogram 187 horizontal 175 HREF 79 HSpace 218 HSV model 230 HTML Basic 86 HTML Colors 231 HTML Meta 89 hue 134 l IBM formats 6 Icon Preview 47 iDVD 262 If Batch Function 302 310 IFF format 355 Ignore extensions Browser 274 Image Calculator 338 IMG format 355 Important Formats 343 Index Options in Storyboard 195 Information 61 Input Levels 160 Insert Row in Storyboard 195 Install TWAIN Support 7 Ins
151. XIF information is displayed GraphicConverter displays the text EXIF in the browser next to the preview Rotate image depending on EXIF orientation rotates pictures from digital cameras when a preview is opened and created if the camera has a position sensor and has recor ded whether the picture was taken in landscape or portrait format in the EXIF informati on Only very expensive cameras have an orientation sensor 395 Open FITS Preferences Edit Open FITS Settings Memory a Mise J Scale complete range Monitor Use probability for scale Plug ins z Print Min stan dev above mean Open Max 3 00 stan dev below mean DICOM ECW Use every 100 point for probability EPSF EXIF M Show dialog for manual range FITS General GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page PCD PDF a Default X Photo Raw T In this section you can specify the Scaling of grayscale data for an FITS file Scaling is ne cessary because the Macintosh can only display 256 8 bit grayscale An FITS file can con tain however between 8 and 64 bit grayscale information Use probability for scale ge nerally provides better results Show dialog for manual range will display a dialog for choosing the range when ope ning an FITS file 396 Open GIF Misc Monitor Plug ins Print Open DICOM ECW EPSF EXIF FITS General GIF HPGL JPEG Metafile Movie PCD PDF PICT PSD Lotus Pic
152. a good example for the use of AppleScript This type of folder is in the Fin der and an AppleScript is run as soon as one or more files are moved to it You can there fore use a hotfolder if you frequently have to convert images from different formats to a specific format for example JPG format Drag the source pictures to the hotfolder to con vert and place them in a destination folder The hotfolder can therefore be used like a droplet Droplets are small programs that are run when you drag files onto them First you need to create an AppleScript We have already prepared it for you Open the program ScriptEditor which is located in the Applications AppleScript folder Insert 419 the following text or download the script from our website and open it with the ScriptE ditor on adding folder items to this_folder after receiving these_items tell application GraphicConverter repeat with i from 1 to number of items in these_items set this_item to item i of these_items convert file this_item using batch Merlin my batch to folder Merlin destination end repeat end tell end adding folder items to On your desktop create one folder called Start Batch and another called Batch Desti nation Enter the path of the batch you want to use in place of Merlin my batch You can drag the batch file to the script from the Finder to insert the path but you will then need to replace the slashes with colons In our case Merlin is the
153. ace character between the date and the name You can select the date format in the box on the right For example if you do not want to add the time delete the HH NN SS characters in the date format box Charset Make filenames UNIX WWW Mac OS 8 9 compatible or Make filenames Windows compatible modifies the filenames so that they can be used under UNIX on the Internet under Mac OS 8 9 or Windows without any problems You can choose between only lowercase and lower and uppercase for UNIX WWW 45 Make filenames uppercase changes the filename to uppercase only Make filenames lowercase changes the filename to lowercase only Make first char of filenames upper case capitalizes the first letter of the filename and writes the rest in lowercase Make first char of each word uppercase capitalizes the first letter of each word in the filename Removal Remove Text removes the text entered in the input box from the selected filenames Remove char range at beginning deletes the fifth to seventh character of a filename if you enter 5 for X and 7 for Y for example Remove char range at end deletes the last and last but one character of a filename if you enter 0 for X and 1 for Y for example The file extension is not part of the name Extension In the same way Change Extension adds a new extension to the files as entered in the corresponding box Depending on image file format always takes the actual format of the file as the ex tensio
154. ad single images from your camera select Choose images to be downloaded from connected camera It may take a moment now as GraphicConver ter checks the images and creates larger previews A dialog opens in which you select the 116 images for download by command clicks A shift click will select all images from the se lected one up to the one you click Command A selects all pictures Options opens the dialog described above containing options for downloading Click Download to import the images Choose a folder in the opening file selector for the images to be loaded into After the download the images will be displayed in a new browser window Download some files from your digital camera Number of files 8 Preview Name Bytes Width x Height Date MG_3060 JPG 2429410 3072 x 2046 i ge ve IMG 3061 JPG 2383588 3072 x 2048 f Y _ i o IMG_3062 JPG 2473644 307 x 2048 f li IMG_3063 JPG 3048736 3072 x 20468 AB hee IMG_3065 JPG 3410326 3072 x 2048 Options Cancel Download Images from Folder allows you for example to select a folder on a hard drive whose content will be imported like the content of a memory card This is useful if for example you want to use your settings for renaming during import Trimming In most scanner programs the picture being scanned is displayed so poorly in preview mode that it is worthwhile making the selection rectangle for the area you want to scan sligh
155. age 227 Click a picture with the Zoom tool to switch to the next zoom level up When you hold down the Alt key you switch to the next zoom level down For more details see page 159 The Filled Rectangle Filled rounded Rectangle and Filled Circle tools allow you to draw the respectively shaped areas onto the picture in the foreground color For more de tails see page 227 or page 224 Rectangle Rounded Rectangle and Circle allow you to draw the respectively shaped frame in the picture Select the line thickness further down in the toolbox The fore ground color is used for the color For more details see page 227 or page 224 Click the Text tool to insert text in a picture First select zoom level 100 and double click the text tool Select a larger size of 36 points for the font You can enter greater va lues in the input box Click the image A text box is added and you can start entering the text As there is nor mally not enough space you will need to enlarge this text box by dragging it out at the corners with the mouse Finish editing in the text frame by clicking another tool in the toolbox You can then no longer modify the text For more details see page 221 If you click a picture with the Transparency tool the color of the pixel you click will be set to transparent Neighboring pixels with the same color will also be set to transparent For more details see page 154 The Stamp copies the content of an area that you Alt
156. ages and automatically de leted later on To avoid problems when the recipient wants to print pictures they will be automatically changed to a standard resolution of 72 dpi Other opens the context menu for the main section of the browser There is a separate context menu for the left section that opens with a Ctrl click In the lower left hand corner of the window frame there are a number of options available on a toolbar To save space the toolbar can be hidden under Preferences 244 Browser Display If you hold the mouse cursor over the icons the name of the option will appear in a small bubble 200x200 Sort Ey Nariel Sod liten 4 selected of 4 total items On the far left of the toolbar you can select the size of the small previews In this pop up menu you can also specify which details you want to display beneath the images Click Sort to select criteria such as Name creation date modification date and size for the middle section If you select By Label amp Name Creation Date the pictures will be sorted according to your label Sorting is carried out according to name Creation Da te among the pictures with the same label Also By Extension amp Name sorts the files ac cording to extension and according to name among the files with the same extension Select By Rating and Name if you have evaluated your images with 1 5 stars and want to sort them accordingly To switch the sort order from bottom to top click t
157. ages with type 2 compression cannot be imported and exported as no SDKs are available If necessary use the X version of GraphicConverter under Rosetta PDF Import and Export only in Carbon Version Mac OS X PDS3 IMQ files with MOC compression PEF RAW format of Pentax cameras PFM Open Source Format PGC PGF PGPF Sony Clie Format Photostudio Format used under Mac OS 9 Photo PDB JPEG PIC B W Atari file format 640x400 pixels PIC PC Paint file format PIC Psion format Supports 1 or 2 bit per pixel 432 Format Import Export Comment PIC 32K Black and white Atari format with 640 x 400 pixels PICS Animation PICT Standard Mac OS graphic format Contains vector and or bitmap graphics The PICT images created by Keynote are also recognized PICT resource PICT graphic that was read into or out of a resource fork PIX Modified BMP format used by some iPod games PM UNIX xv format PNG New file format for the Internet Supports 1 2 4 8 and 24 bit per pixel anda gamma value The Apple Touch Icon for bookmarks on the iPhone and iPod Touch is saved in PNG format PORST Photo on disk format Variation of the JPEG format PowerPoint Only the pictures contained are shown ina multiple page document Ppat PSD Photoshop format for Version 3 0 or higher Supports 1 8 16 and 24 bit per pixel PSF Can contain several JPGs PSP PaintShop Pro format
158. al GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page PCD PDF Photo Raw PICT PSD QuickTime TIFF WMF Save Default undo Custom Icon A If you select Ignore black amp white outlines no outlines are shown on for example po lygon surfaces when opened but instead the entire surface is filled This is necessary for faulty files You should enable Use Window Ext and Org tags if there are problems when you open WMF images Open Formats XMP see p 63 412 Save Custom Icon Preferences PIC al EASE a L E F exe eo vi Add black border General _ Icon with dog ear Custom Icon File Formats M Create standard icon suite icl8 icl4 ICN IPTC EXIF ns Settings v Create new icon suite icns for Mac OS 8 5 or later Slide Show v Add huge icons 48x48 pixel canera M Add thumbnail icon 128x128 pixel Files M Add larger icon 256x256 pixel for 10 4 x or later Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Comert Text PTC Errors Time kcon Preview Index Misc Browser General Context Menu Display General Display Thumbnails Function Keywords Misc Open Preview Mi Add very large icon 512x512 pixel for CoverFlow in 10 5 x or later l Ignore transparency rE Default Undo Add black border creates a black border around the icons that are displayed by the ope rating system Icon with dog ear creates a dog ear on the icon Create standard icon suite ensures that
159. al digits deletes all places in the index above the number specified under digits starting from the left Use this option to shorten extremely long indices like for example 00001234 Reset Index on Date Time Folder Change allows an index to be started over again when the date or time in the image files is changed The index numbering of files can also be carried out at the same time as a conversion Note the instructions from page 51 Name The Change Name option replaces the names of all files with the new text you enter in the adjacent box Don t forget to enable the option with the check box beforehand Sim ply writing the text in the box will not work If you want to insert the name of the parent folder in the filename enter amp parent in the respective box without the inverted commas Like in word processing programs Find and Replace allows you search for spaces and replace them with underscore characters to make the filenames suitable for use on the Internet Make first char of filenames uppercase changes the first letter of the filename to up percase Make first char of each word uppercase capitalizes the first letter of each word Date Add Date is often useful for photos taken with digital cameras Enter a date or use the Document Creation Date or the EXIF Date in the filename Select whether the date should be placed before or after the name or whether it should be added as an extensi on Add Space adds a sp
160. ams GraphicConverter therefore deletes this information when saving if the setting is left disabled If you receive files from a PC you should enable Windows to Mac under Open IPTC to display all special characters correctly in the IPTC information Preferences General a Beet eee Clipboard Digital Camera Text conversion Display Content Display Windows None Edit Windows to Mac Memory Misc Monitor _ Resource overwrites Datafork record Plug ins i Print Ask if double entries contain different data Open Overwrite automatically General Correct amp Change IPTC gt Formats ignore standard length limitation Save General Custom Icon Formats IPTC Settings Slide Show General Effects Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC yw Default Undo Cancel 0K O Never Overwrite If you receive image files in which the IPTC information was written incorrectly by other programs or also written in the resource instead of in the data fork you may not be able to display the version of the IPTC information that was updated the other editor In this case enable Resource overwrites Datafork record and open the file again If you enable Ask if double entries contain different data you will be informed about any double entries upon opening the file Select Overwrite automatically if you want to suppress the security query Never Overwrit
161. an load it with Open When you are creating pictures for the Internet you can select the color table with Use Netscape 216 Colors so that the pictures are displayed the exactly same in Netscape as in GraphicConverter The Use Windows 265 Colors or Use Palm 256 Colors options set the color table to the 256 colors of these systems We recommend using the Optimize Color Table option to avoid losing picture quality unnecessarily You have the choice of reserving colors Reserved colors cannot be deleted and can be useful for later picture processing as colors can still be changed Clicking Re serve Color at the Start sets the reserved colors at the start of the color table Dither is enabled by default because it optimizes the picture when the colors are reduced When the color depth is reduced an algorithm is used to determine the best color table and dither the colors Click Store to store the settings without applying them to the current picture Apply carries out the color reduction 173 Swap Colors Select Picture Colors and then Swap Colors from the submenu to call up a dialog for swapping colors This option is only useful for certain file formats Swap Colors Color 1 This field is empty because the color table is only available for pictures that use 256 colors or less colors np ee oe N KISS CEL format defines for example the color with index 0 as transparent In this case you can swap color 0 with your tran
162. an also contain vector information There are various options available when saving PICT Compression Standard RLE O QuickTime Misc E Dither C Spool Cancel If you select Standard RLE compression the graphic can be opened on any Macin tosh with Color QuickDraw There is no loss of quality when compressing If you select QuickTime compression you can set the quality and type of compression by clicking Options If the Dither option is enabled when you save a PICT the ditherCopy command is used The result is that the PICT is for example dithered in color in Word when displayed reduced in size The disadvantage is that it takes longer to open and display the PICT The Spool option is useful if you want to work with a very large PICT which can no lon ger be saved using the available space In this case don t try to generate the PICT com pletely in the memory with GraphicConverter For small PICTs the disadvantage of this option is that saving takes longer PICT format can contain ICC color profiles 363 PICT Resource Graphic Clip For this file format a PICT graphic is saved in the resource fork of the file The following options are available for the PICT resource format PICT resource clip Compression Standard RLE O QuickTime Document creator RSED Resource M Add Use original index Start at 128 Generate index from filename Name PICTs rsrc Misc Di
163. and tool to move the picture section if the image does not fit completely in the window Alternatively while you are working with a different tool you can hold down the spacebar to switch to the Hand tool 55 You can use the Lasso to select an object with an irregular shape for example a flower As soon as you release the mouse button a line is drawn from the current position to the starting position enclosing the selection For more details see page 146 Selection allows you to define a square selection If you need a specific aspect ratio you can select one at the bottom of the toolbox using the None pop up menu For more details see page 139 Elliptic Selection allows you to make an elliptic selection for example around the pu pil of an eye if want to use the Effect Red Eye option Holding down the shift key at the same time creates a circular selection For more details see page 139 The Magic Pen creates a selection that encloses all neighboring picture sections with the same color as the pixel you clicked The tolerance normally has to be set to a value around 60 as seemingly even color areas in photos also have different color values Dou ble click the magic pen to change the tolerance For more details see page 147 Polygon Selection allows you to copy a contour with a series of mouse clicks to create a selection Close the selection by clicking the first point or by pressing return regardless of the mouse cursor positi
164. ant to open a certain format for example all TIFF pictures in GraphicConverter even if the pictures were created with another program when you double click the files in the finder you can configure this using the information dialog in the finder Click a TIFF picture and press Command I to open the information dialog Click the triangle next to Open with Select the current version of GraphicConverter from the 21 pop up menu Click the Change All button to open TIFF pictures with GraphicConverter in future by double clicking 8 0 DSCN2067 tif Info Y General DSCN2067 tif Kind TIFF Document Size 7 9 MB on disk 8 303 832 bytes Where Hollywood Bilder img0045 JGs tif Created Mi 9 Okt 2002 9 19 Uhr Modified Mi 19 Mar 2003 15 15 Uhr Stationery Pad Locked gt Name amp Extension y Open with 9 GraphicConverter 4 6b3 i Use this application to open all documents like this gt Change All gt Preview Ownership amp Permissions gt Comments Repeat this procedure for each file format that you want to open with GraphicConverter by double clicking Simply click an image file with the corresponding format in the Finder and repeat the process This replaces the Preview program that would otherwise be star ted for pictures without a creator Classic Mac OS only If you want to open very large picture files that require 30 or 40 MB set the virtual memory of your comput
165. appears when a picture has a width that is not a multiple of 16 as a loss of quality will result when the picture is rotated Space bar toggles between label none and label 1 allows you to quickly select pic tures with the label orange You can disable Tab key toggles between lists if you would prefer to switch to the next picture with the Tab key Disable Cursor keys loop selection at list bounds if you do not want to jump from the last to the first picture in a browser 275 window with the Cursor right key and from the first to the last picture with the Cursor left key The Rating and Label pop up menu allows you to choose whether the keys 0 7 set the labels and Control 1 5 assign the rating stars or whether you want to assign stars with 1 5 and assign some of the labels with 6 9 A third option is to specify that files are moved or copied to the folders defined under Slide Show Move Folders with the keys 0 9 The same keys and shortcuts work during the slide show Return Enter opens a pop up menu where you can specify which option should be assigned to the Return and the Enter key When you select an image in the browser Enter or Return can either select the name for editing or open the document or folder Select Keep original file date after IPTC change if the document date should not be changed after IPTC information has been entered You should disable Write labels in XMP metadata if the labels do not have to be com patible with Ph
166. ard pictures just the information on which pictures are where in the storyboard Use this option to save your storyboards for editing later on You can open a previously saved storyboard with File Open Selecting Select an entry by clicking it You can select several entries by holding down the Shift key and then clicking them To select a group of consecutive entries hold down the Com mand key and click the first and then the last entry 194 Duplicating Filenames Click the bottom right of a cell and drag a frame open All cells inside the frame are given the document name Duplicating with the Keyboard Select one or more files with the mouse Now press the Command key and F2 to F10 The selected cells will be duplicated according to the number on the function key All other cells will be moved accordingly Further options are available in the context menu ctrl key and click Show all Items in Slideshow Save all Items as Save all Items in Source Format as Invert Direction Insert Row Delete Row Index Options Insert File Show all Items in slide show displays all entries from the first column in a slide show Save all Items as allows you to save all items from the first column possibly with a new name from the index option in the required location and in the required format Save all Items in Source Format as allows you to save all items from the first column in the required locat
167. are described with mathematical formulas These mathematical formulas are vectors When enlarged the graphics are recalculated using the formulas and always appear in best possible quality with sharp edges when displayed on screen or printed Logos tech nical drawings and comics are prime examples of these kind of graphics You can vectorize black and white pictures in GraphicConverter using Special Vecto rize The file selection dialog opens where you can enter a name for the new file Vecto rization starts after you click OK This may take some time GraphicConverter s vectoriza tion function is not sufficient to meet top requirements particularly with problematic pictures We recommend a program like Adobe Streamline for professional work You can either save vectorized pictures in PICT format or in HPGL format When you se lect the Vectorize option GraphicConverter automatically opens the file selection dialog where you cannot select the format Enter the name for the picture file and click Save A dialog where you can select the format then opens Vectorize Format PICT O HPGL I ae Cancel Vectorization only starts after you select the format This may take a while If the picture is very complex close other programs or other pictures beforehand Vector pictures can only be opened with GraphicConverter with loss of vector informa tion The source picture is only displayed after vectorization If the vector informat
168. arent should also apply to the subsequent move process or sub sequent paste of a picture part Save to Preferences needs to be enabled If the current background color is to be the transparent color click Set Back Color In the following example picture the Z against the white background was created in a separate picture The whole picture content was selected with Command A and copied 142 with Command c In the target picture with the bridge the clipboard contents have been pasted with Command V and placed in the top left hand corner The Copy Selection Transparent option was disabled this time Ho m u fia The selection was cleared with the Escape key esc The Copy Selection Transparent option was enabled again and the Z pasted from the clipboard again White was se lected as the transparent color With this setting the white background of the letter Z turns transparent and our example you can see the blue sky around the Z As long as a moved selection is not yet placed at its destination this effect can still be enabled or disabled using Copy Selection Transparent Only the Copy Selection Trans parent setting is decisive when you insert part of a picture from another picture If you want the insert also to be transparent so you can position it accurately with the cursor keys you need to enable the Copy with other Opacity option in the selection tool dialog and enter a value around 50 143
169. as the time and date when the picture was taken It also indicates whether a flash was used in addition to other de tails Information Image EXIFS XMP Make Model Software File date and time Exposure time F number Exposure program ISO speed rating Exif version Date and time of original data generation Date and time of digital data generation Meaning of each component Image compression mode Exposure bias Maximum lens aperture Metering mode Light source Flash Lens focal length User comments Supported Flashpix version Color Space Yalid image width in pixel alid image height in pixel File source Scene type Custom image processing Exposure method White balance Comment 5 NIKON E4500 E4500 1 1 2003 08 31 18 48 16 10 2249 s 6 2 Normal program 100 0220 2003 08 31 18 48 16 2003 08 31 18 48 16 YCbCr 3 0 0 0 2 8 APEX F2 6 Pattern unknown Flash did not fire compulsory flash mode 30 0 mm 125 bytes 0100 sRGB 2272 1704 reserved reserved Normal process Auto exposure Auto white balance 4 GraphicConverter displays any information that can be found in the Comments tab if a manufacturer does not adhere to the standard for EXIF information The EXIF information can be copied to the clipboard with Copy EXIF as Text in the Edit Copy submenu see p 219 On the EXIFTool tab the EXIF data is displayed in the same way as it is exp
170. as will not be written in the new file Click OK and Save in the file selection dialog to save the trimmed JPG file without losses 145 Double clicking this tool opens the dialog with the options for lossless trimming Lossless JPEG selection cropping Left Width Top Height Type Width amp Height O Type Right amp Bottom Note The entered values will be rounded toa value divideable by 8 upon clicking on OK Cancel 0K Instead of dragging open a selection with the mouse you can enter the size and positi on directly here The values you enter will be rounded up to values that are divisible by 8 Lasso If for example a person s face is only partly in the sun this area will almost always be too light If you do not have another photo you can make things easier by clicking the Lasso at the top left of the toolbox you may need to select Window Show Toolbox first and drawing around the area while holding down the mouse button Only closed shapes can be defined with the lasso If you release the mouse button before you have returned to the starting point a straight line will be drawn to the starting point This effect can be used whenever you do need a straight line You ll need a steady hand for work with the lasso Small deviations in the surrounding dark area can be tolerated Now use Picture Brightness Contrast to darken the area of the picture which is too light see page 128 It is a lot easie
171. at the same time Simple text conversions Mac lt gt PC are also possible Batch actions such as changing the resolution to 72 dpi that are run on all pictures in a directory can also be defined using Edit Batches in the Convert dialog see page 282 Enable Use Batches to use the Batches WWW Ready saves the files without a resource This is useful if they are to be published on the Web If you need to convert a number of pictures at the same time the File menu contains a useful option called Convert that saves you having to open and save each picture indi vidually Select one or more files or a folder whose content should be converted by cli cking in the list on the left hand side of the Convert dialog Files in subfolders are also 30 converted You can use the shortcuts Command D and Shift Command H to go to the Desktop or your Home directory 8 eo Convert amp Modify Function Convert B Go amp jJacobsthal B gt Goal Folder Ls 4 D DSCN5330 jpg D DSCN5331 jpg D DSCN5333 jpg D DSCN5334 jpg D DSCN5337 jpg D DSCN5338 jpg D DSCN5339 jpg D DSCN5340 jpg D DSCN5342 jpg D DSCN5343 jpg D DSCN5344 jpg D DSCN5346 jpg D DSCN5347 jpg D DSCN5348 jpg D DSCN5350 jpg D DSCN5353 jpg D DSCN5356 jpg D DSCN5358 jpg D DSCN5359 jpg D DSCN5361 jpg D DSCN5362 jpg D DSCN5363 jpg D DSCN5365 jpg Filter All available ww Dest Format TIFF TIF T _ Use Batches Edit Batches
172. atically set the parent keyword from the first column when you assign a keyword from the second column Select Change label of item s after setting a keyword to display which pictures have not yet been assigned a keyword when indexing All indexed pictures will then appear with a label that you can select from the pop up menu It may also be worthwhile selec ting the label as a sort method so that the pictures that have not yet been indexed are displayed together at the top of the browser You can refresh the sort with Resort from the context menu In the Preferences you can select automatic sorting every x seconds in the Browser General section In the bottom frame of the pallet you can save and open the keyword list as a text file using the two diskette icons If you want to search for pictures with a specific keyword select the folder to be sear ched in the browser Subfolders are also searched Click the required keyword and the magnifying glass at the bottom of the pallet frame In the browser all pictures found will be displayed in a separate window with the title Search Results If you have received pictures from other users and do not know the keywords used you can use the search dialog that you can open from a browser with Command F or Edit Find compare and replace Find Files You can easily display the keywords used with the IPTC pallet by placing the mouse cursor over the pictures without clicking You can open the IPTC
173. ave 123 JPEGs in TIFF format after editing and then only edit that file If necessary you should only create a JPEG version once you have finished editing the file Two further options are available for pictures with 16 7 million colors when you rotate using Other Value Error Correction and Add Alpha Channel The Error Correction op tion should always be selected because each pixel is calculated on the basis of the exact color content of the source pixel This improves the picture quality especially around the edges The Add Alpha Channel option can be used to create an additional alpha channel This contains just the picture without the white borders that were added during rotation as a kind of template Once an alpha channel has been created you cannot create ano ther one GraphicConverter updates the alpha channel after any further rotate processes An alpha channel is a further invisible level of the picture containing information on picture areas and outlines In professional DTP programs such as QuarkXPress 4 or InDesign 1 5 this alpha channel can also be used to hide the white borders Unsharp Mask and Sharpen Edges If you are using a budget scanner or unfocused pictures it is always necessary to sharpen the scanned pictures In the Effect menu GraphicConverter has the Unsharp Mask and Sharpen Edges options The Sharpen Edges option has been available in GraphicCon verter for a long time and results in slightly more defined
174. aybe you want to remove this information before giving away a photo I EXIF User Comment Cancel E Special filesize use carefully O Reduce quality to reach filesize 512 KB 356 The dialog looks different in the UB version of GraphicConverter Click the black triangle to display and hide the options further down JPEG JFIF Quality Before After 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 low medium high Library O QuickTime JPEG 6 0 Progressive Subsampling 4 2 2 default E3 C Calculate File Size Original Size New Size The calculated file size is only correct if you save Mw Show Preview the file without a resource fork i e custom icon Embed metadata if available M PTC Comments M xmp F EXIF v ICC profile vV Don t embed sRGB profile v l Show this dialog before saving JPEG files 0K EXIF options C Store EXIF preview 200x200 pixel l Store preview DCF compatible will reduce preview to 160x120 C Store EXIF maker note l Store EXIF user comment The EXIF Maker Note and User Comment may contain personal details like the owner name and serial number of the digital camera So maybe you want to remove this information before giving away a photo l Store EXIF date after EXIF directory Some old EXIF readers may need this to see the EXIF data C Store EXIF with original width and height This is useful if you want to get the full size values for reduced thumbnails l Store original unmodified EXI
175. ayed and hidden via the Window menu This is very useful on systems with two monitors The preview window can be sized using the bottom right hand corner If you display the preview window on a second monitor you can maximize the preview window using the context menu so that it fills the whole screen The title bar will no lon ger be visible Open the context menu by Ctrl clicking the preview window and selecting Palettes Window Fullscreen preview window on second screen To return to the 245 normal preview window select Zoom preview window to normal state from the same submenu The icon with the arrow displays and hides the drop area to which you can drag pictures from different folders to show them as a slide show or to rename them The pictures are labeled with a number in the red circle so you can see which pictures you have already se lected The images in the drop area can be sorted again with the mouse Selected images can be removed from the drop area using the context menu or Backspace All options which can be selected for the pictures in the drop area need to be selected from the context menu in the drop area The slide show is available in addition to rename 09e L Beyonce Users hagenhenke Pictures 2004 06 Juni 19 19 j fom io p Aktion Keine Aktion C Sta oH wee oee g tenean i 3 ffnen Links Rechts Diaschau Drucken Katalog E Mail Weiteres Format _ PICT PICT iH Op eh Loki bd D cha
176. ayed too fast for a few seconds after GraphicConverter has been in the background After this the animation will run again at the correct speed Storyboard Storyboard in the File New submenu opens a window where you can sort files from an animation for example and then save them as a movie or GIF animation with a new in dex Pick out files in the Storyboard dialog using the drag and drop technique Drag files from the operating system to the required position in the storyboard or move the files in the storyboard around with the mouse Under Classic Mac OS if the operating system file window is not displayed while GraphicConverter is running you need to enable the Show Desktop when in background option in the General Controls control panel 6 69 Storyboard 1 zehnpunkt Banner a1 zehnpunkt Banner BT 0 zehnpunkt Barner C1 zehnpunkt Banner DI zehnpunkt Banner ET el To save the inserted files as a GIF animation or movie press the Control key and click one of the entries A context menu opens where you can save the inserted files as a GIF animation or movie with the Save all Items as option In the dialog that opens select GIF for a GIF animation and click Options to enable Create Movie If necessary enable Loop so the animation is repeated and enter the required number of times Endless makes the movie run infinitely To save the storyboard list select File Save The file created does not contain the sto rybo
177. aying and editing GIF animations 191 Plug in Batch Function 311 plug in filters 197 plug ins 109 Plug Ins Preferences 386 PNG transparency 155 PNG format 364 Position 54 position of tool windows 64 preference file 13 14 Preferences 371 Prefs 33 preparing pictures for the Internet 65 preview enlarged in the browser 247 Preview Create automatically 267 Print Preferences 388 Print Catalog 92 95 Print Folder 99 Print Mark in Layout dialog 214 Priority 218 Problems with Opening and Converting Files 343 Professional Options for Copy Cut Paste and Clear 217 protan color blindness 341 PSD Photoshop format 365 Put Picture on Desktop 188 Q Quit 421 R Radius median filter 186 Random Matrix 169 Rating 251 RAW 406 RAW format 366 rectangles 227 registration 13 Remove Alpha Channel 207 Remove batch actions after quit 34 Remove Picture from layout 212 removing red eyes 149 Rename 252 Rename several files 43 Replace Color 174 replacing a color 174 Reserve Color at the Start 173 Reset Median dialog settings 186 Resize window after scale zoom 64 resolution 104 Resolution Batch Function 312 Reveal in Finder 252 Revert 152 RGB 152 RGB Colors 231 Rotate a picture 119 Rotate Batch Function 312 Ruler 65 ruler 23 S saturation 129 134 Saturation HSV model 200 Save Custom Icon Preferences 413 Save General Preferences 414 Save Settings Preferences
178. batch has been selected in the top sec tion of the pop up menu and also opens the dialog for the batches All changes are saved immediately once you close the dialog with OK If only the format of the selected pictures should be changed during conversion select No Batch at the top of the pop up menu Remember to switch back to No Batch after using a batch so that you do not accidentally run a batch when converting files The two pop up menus feature almost all of the options from the Convert amp Modify di alog The basic advantage of working with the browser window is that it is easier to select individual images for a batch or conversion from a large number of files and you can al ways see the images in a preview Under Mac OS X 10 4 Tiger you can start a spotlight search with the search box Enter a search term to display all pictures containing the keyword The browser can also display movies and play the selected movie in the right hand sec tion Four images from each film are shown in a preview in the center of the browser to 241 give you a quick overview of the content of the movie This is particularly helpful for mo vies that start with a black picture SKORS Orton Users hagenhenke Documents Websites Elbsand com lorenzkirch videos Lorenzkirch O afinn Batch No Batch Go Cm a amp Rack Forward Sideshow Print Catalog E Mail Make Preview Other Format TIFF TIF TIFF Options D T Orartosi_ u
179. be entered as the color model in the EXIF information by most cameras as the Adobe RGB EXIF standard is not supported If however Adobe RGB was entered as the color model in the EXIF information by another program such as the software that came with your camera this is not standard and GraphicConverter will treat it as if Uncalibrated was entered In order to display pictures with Adobe RGB correctly select File Edit Color Profile from the menu In the dialog that opens click the button next to EXIF uncalibrated and select the Adobe RGB profile If you work with the basic setting Ask if the image has no profile select the Adobe RGB profile from the pop up menu in the dialog that opens If you use a different color model to process pictures with Uncalibrated entered as the color model in the EXIF information you need to select the corresponding profile Printers and Scanners Select the printer or output device from the Printer pop up menu If your printer prints the green hues too weakly they will be amplified by the profile When you install the soft ware for your printer the profile will also be installed automatically and be available in the Printer pop up menu If you are using a modern professional scanner you should create a separate profile and assign it to the scanned images via this dialog You need to scan a special color sample template for this and calculate a profile with a special program The supplied scanner pro files
180. black and white with mask for the se lected status with 16 colors with 256 colors and in True Color And finally the whole image must exist in the new standard and in two old standards and for each of these se veral times in different sizes 16x16 32x32 48x48 and 128x128 pixels for example for the dock in Mac OS X For the preview you can select if it should be displayed as Full size if it should be crea ted with QuickTime or if it should have a fixed Size A fixed size always describes a square which provides the width for landscape pictures and the height for portrait pictures 414 which is why the width is the same as the height The maximum preview size when using QuickTime is 80x80 pixels The preview has a color depth of 16 bit 327668 colors If you are creating graphics exclusively for the Web in one step or for other reasons you have to create the smallest possible files you can disable the option which saves the re source fork This is also possible in the file selection dialog if you are using the Navigation Services from Mac OS 8 5 or higher A preview takes up a lot of RAM and can as a result be created with the option Com press as JPEG This has however the disadvantage that graphics with this type of pre view can only be displayed gradually in the browser because the preview must first be decompressed It takes an unusually long time even on fast computers We recommend clearing this option The quality le
181. box where tools colors and patterns can be selected TB Pointer Hand T Lasso Fa Selection Elliptic Selection Magic Pen Polygon Selection Lossless JPEG cropping Eraser Pen Eyedropper Fill Line Zoom Filled Rectangle Rectangle Filled rounded Rectangle Rounded Rectangle CeBEYNVYKO SHAOOD PeKGL Filled Circle Circle Text AV Transparency Stamp ee Calliper rule Smudge ry Slice RedEye White Point Pen Size Fill Pattern Switch to black and white Foreground and background color Copy Mode i a Swap foreground and background color Aspect ratio for selection Image All the other palettes can be shown and hidden with the Tab key The small red triangle at the bottom left of most of the tools indicates that you can double click the tool to open a dialog with settings These dialogs are explained in the chapters referred to at the end of most of the following paragraphs You can switch between the individual tools using the keyboard For example pressing V selects the transparency tool You can disable this option in the Preferences under Ge neral Edit You can check which letter is assigned to which tool in the tips that appear if you hold the mouse cursor over a tool fora moment providing you have enabled this op tion in the Help menu The Pointer serves for pinpointing picture features during presentations and for shif ting selected contents in layers see page 223 Select the H
182. browser under the file tree Back to the context menu GraphicConverter makes the same basic functions of the GraphicConverter available as in the context menu of the Finder Automator allows you to create or call up a work procedure in Automator see p 421 on wards Disable Folder Actions and Configure Folder Actions are added to the context menu by the MacOS and are a predecessor of Automator technology Instead of the folder ac tions it is better to use Automator as a wider range of functions are available see p 421 onwards Back to the browser window Command F or Edit Find compare and replace Find Files allows you to open a find dialog that allows you to search the metadata The current browser window is searched Enable Search sub folders to also search the subfolders Ignore Resource Forks should always be enabled as it speeds up the search You should also disable Ignore invisible files since invisible files do not normally contain relevant information for the search Show results in a new browser opens a new window with the search results Browser Find Files Search subfolders Cancel Find wv Ignore Resource Forks speeds up the search 7 Ignore invisible files wv Show results in a new browser Include extension in filename search Match if any critera are met Y Match if all critera are met Find all files starting from the current folder that match the following criteria s Filename r contains HH t
183. by sen ding us information and bug reports 15 We prefer e mails as a support medium because of the time factor Thorsten Lemke and Lemke Software GmbH accept no liability for damages and conse quential damages hardware loss of data etc resulting from the use of the GraphicCon verter program This Manual The best way to work with the PDF version of this manual is if you display the file with the Apple Preview software under Mac OS X A search box is then provided in the drawer on the right hand edge of the window allowing you to quickly search for terms that are not listed in the index Click one of the hits to access the corresponding page The search term appears on the page with a colored background You will find Preview in the pro gram folder In the PDF version of this manual you can click the page numbers in the index and the contents as well as any cross references to jump to the corresponding page We have organized this manual so that you can read it from start to finish and get to know GraphicConverter and its capabilities We have put conversion and important to pics like the Internet at the start after Installation and Support Chapters on the functions that are most frequently needed follow Scanning a picture sharpening optimizing brightness and contrast etc Please use the extensive index on the last pages to find spe cific sections You can use the contents to reach a specific page by clicking the page num
184. cal contrast enhancement htm 127 Brightness and Contrast The brightness and contrast need to be adjusted for almost every picture Select Picture Brightness Contrast to open a dialog where you can quickly access these functions Brightness Contrast Picture Before After il Zoom Brightness red Contrast red Hue red Brightness green Contrast green Hue green Brightness blue Contrast blue Hue blue Saturation aa wi Link Sliders v Show details M Full Screen Preview C Reset Cancel Eo Unless you want to correct individual colors select the Link Sliders option This links each set of three sliders for brightness contrast and hue When you move one of them the other two will move as well In this way you can adjust the brightness of all three pri mary colors at the same time A reduced version of the dialog is available under Picture Simple Brightness Con trast for use with small monitors You can also fine tune the sliders in other dialogs using the left and right arrow keys once you position the mouse cursor somewhere over the slider Simple Brightness Contrast Brightness Contrast Saturation M Fullscreen preview Reset 9 Cancel Co With dark pictures you could try increasing the brightness by about 7 30 for examp le and select higher or lower values if necessary Your eye is the best judge Make sure however that the picture does not lose its basic characte
185. cally a dialog opens where you enter the values Z04 Z08 Z16 e z3d format Z24 Z32 New features in GraphicConverter 5 8 2 Label support within XMP metadata added so that labels are also displayed correctly in Adobe Bridge see p 250 Optional color profile selection dialog when opening images without profile see p 135 onwards Sorting into date folders added to browser context menu see p 260 Option for converting XMP metadata into an ANPA resource added to Convert dialog Photoshop CS2 only writes the IPTC data in the XMP section However other programs need the IPTC data in the ANPA resource that is the standard section for IPTC data see p 48 Option for deleting RAWs for which there is no JPG added to Convert dialog Delete source raw file if no jpg exists in dest folder see p 49 Improvements Option click support added to scroll box in browser Press the Option key and click the scroll box to jump straight to a point The label is kept upon saving In older versions the label was deleted when you saved a file again Text for document name batch function improved The text that is added to the filename can now either be placed before or after the name The maximum number of large previews can be defined in the range 1 10 in the settings Preferences Browser Display General Many other improvements and corrections 437 New features in GraphicConverter 5 9 Color profiles from PNG files are s
186. cally appears around the picture window Fixed positions sets the palettes to a fixed position Auto arrange opens the picture window in a logical layout Open only one window keeps the desktop tidy as only one picture window can be opened Show path in title displays the complete path of the picture in the title Show tool tips displays the names of the tools in a yellow bubble when you hold the mouse cursor over the tool for a mo ment Show additional information in bottom of window displays the mouse position co ordinates the red green and blue color values and the format 64 Show rulers displays rulers on the left hand side and at the top of the image windows The unit can be changed from pixels to cm for example on the Image tab in the Infor mation palette using the pop up menu for size Metal Look activates the metal look as used in programs like iTunes and iMovie Internet The following section looks at formats file sizes and filenames for pictures that are to be published on the Internet Sending pictures can often be problematic We will therefore cover this in a separate chapter entitled Tips for Sending with Different E mail Programs Preparing Pictures for the Internet When preparing pictures for the Internet you need to select the appropriate picture for mat minimize the file size and optimize the filename Selecting the Appropriate Picture Format Only pictures in PNG GIF LWF and JPEG formats are used on
187. can double click the function This batch function now appears in the right selection window You can delete it again by pressing Delete Once you select a function in the right selection window the corresponding settings are displayed in the lower section of the dialog The actions can be moved in the selection window to change their order To reuse a batch function at a later time click Save and Open You can add saved ac tions from the current action list with Open and Append In addition to batch functions that actually change the picture there are also functions that create conditions You can add an If which means that the function that follows is only performed if this condition is fulfilled for example that a picture has a specific color 302 depth width height or is a portrait or landscape picture There can be several batch func tions defined for the pictures that fulfill the condition Continue should always come af ter these batch functions The Else option allows you to specify what happens to pictures that do not fulfill this condition Cancel cancels a batch function which is useful when the condition does not apply to a picture Batches remain activated until they are deleted If you quit and then relaunch Graphic Converter any defined batches are still activated If you have defined and saved a batch you can send us an e mail which describes the function it performs We publish batches that could be useful
188. can with GraphicConverter via the TWAIN interface please note the in stallation instructions in the Installing TWAIN section If you want to receive faxes with an e mail program or the AOL software please note the installation instructions in the section Receiving Faxes under Classic Mac OS Installing TWAIN Classic Mac OS If you want to use the PPC version of GraphicConverter under Classic Mac OS to scan via the TWAIN interface you will need to take the following installation steps Open the TWAIN Support folder and start the Install TWAIN Support 1 7 or ne wer installation program The mouse cursor will not turn into the animated watch cursor during installation A dialog informs you that installation has been successfully comple ted Now restart your Macintosh to enable the system extension and start GraphicConverter To scan via the TWAIN interface with Acquire Import a TWAIN module needs to be in stalled with your scanner software Please note the instructions from page 108 If you are using the Carbon version of GraphicConverter under Classic Mac OS the ins tructions in the following paragraph apply to Mac OS X Mac OS X The TWAIN driver is integrated in GraphicConverter Simply install the TWAIN module for your scanner software see page 108 which you open in GraphicConverter via File Acquire If there is not a TWAIN module for your scanner you can try to use the TWAIN SANE Interface for MacOS X that can be downloaded
189. ce tence neeeeee 326 Viewing or Exporting iPhoto IMageS cece cece eee ence teen e eee ene ennenee 328 Apple Touch Icon for iPhone and iPod Touch ccc cece nent cece e tent eneenees 327 Using GraphicConverter as an external editor for iPHOtO cece cece e eee 328 External Editors sose roeas tunami nates dh pak seu eeerabunae eee oko aba EEE as EaR 328 Center Brightness Correction s 5 05 4cco4 ahs dese eas deve onde d deeie abe 0 MN Fae RAG ASS 331 Ed e s Aric Rae vss 5 45 55 is eee sd OE OE SS 333 RODE Ati aus2 ou aoe n ene ease ieee eather eo erties Nia e tularemia ees Moving Picture CONTENT 2 23 ec lt 0i0s dessa cise wwes adie dcaaweet decas decueadedusen ds 336 Merge all Frames in new WindOW cc cece cece e nen e nee e ence tenn ennens 337 Combining Pictures s lt c 4 6 nccsaea oak ndwasie cams Ba i EEn a EN VEEE gs ain aa 338 Image Calculator a54s0c2ss0sasudansaeees Savekesds becas ues eetensaaseoubasdgasabaese 338 Video Monitor 22x cecal Rat Ae a ee i ee ee ee ee ees 339 Remove bad Pixels cfs eie ea ced eis esd Cae Oa ee ERIA 341 COlOPBIMGHESS a hice pte es caer R E RE E E aphid ode 8 ia as ty 341 Color WsaGe phox cu ts anaes deh be ensaedded eae tontedie a a a a a dase eels wedlents 342 Listfroni STRE RESOUICE 3 55 sisasoseg en bhay E PeV hua EAR E IN ST soos ASTER 342 Important Formats poesii eye aia woes oa vies weet oO wei SOS Set Rigen 343 Prefere NCES 45 2200 Mancina ei E EE ale hceee hic
190. ces Browser Misc If files from the iPhoto folder are found a warning message will appear 301 If you have difficulties reading the small font you may want to enlarge this area of the screen To do this open the System Preferences via the Apple menu and click Universal Access Then click Seeing Select the On button under Zoom When zoom is turned on you use keyboard shortcuts to enlarge and reduce the screen image Command Option equal makes the screen image appear larger zooms in Command Option hyphen makes the screen image appear smaller zooms out You can use this for any part of the screen in all programs Special In this section options are described that are only used in special work situations In addi tion to the IPTC information their functions are also described Batch Function To automatically perform one or more processing steps such as cropping the picture margin or changing the resolution for several pictures at the same time go to File Con vert Click Batch in the lower left The following dialog opens Batch Possible Functions Batch Table Add delete margin a Open Autolevel 0 Add Brightness Contrast TE Open and Append Bring To Size sates Change Color Mode Save Continue y Delete All Cancel OK Batch functions can be selected in the left selection window Select the batch function you want and then click Add Or you
191. ch point in a line The coordinates 962 700 200 mean that the point is 962 points from the left margin 700 points from the top margin and 200 points from the bottom margin Make sure that in the Preferences 326 under General Window Display 0 can be selected instead of 1 as the basis for the coordinates If 0 is the setting it would be the 961st point from the left margin the 699th point from the top and the 199th point from the bottom If a picture contains geo data the corresponding data will be added to the recorded da ta The points in the clipboard can be inserted in a word processing program or an Excel spreadsheet for further processing Click Clear recorded points to delete the recorded mouse clicks if you have to correct them Insert recorded points into the image inserts the points afterwards into the pic ture with the current foreground color Each point is only one pixel large which is why you can only see these points well starting at a zoom level of 200 Apple Touch Icon for iPhone and iPod Touch UB Using Safari for web browsing on an iPhone or iPod Touch you can create bookmarks as icons onto yor home screen That is handy as you can open web pages with a single tap To create the icon bookmark tap the plus sign in the bottom section of the screen A se lection opens in which you tap Add to Home Screen If you are creator of a website and whish to avoide a standard icon with a screenshot of the webpage beeing cr
192. clear the Index option you will no longer be informed which picture out of how many is currently being displayed Erase text background improves the legibility of the text as a white 290 block is placed behind the text Shadow text creates a shadow below the text that also improves the legibility Original size displays images at 100 or if they are larger than the screen appropria tely reduced in size Enlarge small pictures scales pictures that are smaller than the screen proportional to the width and height of the screen for portrait pictures You can limit the increase or de crease in size to Factor 2 so that the image quality does not suffer too much Use allows you to set a fixed scaling percentage for all pictures You can use the Justify pop up menu to select whether the slides are centered with bor ders at the top and bottom or right and left or pushed to one of the sides Stretch to fullscreen stretches the pictures so that they fill the whole screen You can avoid the distortion by selecting Crop to fullscreen If the pictures do not fit in the aspect ratio of the monitor the left and right or top and bottom will be trimmed slightly for dis play The source files are not changed Select Information opens a dialog where you can select whether the comment the IPTC information or other details should be displayed during the slide show You can change the order of the details with the mouse in the right hand area Selec
193. crease the size of the video window Open the following dialog with the Video Settings Studio Panel gt Contrast Brightness U Saturation gt Coor SS Default Channel E TV Ce Select Contrast Brightness Saturation and if possible Color Select Channel in the lowest pop up menu The way this dialog looks depends on your hardware 340 Use Sound Settings to select the audio source and adjust the volume Remove bad Pixels Digital Cameras can suffer from single bad pixels on the chip These dead pixels produce tiny white spots in the picture GraphicConverter can remove these bad pixels automati cally by calculating the average color of the surrounding pixels and setting it for the dead pixel Take a picture with a short exposure time in the dark and with the lens cap fitted Open this black image in GraphicConverter and choose Special Learn bad Pixels Gra phicConverter can learn up to 200 000 faulty pixels GraphicConverter memorizes the coordinates of the bad pixels that are not black as they should be Open a normal picture with bad pixels and select Special Remove bad Pixels to repair them You can use Save Bad Pixels Definition and Open Bad Pixels De finition to save learned bad pixels in a file for example so you can open them later and use them for several cameras Color Blindness Around 10 of men suffer from color blindness
194. cromedia Dreamweaver as the creator for example the created files will be opened di rectly in Dreamweaver for editing when you double click them You can select a program file for example Dreamweaver by clicking Set from program file GraphicConverter exports the creator and sets it for the HTML files to be created Several Internet pages are created if all the pictures do not fit on one page The filen ames are then always numbered except for the first denmark html denmark2 html etc The first file contains no number so you can create a standard index file index html Click the General tab Select how many pictures should appear in each row or each co lumn of the Web page with Pictures per Row and Pictures per Col Catalog File HTML Basic HTML Meta HTML Text Batch HTML page Linked Image maximal Make Square Pictures per Row 2 Width 1200 Pixel Fill free Area with a Col Pictures per Col 16 Height 1200 Pixel si on _ Frame Thumbnail Absolute Width Color i Relative Width Width 300 Pixel M Sharpen Height 300 Pixel ig eight ixe p n J 2 Size J9 g C lt small gt lt small gt Color _ Show name only on subpage vi Display Name Show other only on subpage Color M with Extension os M with Path _ Background Image cellspacing 8 _ Display IPTC Caption Select M Merge Profile into Thumbnail Display Dimension __ Merge Profile into Image Display File Size
195. ct number of Bytes simply leave the settings as Show total size and Show Size in KB eee File List uY ictures from volume Kame Type Width He ight Cohrs Resetution Expanded File length 10708 pg ee A SOT AIDAN 1 7M RO 100 re 00 Dp 24 Dea 5 prm PIO pg WGF SOT AZDAN 167M ROD 100 0x00 Dpi 24 or 2 10708 pg wise SOT ATDAN 1 7M ROD 100 Cet 0 Dp 24 o 29 10704 pg DALTA 1 IOT ATDAN 167M ROD 100 Chet Dpi 24 oe 2 10708 9 DALTA A IOT ATDAN 167M ROD 100 0x00 Dpi 24 0r 2 7 re SOTO pg wise SOT ADAD 16 7M eta 100 Dre 1 Dip 24 0 27m mG SOT pg wise DT aD 16 Mn 100 0 D Dpi 24 0m 2 Jei m 10710 pg PGE SOT 704u 16 7M ea 100 D Dpi 24 0m 2 Smi pesos w PGE IDT rD 167M 100 0 1 Dpi 24 0m 2 7 m 10712 9 wines IOT 16 7M ea 100 Che 1 Dap 24 0m le reson 5 wise IOT ADAD 1M 100 0x100 Dp 24 0m 2 pmi ta 10715 m wise OT 17M 100 0x100 0i 24 0m 2 7m m 10716 9 wise Tre ADAD 16 7M eta 100 he 1 Dap 40M 7m re 10717 9 wise IOT ADAD 1M 100 0x00 0i 24 0m le ro 10710 pg wise OT 2040 16 7M eta 100 0 1 Dpi 24 0m 2 m 10719 pg wise OT 2040 16 7M ea 100 0 1 Dpi 24 0m 2 mG 1070 94 SOT ADAD 167M 100 0x0 Dpi 24 0m 5 Smi 10721 m IOT ADAD 16 7M eta 100 Db 1 Dp 24 0m 3 1m m 10772 4 IOT ADAN 1M 100 0 24 0m 5 pmi re 107235 9 SOT ADAN 16 7M eta 100 Dh 24 0m 5 pmi re 10724 9 IOT ADAD 1M 100 Dh 24 0m le 10725 pg 127TH 16 7M RO 1000 y 93 1am 107 pg sre ADAD 16 7M RO 100 0p Dap 24 0r 5 ormi 7 0727 pg OT AIDA 16 7M ROn 100 Chet Dep 24
196. ction You can access the options listed in this dialog at any time via the File menu Choose Open an image and click OK Alternatively you can select Don t show this again and click OK You can then access the file selection dialog with File Open If you disable the info dialog and the first steps dialog next time you start GraphicCon verter you will be able to use the menus as soon as the splash screen appears You can start work with GraphicConverter even faster if you disable the splash screen as well The file selection dialog opens It may be different to the one shown depending on your Mac OS version the screenshot is taken from Max OS X 10 2 p a OOO Open GraphicConverter miS m C Bilder 2 Auflage Q search Y DEVICES C Rote Augen 2 tif Hagen Henkes MacPro E Rote Auge tionen 2 tif H iDisk Save for Web tif Ei Dokumente gt Schatten Dialog tif GB C Microsoft Win amp Schnell Helligkeit K tif J Ej Eyetv a Script Meni tif El Bilder Backup WD amp gt Seitenverh efinieren tif 4 a E Estrella Sichern fuers Web tif Y Name Schettentif D liere unkte tiff lt li E video 1 ee Filter All available Create Preview Enlarge Preview Cancel Open 19 Alternatively you can use the browser option to open files if the small preview icons in the list are too small Select the folder containing the picture you want to open with File Browse Folder A browser
197. ction You can cancel a selection with the Escape key You can select using the lasso one or more selection rectangles selection ellipse or the Magic Pen Click exactly on the borderline of a selection to move the selection frame without the contents 139 If you would prefer to click the selection to move the selection frame instead of having to aim for the frame you can enable this in the Preferences under General Edit using the Swap move selection with without content shortcuts option You can make several selections by holding down the Shift key If selected areas over lap they are joined in a larger selection which can then be L shaped All combinations are possible even with regular and irregular shapes The pixels under the borderlines be long to the selection Use Command A or Edit Select all to select the whole picture With Hi or True Color pictures only the selected picture sections will be edited Adjustments to the brightness and contrast always affect the whole picture if it has 256 or fewer colors because the number of colors would otherwise increase If you want to copy part of a picture and paste it into another one select the required area and copy it with Command C Now switch to the destination picture and paste the selection with Command v The selection is pasted at the mouse cursor and you can adjust its size at the corners by holding down the Command key If you hold down the Shift key at the same time
198. cture as master allows you to specify that not the picture already stamped in the same action but the picture underneath that has not been stamped should be used as the source The source for the stamp can also be another open picture For example you can even paste a face from a passport photo into a group picture Hold down the Alt key click the picture with the stamp and switch to the group picture Holding down the key move the mouse over the area where the face is to appear You may have to enlarge or reduce the source picture to adjust the size see p 103 Export All export plug ins that have been installed in the GraphicConverter Plug Ins folder are listed in the File Export submenu GraphicConverter supports most Photoshop 3 0 compatible export plug ins Importing Pictures from Digital Cameras You can only use GraphicConverter to import pictures straight from a digital camera un der Mac OS X Connect the digital camera so that it appears as a volume on the desktop From Mac OS 10 1 5 GraphicConverter displays the import dialog automatically If your camera is not supported by Mac OS X directly you can use the program Image Capture that is a part of Mac OS X or you can connect a card reader into which you insert the me mory card from your camera 114 Select File Acquire if the import dialog has still not opened automatically and then Download Images from Connected Camera in the submenu that opens A dialog with impo
199. cture file smaller Greater reduction can save a considerable amount Color Pictures Color pictures look best with a color depth of 32 bit In future 48 bit pictures should be used more With 32 bit 32 ones and zeros are written for each pixel 16 7 million colors can be distinguished If you reduce the color depth to 16 bit only 32768 colors can be dis tinguished Please note that a difference between 16 7 million colors and 32768 colors can only be displayed on your monitor if this is allowed by your computer The number of colors can be set in the Monitors amp Sound control panel If 32768 thousands colors or 256 colors is the highest setting available your computer does not have enough video memory In this case select a lower screen resolution to free video RAM for more colors Photos can also be displayed more or less realistically with 8 bit and 256 colors Changing Bit Depth Dynamically for Palette Pictures Pictures with 256 or fewer colors are called palette pictures as the pictures occurring in the picture are similar to a palette when displayed next to each other in boxes If you re duce the number of colors on the palette the memory space required will be reduced again substantially You can reduce the color depth even more for palette pictures using 170 Picture Colors Change bit depth dynamically If a picture has not been saved as a pa lette picture this option will convert it into a picture with a maximum of
200. cture in JPEG format in a subfolder for example In the file selection dialog select the Save web ready without resource and Merge color profile into image for web usage options In the options disable IPTC ICC profile and EXIF Transfer the pic ture to your mobile phone by copying it to your memory card using the Finder or transfer it via Bluetooth Select Send File from the Bluetooth menu in the Finder A file selection window opens where you can select the picture file You can also select several files After 77 the file selection dialog a dialog appears where you can select the receiving device The data will be transferred after you click Send LOO _ Send File IMG_6426 jpg Select Bluetooth Device Select a device to send file IMG_6426 jpg to To find devices in range of your computer click the Search button Device Type Phones E3 Device Category All Categories Device T610 S 700i Search Remove from Favorites Cancel C Send Send When a Bluetooth icon does not appear in the menu bar you can set this under System Preferences Bluetooth On the Sony Ericsson S700i you will find the pictures in the File Manager section and can display them from there Slices On the Internet pictures can contain several links Rectangular picture sections that are assigned a link can be defined with the slice tool from the toolbox Window Show Tool box Draw a rectan
201. ctures If you print just one picture and want to display a preview in the print dialog open the picture by double cli cking and select File Print Catalog opens a pop up menu where you can select HTML to create Internet pages on which your pictures are displayed as a catalog see p 80 Select Picture to create image files with the catalog pictures see p 35 E Mail opens a dialog that lets you forward the selected images to an e mail program to mail them as an attachment If you want to send the image via a webmail provider like Hotmail you can select the Folder on Desktop option from the Send pop up menu to save the file in an automatically created folder that you can then use for your webmail ac count E Mail File s Recipient Subject Message Size Medium 640x480 B E Mail with Mail HH Quality for scaled images 86 Delete all Metadata from JPEGs Add Filename to Image Font Lucida Grande HH sas g Mark images with a red cross Store files always on desktop Apply batch No Batch 4 It is best to leave the Recipient Subject and Message input boxes empty Fill in this in formation in the next step in your e mail program If you use the Mailsmith e mail pro gram it may be necessary to enter a recipient to avoid an error message Select Size Ori ginal Size full quality Large or Larger if the recipient wants to print the image The sizes Medium and Small are g
202. d the size of the displayed file path and name can be selected in the top section Enable loop slide show and the slide show starts again from the beginning after the last picture is displayed until you end the slide show by pressing the Stop button or Command pe riod This option is useful for presentations in store windows for example If further pic tures are copied into the slide show folder via a network for example the current content of the folder can be imported with Reload file list before loop When the slide show is run through again all pictures are displayed that were in the slide show folder when it was Started 295 If you copy pictures into the folder with the displayed pictures during the slide show we recommend using the Reload the list after each image and jump to changes option so that the added pictures are also shown Preferences Misc a Slideshow Misc Settings Monitor Plug ins Font Lucida Grande B Print Open Size 12 fg Color oOo General Correct amp Change ff Background color IPTC Formats Change picture Save 5 0 s Sandi After delay Custom Icon _ After mouse click Formats IPTC EXIF Settings Slide Show General Effects Files A A 3 Misc Search for sound file with same name as the image Move Folders M Up arrow pauses the slideshow Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Loop slideshow Reload file list before loop Reload after each image and jump to changes Show time since start of
203. d can be decisive in choosing a particular program Take a look at the options in the Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences dia log under Open EPSF Settings Resolution allows you to set the resolution of the gra phic after it is opened The ppi unit is the same as the dpi unit If you want to print the pic 347 ture you should select 300 dpi or a greater value Use Bit depth to select the bit depth of the graphic after it is opened Detailed information on other preferences can be found in the corresponding program documentation Preferences General a Open EPSF Settings Clipboard z Digital Camera Resolution 300 pp Display Content Display Windows Bit depth 32 HA Edit Memory Use UNIX pstopdf Mac OS X 10 3 or later Misc m Monitor _ Use UNIX gs at usr local bin gs Plug ins http prdownloads sourceforge net espgs espgs 7 05 5 0 ppc dmg download Print Open Options General AN 5 Correct amp Change Use Ghostscript macps2pdf of the MacGhostView package IPTC http www kiffe com macghostyiew html F ts 4 gt Se m gt ae 2 Select Application Options Deltavision Dicam Try to decode Photoshop EPSF files without helper app EPSF EXIF FITS GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page bl i PCD vil Default J Undo If you are using Mac OS X 10 3 or newer you should select UNIX pstopdf as this allows you to open EPS images
204. d to the left and the previous left hand image is no longer displayed Imagine a film strip is being pushed from left to right through the dialog Go Back there fore moves the strip to the right When you are sure that you want to delete a picture click Delete this one under the picture Enable Read dimensions for info so you can quickly see whether the picture is a versi on for printing or for the Web If you disable Move into trash instead delete if possible the files will be immediate ly deleted and cannot be recovered Automatic mode for all items allows you to automatically delete all duplicates and just keep the originals It is possible that the version that is in the folder where you want to keep the picture is deleted Therefore only use the automatic mode if all pictures are in a folder or you know exactly what you are doing Automatic mode z9 Do you really want to start the automatic mode This may delete important files if your folder selection contains other items than images You can t undo this operation Please make a backup copy of you disk before using this function Delete smaller file Delete larger file Delete older file Delete newer file a Start automatic mode Cancel Cancel You can choose whether the smaller the larger or the newer document should always be deleted During the search GraphicConverter will ignore all files whose extensions are listed un der Preferen
205. d with Stufflt when this option is selected The compression rate can be se lected in the pop up menu If the Create LOWSRC option is selected a GIF picture with 16 colors is created in addi tion to the picture file This GIF picture can be used for Internet applications with the LOWSRC HTML command From Mac OS 8 5 Set Format from Extension allows you to set the format by entering the extension with the filename and not by selecting it from the pop up menu For exa mple if you write Rose tiff the file is automatically saved in TIFF format Save web ready without resource saves pictures without a resource This keeps the file size small and is particularly useful if the picture is going to be put on a Web site The resource contains the overview that is shown when you open files in the file selection di alog You should enable Merge color profile into image for web usage when you save pictures with profiles for the Web as Web browsers do not evaluate profile information Save all pages of multipage files should be enabled if you want to save all pages in multipage files Disable this option to save just the first page Under Classic Mac OS this option is only available if you use the Navigation Services from Mac OS 8 5 If you want to view pictures for the Internet with the GraphicConverter browser we re commend just creating a temporary preview so that the resource is not written in the files again Select Edit under Mac OS X
206. dardized entry you need to decide yourself how Gra phicConverter should proceed Select one of the three options in the large pop up menu at the bottom of the dialog 1 Ask if the image has no profile With this method GraphicConverter shows the following dialog when an image is opened Assign Color Profile The image has no color profile Please select one Source None H You can disable this question dialog in the File menu with item Color Profile _ Don t ask again Assign no Profile 0K This method is recommended if you open very different images If you know that the image is from a digital camera it was accidentally saved without EXIF information and the profile was not incorporated select the sRGB profile as the Source in the pop up menu If you know for sure that the Adobe RGB color model was used for pictures taken with the digital camera select Adobe RGB You will find further information on Adobe RGB further below If you know that the image was scanned in for example and a profile was not added by the scanner software click the Assign no Profile button If your scanner is calibrated select the individual scanner profile If you are working with pictures from the Internet or screenshots and other unprofiled images click the Assign no Profile button 2 Assign the default profile if the image has no profile If you always have the same work situations you can set the Assign the de
207. dded UB New in GraphicConverter 6 5 spotlight comment to iptc caption command added UB conversion of premultiplied alpha to non premultiplied alpha and vice versa added UB PAM and PFM open source formats import added UB function to convert corrupted fz20 raw files in convert amp modify dialog UB canvas changes adds a transparent margin for images with alpha channel UB support for import of PGM PBM with 16 and 32 bit per channel added UB support for DPX files with little endian byte order added UB support for geotagging from CSV and NMEA files added UB Unskew points can be moved with the cursor keys when mouse is near point UB random slideshow can go forward backward in normal order with the page up down and arrow up down keys UB New in GraphicConverter 6 5 2 all UB only invert alpha channel command added for single image and batch Picture Alpha Channel Invert Alpha Channel open browser in flat view added File menu with control key import of MPO added creation of alpha channel from stored Photoshop path added Alpha Channel Create Alpha from Path Name vpb save as dialog can be disabled multiscale dialog in Convert amp Modify dialog supports GIF format and scale algorithm selection command option 5 6 can now be used for back forward in the browser and slideshow if not defined as move folder in Preferences Slide Show Move Folders 3 447 New in GraphicConverter 6 6 all UB only
208. depending on the entries You can enter values between 255 and 255 in the boxes If all outer fields are set to 0 and the center ones contain a 1 the filter will have no effect If you set all boxes to 255 the filter will have maximum unsharpening A preview will appear in the After window a few seconds after the last entry Use the zoom function and move the selection triangle in the Picture window to a representative position It is very difficult to find the correct value between too soft and too sharp Define sever al examples until you achieve the required unsharp effect Taking a look at pictures by David Hamilton for example that use unsharp filters will help http www hamilton ar chives com newsite index html Color Permutations The six color permutation filter changes the colors of a picture on the basis of certain rules The HSV color model is used in which the colors are arranged in a circle If a picture with at least 16 bit color depth see Picture Colors is open you can open the Color Pi cker by clicking the foreground or background color in the toolbox you may need to se lect Window Show Toolbox The color changes with the angle If you imagine a clock face on top of the color circle the red hues are from 0 to 3 o clock You can find the other primary colors by moving the 199 fingers on the imaginary clock The Saturation of the color is defined by the distance from the center point The brightnes
209. dex Misc Browser General Context Menu Display General Display Thumbnails Function Keywords Misc Preferences gt Formats al Browser Display Thumbails Save General 4 Name Custom Icon _ with count of files in directories Formats Fi A ile size IPTC EXIF a en Settings _ with separate fork details Slide Show M Creation date General r Effects t Modification date Files _ with Time Misc m Moa Fadar v Label as little oval Move Folders 2 v Rating v GPS position _ Digital camera details slows the browsing _ Focal length calculated to 35mm TIFF JPEG mode compression and profile slows the browsing Show hidden files and folders Treat files with at beginning as hidden v Treat files with at the end as hidden v Frame preview _ Show long filenames as help tags v Use shadows Open v Multi frame preview for movies Preview Toolbar 7 Default Undo Cancel The color of the label is displayed in the whole background of the preview If you do not like this large display you can select Label as little oval to display the color of the label as a small point Rating hides and displays the stars that you assign via the context menu and the key combinations Ctrl 0 5 GPS position shows a globe above the image if GPS data is available The setting is only applied next time you open a folder Digital camera details slows the browsing lists
210. display The freeware FinderSync also allows you to refresh the content of a Finder window Do not forget to disable this option during the next save procedure if you are working on pictures for other purposes Make filename ready for the web changes the current filename upon saving so that it can be used on Internet servers without problems Spaces are changed to the underscore character special characters are replaced and all letters are written in lowercase For exa mple Next Field jpg becomes next_field jpg You cannot see the changes in the file se lection dialog because the text in the entry box cannot be changed The saved file will have the modified name however Minimizing JPEG Pictures You can set a quality level when you save pictures in JPEG format Select File Save as in the file selection option set JPEG JFIF as the format and click Options The lower the quality the smaller the file Data reduction is used in addition to data compression particularly for low quality levels The dialog for selecting the quality opens automatically after you click Save unless you disabled this under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences in the Open JPEG section 67 The compression rate of JPEG format is also very large at the highest quality level This is why this level or a value over 80 is recommended Try out the lower quality levels if you require small files The loss of quality is clearly visible b
211. displayed You therefore need to finish your work on the picture and then save it without layers Painting with GraphicConverter It is particularly useful to paint with GraphicConverter using a graphics tablet You can paint in new empty pictures or in existing pictures Foreground and Background Color All paint functions such as the line drawer or fill option use the foreground color The era ser uses the background color The foreground and background colors are displayed at 224 the bottom of the toolbox in two overlapping rectangles The partly hidden rectangle is the background color The rectangle on top shows the foreground color 4d e S Copy 13x10 You can select the foreground and background colors in different color pickers by cli cking the color sample in the toolbox There are only the colors black and white available for black and white pictures In this case the color picker will not appear instead you switch between black and white Each picture will have its own foreground and background color if you clear the Use se lected colors for all open images option in the Preferences under General Edit If you select Use selected colors for all open images it will only affect pictures that are alrea dy open when you change the foreground or background color of a picture You will find detailed information on the color pickers from page 230 The double arrow under the foreground color or the x key swaps the
212. e Save all pages of multipage files Gree Given The Options button allows you to select any compression rate for JPEG pictures and other pictures This is necessary if you disabled automatic display of the options dialog for pictures with freely selectable compression at the bottom of the dialog 26 JPEG JFIF Quality Before v A low medium high Library O QuickTime JPEG 6 0 l Progressive Subsampling 4 2 2 default B f Calculate File Size Original Size New Size The calculated file size is only Show Preview correct if you save the file without a resource fork g Show this dialog before saving S SSS JPEG files _ Resize to reach filesize 512 KB M write JFIF header l Special filesize use carefully C Store JFIF after EXIF _ Reduce quality to reach filesize 512 KB Embed if available M iPTC _ Comments CI XMP F EXIF M ICC profile Mi Don t embed sRGB profile EXIF Preview DCF compatible ar Maker Note and User Comment may contain per sonal details like the EXIF Maker Note CAA PA IOO IA ETT Sa hat Gian maybe you want l EXIF User Comment E The dialog looks different in the UB version of GraphicConverter Click the black triangle to display and hide the options further down JPEG JFIF Quality Before After 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 low medium high Library O QuickTime JPEG 6 0 Progressive Subsampling 4 2 2 default E3 C Calculate File Size Original Size New Size The calcula
213. e Select the alignment from the list in the left section of the dialog In addition to the selected alignment you can also enter an off set For example if you select Top Left and enter an offset of x 100 and y 200 the pic ture is inserted 100 pixels to the right of the left picture edge and 200 pixels underneath the upper edge of the picture If the picture you want to insert contains an alpha channel for softer edges it will be taken into account The alpha channel contains a grayscale picture whose pixels could have 256 brightness levels These brightness values are used to prevent the edge pixels of a logo for example being covered by sharp edges The result is an anti alias effect which makes the edges look softer This is particularly useful with low resolutions and diagonal edges Use Insert Text if you want to insert Text in a corner or in the center of an image such as Creation date or a note on copyright Enter the distance from the edge with Offset In stead of the File name or the Creation date you can enter a text of your own or insert meta data Relative Size for the font allows you to adapt the font size to the image size If for example your picture is 1000 pixels high the font will be 100 pixels high at a value of 1 Use the Absolute Size if you want to insert text with a certain font size 310 Fill background allows you to place a Rectangle or Rounded rectangle behind the text and select a Color and Transparent for
214. e 9 General Custom Icon Sort options Sort file by Name H4 Formats IPTC __ Sort folder separately Settings C Sort Top Down Slide Show General n P 7 Effects Automated actions TA Refresh 2 s Misc 7 Move Folders v Resort 2 S Move Folders 2 PPPE Move Folders 3 File options v Correct bad file dates with EXIF before year 1981 Convert M ignore aliases in folder list Convert Text IPTC Errors Time M Don t open packages Icon Preview Index Onerror _ Create log Mise Extended log Browser General Display Function Keywords Misc Open z Preview v Default Undo Automatic refresh allows you to select a time after which the browser re reads the content of the current browser window If you want the display to be updated constantly we recommend a value of approximately 3 seconds The hard drive is accessed more fre quently with shorter times You should enable Automatic resort if you always want to update the sort list after a specific time For example this is recommended if you are working with labels and have selected By Label amp Name as the sort method Correct bad file dates with EXIF before year corrects the file date if it is right in the EXIF information Only those files are changed whose file date is before the date you entered You should only disable Ignore aliases in folder list if you want to display the aliases of folders in the folder list Don t open packages prevents you accidentally displayi
215. e Maker Note and Comment deletes the maker note and the comment Add or edit GPS values opens a dialog in which GPS values can be entered or edited when for example you have written down a position from a car navigation device Pipette Latitude 0 0000 North re Longitude 0 0000 East ey Copy EXIF to XMP copies the IPTC data to the XMP section without saving the image again It is a good idea to copy the EXIF data to the XMP section if for example you will be continuing work on the images in a program that can only read the XMP section You should use Copy XMP IPTC to other IPTC records if your images are to be further processed in other programs that cannot yet read the IPTC data from the XMP section In JPG files the IPTC data can be found in four areas of the image files In the XMP section this entry is used as the master Adobe Photoshop IPTC record The EXIF section can also contain IPTC In the resource fork in the ANPA record IPTC The Copy Comment to IPTC Caption and Copy IPTC Caption to Comment options copy the comment or the IPTC description into the other respective area This is useful if you want to continue work with the data in another program that can only display one of the areas Copy file name to object name is recommended when you have files with descriptive filenames for example Forest jpg and want to copy the filename to the IPTC object de scription The file extensions are left out You can als
216. e Plug Ins folder Therefore if you copy a folder containing a plug in into the Plug In folder the plug in needs to be located in that folder and not in a further subfolder Under Mac OS X Plug ins are copied to the Library Application Support Graphic Converter Plug ins folder User plug ins are copied to the Users Library Applica tion Support GraphicConverter Plug ins folder The tilde character stands for the name of the respective user User plug ins are only available to the respective users One very easy way to install plug ins is to drag them onto the GraphicConverter program icon After a query they will be automatically copied into the correct folder Close and restart GraphicConverter after installing new plug ins The plug ins will then be available in the respective menu Import or export plug ins for example scanner pro grams are located under File Acquire or Export Photoshop plug ins appear in the Fil ter menu This menu only appears next to the Effect menu when plug in filters have been installed If you are using the carbon version of GraphicConverter in the Classic Mac OS from Mac OS 8 5 with the respective latest version of Carbon Lib the plug ins should be in the Sys tem Folder Application Support GraphicConverter Plug Ins folder Copyright of Plug ins Under Classic Mac OS some plug ins have a copyright message with a version number in the Apple menu 197 In addition to your license
217. e ag A Loop You can move individual frames in this palette You can enter the time a picture is dis played in the box next to Delay in seconds with up to three decimal places The value for all pictures can be set to the value displayed with Apply to all All pictures are normally the same size If you want to add pictures of different sizes to a GIF animation the largest image needs to come first You can use Global Color Table to save memory space for an animation as the Local Color Table for the individual pictures normally also contain colors that are not even used in the picture and use up memory unnecessarily Furthermore each color table takes up 768 bytes This soon adds up as even 5 picture animations created with Yves Piguet s GIF Builder often have around 25 pictures due to the intermediate pictures for the fade in effect Each picture is called a frame as in film technology Click the plus button to add ano ther picture after the current picture This option is only available if there is a picture in the clipboard Click the trash bin to delete the current frame Options allows you make further settings for the selected frame Options No disposal Do not dispose Restore to background Restore to previous OOM C User input exspected Cancel Co The No disposal and Do not dispose options are identical for historical reasons Each picture is drawn over the preceding one during playback This mode is mor
218. e and copy the favicon ico image to your server lt link rel shortcut icon href http www lemkesoft de favicon ico gt lt link rel icon href http www lemkesoft de favicon ico type image ico gt FAX CCITT 3 coded fax file FaxSTF FaxSTF program format fep fig First Publisher art With installed xfig fink package on X FITS FLH FLI FLC Flexible Image Transport System Format Animation from the Autodesk Animator program FLI supports 8 bit for 320 x 200 pixels FLC supports 8 bit for 640 x 480 pixels FLH supports High Color FPX FlashPix file format QuickTime 4 or higher is required for opening these files Freehand 10 The browser can display a preview of a Freehand preview file This preview can be opened as a picture but not as a Freehand file FUJI GATAN Microscope format Supports 256 grayscale GEM Vector graphics GEM metafile created by the GEMDraw program GFX Xgrabber program format GIF Supports 1 to 8 bit per pixel This format was introduced by CompuServe Inc GRP Uses 1 or 4 bit per pixel HAM Interchange File Format IFF 428 Format Import Export Comment HD Photo wdp GraphicConverter can only open this Microsoft format in the UB version HP GL 2 This vector graphic format is usually used by plotters HGT IBL IBM PIC Supports 16 bit per pixel IC Imagic Atari Imagic p
219. e created in addition to the basic 8 bit icons with 256 colors that are created The 4 bit icons are necessary if you want to display the graphic correctly on computers with only 16 colors More space is required for additional icons This does not usually however affect CDs Finder Picture v Create 4 Bit Icons A Create 32 Bit Icons only MacOS 8 5 or later will display l Create White Icons X Offset in Finder 10 Y Offset in Finder 10 E Select Create 32 Bit Icons to save a photo as a graphic and display a high quality versi on of it on a Mac OS or higher This option dramatically increases the file size of the icon This is generally not important because the Finder Picture is primarily used for CDs If the source graphic contains white surfaces a file symbol generally does not have to be created for these surfaces Normally a gap is left If you still want to save white icons enable the Create White Icons option Due to the visual effects of the Mac OS X it can be useful to save the white icons because otherwise a different color background can show through Using X Offset in Finder you can specify how far the existing graphic made up of the individual icons is away from the left window edge in the horizontal direction Using Y Offset in Finder you can specify the same distance from the top of the window The va lues should not be less than 10 pixels to avoid having display problems 352 PDB FireViewer etc
220. e display on the screen The image is not rotated physically upon saving and the EXIF orientation also re mains unchanged Add offset to index allows the index number in the filename to be increased This is useful if the counter in your camera has already run through once or several times If your camera starts with picture 0001 again after picture 9999 you should enter 9999 as the offset before importing the 10000th picture 376 General Display Content Preferences General a General Window Content Settings Clipboard Digital Camera Default window zoom Shrink to fit constrain zoom ratio Hey Display Content wae _ _ With frame of 20 pixel Display Windows Edit _ Fit to window after resizing Memory Misc Monitor Alpha channel eta v Display image with alpha channel mask Open Display alpha channel black for transparent parts General Correct amp Change IPTC gt Formats Display quality Best Quality bicubic He Save General Display tiled Custom Icon Formats IPTC EXIF Settings Slide Show General Effects Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time A Display alpha channel white for transparent parts v Default Undo WYSI WYG use ppi dpi of image displays graphics on the screen except for small dif ferences with the same size as they are when printed WYSIWYG stands for What You See Is What You Get However the default resolu
221. e frames with Fill free Area with Color Click the color sample to change the color You can find information on color selection on page 230 84 You can draw a frame around the picture with Frame and set its color with Color Shar pen should always be enabled so that the preview pictures are sharp enough The filenames of landscape format pictures do not appear at the same height as the fi lenames of portrait format pictures when the Make Square option is disabled O file localhost idnea Documents cordoba htm lt to gt Refresh Home p O file localhost Users davidnea Documents cordoba html Back go Address burgruine 1 Local machine zone The filenames of landscape format and portrait format pictures always appear at the same height only when the Make Square option is enabled file localhost idnea Documents cordoba htm a o no e Back i toy Refresh Home A go Address E file localhost Users davidnea Documents cordoba html AJOISIH Local machine zone 85 Switch to the HTML Basic section by clicking the tab and enter a folder name for Thumbnail Path You can also leave it as the default name thumbnails Catalog General File HTML Basic HTML Meta HTML Text Batch v Border 0 Thumbnail Path thumbnails Add Tabs to HTML Picture Path images lt TD gt lt TD gt in one Row m LINK SSS Create images folder te
222. e hac tues oe cee a EEA 371 AppleScript sareni Shs st N a a ee ea a a keen G Mead SO eae wae EN 418 AULOMALON sses stabs cise us tus poaa sea hes tab esaseval esa peseesteueensdoasayeseus 421 OUI eset a ie be tee Li ect Eo ia cette belted Lele cette bles i 421 Troubleshooting siressa eG an eee ea ete es Ba ea a AE a iR 421 SHOrtCU Sor aarti cl re Se eee etl ase E te ae tly ele ce cle lee 8 ian aes 423 Supported Formats 5 0s06dd sss eo sensed educa deniendds aswieb ions E E sandra de 425 MGEXKssiceticin a tcva ns celal ote ce E E E easels E as ace E es tena 449 Introduction After dealing with installation of the program the first section of this manual looks at the most important functions for everyday use Welcome to GraphicConverter GraphicConverter converts pictures into other picture formats allowing you to use gra phics files from other computer systems for example The most important functions are Converting the most frequent Atari Amiga UNIX Organizer and IBM graphics formats to and from Macintosh formats Numerous format related parameters can be configured page 24 Multiple conversion page 30 Importing Pictures from Digital Cameras page 114 Browser for quick viewing of all pictures contained in a folder page 235 slide show page 282 Automatic creation of Internet pages with picture indices for download page 80 Picture processing including dithering e g from page 128 and from page 161 Remov
223. e in the Preferences part Browser Display General If you want to export all pictures from your iPhoto library select Make Copy of iPhoto Library Content from the Script menu You will need at least version 6 of iPhoto The file selection dialog opens where you select the folder or from iPhoto 08 the iPhoto Lib rary package file that is in the picture folder Alternatively you can also create aliases in stead of copies with Create Aliases to iPhoto Library Content GrapicConverter will write any existing keywords in the IPTC information of the copied files Albums from iPho to are transferred Pictures that are in more than one album will be copied several times Using GraphicConverter as an external editor for iPhoto In iPhoto you can select a different program like for example GraphicConverter for edi ting photos if the image editing options of iPhoto are not sufficient If you then double click an image in iPhoto it will be opened in GraphicConverter Edit and save the image The changes will automatically be accepted by iPhoto In iPhoto select Preferences General and click Select Application Select Graphic Converter from the program folder in the file selection dialog that opens In iPhoto 08 you select the entry In Program from the Edit Photo pop up menu on the same tab External editors Many Photoshop plug ins are also offered as normal programs A good example is Lens Fix that you can obtain from
224. e is installed Open the volume image and start the installer You do not need to re Start Select the Use UNIX gs at option in the Open EPSF section of the preferences You can change the path if UNIX gs was installed by another program In this case you do not have to install UNIX gs again Enter the path of the installed UNIX gs in the entry box The path should be available in the documentation of the program that installed UNIX gs You can open the UNIX gs folder for checking with the Terminal only You can not open the folder in Mac OS X You only need the path if you want to check via the Terminal if the library has already been installed You cannot reach this folder via the Finder Installing Ghostscript as a Program Classic Mac OS Open the page ftp mirror cs wisc edu pub mirrors ghost aladdin mac in your Web browser For old Macs without a PowerPC processor download the file macgs 550 68k sit bin For Power PC Macs the file macgs 550 ppc sit bin The macgs 550 installer bin file contains a FAT version that runs on 68k and PPC processors Unpack the file with the Stufflt Expander freeware program A folder called MacGS 550 f is created where you can find Ghostscript 5 5 under the name MacGS FAT Select Preferences Open EPSF and then click Select Application after Ghostscript Then select the MacGS FAT program file in the file selection dialog that opens by double clicking Now open an EPSF graphic It can take a long time
225. e is open GraphicConverter provides information and options in palettes that can be opened under Window You can hide and display the palettes with the Tab key E GraphicConverter File Edit Picture Effect Fitter Special Window Help O 4 t Mo ER0SCN1196 jog RCB oie sisal 1543 pet q CE Size 227241704 pua 3 9 Mega V Resoistiom 72 0172 000 Culore 16 7 ME Caws MOR 32 St Fr ames yiia Fide F msti JIC PY Palettes are always placed in front of windows and also in front of the current window Open the palettes required for your work and create the ideal work environment for your needs 53 The Position palette that displays the X and Y positions of the mouse can be opened using the title bar of the picture window so that certain positions in the picture can be found he 1773Y 89 pixel This palette can be moved in the gray area on the left by clicking and holding down the mouse button Click anywhere in the Position palette and then on the required position in the picture to set the zero point to a position other than the upper left corner Negative values are obtained further to the left and above the upper left corner While you drag open a selection the palette will be enlarged and also show the length of the diagonals the area and the aspect ratio of the selection The 1 represents a square and 0 66 is about 2 3 The red background in the boxes for the width and height indicates that the pixels
226. e of the two formats 373 Put and get RECTs and REGIONS to from the clipboard is only required by some pro grams under MacOS X and ensures that oval selections remain oval on the clipboard General Digital Camera Preferences a General Digital Camera General Digital Camera Display Content Display Windows Edit v Check for connected digital camera during startup v Download JPG files Memory Mi Download AVI files Isc Monitor v Download all other files too Plug ins Print __ Use toolbox download Open General Correct amp Change IPTC _ Enable logfile debug mode VM Rotate depending on EXIF gt Formats Save v Rotate Thumbnail will rewrite EXIF data General Custom Icon r Formats Add offset to index IPTC Settings Slide Show General Effects Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time ai Default Undo y Check for connected digital camera during startup will display the dialog you get with File Acquire Download images from connected camera Cancel Download JPG files leaves all pictures and other files in other formats like TIFF or RAW on the camera if only this option is enabled You should enable Download AVI files if you want to also download AVI movies Select Download all other files too if you want to download all files from the camera You should only use Use Toolbox download under Mac OS X 1
227. e or less nor mal the pictures in the animation are displayed one after the other Restore to background shows the background This is the desktop background during editing with GraphicConverter On the Internet it s the Web site This option allows you to 192 make the animation more active without requiring more memory space as quickly flashing the background makes the animation seem more lively It is even better to allow the previous picture to shine through with Restore to previ ous as this creates fade in effects with just a few pictures The GIF Builder program sets this mode automatically if you select fading To obtain an exact impression of a GIF animation you should open it in a browser Drag the file onto the Browser icon User input expected stops the animation at the frame for which this option is set The animation continues when you click the picture This is useful if the picture shows a but ton that gives you the impression you can trigger a function In fact you only restart the animation Remember that if you have also set up a link for the picture it will be triggered at the same time You can avoid this by placing a permanently visible Go button with the link next to the animation and not adding the link to the animation Disable transparency in all frames simplifies removing the transparency from all fra mes Use Transparent in the Movie Options palette and the transparency tool see page 154 to define a c
228. e red eyes page 149 The layout function allows you to print several pictures on one sheet page 211 Simple text conversion page 36 Print pictures indices page 95 Creating lists with information on all pictures in a directory page 214 We wish you all the best in your work with GraphicConverter System Requirements The current version of GraphicConverter runs on any Power PC and Mac OS 8 and above as well as ColorSync 2 and above and requires 8 MB RAM GraphicConverter takes up around 16 MB hard drive space without add ons such as your scanner software To pro cess pictures it is however better to use as fast a computer as possible for example any Apple computer with a G3 G4 or G5 processor You will need to use the Universal Binary Version for the Intel Macs available from 2006 Installation Summary Copy the GraphicConverter folder onto your hard drive and start the Graphic Converter program From version 5 1 GraphicConverter is a multi language program that starts in the language set in the International section of the System Preferences This manual is stored inside the GraphicConverter program file that is a so called package Packages can be opened by selecting Show Package Contents from the con text menu in the Finder They then work in the same way as folders All documentation for GraphicConverter is under the path Contents Documentation If you want to install a newer version of the documentation simply
229. e results are not too light in this case we recommend setting the factor to 0 5 in the top box Video Monitor GraphicConverter can display videos created by video hardware for example a web cam in a monitor window record videos and save them as QuickTime videos Videos from camcorders cannot be displayed and saved because the additional hardware has to be connected via QuickTime Open a monitor window by clicking File New and then Video Grab Window If there is a video signal it is displayed right away A captured file of the current picture can be sa ved onto the desktop by pressing the space bar The default name will be grab The file will be saved to the desktop in PICT format with the name grab Ctrl click the video window to open the context menu Help Copy current foreground color as HTML Copy current color as HTML Calculate Color usage Video Settings Sound Settings Full Size Half Size Quarter Size Record to Disk Preview during record Grab to desktop options 339 You can change the name with the Grab to desktop options and select the number of digits for counting further pictures The files can then for example be called messa ges 001 etc Record to Disk starts recording after you create a destination file in the file selection dialog that opens Disable Preview during record if your computer is too slow for this Full Size Half Size and Quarter Size increase and de
230. e saving The quality is reduced accordingly to achieve this GraphicConverter can also open Medical JPEGs at 12 16 bit A color depth of 8 bit is nor mal LuraWave LWF The LuraWave plug in is integrated in GraphicConverter It can be used to open graphics in LuraWave format LWF This format achieves a considerably higher compression level for very good quality graphics than JPEG format by using Wavelet technology All Lura Wave format graphics can usually be opened and saved in another format The registered version of GraphicConverter limits you to a maximum graphic size of 800x600 pixels when saving in LuraWave format You can only save larger graphics after you have paid the licensing fee to Luralech GmbH To do this under Mac OS 9 open License in the Apple menu Under Mac OS X select GraphicConverter License A dialog opens where you can launch your Internet browser directly with the correct URL to purchase a license for saving larger LuraWave graphics After you have paid the licensing fee you get an invoice via e mail which contains your license number Enter the license number and your name in this dialog to completely activate the LuraWave format The licensing fee costs US 12 00 as of April 2005 359 As for JPEGs the quality level can be set for LuraWave format However unlike JPEGs files can be saved without a quality loss LuraWave LWF Mode Before Lossless OA bit lossy Quality 78 1 100
231. e several source pictures with different background images in the following way Source pictures Picture A jog with background pictures Picture A jpg Source pictures Picture B jpg with background pictures Picture B jpg Source pictures Picture C jog with background pictures Picture C jpg you can use the character in the path for the background picture instead of the filen ame If the Background pictures folder is in the Source pictures folder you can use the character as a placeholder in front of the Background pictures folder name instead of the path 308 Copy Spotlight comment to IPTC caption copies the spotlight comment to the IPTC caption In the same way Copy Spotlight comment to IPTC keywords copies the spot light comment to the IPTC keywords We do not recommend working with spotlight com ments since they are not included when you send a file by e mail for example Comment inserts a comment into pictures The GIF JPEG PNG and TIFF formats all di rectly support comments For all other formats the comments are written to the resource fork To do this the option for creating a resource must be enabled under Preferences Save General You can modify the comments for JPEGs without negatively affecting the quality of the picture when opening and then resaving the graphic by displaying the picture in the browser and then selecting Modify Comment in the context menu Control click the preview The picture quality is also no
232. e should have in total you can enter the total number of pixels see p 108 Set Creator for Saving allows you to set the creator so you can open files in a specific program by double clicking them Shadow adds a shadow to the right hand and bottom edges of the picture You can select the color behind the shadow using the background color You can select the color behind the shadow using color Sharpen Edges sharpens the picture For more information see page 124 Show Alpha Channel adds an alpha channel in which for example surfaces can be in serted see p 206 Smart Trim cuts single color margins off see p 118 Sort Color Table makes it possible to sort the color table normally or in the reverse or der Stop batch cancels the function which is useful if a picture does not fulfill an If criterion and the function cannot be performed Threshold converts the picture to a black white 1 bit picture with the selected threshold value see p 163 Trim crops margins with a specific color You can select whether all margins or only spe cific ones are cropped You can set the color of the margin To set a specific color switch to the picture click the eyedropper on the appropriate place in the picture to put this co lor in the foreground Click the foreground color in the toolbox and make a note of the value of the color so that you can enter it in the function dialog by clicking it in the exa mple 312 If you want color hues t
233. e the shadow should be Shadow Size of the shadow pixel After inserting the shadow you may have to drag open the window slightly to see it In our example the area around the image that is normally gray is yellow You can choose any color from the context menu for this area You can select the color behind the sha dow using the background color This is white in our example 177 Unskew Often the perspective of houses or other rectangular objects appears distorted on pho tos The following example picture was taken from above to minimize the reflection of the flash eoo A OSCNS317 jpg ILLE DE ns v Sas aat To unskew the picture choose Effect Unskew Four blue lines appear over the image with handles at the junctions Drag these handles to the four corner points of the object that is to be unskewed and press Return to start unskewing You can also move the hand les with the arrow keys Place the mouse cursor next to the required handle to move it 178 with the arrow keys You can stop the procedure with Escape A brief guide is shown at the top left of the picture A dialog opens where you should select Auto Fit to obtain the approximate size If you require a specific target size you can select it with Manually Enable Try to unskew com plete image to obtain the edges Unskew Auto Fit Manually Original width Original height 600 vi Try to unskew complete image Greet ED 179 Unskew
234. e to see the effects of the compression on the complete picture Leave No subsampling disabled as it minimizes the picture faults caused by compressi on but makes the file larger 68 Save for web You can also save images with File Save for Web A dialog where you can select the Quality opens Progresive makes images display from rough to fine the more data is re ceived when the internet connection is slow Without this option pictures are displayed growing from the top to the bottom Save for Web Quality gt 7 x _ Progressive 7s OS OSE OTER Asiaing IRR the EDN GAO 1000 Os Embed IPTC XMP iv Merge Color Profile into image A Embed EXIF vw Reduce to 72 ppi al Scale longest side to 1024 pexel A Sharpen 30 x Cancel Eo The preview picture is always displayed at zoom level 100 and can be moved with the mouse The options for incorporating IPTC XMP and EXIF are under the preview Leave IPTC XMP selected if the IPTC information along with details like the keywords or other XMP information should be available to users after they have loaded the image onto their own drive The EXIF information contains the exposure time as well as the time and date when the picture was taken When you want to put pictures on the Internet just to display them you should select Merge color profile into image as they will otherwise be displayed too light and pale by most web browsers Safari 3 1 suports color profiles I
235. e uses the first IPTC entry found in a file There are the following possibilities In the data fork EXIF with IPTC XMP with IPTC Standard IPTC record In the resource fork IPTC 321 Ignore standard length limitation allows you to enter longer pieces of text in the IPTC boxes As the length limitation is also ignored by other programs you can leave the option enabled If you open the File menu while holding down the Alt key the Edit File Comment option will appear instead of Edit File Info IPTC Geo Coordinates Images can contain geo data for the location where the picture was taken in the EXIF in formation This is useful if you travel a lot and do not want to or cannot note the location for each image Geo data can also be interesting when you pass on images because the recipient can easily see where the picture was taken Geo data can be provided by GPS re ceivers or transferred later on from Google Earth Google Earth is a free program that displays satellite pictures of the earth You can download Google Earth at http earth google com The earth appears when you start the program L wpun me wm tees tee eee 1 X YET iomp aon 322 At the top left enter the name of a place like Lorenzkirch Germany and press Return The globe then starts to turn and the camera zooms closer to the surface until you see the entered location Lo Gentes fee wm e tee ee oe OC 6 t Hee Omp O7 You ca
236. eated you can upload to the root path of your webserver an image file with the standard name apple touch icon png This file should have 57x57 pixels or 129x129 pixels the size used by Apple likely for future devices and scaled down by devices like the iPhone automatically This feature is available in the UB Version of Gra phicConverter only GraphicConverter scales down any image automatically when saving to 57x57 pixels If you want to use the size of 129x129 pixels you can select this in the formats options in the Save as dialog Apple Touch Icon Size 57x57 QO 129x129 Cancel oK To save an own icon select Apple Touch Icon from the format list If this format is not displayed you can add it in the Extended Preferences in the section Save Formats The mirror effect on the icon and the rounded corners will be added by the iPhone automati cally Cut for example your logo in a way the image is square and save as Apple Touch Icon To create a square selection you can select the aspect ratio Square from the bottom of the tools palette 327 Viewing or Exporting iPhoto Images From iLife 08 or newer images from iPhoto can be displayed in the browser of Graphic Converter UB version or newer The iPhoto albums appear in the folder list of the brow ser under the folders led by an own icon Select an album to access the images directly If you do not want to display the albums disable the option Show iPhoto albums in left pan
237. eck 392 Open ECW Preferences Digital Camera gt Open ECW Display Content Display Windows __ Show dialog on opening Edit Memory Misc Monitor Plug ins Print Open DICOM ECW EPSF EXIF FITS General GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Default Undo Multi page Show dialog on opening calls up a dialog where you can select the desired part of the image when an ECW file is opened Open EPSF Settings See from page 346 393 Open EXIF Preferences Display Windows Open EXIF Edit Memory M Keep native EXIF block for savings Misc __ Copy EXIF into empty comment field Monitor Plug ins v Assign ICC profile depending on the Color Mode tag Print Open v Recognize thumbnail for display DICOM ECW v Rotate image depending on EXIF orientation EPSF EXIF FITS General GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page PCD Default Undo PDF Keep native EXIF block for savings should always be enabled so that the EXIF infor mation is kept upon saving You need to save the picture in JPEG format Copy EXIF into empty comment field allows you to transfer the EXIF information to the comment box when a picture is saved in a format that does not support the EXIF in formation The EXIF information can then be viewed and edited in the comment box TIFF format supports the EXIF information You can therefore import JPG pictures from a digital camera
238. ect The font size gets adapted to the resolution of the picture as the default behaviour of GraphicConverter so a 12 point text appears in a size you expect in a 300 dpi picture as well If you switch on the function Use absolute value a 12 point text would appear much smaller in a 300 dpi picture In a 72 dpi picture the letters of a 12 point text are about 12 pixels high if the function use absolute value is active The Anti alias option allows you to smoothen the edges of the font This is only useful when you are preparing pictures for onscreen use for example for CD ROMs or Web sites The text can be deleted with Backspace and the color of the text can also be selected later on There is a cursor for correcting typing errors but selection is not possible 222 Changes to the font always change the whole text object The cursor keys move the text frame you can also use the mouse Sankt Laurentius Wer nicht Hebt der kennt Gott nicht denn Gott ist die Liebe b ga You can start a new line with Return Enlarge the text frame by dragging it at one cor ner Delete an active text object with Escape To deselect a finished text object select a different tool for example the selection rectangle Once the text object has been dese lected the font is inserted on a separate layer of the image and can be positioned any where with the Pointer tool You do not need to click the text here You can click any where on the picture
239. ecting File New and then Image First decide how large the picture is to be in the dialog that opens and the Resolution Depth and Palette you require A resolution of 300 dpi is recommended for pictures that are to be printed The background cannot be transparent New Width 1200 pixel E Height 900 pixel 3 Resolution 72 ppi Depth 16 7 Mill Colors E Palette System Color Table l Transparent Background You can use Transparent Background to open a new picture with a transparent back ground This is often useful for Web sites 226 Painting You can paint in the picture using the paint tools from the toolbox Window Show Toolbox Use the Pen 7 for example you can select its line thickness in the pop up menu immediately above the Pattern picker If you have not installed interfering pro grams like for example USB Overdrive you can change the line thickness or size of the selected tool by holding down the Shift key and adjusting the scroll wheel on your mou se Left handers can adapt the pen to their needs by double clicking the tool in the tool box The pen will then appear as if held by someone left handed The following dialog appears 7 Pen Right Hand Left Hand pee ance OED The line thickness also applies to the line tool N that draws any kind of line but only draws vertical or horizontal lines when you hold down the Shift key Double clicking the line drawer opens a dialog where you ca
240. ecting in the pop up menu and can also be opened several times in this way Print display information prints the display information at the top of the page that is also in the information palette The date is also printed Print only name and comment limits the display information to these two items Font and Size of Header allows you to select a font in a specific size for the additional information Behavior for printing images that are larger allows you to scale the image automati cally to the page size to trim it print on more pages or to use the Ask always option to determine which option should be used each time Smart Trim before printing deletes single color picture margins in the background color before printing see p 118 Smart print orientation is only available in the Carbon version of GraphicConverter and should always be enabled when you print larger pictures as the paper format is auto matically set to landscape format for landscape format pictures Likewise the paper for mat is switched to portrait format for portrait format pictures You can disable Show preview to speed up your work Normally it is useful to display the preview however The page margins are displayed under Margins Click Use printers minimum before printing to export the minimum printer margins from the printer driver and apply them to the printout If you have selected a paper format without margins four times zero should appear here as the value
241. ects to make the slide show visually more interesting Preferences General a Ve Custom Icon 7 Formata No effects IPTC I QuickTime effects Settings AN Slide Show ae FANE lt lt lt General _ User defined QuickTime effect Select Effects Mise Steps for the effect 30 Move Folders _ Add black frame between images Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 for 1000 ms Convert m i Convert Text IPTC Series detection ___ Errors Time compare 11 chars of the filename Icon Preview s Index C Overlay logo C Select PICT file Misc e Browser Opacity 80 General Sa Display gt Top Left J Bottom Left Top Right J Bottom Right Function peswonts Background sound Select sound file 1st Open Current file Jay Z Wishing On A Star mp3 Preview mee e Toolbar v Default Undo Cancel oK The following options are available in older versions of GraphicConverter All effects Vertical to the middle Puzzle Horizontal to the middle and Delay For all options the display must be set to 16 7 million colors see the Monitor control panel As a result of compatibility issues with Mac OS 9 and X these effects have been re placed by QuickTime effects in newer versions of GraphicConverter Fade creates a nice effect The number of Steps for the effect specifies the length and the quality of the ef fects Select No effects to display the pictures in your slide
242. ed to sharpen pictures by 200 or higher The Before After display helps you find the best sharpening value The After window shows the effect of the current setting In the Picture window you can change the picture section displayed in the Before After windows Sharpen m Pie Before After z a Normal Hint A n Usual is a value of 15 for diagonal and 90 for Diagonal normal M Full Screen Preview Cancel ECx A The Diagonal option provides an alternative sharpening method that sometimes has better results than the Normal option Higher values for diagonal sharpening can often cause a distancing effect This can be used as a stylization filter 126 Enhance Local Contrast Effect Enhance Local Contrast allows you to increase the contrast of suitable pictures without the contrast becoming too harsh A dialog where you can enter the values for the radius and the value opens Enhance local Contrast Picture Before Zoom Radius z 0 10 pixels Amount z 83 00 _ Full Screen Preview Cancel The basic technique here involves an extremely unsharp copy of the image being crea ted that is used as a mask to compare the original and a version with greatly increased contrast with each other Normal values for Amount are 130 200 and 0 5 1 0 pixels for the Radius You will find further information at http www cambridgeincolour com tutorials lo
243. effects You can select the most important modes directly under Picture Mode Grayscale gt v Dither Minimize Color Table Change Bit Depth Dynamically 360 Change to B W 1 Bit 1 Change to 4 Colors 2 Bit 362 Change to 16 Colors 4 Bit 33 Change to 256 Colors 8 Bit 4 Change to 32768 Colors 16 Bit 365 Options 7 Swap Colors Change to Sepia Colorize Sepia allows you to color an image as was common at the start of the 20th century Colorize opens the Color Picker where you can select a color to color the picture after you click OK To make a black and white picture out of a color picture select Picture Colors Grayscale If the picture is a True Color picture 32 bit the grayscale menu will lead to a submenu where you can select the number of grays You will only obtain a result without losing quality with 256 Grays 4 Grays X 7 16 Grays X 8 256 Grays V 9 You can obtain the best number of grays for good quality by selecting Picture Mode Grayscale If you want to convert just part of a picture to grayscale select it with one of the selec tion tools and open the context menu Select Convert Selection into Grayscale If you 161 want to leave just specific parts in color you can select them and then select Invert Selection from the Edit menu You thus create an effect like with partly colored in black and white pictures You can select several parts of a picture by holdin
244. eft of the screen or press Command period For more detailed information see the chapter on slide shows on page 282 The Edit File Info IPTC option can be opened directly for example to enter copy right information see p 314 Only the content of the boxes where the check box has been selected is modified You can therefore use this option to enter yourself as the copy right owner for several pictures at the same time without changing any different key words for the individual pictures If you select a folder the changes will also be made to all pictures it contains The URL box is not part of the official IPTC standard and is not sup 252 ported by all programs Therefore it is better to enter your URL in the Copyright box You enter the copyright symbol with Alt G File Info Caption Keywords Categories Credits Origin Copyright Copyright OHagen Henke 2003 www elbsand de Bina The URL isn t part of the IPTC standard it is a Photoshop extension 5 X x Save Open Cancel CA The Edit Comment option allows you to enter or modify a comment for JPEG JFIF gra phics or for graphics you want to save If the option for creating resource forks is enabled under Preferences Save General this information is written to the resource fork Com ments in the resource fork are supported in the following formats JPEG GIF TIFF and PNG Open with allows you to open graphics in t
245. eight If you use a landscape for mat like 320 X 240 portrait format pictures will be reduced to fit the height of the film If all pictures are to be the same size you can enter the same value for the width and height Landscape format pictures will then have black bars at the top and bottom however If the film file is to be kept small enter small values like 320 x 320 If the size of the file is not important you can enable Use dimension of first image Reducing the Depth will reduce the size of the file The picture quality will decrease however 288 Show names allows you to display the image names with a definable Size Font and Text color at one of four possible Positions Antialias text only Mac OS X smoothens the edges of the text The Back Color is for the bars next to pictures that do not quite fill the selected format Use transition effects allows you to select QuickTime fading like Cross Fade via the Select Effect button Select Effect gt Compositors z Transitions Percentage to Cross Fade i i S Explode Implode 0 100 0 100 Zoom gt Wipes 3 EP TORETE z Load Save Cancel y K Compression allows you to call up the QuickTime settings to select a higher quality level Flatten Movie creates movies without resource fork so they can be loaded onto Web servers and are better suited to data exchange with other operating systems Dither al lows
246. el select Picture Show Al pha Mask Channel Any mask contained is shown as a white area against a black back ground In the following example a mask was defined for the pullover in Photoshop so that it could be excluded when the picture that was previously too dark was brightened In GraphicConverter you can define a selection with the lasso and then use Edit In vert Selection to select everything but the pullover shirt and make it brighter The content of the alpha channel can be deleted under Picture Remove Alpha Chan nel If a picture contains transparent areas or a selection you can create an alpha channel by selecting Picture Create Alpha Mask Channel from Transparency respectively Pic ture Create Alpha Mask Channel from Selection Convert premultiplied to non premultiplied and Convert non premultiplied to premultiplied both swap the premultiplied mode of an image Images in premultiplied mode can have advantages in particular if you are working with videos because the images can be mapped more quickly Flatten Alpha Channel overwrites the picture content with the content of the alpha channel to make it visible A transparency like an alpha channel can optionally be used If you delete parts of the picture with the eraser tool deleting is also carried out in the alpha channel 207 If you want to document the contents of the alpha channel you can use Picture Al pha Mask Channel to Picture to make the alpha chann
247. el are normally saved in TIFF format Layout programs like QuarkXPress and InDesign recognize the alpha channel so that the corresponding areas appear transpa rent There is no tolerance setting for the transparency tool If for example you want to set a white background area with colored shadows to transparent you can do so with the fill tool at first or also set white later Select white as the foreground colour and open the set tings dialog by double clicking the fill tool Enter a value between 30 and 60 for example as the tolerance and click the areas of the image that are not completely white to set them to white Click the white area again with the transparency tool The whole white area will now be set to transparent If you have already set pure white as a transparent color the area you set to white with the fill tool will immediately be displayed transpa rent The Mac OS clipboard does not support transparency The transparent area is lost when you paste into another picture If a transparent area was created by an alpha channel you can use the clipboard or drag amp drop between two windows If for example you want to copy a face from one image to another select the face with the lasso and copy it to the clipboard to paste it with Command V into the other image No transparency will be added If you use drag amp drop between two windows you need to 156 hold the shift key if you have selected Swap move selection with wit
248. el part of the picture The nor mal picture information is then lost Save the picture beforehand if you have edited it and then save the new picture immediately afterwards with a new name so you do not accidentally overwrite the source picture The second example picture with the white pullover area was created with this function The Picture Add Alpha Channel option can be used to create an additional alpha channel This can then be displayed with Picture Show Alpha Mask Channel You can add copied picture parts to this for example While an alpha channel is displayed you can switch back to the picture by selecting Picture Hide Alpha Channel from the same position in the menu Once an alpha channel has been created you cannot add another one with GraphicConverter If you receive an image to which you want to add an alpha channel that is saved in ano ther image you can copy the alpha channel into the target picture via the clipboard Open the source image select everything with Command A and copy the contents with Command c Next switch to the target image and insert the alpha channel with Edit Paste Paste into Alpha Channel If you open a picture with an alpha channel but do not achieve the desired effect this could be because the alpha channel needs to be inverted first Select Picture Alpha Channel Invert Alpha Channel or Picture Invert Alpha Channel If a picture contains a path created with Photoshop it will
249. elect the time zone of the location where you took the photograph if you adjusted the clock in your camera to the local time Timezone Please select the timezone of the exif data in the selected images Timezone UTC WET GMT B Cancel Co 324 In the GPX NMEA files the UTC time Universal Time Coordinated of the satelites is used that was previously known as Greenwich Mean Time If for example you forgot to adjust your camera clock to the local time while on a trip select the time zone in which you normally take photographs and which was set in your camera If it was summer time at your destination and this was set in the camera you will need to compensate this by selecting the local time minus one hour i e for example UTC 6 instead of UTC 7 GraphicConverter reads the photograph time from the EXIF data of the image file and searches for the best matching entry from the GPX file to transfer the position data This function is only available in the UB version of GraphicConverter The first versions of the iPhone 3G software had an error in the GPS data for photos from the built in camera The longitude and latitude were switched If you have images with this error use the Add or edit GPS values option to swap the values over You can delete GPS data in images with Delete GPS data in selected files Use Show Position in Google Earth to show the position where the picture was taken in Google Earth Tips The free pro
250. elow the medium level 50 JPEG JFIF Quality 98 low medium high Library O QuickTime JPEG 6 0 l Progressive Subsampling 4 2 2 default E C Calculate File Size Original Size New Size The calculated file size is only Show Preview correct if you save the file without a resource fork m Show this dialog before saving S JPEG files Resize to reach filesize 512 KB M write JFIF header l Special filesize use carefully Reduce quality to reach filesize si2 KB C Store JFIF after EXIF Embed if available v IPTC _ Comments CI XMP v EXIF wi ICC profile Mi Don t embed sRGB profile C EXIF Preview DCF compatible oe Maker Note and User Comment may contain per sonal details like the EXIF Maker Note owner name and serial number of the digital camera So maybe you want a EXIF User Comment Set ee camera a Eeeh 0K The preview which you can enable by clicking the check box if necessary allows you to judge the loss of quality The section can be moved with the mouse Creating the preview and calculating the file size may take longer on slower computers If the quality slider cannot be moved your computer does not have sufficient processor power In this case disable Preview and Calculate File Size and then enable them again af ter you have selected the quality level After saving the picture will not be displayed in its window at the actual quality level You need to close and reopen the pictur
251. entation of an image that has not yet been rotated physically using the EXIF information and displays the picture correctly in the browser and when it is opened However if you use this kind of picture in another program that does not eva luate the EXIF information it will be displayed incorrectly in landscape format To avoid this you should rotate all portrait format images physically The easiest way to do this is to always use GraphicConverter when importing The Rotate depending on EXIF setting needs to be enabled If you are working with images that have been imported in a different way you can rotate them physically later on This has the advantage that other programs will display the pictures correctly in portrait format Select the pictures in the browser and select JPEG Rotate depending on EXIF from the context menu You can recognize images that have not been rotated physically by opening one and checking the orientation in the Information palette in the EXIF section If the image is displayed correctly in portrait format and has a value other than one for the orientation it has not yet been rotated physically GraphicConverter sets the value for the orientation to 1 after physical rotation This value indicates that the first line in the visible image is at the top and the first column is on the left As usual in the technical field the first line or column is zero The following list of EXIF tags for orientation is only intended
252. ents An overview of the attached files opens There is an area below the overview where the current encoding is specified This area is a button although it does not look like one Click the area to open a menu where you can select another encoding method 73 see above A proper button for this option would be a useful new feature in the next version of Outlook 74 o J untitled El send Now Send Later fey Save as Draft hdd Attachments of Signature ES Options FE Rewrap Attachments 8 To Hagen Henke B Ce 9 Bee Subject P1010001 JPG GB P1010001 wes cp Add Q Find 3 Remove a Encode for Compression Any computer AppleDouble None Macintosh BinHex Macintosh Stuffit QO Windows MIME Base6 4 O UNIX CUUEncode Compatibility amp Efficiency J Append Windows extensions to file names A Send attachments to Ce and Bee recipients In Eudora 5 when you send attachments to Windows users click the BINHEX button in the e mail window and select AppleDouble mime from the pop up menu amp AppleSingle HN BinHex UU Uuencode Data Fork In Claris E Mailer select Base64 from the pop up menu for Encoding in the e mail win dow Outgoing Message Test message Out Box Subject Test message Send via _lemkesoft via ping net_ 7 TF amp lemkesoft lemkesoft Service defau V red_02 jpg No enc
253. er 245 Sound Batch Function 313 Source 37 Split JPEG data stream into single JPEGs 40 splitting 27 Spotlight 316 square 84 228 Stamp 113 starting the program 16 StartupScreen format 368 Stop batch 312 Storyboard 194 Stufflt Expander 8 13 Sub Category 43 subfolders 33 support 15 Swap Colors 174 Swap Fields 209 system color table 173 454 System Requirements 6 T Temporary Preview 236 Text below the large preview 271 text conversion 36 Text in Pictures 221 text tool 221 TGA format 368 THM file 242 threshold 164 Threshold Batch Function 312 TIFF format 369 tiled 234 Toast 262 Tolerance replacing a color 175 Tolerance when trimming 118 Toolbox 55 transparent 154 Triangle 167 triangle for opening folders 247 Trim Batch Function 312 Trim Options 118 Trim Selection 118 trimming 117 TWAIN 7 109 TWAIN Acquire 108 TWAIN folder 110 TWAIN Open Source 110 Type 286 U UFS partitions 30 Undo 122 152 Unicode 247 UNIX formats 6 Unselect 118 139 148 Unsharp 3x3 198 Unskew 178 update 12 Urgency 43 Use Netscape 216 Colors 173 Use Windows 256 Colors 173 user defined filters 199 using QuickTime 218 Vv Value HSV model 200 Vectorize 205 vertical 175 Video Batch Function 313 Video Grab Window 339 video pictures 209 Video Tips 210 View as Non Proportional 159 View as Proportional 159 View at Original Size 158 View Item s in Slide Show 252 Vign
254. er of different colors are related in the following way te ii Colors 7 hew 2 4 4 16 8 256 16 32768 32 16 7 million The number of colors is not the calculable maximum value because Macintosh compu ters only use 15 bit for 16 bit and 24 bit for 32 bit Dither Even normal color or grayscale pictures can be converted into pictures with a color depth of one bit This technique is worthwhile when you want to create an effect or if the pic ture is to be reproduced using a photocopier Some photocopiers have a photo button In this mode originals are dithered during copying This has a similarly good result as dithe ring and printing with GraphicConverter beforehand Unfortunately the whole page is dithered and thus also any writing that then becomes very unfocussed at the edges The refore we recommend printing dithered pictures and then copying them A lot of DTP programs like QuarkXPress as well as printer drivers dither pictures automatically upon printing In this case a picture does not need to be dithered with GraphicConverter and can be inserted in a document as a color or grayscale picture If you want to create an effect or dither a picture with a specific dither variant convert the color depth by selecting Picture Colors and then Change to B W 1 Bit If the Dither option is disabled under Picture Colors Options with a threshold value of 50 each lighter color is set to white while all col
255. er to a large value of around 200 MB in the Memory control panel to avoid problems when opening files 22 An open image is shown in a window In the context menu which you open by Ctrl cli cking the image you will find different options that are explained in more detail in the respective chapters ana GB IMG_18504 Pc RCE D Help Paste Select All View all saved windows as sideshow Open document folder in Browser xT Rename this file Copy EXIF as Text to the Clipboard Copy current foreground color as HTML Copy current color as HTML Cakculate Color usage Reveal in Finder Mae image insert Date Time insert Date Time Options Record mouse clicks Change image Border Color JHE You can modify the filename with Rename this file The change immediately affects the file on the hard drive and in the RAM In the General Display Windows section of the Preferences you can display rulers You can set the ruler units to cm for example at the top right with a pop up menu and on the General tab of the Information palette with the pop up menu at the end of the Size of pixel line e098 IMG_1712 tiff RGB a 13 vefe 1 1 i Pal Please note that the values in cm mm etc depend on the resolution Therefore change the resolution beforehand to 300 dpi for offset printing or to 180 dpi for printing on inkjet printers via the Picture Resolution dialog 23 Converting a picture with Save a
256. eral pictures from one picture that each contain part of the larger picture If you click the split button in the file selec tion a dialog opens where you can set the segments according to size or number 27 For example if you want to split a picture with a width of 960 pixels into three parts widthways enter 320 pixels as the width for the segments Split Set segments with Use the following characters for the name n name c column add more c s to add digits r rows add more r s to add digits absolute number add more s to add digits Size in pixel Number of parts Width 320 Pixel x extension Height 200 Pixel Sample The naming n cc rr x will create the first segment of Naming n cc rr x sample gif as sample 01 01 gif PTET If you select the Set segments with Number of parts option you can enter the num ber of segments for the long side and the short side Split Set segments with Use the following characters for the name O Size in pixel m name Numb E c column add more c s to add digits GMBEEOrR r rows add more r s to add digits i absolute number add more s to add digits RL C x extension Short Side 3 Sample The naming n cc rr x will create the first segment of Naming N CC IT X sample gif as sample 01 01 gif fone ae Cancel OK The individual files are automatically given a numbered name The scheme for the auto matically created name
257. erefore you should select Ask for TWAIN source before aquire 10 5 or later only in the Preferences General Plug ins to get the dialog for selecting the source before every scan The GraphicConverter Version 1 7 9 and higher allows integration of plug ins so that you can use additional import and export filters Each user can use these plug ins to pro gram special graphic formats and then integrate them into GraphicConverter An examp le plug in with its source code can be found at http www lemkesoft com Version 2 3 and higher of GraphicConverter also supports Photoshop filters that are compatible with Photoshop 2 5 Support Menu Sharing Frontier classic only enable this option if you are using the Menu Sharing program Ask for scanning a new page after end of scan is useful if you scan several pictures one after the other as you do not have to start the scan program manually over and over again If you scan several pictures one after the other they will be given numbered names The Reset scan counter upon launch option restarts the picture count each time Graphic Converter is started You can select Disable menu shortcut if you want to avoid the scanning program being started if you accidentally press the key combination This is useful if your scanning program crashes when the scanner is not connected 387 General Print The entries under Margins determine how large the margins should be on the printout These values a
258. erlaced so that they are dis played gradually from top to bottom on the Web If you click Adam 7 the overall graphic is out of focus at first but becomes increasingly sharper This code however makes the file somewhat larger PNG Interlaced None O Adam7 Filter O None O Sub Up J Average Paeth Automatic OCC ca Store gamma value v Store software name If you prefilter the graphics so that there is no quality loss they can generally be com pressed better This results in smaller files Select one of the possible prefilters under Fil ter The Automatic option creates the smallest possible PNG files Compression can take between 10 and 1000 times longer with the Automatic setting than with a specific filter because all filters are tested Store Gamma Value should be enabled if the gamma value should be written in the file Store software name writes the name of the creation pro gram in the file comment box i e GraphicConverter in our case PSD Photoshop Photoshop the well known graphics program has its own file format Photoshop o Compression None RLE Cancel If you save graphics in Photoshop 2 5 format you can choose between None and the RLE run length compression 365 RAW Unfortunately there is no standard RAW format meaning that some variants may not be opened by GraphicConverter Each camera manufacturer uses its own RAW format that in some ca
259. ero needs to be added to the front of three digit GPS codes 46 Back to the options in the pop up menu for the Convert dialog The Create Icon Preview option creates an icon and an overview for all selected files in the source directory Conversely Remove Resource Fork deletes an existing resource for all selected files This is useful for saving memory space for Internet usage or if you want to send pictures to PC users as they may have problems with the resource Under Convert Icon Preview in the Preferences you can specify that an icon and a preview are created Only if one doesn t exist This option saves a lot of time when you convert a number of files Preferences TIFF z WMF _ Only if one doesn t exist Save Custom Icon General Settings Slide Show Effects General Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time Icon Preview Index Misc Browser Display Default Undo General v S Se 7 S Cancel oK Calculate Superpalette calculates an optimum color palette with 256 colors for all se lected pictures This color table is saved as a file in the target directory and can then be used for manual color reduction or color reduction using Batch Set a saved palette for a picture by selecting Picture Colors and select Edit Color Ta ble from the submenu The color table can be edited directly in the dialog which opens and a saved table can be opened and
260. ers can display both versions correctly The three options Align Thumbnails TOP MIDDLE and BOTTOM set the position of the preview pictures This option is only useful when you have different sized preview pictures or to distinguish between portrait and landscape format If you have portrait and landscape format pictures in your catalogue we recommend using the Middle setting so 87 that the landscape format pictures appear in the middle of the neighboring portrait for mat pictures when in vertical position Charset allows you to choose a different standard for the type set when you design a Web page in a foreign language The Navigation pop up menu allows you to insert different colored arrows into the HTML pages instead of Textlinks Click on image moves to the next only works when a single image is displayed On the HTML Text tab you can insert additional text in various areas of the HTML page Catalog General File HTML Basic HTML Meta HFME Text Batch Addition to the body tag Text after lt body gt Text before lt body gt Addition to the head tag Open a Save e Cancel 0K Addition to the body tag allows you to enter additional HTML tags for the body Text after lt body gt allows you to enter additional HTML tags after the body Text before lt body gt allows you to enter additional HTML tags before the body Addition to the head tag allows you to enter
261. es Under User interface you can select Standard or Less complex Less complex versi ons of graphics can no longer be modified and the magnifying glass is automatically en abled This option is useful if you only want to use GraphicConverter for viewing graphics Save available allows you to save the user interface settings with a password If this op tion is saved it can only be changed from Less Complex to Standard by entering the password Click Password to enable the block by entering a password a second time This block can be lifted again by clicking Password and entering the password once Fast sorting only Roman font accelerates sorting in the browser for a slide show and when performing a batch conversion Use this option if you are not working with other font systems such as Japanese or Arabic because sorting speed will increase considerab ly for the various options If there are several thousand files the sorting speed can be re duced from 60 seconds to one second Choose a font from the pop up menu Standard as your Default List font Small lets you choose a font for lists displayed with a small font Use WYSIWYG font menus to display the fonts as they look in all font pop up menus If you enable Check for newer versions every week GraphicConverter will check for a new version one per week and inform you about any updates Clear Always resolve aliases completely if you want to avoid long waiting times when searching for
262. es of pic tures In the browser the selected picture will be displayed with a frame Display font sets the character set for the IPTC entries This is useful if you need special characters for foreign languages However you can also use this function if you prefer a different font to the default Geneva The options Save and Open allow you to save IPTC data and for example replace information for various graphics or set basic settings quickly and easily for new graphics The JPEG TIFF and Photoshop formats support the IPTC document information You can enter or edit keywords separated by semicolons on the Keywords and Catego ries tabs You can also copy the list from a word processing program You can also copy the IPTC information of a picture clicked or opened in the browser using Edit Copy Copy IPTC to the clipboard to assign it to all pictures selected in the browser or an open picture with Edit Paste Paste IPTC 317 To automatically enter the same or different IPTC document information in several gra phics at once for example from a database use the Insert IPTC option in the Convert dialog File Convert amp Modify For a detailed introduction and information on extrac ting IPTC information from several graphic files see page 42 In the browser you can quickly display the IPTC information by selecting Window Show IPTC Information The IPTC information for the picture under the mouse cursor is alway
263. ess the Command key to use the option that is not selected Disable Show anchor boxes if you want to use the selection without handles You can also change the size of the selection without handles at the corners and in the middle Disable Show selection frame if for example you need to position inserted picture sections to the exact pixel and the selection line is in the way Move image parts up after erasing selection If you select and delete part of a pic ture the part underneath is moved upwards You will probably only need this option when the selection stretches across the whole width of the picture Reposition windows after change moves the window for example after changing the zoom level to the top left hand corner of the screen This can be useful if the larger pic ture window does not otherwise fit on the screen 379 Drag using translucent selections displays the content of a selection as translucent as it is being moved For this option you must have a PowerPC with Mac OS 7 5 3 or higher It can take too long to move selections on slower computers which is why this option can be disabled Drag into top left of new window puts a section picture inserted by drag and drop in the upper left hand corner of the target picture in the exact position where you release it Use selected colors for all open images makes the foreground and background colors for all open pictures the same If you enable this option while you are work
264. ession GraphicConverter supports the following apps Ghostscript 5 1 or later ftp mirror cs wisc edu pub mirrors ghost EPStoPICT 1 2 or later http www artage com macps2pdf from MacGhostView http www kiffe com macghostview html UNIX gs MacOS X only http prdownloads sourceforge net espgs Please select one and click on Search to link GraphicConverter to the application on your harddisk or click on Cancel if you need to download one app You should first decide which module you want to download from the Internet and use Here is an overview to begin with UNIX gs Ghostscript is a free library that is only available for Mac OS X The Ghostscript program is free and only available for Classic Mac OS Under Mac OS X the module can be run in the Classic environment while GraphicConverter is run in Mac OS X EPStoPICT is a commercial program just for classic Mac OS and costs US 24 95 Under Mac OS X the module can be run in the Classic environment while GraphicConverter is run in Mac OS X macps2pdf is a subroutine from the MacGhostView package that costs US 20 and can only be used under Mac OS X After installing the selected module you need to specify which module should be used in the preferences You also need to selected the program file with Select Application unless you are using the UNIX version of Ghostscript The options used to open files in the different programs vary an
265. et to transparent in the area being added Canvas Size Current Size 4 6MB Width 1000 pixel Height 1200 pixel New Size 4 6MB Width 1000 pixel RA Height 1200 pixel PA Position O O O D S E Color of added area GE _ Remember previous values Cancel Ok ini Enable Remember previous values so that the values are available when you next call up the dialog You can also use the Add Remove Margins option It makes adding or removing a spe cific value on two or more sides more easy Add Remove Margins You can use Picture Size Add Remove Margins to change the size of a picture by ad ding or deleting margins This function is useful for example when you need more space for other picture parts in picture montages Add Remove Margins 480 Type in the number of points for each margin Positive values add and negative subtract the margins D GD 106 If the picture should be enlarged on the right hand side for example enter the cor responding value in the box to the right of the gray square At the same time you can add a margin on one side and delete the margin on another To delete enter negative values for example 30 The unit is pixels Scale with last Values If you want to scale several pictures with the same values this option saves you having to repeat entries Select Picture Size Scale with last Values to display the last values used in the Scale dialog and enter new values the
266. etting 328 VSpace 218 WwW What is color depth 162 White Correction 180 windows 234 WMF format 371 Word file export images 40 work environment 53 www lemkesoft com 12 X XBM format 371 X Face 219 XMP 39 X Position 220 X Resolution 105 Y Y Position 220 Y Resolution 105 Z zoom 157 455
267. example that you previously copied from another image Effect Enhance Local Contrast allows you to use an alternative method for increasing the contrast gently Images can be displayed in a tile arrangement This is useful as a preview if you want to create a pattern Enable the tiled display with Preferences General Display Content and drag the window further open if necessary The image is saved as normal In the browser you can copy files with Command C and paste them into another folder or into another browser window with Command V You cannot copy and paste files from the Finder Files cannot be cut out In the browser context menu JPEG Copy Windows EXIF Tags to IPTC allows you to move indexes that were added by Windows Explorer from the EXIF section to the IPTC section New features in GraphicConverter 6 0 Lossless trimming is also available as a batch 441 You can select small icons at the top of the browser via the context menu The formats j2c HD Photo and kdc are supported during import The crash report for Lemke Software can be disabled File Save for Web added Polygon selection tool added see p 148 Simple layer function for text added see p 223 GPS data from Google Earth can be inserted and flown to see p 322 Rulers can be displayed via Preferences General Display Windows Additional frames under Effect Edges and Frames Additional measuring functions for caliper rule Line rectangle
268. f Cancel b o gt For movies you can enter a maximum data rate in kB per second This is helpful when streaming videos for example to the Internet You can adjust the amount of data so that it corresponds to the transfer speeds to the viewer mrSID You can only open mrSID pictures if you have installed the corresponding Plugin You can download it for free from the Plugin section of www lemkesoft com As with ECW format 361 a dialog appears when you open a picture allowing you to select a section and a reduc tion factor Define mrSID import area and scale 0 Downsample 16 44 Range fo K Full gt 42963 Required memory 24 00 MB 39235 Note Click Into the preview to define an import area EConcel ox You can open the whole picture or just part of the picture so you just have to deal with smaller amounts of data Select a rectangle with the mouse or enter the values for the top left hand corner and for the bottom right hand corner as the Range Downsample al lows you to select a factor by which the image should be reduced With a factor of 8 a picture that is 8000 pixels wide would be reduced to 1000 pixels The Required memory for opening the picture is shown underneath GraphicConverter can also open pictures in mrSID format if they are in CMYK mode PDB see FireViewer PDB 362 PICT The PICT format is one of the original Mac formats developed over a long period of time It is a bitmap format which c
269. f a JPEG is modified and then saved as for example a TIFF the normal rotate option can be used because the file suffers no additional quality loss when saved The comment can be edited without losses using Edit Comment the context menu in the browser Image files in Photo Raw format may also contain a JPEG version of the image that you can export with Extract JPG from Photo Raw PhotoRAW only Fix file length of recovered JPEGs is useful when you restore JPEG files with rescue programs like for example Techtool after file system crashes They often end up being 100 MB instead of 20 MB In some cases Techtool cannot establish the actual size of the file and therefore creates a file that is too big You can reduce it to the actual size with this option 258 Remove Metadata opens a dialog that lets you choose the metadata you want to re move from the picture Remove Metadata from JPEGs Remove m EXIF XMP l IPTC and Photoshop metadata mM icc v Comment v Delete everything after EO marker l APP14 JFIF header lall other APP markers Note This function will also strip off the complete resource fork Also it ignores all files that do not end with jpg or jpeg Rebuild and repair Metadata reads all metadata from an image file that does not cor respond with the standards and can still be restored When you save the file the meta data is saved according to the standards Insert DESCRIPT ION file co
270. f black and white images small disable Use colors If the file size is not important this option can always stay enabled 400 Open Metafile Open DICOM ECW EPSF EXIF FITS General GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page PCD PDF Fhoto Raw PICT PSD QuickTime TIFF WMF Save Default Preferences Open Metafile Settings GEM Metafile Font number fo is Lucida Grande He Open Save Maximum width 1024 Maximum height 1024 Mi Calculate minimal size Font scale 0 80 Treat CGM coordinates without VDC tag as Integer O Real Undo gt Use Font number to identify and change the characters contained in GEM Metafiles You can assign several character sets one after the other and save them so they can be opened at a later time Maximum width and Maximum height set limits that may not be exceeded when opening files Larger images are proportionally reduced in size Calculate minimum size calculates the area taken up by the graphic when it is opened This option helps save memory The Font scale option scales character sets when they are imported from WMF files WMF is the Windows Meta File Format The Treat CGM coordinates without VDC tag as Integer or Real option allows you to open graphics saved incorrectly that would otherwise cause problems 401 Open Movie Preferences DICOM Open Movie Settings aoe FLH color encoding EXIF PC SVGA 32768 colors
271. f your web pages will be viewed with Safari 3 1 or newer exclsively you do not have to merge color profile into image Embed EXIF but has to be enabled In FireFox 3 you can enable color profile support Here you can find a how to http www fotohacker com 2007 12 04 modify firefox 3 to support color manage ment high_3 If you want to put pictures on the Internet for others to download you should leave Embed EXIF enabled The pictures can then be exposed correctly by a photo developing service because the color model mostly sRGB is given in the EXIF information The Merge color profile into image option should disabled as the pictures will otherwise have double profiles These pictures will be displayed too light and pale in Internet brow sers however 69 Reduce to 72 ppi changes the resolution entry in the file head and should always be selected Scale longest side to allows you to enter a value for the pixel size of the file you save The value is for width when the image is landscape and for hight when the image is por trait Sharpen should always be enabled when you scale down The preview shows the effect of sharpen and can be moved with the mouse Make filename ready for the web changes German umlaut characters like a to ae and replaces spaces with underline characters Comparing Pictures You can visualize the loss of quality in a JPEG compression for example with Edit Find compare and replace Compare Pictures
272. fault profile if the image has no profile option from the pop up menu If an image contains Uncalibra ted as the EXIF information or another entry that does not correspond with the standard like Adobe RGB for example the profile defined for EXIF uncalibrated will be used Click Change to select a different profile The color profiles are located in the User Library Application Support Graphic Converter Profiles folder The tilde stands for the name of the user After installing Gra phicConverter only the AdobeRGB1998 icc CMYK icc and sRGB icc profiles are available at first When you open an image with a color profile that GraphicConverter does not know yet it will be saved automatically in this folder You can use this option specifically 136 to save a profile from an image If possible select all existing profile files beforehand in the Finder to recognize the new profile file immediately If a profile is only available in another program you can add it to a test image there save it and open it in GraphicCon verter Then delete the test image as it will probably be displayed with the wrong colors because of the profile The profile defined for RGB is selected for RGB images without profile Accordingly the profile defined for CMYK is selected for CMYK images without profile 3 Do nothing if the image has no profile Only select this option if you are sure that color profiles should not be assigned to any images with
273. ff files in one process with single page Tiff files to chan ge the compression for example you need to select File Kind Same as Original in the options for the Convert dialog Single page documents will then remain single page and multiple page documents will keep all their pages TIFF Compression Format None Big Endian Motorola PackBits RLE Little Endian intel Q zw zi NFA File Kind _ LZW with Prediction single P Fil A CCITT 3 e e e O CCITT 4 zanen i CCITT Fill Order E High Bit to Low Bit New file after folder change Low Bit to High Bit Photometric Interpretation of B amp W images 0 White is Zero usual on MACs Embed Metadata if available 1 Black is Zero usual on PCs M iptc m EXIF m Export 16 bit gray if possible m xMP v ICC color profile Paths e goes comments _ Cancel 0K Stripe Stream 370 The Single Page File option makes several single page documents out of multiple page documents The Multi Page File option makes a multi page document out of seve ral single page documents You can use this function via the Convert dialog or more sim ply via the browser by selecting TIFF as the target format and enabling Multi Page File in the Options Select several files and click Start The first filename of the source files is used as the filename PDF format also supports multi page files If you want to create multi page PDF files first save them in TIFF format and then c
274. ff palette The close box at the top left closes the torn off palette The lines in the pattern have the foreground color The background has the background color To clear the pattern again select the pattern free box at the top left of the palette Windows In the Window menu you can use Minimize Window to send the current window to the Mac OS X Dock Bring all to front brings all GraphicConverter windows out of the dock Furthermore you can choose how to arrange the picture windows The icons indicate the position of the open windows The tiled arrangement helps you tidy up quickly 234 when picture windows start to become disorganized A proper arrangement provides you with a quick overview of all open pictures Arrange staggered Arrange staggered reverse Arrange left to right Arrange top to bottom Arrange tiled Arrange left to right is particularly suitable for portrait format pictures Accordingly Arrange top to bottom is particularly suited to landscape format pictures Arrange staggered allows you to find the pictures buried under other windows Window Cycle Windows brings the next picture to the front as the current picture in a circuit so to speak The names of all open documents are listed under the Cycle Windows menu item Click one of the entries to activate the corresponding window Pictures that are in the dock are indicated by a hash sign in front of the filename Viewing amp Sorting It is easy
275. folder 4 Set Folder _ ignore alpha channel v Use QuickTime for scaling Tile pictures v Ignore incomplete JPEGs Display Thumbnails Function Show errors l Write protocol Keywords Misc Open Preview Save Slideshow Settings Open Slideshow Settings J al Default Undo 4 Under General you can choose whether the slide show should use Fullscreen Display and whether additional monitors should also be darkened with Darken all screens When Fullscreen Display is disabled the slide show is displayed in a separate window In Mac OS X Ctrl clicking this window opens a context menu where you can select a trans parency level in percent The window will then be more or less transparent Show next image on second is useful if for example you want to see the next picture on your laptop Mac during a presentation using a beamer You then know which picture is coming next and can build up the tension by for example saying And you can see the result in the next picture Then you change the picture Note that you can only select on which monitor the main GraphicConverter window is displayed after connecting a bea mer or a second monitor in the General Monitor section of the Preferences The display of the Name at the top left of the screen with the label and optionally the path can be enabled and disabled Under Scale you can specify if pictures should be scaled and if so how If you
276. for different users General Clipboard Preferences General am General Clipboard Clipboard Digital Camera m Dither Display Content _ Add color profile ICC Display Windows z Edit _ Add mask region Memory Misc Put image as PICT and TIFF into clipboard Mac OS X only Monit TEE v Put and get RECTs and REGIONS to from the clipboard Print Open General Correct amp Change IPTC Y Formats BMP Deltavision DICOM ECW EPSF EXIF FITS GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page PCD vi I Default Undo Cancel GOK When transferring a PICT graphic to the clipboard select Dither to use the ditherCo py command The result is that the PICT is for example dithered in color in Word to im prove the display quality when a smaller version is displayed The disadvantage is that it takes longer to display the PICT Add color profile ICC adds the corresponding color profile to the picture in the clip board This option is disabled at first as there can be problems with the program that receives the data If you leave this option disabled the picture will be copied to the clip board without a profile Add mask region adds a mask to the image in the clipboard so an oval selection in the image is kept in the target program if it supports masks Put image as PICT and TIFF into clipboard MacOS X only will enable other Pro grams to use the image from the clipboard if they can read only on
277. for the page margins the font for the file information and the title can be made in the extended print dialog You can define a maximum of two top lines and one footer line by entering text or variables in the boxes Entries in the left hand box will be printed left aligned Content entered in the other boxes will accordingly be centered or right aligned amp deltapath allows you to print the path from the selected folder without the selected folder itself This is useful if you do not want parent folders to be shown Define Details which should be printed opens a dialog where you can choose which details should be printed under each image when Print with description is en 96 abled Click the desired details under Available Texts and click Add To remove a detail from Selected Texts click it and click Remove Select the Information Available Texts Selected Texts Name File Format Name without Extension f Add gt Memory Usage File Length File Creation Date File Modification Date Compression Req Time for Decompression Comment about File Format Exposure Time F Number Exposure Program ISO Speed Rating Date YYYY MM DD Time 4 Comp Bits per Pixel You can also Arrange Pictures depending on Resolution GraphicConverter reads the resolution from the pictures The resolution is stored in the file for most formats If you specify that you want to print at 300 dpi for example GraphicC
278. from there click Temporary if ppi value is equal or less than 72 or Always temporary Click the picture to display a larger version of it in the right section You can also select several pictures A histogram is displayed above the enlarged picture This is only interes ting for professional users A detailed view is displayed under the picture Move the red rectangle on the picture to select the section You can close the histogram and the detai led view by clicking the small white cross in the top left hand corner You can display the histogram and the detailed view via the context menu To select several pictures use Shift and Command click for example to move them to a different folder on the left or to the displayed folder in another Browser window You can expand a selection with Shift cursor left and Shift cursor right Tip You can use the Shift Lock key to select pictures as if the Command key was pressed This trick is useful if you want to select a number of pictures from a large stock of images as you do not have to hold down the Command key the whole time 236 If you drag files or folders to a browser window from the finder or from another browser window you can move or copy the pictures to the displayed folder or its subfolders As soon as you move the mouse over a folder a gray circle appears at the top left of the fol der The files will only be moved to the folder once you move the mouse over the circle To copy the fi
279. further HTML tags for the head section 88 You can enter so called Meta tags on the HTML Meta tab if you want your pages to be found by search engines and displayed for corresponding search names Catalog General File HTML Basic HTME Meta HTML Text Batch Mi Allow Search Site to build an Index Author Hagen Henke Description Language de Keywords Add text before lt a gt Add text inside lt a gt Add text after lt a gt Open pa Save E Cancel 0K First enable the Allow Search Site to build an index option Enter an Author and de scribe your page in the Description box An abbreviation for the language is already entered GraphicConverter selects this according to the language set for your Mac We recommend entering terms that you think might be entered as search strings by In ternet surfers as Keywords You can save your settings with the Save button at the bottom left and then use them again by clicking the Open button later on On the Batch tab you can also select a batch for the large images and the smaller preview pictures that you defined using the Convert dialog or via the pop up menu 89 on the browser toolbar This is useful for example if you want to add a watermark only to the large pictures Catalog General File HTML Basic HTML Meta HTML Text Batch Apply batch No Batch Sa Ganonin Open Save
280. g down the Shift key and dragging open other selections For further information on selecting see p 139 onwards Enable the Dither option in the Picture Colors submenu before converting to black and white to improve the picture quality After selecting Dither open the menu a second time and then you will see the Dither option indicated as enabled by a check Now select the required number of grays Pictures with 16 or 4 grays use less memory but are poorer quality If you reduce the color depth from 32 to 16 bit you will cut the file size considerably and normally only lose a slight amount of quality This reduction is only worthwhile if the pic ture format supports 16 bit PICT format supports 16 bit mode In the next step from 16 to 8 bit you will see a small or extreme loss in quality depending on the picture What is color depth Pictures can have different color depth levels Black and white pictures without graysca les for example an engraving have the shallowest color depth Only one piece of infor mation needs to be stored for each pixel dot or no dot Areas with dots are black areas without dots are white The computer requires two characters i e one and zero to dis play black or white Only a single digit number is needed for each pixel either one or ze ro This single point is called a bit Black and white pictures without grayscales therefore have a data depth of one bit 162 Color depth and the maximum numb
281. g other things A scanner profile will increase or change the red hues and all other hues that have been altered accordingly The result is a corrected picture You need to attach the scanner profile to the scanned picture by selecting it via the Source pop up menu while the picture is open Some scanning programs attach the profile automatically The profile will not need to be assigned manually in this case 137 There are also differences in the way various monitors display colors Color hues that are not displayed correctly can also be corrected with a profile A simple monitor profile can be created under Mac OS X in the Monitors section of the System Preferences Monitor profiles can be improved considerably if you connect a color analyzer to your monitor and create the profile using the special software provided You will not have to worry about the monitor profile after that GraphicConverter shows it in the color profile dialog to help you The monitor profile is not saved together with the image file It cor rects the monitor display in the background If you want to work professionally you should ensure that the lighting in your office al ways has the same brightness Black out the windows and use fluorescent tubes with D50 rating Paint the walls white or gray and lay white or gray carpet or flooring Adobe RGB If you selected the technically better color model Adobe RGB on your camera when ta king the pictures Uncalibrated will
282. g system such as UNIX The following paragraphs describe the procedures for Microsoft Outlook Express 4 5 and 5 Netscape Eudora and AOL You can set the Attachment encoding in Outlook Express 4 5 under Edit Options in the Outlook Express Create Mail section Select AppleDouble when sending to Mac 72 intosh users Base64 mime when sending to Windows users and UUEncode when sen ding to UNIX users BinHex is also suitable when sending to Mac users Optionen w Konten Nachricht erstellen E Mail Format beim Senden von E Mail Format beim Senden von News N Sexe HTML Q HTML Yerzeichnisdienste ik pren QO Standardtext Standardtext Allgemein Autostart amp Beenden Q Nachricht erstellen J Beim Weiterleiten urspr ngliche Nachricht markieren Rechtschreibpriifung Antworten im Internetstil verwenden Anzeigen A rs A Maximale Zeilenl nge re Zeichen Schriftarten w Netzwerk Frotokolhilfsprograrnme Anlagen Codierung e AppleDouble Base64 MIME UUEncode Bei Antworten gleiches Format wie im Original verwenden Proxies A Anlagen komprimieren lt Dateien empfangen BinHex Keine nur Daten senden Dateihilfsprogramme Cx In Outlook Express 5 you can only select the encoding for each e mail individually in the e mail window Click the small triangle to the left of the box for the current attach m
283. gle over the corresponding picture sections with the slice tool The rectangle can be moved with the mouse and the size adjusted with the handles To enter 78 a link Control click the required slice to open the context menu and select Edit Slice URL f 090 untitled mE tclub3 fenjer 100 w afad A dialog opens where you can enter the URL Uniform Resource Locator the Internet address HREF is the technical name for a slice link r Edit Slice URL Custom Name The address can be short for example http www heidelberg com or long It is easiest to enter long addresses using the clipboard Custom Name allows you to select a name for the file that is created for the slice If you leave the box empty GraphicConverter will automatically assign a name Delete Slice deletes a clicked slice Delete All Slices deletes all slices in a picture Save Slices as creates a file that should not be copied to the web server The file contains in formation about the slices and the links and is used to save slices and for example allows you to import them later for use in a similar picture Open Slice opens a slice file and displays the slices it contains 79 Optimizing Filenames for the Internet No special characters for example commas or foreign characters should be used in filen ames when you prepare pictures for the Web Numbers are allowed We recommend enabling the DOS filenames option for multiple con
284. gram GPSPhotoLinker shows the nearest town on the basis of the coordinates You can use your iPhone 3G or newer as a GPS tracker with the Trails program from the iTunes App Store The recorded GPX file can be sent to your home computer from Trails by e mail and imported into GraphicConverter If your pictures already contain GPS data you can export it with Create KML files for selection so you can edit them in other programs The KML files are saved in the picture folder Double clicking a KML file in the Finder opens the position in Google Earth for example Further use is processing in scientific GIS programs that can for example indi cate where a power line crosses a river You will find more information at www wikipe dia com or en giswiki org Links to topic of GPS and Geo Tagging These Web sites can convert GPS files http gpsvisualizer com gpsbabel and gpsies com GPS tracks for example for cyclists and hikers or distant countries can be obtained for a fee in some case at addresses like www tracegps com magnalox net www gps tour in fo and tracks4africa com DRIMaker instead of HDR If one part of a photograph is considerably lighter than the rest this area will often ap pear bright white or light yellow while the darker area will appear too dark With subjects 325 that are not moving you can solve this problem by using a series of exposures Take a pic ture of the subject using a tripod with three or more diffe
285. gram thoroughly If you use the program frequently you will need to register Click Order Now in the start dialog and select one of the regis tration options Our address Lemke Software GmbH PF 6034 31215 Peine Germany Tel 49 5171 72200 from the USA dial 011 49 5171 72200 Fax 49 5171 72201 from the USA dial 011 49 5171 72201 E mail support lemkesoft com When you receive your license key click Enter Code in the start dialog and enter the license information you received Start with the name writing it in exactly the same way as in your license information If you want to translate this manual please contact us support lemkesoft com Support If you have questions on GraphicConverter or have problems see also page 421 it is best to contact us by e mail support lemkesoft com If in your country support is available in your language through a distribution partner a corresponding entry will appear in the Help menu so you can send an e mail You can solve most problems by deleting the preference file see p 421 Please limit your attachments to 100 kB as we receive a very large number of e mails If you want to attach a larger sample file please ask us first Please remember that problems can often be indicated with a small section of a picture We are always glad to hear about any problems and new formats We would like to thank all users who have helped in the further development of GraphicConverter
286. h Color select a skin color from somebody s face and use a pastel color as the Replace Color If you want to swap two specific colors for each other select Picture Colors and then Swap Colors from the submenu Please refer to the previous chapter for information on this option Invert You can use Picture Invert Normal to invert the grays in a picture to negative or from negative to positive Use this function to convert scanned negatives into normal pictures or as an effect There are three different curves for color negative films This is why GraphicConverter offers three Variants in the submenu Simply try them out to find out which one provides the best results If you want to reverse the order of the pictures in a movie select Picture Invert and then Order of Frames from the submenu You can use Picture Invert Color Table to invert the color table of palette pictures if you want a 1 1 inversion to negative Mirror Imagine that the picture on the screen is a slide that you can turn around If the top is then still at the top you will have mirrored it horizontally If the top is at the bottom after turning you will have mirrored it vertically It is exactly the same in GraphicConverter with the horizontal and vertical mirror options If you can t remember that it doesn t mat ter You can just try it out and if necessary undo the change The small icons in the Pic ture Mirror submenu help however Of Hor
287. he blue triangle on the right By Name starting at Position ignores the first characters of the files which can contain a street name for example that is followed by the actual count You can enter how many places should be ignored in the Browser Misc section of the Preferences next to Positi on You can use By Hex in Name starting at Position if the hexadecimal system is used for counting The icon to the right of the blue triangle indicates whether folders are always displayed ahead of files in the middle section or whether the files and folders are displayed in al phabetical order regardless of type The open lock indicates that the folder displayed in the browser window is not read on ly If the left section does not display the directory structure or if you want to hide it click the Folder icon with the two small folders to the right of the lock The Favorites area is underneath the file tree There you can add frequently used folders to access them quickly Click the folder to be added in the file tree and open the context menu via the Favorites area Select Add current folder to favorites Click the icon with the magnifying glass to switch the large preview on the right on and off In a third mode you can click the icon again to also display the large preview image in a separate window that you can position anywhere You can use the Option Tab key board shortcut to switch between the modes The preview window can also be displ
288. he browser with Command C and paste them into ano ther folder with Command Vv Files copied in the Finder cannot be pasted For security rea sons it is not possible to copy files with Command X and delete them at the same time The Favorites area is underneath the file tree There you can add frequently used folders to access them quickly Tool buttons are provided at the top for the most important options You will also find these and other options in the context menu that opens when you Ctrl click a picture You can hide the toolbar by clicking the oval button at the top right of the window frame or in the Browser Display section of the Preferences with Show tools 238 General Preferences You can choose yourself which tools are displayed in the Browser Toolbar section of the Preferences Browser Toolbar Custom Icon i i Formats Available Functions Show Functions IPTC P A I Settings y Rotate left Ne Back Slide Show l S General Rotate right gt Forward Effects Cw gt Misc X Ee Move Folders S Find double asd Open Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 S Search Re p a Slideshow Convert bed Convert Text PTC cal hay o Errors Time jy New folder E Print Icon Preview Index E Trash Catalog Misc a Browser Upload E Mail General EA p da oot As Display Function Keywords s Mise v Show conversion option Open Preview Tn l Toolbar Ti
289. he program that you select in a submenu The submenu contains a list of all programs currently open If you have selected for example Photoshop under Browser Misc with the Select de fault Open with application button when you click Open with Open with Adobe Photoshop also appears as an entry in the context menu Rotate Mirror opens a submenu with the options for lossless rotating and mirroring Rotate 90 clockwise Rotate 90 counterclockwise and Rotate 180 rotate the image in the respective directions You can rotate counterclockwise by pressing Command R on the keyboard Command Shift R rotates 90 clockwise You can also rotate just the preview with Rotate thumbnail 90 clockwise counterc lockwise This useful for RAW files as they can be opened with GraphicConverter but not saved To freely rotate the image by entering an angle click Other Value in the Picture Ro tate submenu after opening the graphic as you usually do Mirror Horizontal mirrors the image on a horizontal axis without any quality loss Mir ror Vertical mirrors the image on a vertical axis without any quality loss 253 Metadata EXIF IPTC opens a submenu with the following functions Set Creation and Modification Date depending on EXIF Set Creation Date depending on EXIF Set EXIF Date to File Creation Date Shift the EXIF timestamp Set EXIF Date Rotate depending on EXIF PGs only Remove double orientation tags and rese
290. he selected images to an e mail pro gram to e mail them as attachments see p 243 Toast or iDVD allows you to transfer the files selected in the browser to Toast or iDVD Toast adds the data exported to its list of files to burn The files are not moved on your hard drive The pictures transferred to iDVD are inserted as a slide show The preview mode should not be selected in iDVD in this case The pictures transferred to iDVD are inserted as a slide show The preview mode should not be selected in iDVD in this case Unfortunately iDVD does not evaluate the profile information from image files and therefore displays profiled images for example like those from digital cameras too pale Therefore you should always use the iDVD with merged Color Profile Slide Show option for images with profiles The iDVD Slide Show option is only suitable for pictures without profile Images without profiles are for example scanned pictures if no scanner profile was atta ched or pictures from digital cameras that were saved with the Merge color profile into image for web usage option This option is available in the file selection dialog that opens when you select Save As If you select iDVD with merged Color Profile Slide Show the images with calculated profiles are saved in the Documents GraphicConverter iDVD Export folder that is cre ated automatically in your document folders Delete these pictures as soon as you have completed the current D
291. herefore recommend scanning pictures as close as possible to the required size If the Keep Proportions is option is disabled pictures can be distorted to create special effects when you change a single value Scale Picture recalculates the picture instead of just changing the value for the output size Reducing with this option lowers the number of pixels If you disable Scale Picture when reducing a note is simply made in the file that the picture should be outputted ac cordingly smaller Scale complete Movie does not only scale a picture from a film or animation in the dis play but all pictures from the film Select the Quickdraw Quartz algorithm to obtain the optimum image quality for nor mal applications A range of other algorithms are available for special tasks Dither only for standard QuickDraw scaling increases the quality of pictures with 256 colors except for line graphics This option will not interfere in your work with images that have a greater color depth and can therefore be left enabled Picture size an example If you cut a person s head out of a picture and want to glue it onto another person s body in another picture the head will often be too big or too small in the new picture Display both images at 100 zoom level and reduce the larger picture with the scale function Picture Size Scale by entering 80 as the width for example see above If the new size does not fit return to the initial ve
292. hile the clipboard window is open If you define a selection only the content of the selection is copied or cut A picture can be pasted from the clipboard onto the currently selected picture window with Command V or Edit Paste If you want to create a new window for the picture on the clipboard select File New and then Image with Clipboard from the submenu The picture from the clipboard will be copied into a new window If picture parameters are to be changed during this process select File New and then Picture with Clipboard from the submenu You can then change the Resolution for example This process is re commended in particular if the picture contains vector information as this information on pictures from the clipboard is only evaluated with this option and can cause a notable in crease in a quality when the size is changed for example Note that PICT pictures can also contain vector information Options for PICT Import Source File Width 1483 1483 pixel Hor Res 300 300 ppi Height 867 867 pixel Ver Res 300 300 ppi New Settings Depth No Change Change Change Size Depth 256 Color r roportiona Palette SystemC 4 Non Proportional lulu Width 486 pixel pou Height 352 pixel O Change Resolution Hor Res 72 ppi pron P arema Ver Res 72 ppi Cancel E The source data is shown in the top part of the dialog for orientation If for example you are preparing pictures for a
293. his dialog before printing Margins Position Left 0 000 cm cas ee re O 6C Top 0 000 cm H0 e Right 0 000 cm Bottom 0 000 cm Use printer s minimum Ew However if you want to copy documents like letters the setting Trim image will be bet ter as most documents do not have text around the margins Before you start copying you should click Use printer s minimum under Margins in the print options dialog so that GraphicConverter reads the print margins from your prin ter Using the Stamp for Touching Up Scanned pictures often have small marks caused by dust You can see these faults easiest if you display the picture at a zoom level of 100 Select Stamp in the toolbox and hol ding down the Alt key click an area in the picture with the same color or the same struc ture as the fault area Click the area to be stamped without holding down any other keys and move the mouse over the whole of the area to be touched up 113 The mouse cursor will turn into a double circle Everything inside the inner circle will be stamped The edge of the stamp is softened The effect of the stamp gets weaker towards the second circle You can set the size and smoothness of the stamp by double clicking the stamp tool The following dialog opens Stamp Size Preview a A Smoothness _ _ _ eee i Always use unstamped picture as master Cancel on Like in Photoshop Always use unstamped pi
294. hout content shortcuts Zoom You can use the Zoom function to display pictures enlarged or reduced on the screen The output size of the picture is not changed by this The window size is adapted to the picture upon zooming if possible This function can be disabled with Resize window af ter scale zoom in Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences General Display Windows You can select the zoom level using Zoom in the Picture menu It is faster in most cases if you select the zoom level at the bottom left of the picture frame There are various possibilities here You can select the number and overwrite it with the required zoom level You don t have to enter the percentage sign Press Return to com plete your entry Single clicking the black triangle next to the zoom level opens a pop up menu where you can select zoom levels This menu is exactly the same as the one under Picture 157 Zoom and can also be called up by clicking the picture while holding down the Control and Option keys View at Original Size View at Maximum Size 0 View at Window Size CHF View as 5 View as 6 25 View as 8 33 View as 12 5 View as 16 67 View as 25 View as 33 33 View as 50 View as 66 67 View as 85 v View as 100 a View as 150 View as 200 View as 300 View as 400 View as 500 View as 1000 View as 2000 View as 5000 View as Proportional View as Non Proportional Zoom In a Zoom Out Some of the z
295. how script menu change requires restart Sos vi Use sound effects Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time Default Undo J Under Units for various dialogs you can select Metric i e meters or centimeters or In ches Reset all Notification Dialogs reactivates all messages that you disabled You can skip display of the splash screen in the registered version of GraphicConverter so that you can begin your work more quickly Disable all notifications switches all messages off This setting is useful if you call up GraphicConverter options with an AppleScript as the messages will then not interrupt the script process Allow display of invisible files will display invisible files in the file selection dialog Use Zoom Effects enables the zoom effects that open pictures like the unfolding petals of a flower Use File Exchange Internet Config configures File Exchange so that graphic files can be automatically opened with GraphicConverter from diskettes If you click the Confi gure File Exchange button another dialog opens where you can select whether to over write or add to the File Exchange settings 382 You can disable Use Smart Crash Reporter to notify developer upon crash if you do not want to send messages from the Smart Crash Reporter to Lemke Software You can disable Use sound effects if you do not want to hear sound effects for exa mple when deleting fil
296. iPod Nano G3 the option Include full resolution photos will also appear You can use this function to copy the photos to 281 another computer The image files will be copied to the path iPodname Photos Full Re solution Year Month Day If the photos were taken on several different days we recom mend using a USB stick to which you can copy the images via the Finder Slide show Click File Slide Show to show a slide show on the screen A file selection window opens where you can select a folder The graphics contained in this folder and its subfol ders are displayed on the screen against a black or other colored background for a set amount of time You can start a slide show from the browser easily by selecting the required pictures and clicking the slide show icon or pressing Command G If you have not selected a pic ture Command G will start the slide show and include all subfolders To compile pictures from different folders in a slide show you can drag the pictures to the drop area at the bottom of the browser Display the drop area by clicking the icon with the arrow in the browser footer Start the slide show using the context menu that you open by Control clicking the drop area For more details see p 246 onwards If the context menu extension for GraphicConverter has been installed you can also display a folder in a slide show using the context menu in the Finder Graphics that are larger than the main screen are disp
297. ial mode similar to the elliptic selection tool Select the iris The iris is the area around the pupil that is blue brown or green Once you have made the elliptic selection the pupil is darkened and made smaller You can specify how dark and how small the pupil should be Reduce Level for Pro The Red Detection Level decides when a red tone is recognized as a pupil and bla ckened It may be worthwhile setting the threshold value high in pictures with a lot of red so that any parts of skin that you accidentally select are not darkened Select Effect Red Eye Settings and try different values out You can use Red Eye Co lor to define a color to be set for the pupil Remove Red Eye Settings Darken Level Reduce Level for Pro 20 Red Detection Level 30 Red Eye Color 0K If black is too dark try a dark gray Click the color box and change the color in the color selector If black was the starting color and the color circle is selected as the color model at the top left you simply need to push the slider upward to get a dark gray Reset allows you to reset the values and the color to the default settings The result of the Red Eye Pro effect may have faults that you can remove with the stamp 151 Stamp over the line from the outside to the center Set the source point over and over again by Alt clicking the area around the line you want to stamp The result will normally not look so nice at high zoom leve
298. icConverter 0 cece cece eee nce eect e een tent eenennens 108 Using the Stamp for Touching Up cece cece cece eee n ene e tence een ennenes 113 EXOT sevens edt ihecre ahaa idence unset dais Beene E ciabatta ieee a abet 114 Importing Pictures from Digital Cameras ccc cece cece eet e teen e ne eenenee 114 TAMMING aie A ae teal NR Shr oes N A ot oe eg 117 ROCIO cass oni caste gd gus cg an dcgen tie dara earn E asd ani co E AEE TEET ARE wana E oad 119 Unsharp Mask and Sharpen Edg S 0 cece cence nee een een eee en tee entennenee 124 Enhance local CORT ASCs 44 4 lt 5i s o043 kod vends dee eheaeeddecasrecdsiaalie EERS 127 Brightness and COntrast 5 as04s49 each agar apenas es bag kaa pes dsb e GaN er sas aan ees 128 Color COME CHION esee ee We ua esa oaatia ee E a Oya aus Me A tsa rk uw aA 132 Color Profile Wl IPCClorSyne Siw et volts cant coheliw ats ct wea Vow ata mie leat Joes 135 Selection cd nec ewes ne veer o woreda naga a a gate are eaten regan ee 139 Removing Red Eyes i csssvsssetabecaseveboaeedecasovsberdsusaaseasbeadecuabecwa 149 ae Ce Rte pete aren Rai ea DoDD ere a Ear RM PE a C 152 RGBand CMYK 35 544 5 5 gpa paces ew ded ho aero Sch ee A ea dw OE 152 Transparent oso svat tea sat En sede EN tel di eae tee eee cua es N te 154 LOOM sas isn onni eni anetad ee ETE taupe aiden fa neta bea A a a a Bare ied onde ce 157 ES EA AE hola wert osg uta M TEE ES E dell EAT wuts 160 Colors Modes and Color
299. icConverter Options 95 In both cases a dialog opens with options for printing the catalog such as the number of copies of each page Font Geneva a Size of Header 12 fe Size of Text 9 fA Top lines max 2 Footer line Defies values Apah complete path Sfokder tokter rame pape asrem page manmer wee with number to add an offset A papes tota nerber of pages kome printing date Scourter cower use with mmber to add an offset Define Details which should be printed _ Print with description z Arrange Pictures depending on Resolution Resolution of pictures 300 fe pp ag Arrange Pictures with fixed Number ae Horizontal Pictures 2 Vertical Pictures 2 n O Arrange Pictures with fixed Size HU Horizontal Width 2 ED em Vertical Width 7 00 em Print Catalog Margins Left 0 000 em Top 0 000 cm j Right 0 000 cm Bottom 0 000 cm v Shrink Images a bit to avoid printing directly next to each other z Reduce Resolution to Printer Resolution M inctude subfolders wv Sort folders separately ww Print each folder on a new page _ Rotate image for optimal paper usage Show this dialog before printing _ Use only default printer resolution normally 72 ppl Frame Thumbnails F Print all pages from multipage files SEE CZ Text Frame color Background color GraphicConverter creates the pages to be printed and prints them directly on the prin ter Settings
300. icture _ Before After lt Standard gamma value for images without gamma value 1 80 The standard gamma values are 1 8 for MacOS and 2 2 for Windows B Full Screen Preview Cancel Coxa A zoomable preview will help you with the settings even when you use the standard values You can move the section in the left hand window If you set the picture to the Windows gamma value 2 2 it will appear darker on your Mac as in the preview It will be correct under Windows however since pictures with a gamma value of 2 2 are normal there You more or less need to use your imagination with the preview To set all pictures to a gamma value other than the Mac OS standard value enter a value other than 1 8 in the lower input box If for example you are exclusively creating pictures for the Internet the mean value of 2 0 would be a worthwhile alternative Remember to change the value back if you edit pictures for further processing and printing on Macin tosh computers PNG format solves this problem as it displays the pictures automatically in a way that all users see the picture correctly no matter what operating system they are using and what original operating system was used to create the picture The display software does need to read the gamma information however PNG format can be used on the Internet Opti mize your pictures as usual for PNG format without correcting the gamma at all and se lect PNG format from
301. iew and icon into resource fork Vv Show last file format upon save as Vi Show only usual file formats Slideshow v Use effects Change image after s O Change image after click Browser v Show only basic commands in context menu M Create and add previews automatically _ Enlarge small previews for display v Use number sorting Misc Check for connected digital camera during startup Go to extended preferences Co You can save the current preferences with GraphicConverter Environment Save current settings as A normal preferences file is then saved under the path Username Library Application Support GraphicConverter Environment 372 File Edit Picture Effect Filter Special Window About GraphicConverter IMG_10858 jpg RGB License Environment Ai v Hagens Standard 2 Hagens Standard Preferences 3 Save current settings as Save Current settings to active environment Hide GraphicConverter 3H Delete active environment Hide Others XH Show All Services gt Quit GraphicConverter Q You can enter your own filename Use the Save current settings to active environ ment option from the same submenu to save the current preferences Delete active environment deletes the current environment file The preferences are kept however and are saved to the preferences file when the program is closed You can use this func tion to save different preferences for different types of work or
302. ified and not converted The folder name is used as the file name for the PDF file with the extension PDF The preferences for the target format and the target folder are igno red by this option This option is useful if you want to assign patient numbers to image files for example as a patient number will then only need to be assigned once to the PDF file Fix Lumix FZ20 2GB TIFs repairs TIFF image files that were written incorrectly by the Panasonic camera model Lumix FZ20 Further Settings for Convert amp Modify GraphicConverter issues an error message if Errors occur during the multiple conversion Multiple conversion only continues once you close the error message To avoid this an al 50 ternative can be selected in the preferences under Convert Errors so that a log file is created on the desktop where all error messages are written Preferences QuickTime Convert Error Time Settings TIFF WME Q Show alert Save O Save to log file Custom Icon 5 General Copy files that can t be converted Settings Slide ie Idle time during automatic conversion po js Effects General Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time Icon Preview Index Misc Browser Display Default Undo v _ _ _ eS General Enable Copy files that can t be converted if the source folder also contains HTML files for example that are to be copied into the target folder For
303. ight value If an even blue sky is to be selected a low tolerance of about 10 will be enough If a creased white shirt is to be selected the tolerance needs to be set a lot higher to about 70 This technique does have its limits however and you will not always manage to select a reasonably single colored area properly with the Magic Pen Don t give up too soon though Once you ve mastered the Magic Pen you can definitely work faster than with the Lasso 147 Polygon If you want to define a selection exactly around an object you can work with the Polygon tool Hide the Operator by clicking the oval button at the top right of the window if it is displayed Zoom as close as possible into the image and click along the outline of the ob ject at short intervals to produce a line The smaller the intervals the more accurate the selection will be You will not see a point after the first click It will only become visible with the line and the second point after the second click Close the polygon by placing the mouse cursor over the first point and moving the mouse slightly until the cursor changes to a crosshair Now press Return on the keyboard to close the polygon As soon as the polygon is closed it will behave like a selection whose content can be trimmed copied or moved The position of the individual points can now be moved with the mouse Move the mouse over the point until a point appears next to the mouse cursor and then move the po
304. iginal pictures that has the same name as the first sour ce picture You should rename the new picture to avoid confusion If all pictures appear individually in the target directory instead of a single file you have forgotten to enable the Create Movie option in the Options dialog Playing and Editing GIF Animations If you open a GIF animation or a playable film in GraphicConverter a Play button will ap pear at the bottom left of the window frame like on a CD player Bjal 1 20 iog Click this button to start and stop the animation or film The buttons to the right are used to jump to the next or previous picture These also work during playback The num ber of the current picture in the sequence of pictures is displayed in the next box The number after the slash is the total number of pictures contained in the animation You can call up the palette for further settings by selecting Window Show GIF Anima tion When you open a QuickTime movie it will be converted into a GIF animation after a security query by opening the palette This palette is constantly updated while the ani 191 mation is running to show the settings for the current picture The animation may then run slowly on less powerful computers as this process is relatively complex Stop the ani mation to change the settings e GIF Animation Delay s Global Color Table Options o Transparent m Apply changes to all frames Croa local Colar Tab
305. ilename may be replaced by the file ending when carrying out a conversion If two source files differ by the last three to five letters only they are identical after the change of name In this not so unlikely case the second file would overwrite the first file in the target directory We recommend clea ring this option Keep original date after conversion leaves the original date after the file conversion 33 Show hidden files displays invisible files that have been made invisible because you will probably never need to access them Remove batch actions after quit deletes defined batches after they have been run The advantage of this is that you cannot forget to delete a defined action However it also has a disadvantage the batches will need to be redefined if you happen to need them again at some time Delete source files after conversion deletes the source files after the conversion pro cedure All pictures from a photo CD are converted or copied to a folder that is automatically created and is named after the serial number of the CD with Convert PhotoCD images to folder with CD serial Separate layers of Photoshop files allows you to open Photoshop pictures that conta in several levels with separate pictures Add background layer inserts the background layer of the Photoshop picture in each picture created Use layer name for file sets the document name to the name of the corresponding layer Allow conversion to same folder a
306. indow Use last default set tings uses the last settings or the default settings Check the Internet weekly for new version will automatically inform you about Gra phicConverter updates Change file type and creator upon opening files changes the file type to that of Gra phicConverter when opening the file and not when saving it Select this setting if you want to open all graphics that you open with GraphicConverter next time by double cli cking Check the Internet weekly for new version will automatically inform you about Gra phicConverter updates Change file type and creator upon opening files changes the file type to that of Gra phicConverter when opening the file and not when saving it Select this setting if you want to open all graphics that you open with GraphicConverter next time by double cli cking Show first steps dialog opens the following dialog for selecting a function 18 Next the first steps dialog for choosing a function is displayed GraphicConverter first steps What do you want to do Open an image Open a browser Show a slideshow Do a batch conversion Do something else ES C Don t show this again Cancel OK The first three features open the file selector allowing you to select an image to open or a folder to browse or display as a slide show Do a batch conversion opens the Convert amp Modify dialog Do something else will close the dialog without opening any fun
307. ing the fore ground or background color is only applied to all open pictures after the corresponding color is changed Remember last selected tool for new windows ensures that the tool selected from the tool palette is also selected in the tool palette for new pictures Remember last settings for new windows ensures that the toolbox settings like for example the pen thickness and color also apply for new windows after the last window has been closed Show pixel bounds displays a thin line around each pixel so that the borders can be clearly seen at higher zoom levels and for pixels of the same color Swap rotate 90 clockwise counterclockwise shortcuts swaps the Command R key board shortcut for rotating counterclockwise with the Shift Command R keyboard short cut for rotating clockwise Select this option if you have to rotate images mainly clockwi se and want to use the more simple Command R keyboard shortcut You should use Disable toolbox shortcuts if you do not want to change the tool using the keyboard This could for example be useful if you occasionally press V instead of Command V and do not want to select the transparency tool Enable Swap move selection with without content shortcuts if you want to click inside a selection without its content and without the Shift key to move it If you enable this option you can move the contents of a selection for example after inserting by hol ding down the Shift key You can enab
308. ing lamp Your monitor and scanner need to be calibrated with a special tool or special method Repeat the monitor calibration on a regular basis and wait half an hour before editing pictures on tube monitors so that the monitor becomes warm and the colors are displayed correctly 3D Effect You can achieve a simple 3D effect for viewing with red green glasses by opening a sui table picture selecting everything with Command A and copying the pictures to the clip board with Command C Cancel the selection with Escape Then click Effect Channels and Move image as Grays into Red Channel in the submenu that opens The picture will now look red Select Edit Paste and Paste into Green Channel from the submenu that opens The picture will now look yellow If you look at it with red green 3D glasses it will look three dimensional You can check the success with Effect Channels Split Select a lower zoom level to display all three channels next to each other The third blue channel re mains empty and therefore appears black eeAea Jjugendtag_Spansberg_O1 Kopie 2 tif RGB mm weed Transparent For the Internet and also for printing you may need pictures with transparent areas through which something in the background is visible The transparency can be achieved using two different techniques A transparent color can be selected for images to be used on the Web and a mask is normally added to the image in an alpha channel for printing
309. ing the picture may take a moment The result is an unskewed picture Trim the image as required to remove any unwanted edges 6 S DSCNS317Jpg ma viise ia tt ir fi Rav oad It is a good idea to sharpen a little after unskewing White Correction Select Effect White Correction if you want to remove a color cast from a picture It does not matter whether the color cast was caused by a camera error during automatic white correction or whether the light was colored when the picture was taken In our example picture the light was yellow because of a sunshade There must be a point in the picture 180 that should actually be white Click this point The white point will then be moved accor dingly If the colors are not improved try with another point j amp GraphicConverter File Edit Picture Effect filter Special window Help aeoe Copy of IMG 7281 JPG RCS MEEN QuickTime Effects Effect Apply QuickTime Effect provides you with all QuickTime effects for pictures in one dialog The effects that appear in this dialog depend on your QuickTime version and whether you have installed additional third party filters for QuickTime We can therefore not guarantee that all of the following QuickTime effects are available on your computer 181 Some effects like brightness are also available in GraphicConverter Filters like Emboss with which you can convert an image to a metallic looking stamp are interesting howe ver
310. ings Slide Show Maximum compare length 20 General A Effects M Use lossless JPEG rotation mirroring Misc _ Don t modify EXIF data Move Folders a g Move Folders 2 M Keep original file date Move Folders 3 Fl Don t alert Convert peas Convert Text IPTC Keyboard Errors Time M Space bar toggles between label none and label 1 Icon Preview Index Mi Tab key toggles between lists Misc M Cursor keys loop selection at list bounds Browser General Rating and Label 0 7 set label control 0 Ea Context Menu 1 x Display General Return Enter Return edit filename Ent H Display Thumbnails M Keep original file date after IPTC change Function z Keywords Write labels in XMP metadata Misc l Write IPTC data into NEF files Open Preview Ee eg os Avil Default Undo Cancel GORD Use lossless JPEG rotation mirror ensures that there is no quality loss when rotating and mirroring JPEGs Disable Don t modify EXIF Data if you want transfer pictures back to a camera for exa mple to show them on a television using the camera This setting has the disadvantage that the EXIF preview cannot be rotated You should only disable Keep original file date if the date is to be set to the change date You should disable Write labels in XMP metadata if the labels do not have to be com patible with Photoshop CS2 as the labels can be set considerably faster in this way Don t alert suppresses the warning message that
311. int You can also move individual points before you close the polygon You cannot add or delete any points later on Invert Selection and Fill Selection with Foreground Color If you want to select everything except for one part of the picture first use one of the se lection tools to select the area and then select Edit Invert Selection The selection then remains visible but a further selection borderline can be seen on the outer picture edges Now everything between the outer and inner selection line will be selected You can make this clearer by highlighting the selection with Edit Fill selection with foreground Color Clearing and Recalling a Selection You can delete a selection by pressing Escape esc selecting Edit Unselect from the menu or by clicking next to the selection with a selection tool Use Shift Control click to recall a cleared selection at the mouse cursor If the mouse is near the edge of the win dow the selection will be reduced so that it fits in the picture To obtain exactly the same 148 selection as before the delete action you should therefore place the mouse as close to the center of the picture as possible You cannot call up a deleted selection automatically at the same position Removing Red Eyes The so called red eye effect often occurs when you take snapshots with automatic came ras You see the red retina in the eye instead of a black pupil because the flash shined di rectly into the eye
312. ion The files will then be smaller By using this setting you will never forget to attach profiles to other pictures for example pictures from scan ners with profiles With the EXIF data you can specify whether the EXIF preview the Maker Note and the User Comment are also saved The EXIF preview has the advantage that it can be dis played in all operating systems The Maker Note and the User Comment may contain your name and the serial number that you may not want to forward with the picture file Disable these elements if necessary therefore You should enable iPhoto compatible EXIF if you want to transfer pictures to iPhoto The pictures will then be saved without EXIF Maker Note and EXIF User Comment 358 The EXIF preview can be saved in the file and is created again for this The advantage is that this preview can also be displayed in other operating systems Unlike EXIF previews of pictures from a digital camera newly created EXIF previews have a higher quality Resize to reach filesize allows you to set a target file size for the image being saved Only the Scale option is used for this The JPEG quality remains as set above It is more worthwhile to carry out this kind of optimization with Convert amp Modify and the batches as the pictures can still be resharpened with a further batch as is always necessary after scaling see p 302 Reduce quality to reach filesize allows you to specify a target file size for the image you ar
313. ion in the source format with a new name from the index option if you wish Invert Direction reverses the order of the selected files Insert Row inserts a row above the selected row Delete Row deletes the selected row Index Options calls up the preferences with the index options for the menu items Save all Items as and Save all Items in Source Format as You can take a look at the ani mation created here at http www foto service links de Gamma Correction The Gamma Correction can be used to set a different gamma value for pictures The gam ma value is responsible for the contrast and therefore indirectly for the brightness of pic tures It would be a technical detail that is managed by the operating system alone were it not for there being Windows in addition to the Mac OS and both systems working with 195 a different gamma value All versions of the Mac OS presume the target gamma is 1 8 Windows 2 2 Pictures optimized on a Mac without gamma correction therefore appear to be high contrast and too dark under Windows Pictures from the Windows world however appear slightly too flat on Macs If pictures edited under the Mac OS are to be published on the Internet or on CD ROM for example they may be viewed on a Windows PC and appear too dark Therefore chan ge the gamma value accordingly under Effect Gamma Correction either to the uni versal mean value of 2 0 or 2 2 for Windows PCs Gamma Correction P
314. ion is lost as in this case the picture will become just a normal pixel picture Vector pictures can however be converted from HPGL into PICT format without losing vector information using File Convert In word processing programs and DTP programs that can process vector graphics the vector pictures can be scaled as required without losses this is excellent in the papyrus word processor by rom logicware de that is unfortunately only available for Windows 95 Atari and OS 2 Mac developers get in touch 205 Pictures made up exclusively of lines and surfaces for example scanned logos are most suitable for vectorization Lines and surfaces should be continuously black for vectoriza tion in GraphicConverter Programs that are specially designed for vectorization can also vectorize color pictures A broken line on which the paper structure and the pen have left gaps in the black area will not be represented by a single line after vectorizing but by several small ones that imitate the grayscale of the broken line Here is a greatly enlarged section from this kind of line This large number of lines called paths slows down work with these kinds of graphics Even just a few lines in the source drawing lead to ten thousand paths Logos often have to be reproduced for business stationary as the orderer cannot provi de the required data To reduce the work you can try to scan the logo from a letterhead for example
315. ions of Com mand U and Alt U so that Command U rotates permanently and Alt U only rotates for the time the image is displayed in the slide show The functions of Command Z and Alt Z are swapped in the same way 296 You can enable Go to next image after change of label or rating if you want a slide show to move onto the next picture after a label or a rating has been added This setting is particularly useful if during the slide show you switch to the next picture using a mouse click or the space bar and not after a set time Under Slide Show Files you can enter file extensions you want to ignore in the lower section The HTML extension appears in the list as it does not make sense to display HTML files as pictures Click the list to modify it The Default button returns all the settings to their defaults The Undo button resets the settings to what they were the last time you opened this dialog Preferences Misc Monitor Slideshow Files Plug ins Ignore extensions separated by a space P Do THM TXT HTM HTML EXE DLL P C PAS CC ASM COM SYS General LST DOC XLS PST OST INI PPT INF SIT ZIP TAR MIM GZIP Correct amp Change IPTC __ Show content of Thumbs folders aie Ne C Show content of Originals folder General Custom Icon Formats IPTC EXIF Settings Slide Show General Effects Files Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Comert Text PTC Errors Time icon Preview index Misc Browser General Co
316. is ful You can drag the folders i the lint to change their order include ful resolution photos Copy ful resedutinn versions of your photos into the Photos folder on your iPod which you Can access after enabling disk whe In the Synchronize photos from pop up menu you can select a folder for synchroni zing with Choose Folder Select your picture folder or a folder with selected pictures Aliases cannot be used All photos copies all photos from the selected folder on the iPod Subfolders appear as albums on the iPod The pop up menu All is only available if you synchronise from iPhoto or Aperture Selected folders allows you to select which subfolders are to be synchronised If you add or rename folders in the Finder or in GraphicConverter you can update the list by clicking Apply at the bottom right of the iTunes window or by switching to another tab and back To sync new pictures on your iPod we recommend adding the picture folder selected in iTunes as a favorite at the bottom left in the GraphicConverter browser Display the re quired folder in the browser and open the context menu by Ctrl clicking the Favorites area Select Add current folder to favorites Hold down the option key and drag the new photos for your iPod to this folder to create a copy Now start the synchronization in iTunes Click Apply and Sync to copy the selected pictures to the iPod The images are then re duced If your iPod can be used as a volume like the
317. is height In the left section select the If function to define a condition under which the Scale batch function is performed Batch Possible Functions Batch Table Else s _ Bring To Size Open Filled Rectangle Add A Filter Open and Append Flatten Alpha Channel 0 Delete nt Gamma Save GIF Transparent Grayscale insert PICT y Delete All Cancel 0K if _ Process Picture only if Bit Depth 1 to 32 Bit v Process Picture only if Width 301 to 1000 Pixels M Process Picture only if Height 301 to 1000 Pixels _ Process Picture only if A Landscape Portrait In the lower section select Process Picture only if Width and Process Picture only if Height and enter a value between 301 and 100 000 because a picture is only larger than the target size of 300 pixels starting at 301 100 000 just stands for an infinite number and does not quite fit in the entry box 3 Select Scale in the left section and click Add This batch function is only performed for those pictures that fulfill the conditions defined by the previous If Batch Possible Functions Batch Table Remove Alpha Cannel Replace Color Table Resolution Rotate Open Open and Append Save Scale to Pixel Count Set Creator for Saving Sharpen Edges Show Alpha Channel Ox Delete All Cancel OK Scale Factor Size in pixel O S
318. is why you should not display these files in the browser with automatic preview creation enabled If you want to take a look at the crop ped pictures you should first go to Preferences Browser General and choose Always temporary for the Previews Change resolution value to allows you to change the resolution This is not normally necessary Include images in subfolders causes the pictures in subfolders to also be opened for trimming Select Copy unknown files if your picture folder also contains text files for example that should be copied into the target folder Select Save to subfolder to save the images in a subfolder which is created automati cally or Save to user defined folder to select a specific folder with Choose Once you click OK a full screen dialog opens displaying the selected pictures one after the other There is a selection rectangle over the picture that you can move with the mou 101 se Click inside the rectangle to move it to the required position The edges are displayed brighter G GraphicConverter file an Pawe Den Filter Specul Widow Hei OO 40 wma D GraphicComverer y osa neet d Oa amp Agun yore Cancel OK tor An image 1 of 1 Selectann Tegye Chenge Sate Click OK amp Next to go to the next picture You can also apply the trim by double cli cking the selection The cropped picture is saved into a folder named Cropped Images that is generated automatically This folder is crea
319. isc section of the Preferences you can specify with Toggle rotate shortcuts permanent not permanent that the icons and Command Z and U rotate images permanently while Alt Z and U only rotate the image while it is displayed The button to the right of the arrow opens the picture in GraphicConverter which inter rupts the slide show You can also press the O button without any other buttons Select File Continue Slide show to continue the slide show where you left off Click the printer icon to print the current picture 284 A click on the IPTC button opens the IPTC dialog in which you can enter data such as Caption and Copyright The slide show continues when you quit the dialog File Info Caption Keywords Categories Credits Origin Copyright Caption Community festival in Lorenzkirch Caption writer v Automatically neagine ae Event The button with the four colored spots opens a pop up menu that lets you apply a Mac OS label to the picture You can also use the labels under Mac OS 10 2 or lower even though they are not shown in the Finder From Mac OS X 10 3 the labels are displayed in the finder GraphicConverter can display the labels in the browser under any Mac OS You can rate JPEG and TIF images displayed in the browser during the slide show with 0 5 stars using Ctrl 0 5 If there are one or more move folders defined under Preferences and they are enabled for display the first te
320. it Use high quality zoom anti Aliasing is particularly useful when displaying faxes as the text is more legible Otherwise this setting improves the picture quality of the screen display for zoom levels under 100 because the graphics are dithered in color The screen display is considerably slower however on old 68k computers The Best Quality bicubic settings improves the display of pictures at high zoom levels If you want to see each individual pixel to edit them precisely you need to set the dis play quality to Standard as otherwise some pixels will not be displayed in their true color The printout quality of the picture is not affected by this option Display tiled displays open pictures in a tiled arrangement If necessary drag the win dow open slightly larger to see the tiled display This option helps you check the joins at the edges of the tiles if you want to make a pattern out of an image The tiled effect is not saved To save a tiled version create the required number of duplicates in the browser via the context menu Save multiple copies as Open the Convert dialog by selecting File Convert and select the folder with the image files on the left hand side Join the files together with Concat General Display Windows see p 64 378 General Edit General Clipboard Digital Camera Display Content Display Windows Edit Memory Misc Monitor Plug ins Print Open General Correct amp Change IPTC gt
321. it This makes the text easier to read Invert inverts the colors of a picture from positive to negative or vice versa Use this function to convert scanned negatives into normal pictures or as an effect Invert Alphachannel makes transparent areas non transparent and vice versa Levels lets you modify the levels for white black and midtones see p 160 Make Square is available with the Crop to shortest side option The shorter side is taken as the side length for the square that is cut from the picture centered Crop to lar gest side adds black strips to the picture that are large enough to make it square Max Size reduces the size of the picture to the size entered in pixels Smaller pictures are not changed The Achieve value s function scales the picture so that the target size is always achieved even when it has to be enlarged Disable the Proportional option only if you want to distort the pictures Invert dimensions for vertical images should always be enabled Portrait pictures take the same value as used for the width of landscape format pictures The value entered for the maximum height is not taken into consideration Minimize Color Table is used to keep file size to a minimum when you are preparing color table graphics for the Web Mirror mirrors pictures along the x axis or along the y axis see p 175 Copy with transparency makes it possible for you to define a color for the picture that should be made transparent when the
322. ive path of the picture i e the name of the folder where it will be located on the server This entry will also be suggested by default after you restart GraphicConverter Select the Alignment for the position on the Internet page from the pop up menu You can define a Border with various widths Pictures on the Internet do not normally have a border VSpace and HSpace allow you to set the vertical and hori zontal position If you require the picture from the clipboard in a specific format with a different size or resolution use Copy as and enter the required values in the dialog that opens The size of the current selection is shown on the left of the dialog Under Priority select whether you want modify the Size the Scale or the Resolution Size allows the picture to be mo dified disproportionally by setting one of the values for the width or height to the re quired target value You can enter a scaling value in percent with scale If Priority is set to resolution you can change the resolution Copy as 1a 12 10 _ 12 10 al Priority Scale Scale A Scale 100 P9 Resolution ppi F Use QuickTime compression Cancel gt OK Use QuickTime compression allows the format selected under Options to be conver ted If QuickTime is not installed on your computer you can download it free of charge at http www apple com Apple software may not be published on magazine CD ROMs any more The scale can be set first of all
323. ividual steps in several files As data is also written to the hard drive for the undo function GraphicConverter will dis play an error message if the hard drive is full We recommend not disabling this mes sage and making space on the hard drive if it appears Mac OS X always needs a reserve of free hard drive space on the start volume in order to write cache files We therefore re commend selecting a folder on a different hard drive in which the temporary files for the undo option and for catalog printing can be written using Set Scratch Folder 381 General Misc Preferences General DER Clipboard z O m Units User interface Display Content Metric B 0 Standard eple Windows O Less complex Memory m Show splash screen at launch Mw Save available Mise Monitor Reset all Notification Dialogs Password Plug ins Be Fast sorting only Roman font Print Disable all notifications Fas 9 fo y antant Open M Number sorting General Correct amp Change C Allow display of invisible files Default list font IETE v Use Zoom Effects Standard Lucida Gra FH gt Formats Save Small Geneva B General Custom Icon _ Use WYSIWYG font menus Formats wv Use File Exchange IC Config IPTC EXIF will be active after the next restart M Check for newer versions every week es eA Use Smart Crash Reporter to M Always resolve aliases completely General notify developer upon crash M S
324. ize lt 0 eee cc ee ak cess caved ve ab etee vetelcnesbeveanedsaeuases 161 Invert 253 Sheu terewhereGeratincinenebera tose EE DAD voaberseseidedasbevesscc Se 175 Mirroring otc wtirtubn ranieri aa a aee i a edn ed oo eeto eet tee D duke oc eai 175 Unsk W sarene 84 SR a a a a eraa e a i 178 White GOrr ctioh esei tes ess Aa a A a aS A ho Se ES 184 Quicklime Effects mr ee aena adda a deg hehe T R EA E R e a od E eas 181 Gor e Image Filter escenes e a E deed E a a E E S e 183 Dateand Time Stamp vas sender cd tien aeon a E EEE E E gaa Re aaia 184 Mediaan aaa E O nc Ane EAr DESL Gel UR E Oh N NE a EATE 185 Picture lnformati N esens inrer ea a E e E a E E E enero EES 186 HistograM 22 2se 0e eteraite riai reena EEE E D AE ETE e E AE EEE E E aA 187 F l ScreemM e a a eae E a E N A ee dine EET E AN 187 Play as Fades av a E A REEL E T KA 188 Put Picture on Desk oe E E E E T G 188 Creating a GIF Animation sssessssssesesensesesesessosesesseseseseererereso 189 Storyboard eiae eey ai a e n a el E TETE EE ENT E EEE E EA a E E EEA 194 G mma CONECHON ecse eana aE a A E E E a ie Wee EEA a E aA 195 PIGG TAFIRETS 55s asahtaasususeavabees n araea a a a a a a a 197 User defined FilterSerisn sieren poten ke lesa eannan at ra a E AA OARA ates 199 Col r PERMUTATIONS resesi e a E E A eee ee a a EREA 199 WEGIOR ZG eect iae a a a ete eee O a E A E N lc dea a 205 Alpha Channels 9 5 4 3 5 assieslyds0ds eaadteed eea eee Ie E E EEEE EE E 206 Video Pictures narren O
325. ize in inch O Size in cm Width Height 300 30d QuickDraw Quartz z v Proportional Algorithm 305 Select Size and enter 300 for the width and the height Enable the Proportional opti on We recommend QuickDraw Quartz as a process Under Mac OS 9 you can try to in crease the quality with one of the variants of Bicubic 4 Finally insert the Continue function using the left section because each If must be completed with a Continue even if an Else is defined for other cases 5 The next function you need to define is the one that converts the resolution to 72 dpi The reason is that all graphics on the Web have a screen resolution of 72 dpi Select Reso lution in the left section and click Add Enter 72 dpi for the horizontal and vertical resolu tion in the lower section The Convert picture option must be disabled Batch Possible Functions Batch Table Remove Alpha Cannel 4 Replace Color Table Add if P Open SS Open and Append Rotate Delete gt Scale Scale to Pixel Count Set Creator for Saving 0 Sharpen Edges Show Alpha Channel Save y Delete All Resolution Horizontal 72 00 ppi Vertical 72 00 ppi _ Convert picture 6 The sharpness is generally improved after the resolution is decreased In the left sec tion click Sharpen Edges and select a lower value of approximately 15 30 for the Nor mal setting because pictures with 72 d
326. izontal The white rectangle is the slide before you turn it The line is the mirror axis that acts like a hinge and the gray rectangle is the slide after turning 175 Normally you do not need to mirror pictures unless a slide or negative was accidentally scanned the wrong way round Sometimes it is good to mirror a picture horizontally to optimize it for design purposes You should remember however the realism of photos is affected possibly with negative results If you define a selection only the selection will be mirrored Effect Glass Blocks allows you to mirror an image in strips This can be used as an ef fect or as a simple copy protection The follow dialog opens where you can specify whether the strips should be vertical or horizontal The Size of the strips is the key to re versing the effect at any time by using the option again If you are using this option as a simple copy protection for pictures that you want to pass on for demonstration purposes you will need to protect the size of the strips like a password The recipient can work out the strip size him or herself by simply measuring them however Glass Blocks Where Vertical O Horizontal Size 64 pixel Cre E This is the result with an example picture 999 EA DSCN5986 jpg RGB 176 Shadow Effect Shadow allows you to add a shadow around the right and bottom of an image First a dialog will open where you can choose how larg
327. key you can enter the license key for LuraWave format by selecting GraphicConverter License under Mac OS X You will find detailed informa tion on LuraWave on page 359 You can display a copyright message for some plug ins by holding down the Command key and clicking the filter The filters permanently integrated in GraphicConverter are Laplace 3x3 and Unsharp 3x3 They do not appear in the Plug Ins folder but under Effect Plug In Filter Experts and those of you who like experimenting can define your own filters up to a matrix of 64x64 using a text editor like SimpleText Enter a space or a tab between the values An extremely unsharp filter could consist of a matrix made up of 9x9 ones for example a d Md et Md d Md d d Md d d Md d d d Md d Md d d d d When you use the filter the matrix checks each pixel and multiplies all surrounding pi xels by the specified values 1 changes the pixels 0 leaves the pixels as they are 198 User defined Filters You can define your own filters using User Defined Filter in the Effect menu User Defined Filter Picture n Before Zoom 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Do Full Screen Preview Cancel Fox This filter can unsharpen pictures or create other effects
328. l v SE Apply 63 Specify which palettes are to be displayed when opening a new picture under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences in the General Display Windows sec tion Preferences General ME General Display Windows Settings Clipboard _ Digital Camera Show tool windows Position of tool windows Display Content v Toolbox Toolbars follow picture mas C Information Al Fixed positions Memory Position base 0 Position of main windows Mise GIF Animation _ Auto arrange Plug ins Overview Open only one window Print _ Detail with zoom 27 C Show path in title mE em Monitor p s General L Show center dot Show tool tips Correct amp Change IPTC M Resize window after scale zoom F ts a F eat z Sem _ Show additional information in bottom of window General Cl Show rulers Custom Icon Formats _ Use metal look IPTC EXIF Settings Slide Show General Effects Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time iy Default Undo The zoom factor can be selected for the Detail and Resize window after scale zoom can be disabled The base for the positions can be set to 0 This is preferred by professio nals Non professionals prefer it when the first pixel has the position 1 1 The picture is not changed by this The Position of tool windows can be set to follow the picture The window then auto mati
329. l O Do not dispose R rder 3 ne Orde Restore to background S Normal Restore to previous _ Interlaced User Input Color ordering of B amp W images Transparent 0 Mac OS 9 Windows Loop 0 l Endless Colors v Center small frames l Optimize Tip Creates smaller files It does not support comments or a transparency mode This means that it doesn t make sense to further process the graphic in a program that cannot import the newer GIF versi on 89a which does support comments and a transparency mode If the Row Order is set to Interlaced the GIF is first created over the entire surface and is relatively out of focus but it gradually becomes sharper For Standard row order the GIF is created from top to bottom increasing to the final quality level see p 65 Color ordering of B amp W images can be used to select the usual mode for Macs with MacOS Windows sets the standard Windows mode Any good software should be able to recognize both without any problems however Therefore it does not matter which mode you select If you have problems opening a file select the other mode when saving Use Optimize to automatically reduce the bit depth under Colors if this is possible The graphic that for example uses 28 colors is saved with 5 bit color depth maximum of 32 colors instead of with 8 bit color depth This option makes the graphic files somewhat smaller This option is particularly helpful for use on
330. l for placing squares exactly next to each other for example Enable Display grid with color to make the grid visible You can se lect the color of the lines by clicking the sample color The grid can be added to the picture with Effect Overlay Grid The lines can then not be removed They are saved and appear on printouts You can select the spacing line thickness and color in the dialog Overlay Grid Width 50 Line Width 1 Colors O ee Caneel COD Selecting Colors If the foreground and background color is to be set to black and white click the small icon above the background color The bent double arrow under the foreground color swaps the foreground and background colors To select a different color click the fore ground or background color ol t Copy ae If the color depth is 16 bit or more the Color Picker will open allowing you to define a color using various color models The HSV model is particularly clear just like the cray ons that are very useful for painting in particular The pallet is part of the Mac OS and will 230 therefore look different depending on which Mac OS version you are using You can en large the pallet in Mac OS X 10 3 and above OO Colors a ma Q T ee D a HSB Sliders i Hue 2 1 L 0 Saturation r 1000 Brightness I anem ee we an on E A If you need a specific CMYK color you can define it using the mixing s
331. layed proportionally smaller in size You can zoom into the pictures with the scroll wheel or scroll ball on your mouse and back out again The position under the mouse cursor is centered If you do not want to move the mouse cursor over the image you can position the mouse in the center of the 282 lower edge of the screen to zoom into the center of the image During the slide show the Mac OS energy saving option and screensaver are disabled In the file selection dialog you can specify whether the first graphic or a further one from the selected folder is the first in the slide show or whether you want to begin with the selected graphic If so you have to open the folder where the graphic you want to se lect is located It is not possible to display the graphics in random order If during a slide show in random order you see a picture that is part of a series of similar pictures which you want to show together you can switch to the normal sort method with the Page Up Down or arrow up down keys and show the subsequent or preceding pictures When you click Options the Preferences dialog opens that you can also open by se lecting Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences Slide Show General see below Filter All available HA Start with file 1 aree Start with selection Random order New Folder Cancel Choose The name of the graphic with or without path is shown in the top left of the sc
332. ld be reduced With a factor of 8 a picture that is 8000 pixels wide would be reduced to 1000 pixels The Required memory for opening the picture is shown underneath Opening EPSF Graphics EPSF stands for Encapsulated Postscript File The F is often missing However it is the same format PostScript is a computer language for outputting graphics and texts to prin ters and image setters in the professional realm EPS graphics contain this information and as a result do not have to be converted when printing for example to a PostScript printer EPS graphics are not pixel graphics like for example TIFF graphics and can only be modified if they can be interpreted by the appropriate module GraphicConverter has this type of module that is only for EPS graphics created in Photoshop ASCII and binary format These can thus be opened directly EPS images created in other programs can be opened with external modules If you are using Mac OS X 10 3 Panther or a newer version you can open all EPS and PS files with GraphicConverter directly because the Mac OS takes care of conversion UNIX pstopdf 346 If you try to open an EPSF graphic not saved in Photoshop with GraphicConverter that does not have the correct registered module installed on your computer the following message appears c EPSF Interpreter Document 24 eps is an EPS file GraphicConverter requires an external EPS interpreter as a helper application for decompr
333. lders Don t create if EXIF preview available m Don t create in memory cards Temporary if ppi value is equal or less than 72 M Use quick existing preview check Icon Preview 1 Enlarge small ones Index Misc Cache in memory Browser C Create THM for RAWs general Te The preview creation uses the settings from Save General and Save Custom Icon Display General Ignore extensions for automatically preview creation separated by a space PDF EPS EPSF PS Display Thumbnails Function Keywords Misc A Open Frame offset for movie preview 0 Preview y 4 Toolbar a m v Default Undo Cancel 0K You can use the Preview Create automatically option to switch this option off and on A preview is added to the file if Add to file is selected You can create the preview as a temporary file with the Temporary for locked files option because this is not possible for read only files You should enable As EXIF preview for JPEGs if you want your images to be compatible with Photoshop in Windows too This option will not write the preview in the Mac resource but in the EXIF data at high quality with 200 x 200 pixels If you are creating graphics for the Web we recommend that you enable the Always temporary option because a preview increases the size of the file and is not useful for 267 the Web The Scan files up to option allows you to set an upper file size limit in MB up to which a preview is created for graphics This
334. le for example The values are also shown on the Coordinates palette mya 254 FV 127 4 mr 1186 6 mm In addition to the option for measuring lines you can also measure the area of rectang les with Measure Rectangle and circles with Measure Circle Select the corresponding options from the pop up menu for this Measure Min Max and Mean in a Rectangle allows you to measure the brightness value of the darkest and lightest pixel The mean value is also displayed This option is useful if for example you want to determine on pic tures of bacteria cultures whether the whole area is affected how badly the darkest area is affected and what is the average occurrence The measured value 255 represents white and 0 represents black The coordinates of the rectangle are also given Measure Angle with two Lines allows you to measure the angle between two helper lines that are inserted at the top left of the picture after you select the option You can position both lines anywhere on the picture using the handles and after each change the current angle is displayed in the comment box of the Information palette that opens automatically You can copy values from the palette to edit them in other programs The helper lines are hidden as soon as you switch to a different tool The Smudge Tool allows you to smudge parts of pictures for example to smooth the edges in collages Double clicking the tool allows you to set the size Hold down the mouse b
335. le Set focus of scroll wheel zoom to mouse position if you want to cen ter the point under the mouse cursor when zooming with the scroll wheel If you select a pixel that is closer to the edge it may only be possible to center it at higher zoom levels You need to move the mouse cursor again over the centering point after each zoom step You should select Disable double click for cropping selection if you want to avoid accidentally cropping a picture by double clicking a selection You can disable Automatically create layers for new text if you want to insert text directly into the picture The text can then no longer be edited after you switch to ano ther tool 380 General Memory Preferences General a General Memory Settings Digital Camera g v Undo available Display Content v Show warning if disk is nearly full Display Windows Edit Memory I Set Scratch Folder Misc a F Monitor Current folder Volumes Beyonce Applications GraphicConverter Scratch Di Plug ins Print Open General Correct amp Change IPTC gt Formats Save General Custom Icon Formats IPTC Settings Slide Show General Effects Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Default Undo SE lt If you disable the Undo available option you can no longer undo the last step Howe ver this frees up more memory and disk space Disable this option if there is not enough memory available In this case save your ind
336. le extension Slide Show Effects See p 294 Slide Show General See p 290 Slide Show Misc See p 295 Slide Show Move Folders 2 3 See p 293 Convert Convert Text IPTC See p 36 Convert Errors Time See p 51 Convert Icon Preview See p 47 Convert Index See p 51 Convert Misc See p 33 417 Browser Display See p 269 Browser General See p 265 Browser Misc see p 273 AppleScript Using AppleScript you can automate tasks on your Macintosh by writing small programs called AppleScripts GraphicConverter supports AppleScript You can access all of the GraphicConverter options with an AppleScript On our Web site http www lemkesoft com content 166 scripts html you can make your AppleScript available to other GraphicConverter users We recommend disabling all GraphicConverter messages in the Preferences in the section General Misc Settings so that any message dialogs do not interrupt script pro cesses If you want to work with a system wide AppleScript menu you will find instructions on page 383 about how to install this and disable the AppleScript menu in GraphicConver ter Under Mac OS 9 copy your AppleScripts to the folder GraphicConverter Scripts in the GraphicConverter folder and if there is an update make sure to copy the contents of this folder to the corresponding folder under the new GraphicConverter folder just like the plug in folder Under Mac OS
337. les hold down the Alt key DSCNS558 JPG DSCNSS59 JPG 1 3M 1 4MB 06 01 2004 06 01 2004 Jigi onve icans ae _ p igi F LA Ls Mayers Weihnachten 2003 63 Mayers Weihnachten 2003 t 64 07 01 2004 07 01 2004 The options from the context menu affect all selected pictures If you move a graphic from the browser to the desktop or another folder on the left hand side of the browser with the Command and Option keys an alias is created If you open a picture as normal you can open a browser window showing the content of the folder where the open picture in stored by pressing Command Up arrow key Use this option to sort larger numbers of pictures Select the next picture with the cur sor key and use Command 1 to Command 0 to move the pictures to the folders that you define in the Preferences under Slide Show Move Folder Using the key combinations with the Control or Option key you can select a further 20 destination folders that you can select under Move Folder 2 and 3 Using the Tab key you can switch between the left hand area with the file tree and the preview area The cursor key functions then change accordingly The respective area is displayed briefly with a blue frame While the preview area is active the cursor down key selects the next picture down If you switch to the left hand area with the Tab key the cursor down key will take you to the next folder down In the preview area you can also enter the name of a file
338. lick the right arrow key to jump from the last image of one row to the first image of the next You can cancel a se lection with Escape If there is no preview for a picture in the graphic file it will be automatically created If this does not occur you can create a preview in the context menu To open the context menu Control click the picture you want and then select Create Preview This very long context menu has been split into two parts placed next to 247 each other so it fits on the page 248 Help Refresh if modified Resort Select All aA Deselect Create Preview Add Image as Folder Icon Label gt Rating gt Lock File Folder Change File Type and or Creator Reveal in Finder XR Edit filename Rename a6E View Item s in Slideshow Edit File Info IPTC 31 Edit Comment X I Open with Adobe Photoshop CS3 T O Open with gt Rotate Mirror JPEG Date vv v Make Aliases Copy files to Move files to Save copy as Save multiple copies as Move file to Sort files into subfolders b Duplicate Set GPS from current Google Earth position Export gt Find duplicate files Insert profile into selected JPEGs TIFFs New Folder THN Create Sort Folder Flat Folder View Move Item s into Trash Remove Resource Fork View Options gt Preferences GraphicConverter gt Automator gt Disable Folder Actions Configure Folder Actions Note the shortcuts i
339. liders in the CMYK section The color bar shows the respective color GraphicConverter can open and save pictures in CMYK mode You can also define HTML Colors for the Internet and RGB Colors for screen publishing for example The color bar shows the respective color OO Colors oO eo f FPT Color iv Ea E 4 ZA If you select a Web Safe Colors you can be sure that this color will also be displayed on the Internet even on very old computers in the same way as on your own computer All other colors can only be displayed on very old computers by mixing and dithering and 231 may therefore seem slightly wrong However as these computers will hardly be in use anymore you can also use other colors today If you need the HTML code of a color that is not in the list of Web safe colors you can read the code via the context menu over a picture Open a picture containing the color and Control click the part of the picture where the required color occurs It does not mat ter which tool is selected Select Copy current color as HTML The HTML code for the re spective color is now in the clipboard and can inserted into the HTML code of a Web site with Command V If for example you have defined the color as the foreground color with the eyedropper you can select Copy current foreground color as HTML The first version of the HTML standard could already display all colors The limitation to 213 colors was simply a
340. lignment pPuor _ Anti alias valid for all tools In the UB version of GraphicConverter you select the font from the Text pull down menu in the menu bar at the top edge of the screen that only appears while you are edi ting text In older versions you select the font in the Text dialog From version 5 3 1 of GraphicConverter the functions Alignment and Anti alias are only available under Mac OS X if Unicode text input is disabled If you enable Unicode you can use all Unicode font characters Unicode text input can only be enabled if there are no active text objects in the picture If for example you have set your OS X to Czech or Chinese you can normally find the character using the keyboard To find a single cha 221 racter we recommend the program PopChar http www ergonis com products pop charx Disable the Unicode option if you are using very old fonts that cause problems You can use Erase background to insert a color bar behind the text so it is easier to read You can select the color using the current foreground color If your computer crashes after you double click the text tool you have a corrupt font in your system If you should crash after this double click you have installed a bad font in your system Turn off the WYSIWYG font menus in the Preferences in General Misc The settings always apply to all text in the current text frame To use a different font in a new line you need to create a new text obj
341. lines than the newer Unsharp Mask option We recommend that you always use the Unsharp Mask option first and only use Sharpen Edges if you are not happy with the results of Unsharp Mask Always select zoom level 100 when you are using Sharpen Edges as you can often not see pro blems at lower zoom levels Sharpening always converts the pictures to 32 bit pictures because considerably better results are obtained in this way The only exceptions are black and white and grayscale pictures If you want a different color depth you can select 16 bit for example with Pic ture Colors 124 Unsharp Mask Select Effect Unsharp Mask and try the value 60 first Switch to full picture preview to obtain a better impression of the result One good practical tip is to move the dialog to the lower right hand corner of the screen so you can see more of the picture Unsharp Mask Before Radius x fe pixels Amount dK Threshold z 0 levels x y SET al v Full Screen Preview Cancel Select 1 as the standard value for the Radius and 0 for the Threshold Some pictures re quire a high level of sharpening At a value of 160 there are normally no problems with unedited scanned pictures Just increase the value until you cannot see any more faults Sharpening involves increasing the contrast of neighboring pixels If you increase the Radius more pixels will be incorporated in the process giving coarser results You sho
342. ll return to their normal colors as soon as you close the picture again Minimize Color Table Using Minimize Palette you can minimize the palette automatically so that the quality is not reduced as only the colors that are not required are deleted from the palette This function should therefore always be used when you are preparing pictures for the Inter net see page 64 Always remember that it is not worthwhile saving storage space if the quality of the pic ture is reduced noticeably Instead use possibilities such as reducing the picture or saving in JPEG format with reduced quality for example Save as Options or cut off unim portant parts of the picture at the edges 172 Options for Color Reduction You make color reduction settings using Picture Colors Options Options for Color Reduction Use System Color Table Use Custom Color Table Open Use Netscape 216 Colors Use Windows 256 Colors Use Palm 256 Colors Optimize Color Table Reserve black and white Reserve 16 Colors only 8 bit Reserve 32 Colors only 8 bit __ Reserve Color at the Start v Dither Cancel store Apply O Apple Computers have their own system color tables that return better results than the optimum palette when reducing from 2 or 4 bit In all other cases use the Optimize Color Table option see below If you want to work with your own color table for example to create effects you c
343. ls Once you switch back to a normal zoom level though the eye should look good Undo If you are not happy with a change to a picture you can reverse it with Edit Undo The option you used last appears next to Undo for example Undo Paint You can also use this menu item to check which option you used last Edit Redo allows you to reverse the undo action If you want to undo more than 40 steps you have no choice but to reload the last saved version of the picture by selecting File Revert to Saved The current versi on will then be closed without saving To avoid mistakes GraphicConverter will ask you if you really want to discard the current version RGB and CMYK Pictures cannot only exist in different file formats for example TIFF or GIF but also in dif ferent modes Scanners in the lower price segment normally return pictures in RGB mo de made up of the colors Red Green and Blue This mode is ideal for printing out on laser or inkjet printers Effect Channels Split allows you to display a picture so that only the red part of the picture is displayed Scroll horizontally to the right to display the green part and blue part or select a lower zoom level to display all three areas at the same time Effect Channels Join reverts the effect 00900 DSCN 1985 JPG 13 vad Effect Channels Split into new windows allows you to split RGB or CMYK images into several pictures each containing one channel This is pa
344. m basic prefs to extended prefs added support for multipage ps files added New features in GraphicConverter 6 0 3 BSP import added Browser can optionally hide files that begin with or end with tilde Preferences Browser Display Thumbnails New features in GraphicConverter 6 0 4 sff import added format of Fritzbox fax files Single color channes can be joined Effect Channels Frames Join Browser creates thm files to speed up viewing of raw previews An image can be set as a folder icon via the context menu Slide show can create a protocol noting when which images was shown Preferences Slide show General IPTC information is written as Unicode for better compatibility with PC Systems This can be set to Mac or Windows standard in the Preferences Save IPTC EXIF New features in GraphicConverter 6 1 Icons of 256x256 and 512x512 Pixels are possible but not supportet by Mac OS 10 1 and 10 2 External editor support added UB Slideshow can display next image on second monitor as an option UB 443 Geotagging with gpx files added UB JP2 export with alpha added Updated features Option for label display in browser added UB Import from folder Option for destination format during html catalog creation added Core image filters can be applied to selections UB Save for web shortcut added Move folder option added Crop ratio of image added Option tab key toggles preview mode i
345. m like Exif Untrasher that you can download at http www bluem net downloads We were able to save approximately 90 of the lost pictures in our tests Transfer IPTC records can be used when for example you have low resolution pictures with IPTC information and want to transfer this information to the high resolution versi ons of the pictures The files need to be in different folders and have the same name Se lect the pictures that contain the IPTC information on the left and the folder with the pic tures to which the IPTC information should be transferred from the right hand list Convert Win to Mac IPTC converts all special characters in the IPTC section for examp le 4 so that they are displayed correctly your Mac This option will allow your Mac to read the IPTC information in images from the world of Windows 40 Convert Mac to Win IPTC converts all special characters in the IPTC area for example 4 so that they are displayed correctly under Windows This option allows Windows users to read the IPTC information in the images Convert Mac IPTC to UTF8 IPTC converts all special characters in the IPTC area for exa mple a so that they are displayed correctly by programs that support Unicode Sort by EXIF Camera Model sorts the pictures according to camera model into subfol ders named after the camera You can use Export EXIF Text if for example you want to transfer EXIF information to a FileMaker database A text
346. m the EXIF data All other metadata IPTC Rating Label XMP is therefore written to a file with same name and the extension xmp that is automatically copied and ren amed by GraphicConverter like any THM file Photoshop CS also uses this technology which is why RAW files with IPTC information in XMP files are fully compatible with Photo shop CS NEF files may also contain IPTC data If you enter IPTC data for a NEF file it will be writ ten in the NEF file NEF is Nikon s RAW format The XMP file is only created if metadata apart from the EXIF is available If for example you add a rating in the browser using the context menu an XMP file is created and dis played in the browser immediately If you do not want these files to be displayed add the extension XMP to the list of extensions to be ignored in the Browser Open with section of the preferences You can set this list to the default setting by clicking the Default but ton To speed up the display of RAW images in the browser GraphicConverter creates THM files containing previews for each image file You can disable this option in the Prefe rences under Browser Preview Some cameras create the THM files automatically The THM files are not shown in the browser 366 RAW format offers the following options RAW Header E Width Word Long Word A Height Word Long Word E Depth Word Long Word Color Table Word Format Motorola Intel True Color
347. mation is written in the XMP section of the files It is easiest to assign the stars to rate pictures by selecting the images and setting the stars with Ctrl O 5 You can also use these keyboard shortcuts to assign stars during a slide show In the Browser Function section of the Preferences you can change the key assignments so that keys 1 5 assign the rating without an additional key If you disable XMP in the format options for JPG or TIFF pictures any ratings that have been set will not be saved with the file when you save it again and will therefore be dele ted Therefore make sure that XMP is kept enabled in the format options when you work with ratings JPEG JFIF Quality 98 low medium high Library O QuickTime JPEG 6 0 l Progressive Subsampling 4 2 2 default 34 C Calculate File Size Original Size New Size The calculated file size is only Show Preview correct if you save the file without a resource fork m Show this dialog before saving S JPEG files Resize to reach filesize 512 KB M Write JFIF header Special filesize use carefully Reduce quality to reach filesize S512 KB C Store JFIF after EXIF Embed if available v IPTC _ Comments XMP v EXIF v ICC profile v Don t embed sRGB profile C EXIF Preview DCF compatible og Maker Note and User Comment may contain personal details like the EXIF Maker Note owner name and serial number of the digital camera So maybe you want a EX
348. memory M Ask TWAIN driver for color table _ Invert 1 bit TWAIN images v Support Menu Sharing Frontier _ Ask for scanning a new page after end of scan Default Undo Using Your Scanner as a Photocopier If you want to use your scanner as a simple photocopier select File Acquire and then TWAIN Acquire amp Print from the submenu Your scanner software will open allowing you to scan the picture in a size that fits on the selected paper format We recommend a value between 200 and 300 dpi for the resolution After scanning printing will be started immediately with the current print settings If you scan a picture that is larger than the current paper format we recommend using the setting Scale image to fit page You can select this setting by opening the print dia 112 log with File Print selecting GraphicConverter from the pop up menu and then cli cking the GraphicConverter Options button Print Options Area O All Content of window Size Original size Enlarge reduce area to fit page Resize area 100 _ Print display information Print only name and comment V Print with date l Print IPTC caption if available Font Geneva RY Size of Header 14 B Behavior for printing images that are larger than the page Ask always Scale image to fit page Trim image 3 Print on more pages with overlapping of 0 00 cm _ Smart Trim before printing vi Smart print orientation _ Show t
349. method you can copy it back to save you making all the settings again As problems with the preference file occur frequently when an update of GraphicConver ter is installed you should create a back up of the preference file before updating unless you already make regular backups The next time you launch GraphicConverter you must re enter your license key and pre ferences If your problem persists please contact our support by e mail support lem kesoft com see p 15 You can also enter yourself in our mailing list at www lemkesoft com to receive help from other users 422 Shortcuts The shortcuts for the slide show are in the chapter for the slide show see p 297 General Shortcuts Key Combinations Ctrl with mouse click Result Opens the context menu The contents are dependent on the window that is open Option key with mouse click in the middle of the window title A pop up menu appears in which the titles of all open windows are listed If you select the title this bar window is brought to the foreground Tab key Closes all open color tables and reopens them when pressed again Shortcuts in Picture Windows Key Combinations Ctrl and Option key with mouse click the picture surface Result A pop up menu appears where you can select the zoom level Command key and or minus Zooms to the next higher or next lower level Shift and Ctrl on the picture surface
350. mported OK amp Again in Crop for Photo Service applies an index to the file name if more than one image is cropped New in GraphicConverter 6 4 1 Bio formats are supported via an SDK from Glencoe Meta data can be used also in formats like CR2 CRW EPS EPSF GIF NEF NRW PDF PNG PS PSD THM TIF TIFF PNG PDF and other formats that are labeled with R W at http www sno phy queensu ca phil exiftool in the Support column of the Supported File Types table When printing catalogs the delta path with just subfolders can be shown instead of the whole path In the preferences you can select the path for an alternative iPhoto library under Browser Open New import formats NV12 and CWK New in GraphicConverter 6 4 2 GPS tagging supports NMEA data files as input in addition to GPX UB GPS tagging supports multiple log files from a folder UB Combine folder into one PDF added to Convert amp Modify UB Import of Photostudio format added UB Line drawing supports now arrows at both ends Concat supports now multiple files UB E mail image function supports batch actions for manipulation before e mail UB Levels dialog and find and replace supports change of all frames UB JPEG save as options dialog improved UB 446 back and forward in slideshow remembers the last file for random slideshow UB Ism import improved UB detail window supports now 50 and 25 UB support for a special bmp variant a
351. mputer Inc Photo CD mark licensed from Kodak Mercutio MDEF copyright Ramon M Felciano 1992 1998 Copyright for all pictures in manual and on cover Hagen Henke except for page 95 exa mple picture Tayfun Bayram and others from www photocase de page 404 PCD example picture AMUG Arizona Mac Users Group Inc Reginald Muhl and ECW and mrSID exa mple pictures New editions of this book may contain some paragraphs translated by the author in rough English These paragraphs will be replaced with a professional translation as soon as possible Typesetting Hagen Henke Version 4 4 Lorenzkirch 2009 Contents Introduction Welcome to GraphicConverter 0 cece cece een cence nen ete ete e eee ee eee nenees 6 SYSTEIN REOUINEMOENS x4 isd vaio onl n art ia easels we sation Gee Mer she A tad EEE 6 Installation ditadet veg tects cee Mortals aa ena ve clic boat RE oe eeu tisk Oe Sea E ee ae 6 Widates 642 c vedas busateaatisue ive chasse vaho tabu cad busad ean be phase sabes peraee Baws 12 License Key and Registration cece cece cece cen e eee e nen e een ence eeeneenes 13 SUPPOMN 2 5 2 ds cea ia Sua dee lege hire cede eee eae 15 ThisManual a tee rr Un T E E OU oeA A a E 16 Starting the Program and Opening a Picture cece cece cece teen e eee n eens 16 Converting a Picture With Save 5 0 cece cece e eee ete teen eetenteneenes 24 Savingand CLOSING eessen He aon oana aan ae ao argade eet Wa Rar eae an aa aan
352. n This is useful for folders that may contain pictures with the wrong extension Specials Add timecode after DPX only reads the timecode from DPX pictures taken from pro fessional videos and adds it to the filename The DPX metadata is displayed in the Infor mation palette on the Comment tab At the top of the dialog you will see a pop up menu that allows you to save the current settings in the dialog and reload them later on Click Save and enter a suitable name in the dialog that opens After clicking OK the saved settings will appear in the pop up menu and are then available for selection The Save button next to the pop up menu al lows you to save the current settings in the selected set of settings that you have modi fied Delete current settings deletes a set of settings Rename with EXIF content allows you to transfer EXIF information content to the filen ame Enter the corresponding Hexcode preceded by an amp You can insert further parts of the filename as plain text For example enter Mountains amp A001 amp name amp extension to keep the original filename with the extension insert the name of the camera model according to the EXIF code A001 and place the word Mountains in front The EXIF hex codes are always four digit for example A001 You will find a complete list of the EXIF hexcodes on page 60 onwards in the PDF file Exif2 2 pdf which you can download here http www exif org specifications html A z
353. n Transparent to make the area transparent Transparency for the Internet The transparency is more or less a color although a co lor that you cannot see For example if you generate an oval button in a normal rectan gular picture against a white background you can set the white background to transpa rent so the background of your Web page can be seen Pictures in which one color is set to transparent can only be saved in GIF89a or PNG format To save in GIF89a format select Save as and select GIF from the format list 155 Version 87a 89a Tip Transparency and Comments are only supported by GIF 89a Now click Options and select GIF89a The other options in this dialog are freely selec table and not related to transparency GIF Movie Options Create Movie 10 000 s Delay Behaviour after frame change 0 No disposal O Do not dispose Row Order lt O Ord _ Restore to background 9 Normal O Restore to previous J Interlaced User Input Color ordering of B amp W images VETE 0 Mac OS O Windows Loop 0 l Endless Colors v Center small frames l Optimize Tip Creates smaller files There is also a dialog with parameters for PNG format behind Options but these are not important for transparency Transparency for printing You can create an alpha channel from a transparent area by selecting Effect Create Alpha Mask Channel from Transparency Pictures with an alpha chann
354. n experts 1 1 Paste centered pastes the clipboard contents centered instead of at the mouse cursor You can choose where it should be pasted with Paste top centered etc Paste into Green Channel see p 154 Paste Frame in the Edit Paste submenu inserts the clipboard contents as a frame af ter the current frame in films and animations You can place a suitable picture on the clip board with the normal copy function for example Command A Command C 220 Clear deletes the current selection In addition to the regular Clear option Clear Frame is available in the Edit Clear submenu This deletes the current frame in animations see p 191 Remember you can set a color in the picture being pasted to transparent when pasting Open the corresponding dialog by double clicking the selection rectangle in the toolbox and follow the instructions from page 140 Text in Pictures Click a picture with the text tool A from the toolbox Picture Toolbox and a rectangle that you can write in will appear Click on the picture and enter the text If the font is too small you can select the font size font and different styles while the text frame is active Double click the text tool in the toolbox and the following dialog will open Text Size 12 00 a l Use absolute value Default width 200 Alignment Shadow Condense Extend Italic Underline Outline _ Erase background ode text input disables anti alias and a
355. n move folders appear as icons to the right of the control bar Click the number of the move folder to move the graphic file currently being displayed to this folder A description of how this target folder is defined can be found later in this section If there are more than ten target folders defined you can go to these folders using the keyboard shortcut displayed in the Preferences when defining the target folder 285 You can click the left hand end of the toolbar and place it for example on an extra mo nitor screen During the slide show you can zoom the picture to 200 by holding down the Option key clicking the picture and holding down the mouse button While you hold down the mouse button the slide show will stay on the same picture If you also hold the shift key the picture will be zoomed to 100 The original zoom level will be applied again as soon as you release the mouse button You can also zoom with the and minus keys while moving the cut section with the clicked mouse It is normally better to pause the slide show first In presentations you can darken the current picture with the B key to draw attention to you the speaker when questions are posed First click the Pause button so that the slide show does not continue Press B again to cancel the darkening and continue the slide show by clicking the Play button Tip You can show all opened and saved Pictures as a slide show at any time Choose View all saved wind
356. n move the picture section with the mouse or zoom in further using the plus sign at the top right The GPS coordinates of the mouse cursor are shown at the bottom left Back to GraphicConverter If you want to enter the GPS coordinates of the photo loca tion in the EXIF information of images select the images in the browser show the respec tive location in Google Earth and select Set GPS from current Google Earth position from the Geo menu amp in the GraphicConverter menu bar You will recognize this menu from the standard red geo icon Bi In the X Version of GraphicConverter and also in older versions you will find the GPS options in the context menu The GPS coordinates are transferred to the EXIF information and shown in the information palette This sets the coordinates from the center of the image in Google Earth If you want to set the values precisely you should first zoom into the Google Earth image and then set a placemark with Add Placemark The placemark will then be dis played around the middle of the left hand column Double click the placemark and wait until the image in Google Earth stops moving Now transfer the GPS data to GraphicCon verter as usual Images with GPS data are displayed at the top right of the browser with a globe icon IMG_2795 jpq 7 1MB 26 06 2007 323 Click the icon to automatically display the marked location in Google Earth Alternatively you can use Show Position in Google Earth from the
357. n offset which sets the time as 1 second la ter for all files to be modified for example The sort order is kept for the sort method ac cording to date in the browser Make Aliases creates an alias of the image file in the same folder from where you can then move the alias to another location for example Copy files to allows you select a folder where a copy of the selected images is saved Move files to allows you select a folder where the selected images are moved to Save copy as allows you to save a copy of the graphic file with a different name Enter the new name in the file selection dialog in the same way as when you are saving a pic ture Move file to saves the file with a different path and deletes the original Sort files into subfolders Name creates a subfolder and sorts the files according to name in this folder If for example you select five pictures whose name starts with Wall and five others starting with Grill the first five will be copied to a folder named Wall and the others to a folder named Grill If a filename occurs only once the file will not be moved and not renamed If you select Date instead of Name the selected images will be moved to subfolders that are named after the date of the respective image file and are placed in automatically created month and year folders This option is also available immediately upon import and is useful if you used the Finder to import pictu
358. n specify whether the lines should have normal or arrow ends You can enter the size in pixels for the arrow points You can also draw in the alpha channel with Draw in alpha channel too Line _ Anti alias valid for all tools Type s Normal Arrow Pixel Cancel 0K The fill tool amp allows you to fill connected single color areas with the current fore ground color or even with a selected pattern by clicking part of the area The area needs to have the same color throughout The tolerance of the extent GraphicConverter also re cognizes pixels with colors slightly different to this area can be set by double clicking the fill tool icon Fill Tolerance 0 j 0 255 Cancel f OK 9 The greater the value the greater colors may deviate and be considered part of the area To find the right value to color a white pullover with shadows green for example you will have to make several attempts Drag open unfilled ellipses rectangles and rectangles with rounded corners with the corresponding tool from the toolbox Holding down the Shift key with the el 227 lipse tool gives you a circle and with the rectangle tools a square The current line thick ness see p 227 and foreground color are used for the outlines Drag open ellipses rectangles and rectangles with rounded corners that are fil led with the foreground color using the corresponding tool from the toolbox Holding down the Shift key
359. n the browser UB Trim option for alpha channel added Catalog printing enhanced more header and footer options Pipette can calculate a median color for a region double click on the pipette tool icon Context menu can be installed flat or as submenu UB on 10 5 x or later New features in GraphicConverter 6 1 1 E mail attachments in Mime format can also contain several images Labels can be assigned in the operator and the current image can be deleted Pictures can be sorted according to label and date in the browser There is an option for also drawing in the alpha channel double click rectangle tool When calibrating the slide rule you can make the line perfectly horizontal or vertical by pressing the Shift key Subfolders can be printed separately when you print catalogs New features in GraphicConverter 6 2 Geo menu added only UB version Content of GPX files with geo data can be displayed via the Geo menu QuickTime extensions like Perian are supported by the UB version DRIMaker allows HDR like images with a high contrast via the Effect menu and and or links added to search option 444 Stamp edge pattern can be selected All pages of multi page documents can be printed when you print catalogs New features in GraphicConverter 6 2 1 curves added UB only kml geo data export added UB only delete GPS function added UB only RW2 import added JAlbum export added UB only Rename option to make fir
360. n the left and click Go A dialog opens in which the OK button cannot initially be selected as one of the options needs to be en abled first Index Select Change Index on the Index tab to change an existing index In our example we want to raise the index by 1 so 9395 becomes 9396 and so on Add before name on the 43 Name tab allows you to extend the name by inserting the word Celebration_ for exa mple Rename a w index Name Date Charset Removal Extension Specials Change Index __ Remove existing Index _ Add Index MAI OC Begin Offset 0 Before Name After Name As Extension Insert separator Subtract Index from Offset Digits gi Step 1 Remove additional digits _ Reset Index on Date Change Reset Index on Time Change _ Reset Index on Folder Change Results with selected items IMG_0720 JPG gt Celebration IMG_0720 JPG IMG_0721 JPG gt Celebration IMG_0721 JPG IMG_0723 JPG gt Celebration_IMG_O723 JPG IMG_0724 JPG gt Celebration IMG_0724 JPG IMG_O725 JPG gt Celebration_IMG_O725 JPG IMG_0726 JPG gt Celebration_IMG_0726 JPG IMG_O727 JPG gt Celebration_IMG_O727 JPG IMG_0728 JPG gt Celebration IMG_0728 JPG _ Rename via Finder to keep Finder comments i Uncheck All Note You can access the tabs from keyboard with command e 2 1 7 Cancel 0K In the lower left hand corner of the dialog the filenames before and after are dis
361. nd contrast by about 80 90 afterwards aoe IMG 72700 ACAD Special Effects Film Noise changes the colors in the image and adds scratches or dust This filter is more suited to films with television resolution Blur Blur reduces the sharpness of the image Core Image Filter The Core Image Filter from Mac OS X 10 4 is available in the Filter menu if you are using that version of the Mac OS or above You can recognize the filter from the CI added to the name aiicday Special Window Help Composite Operation Cl gt Geometry Adjustment CI gt Tile Effect Cl b Color Adjustment CI gt Color Controls Stylize Cl gt Gamma Adjust Generator Cl gt Exposure Adjust Halftone Effect CI gt Color Matrix Distortion Effect Cl gt Hue Adjust Blur Cl gt White Point Adjust Color Effect Cl gt Sharpen CI P Gradient Cl b 183 One example If you need to make a face unrecognisable for legal reasons you can select the face with the lasso and disguise it with Filter Stylize Pixellierung Date and Time Stamp If you have taken pictures using a digital camera that uses EXIF information you can add a date time stamp via the context menu by Control clicking the open picture and selec ting Insert Date Time First select Insert Date Time Options Help Paste Select All Calculate Color usage Insert Date Time Insert Date Time Options Record m
362. nd then the folder for your Mac OS The following window opens if you are using Mac OS X jfeane 33 m webdav macbay I B Orion E Backup 500 T Media A Renare Henkes i 2007 07 26 L I gt B Schreibtisch A hagenhenke A Programme 1 Dokumente E filme amp Musik Bilder L Websites z a a i GraphicConverter X a 4 GraphicConverter Universal Binary 6mg 2 Objekte O KB verfagbar GraphicConverter X dmg If you have a Macintosh with Intel processor you need to double click the GraphicCon verter Universal Binary dmg file to install the volume image Please read on above under Possibility 1 If your computer has a PowerPC processor double click the Graphic Converter X dmg file Mac OS Classic only If you have a Macintosh with PowerPC processor and Classic Mac OS open the GraphicConverter Classic folder and copy the program folder with the re quired language into your Applications folder Macs with PowerPC processors normally have the word Power somewhere on the front or G3 G4 or G5 on the side On iMacs etc you can display which processor CPU type is fitted using the pre installed System Pro filer program in the Hardware section Possibility 3 GraphicConverter was already installed on your computer and you want to update it Download and install the latest version of GraphicConverter and order an upgrade for GraphicConverter costing 19 95 thr
363. ndicated in the context menu for example Command R for rotate clockwise They will help speed up your work If this context menu is too big for you you can hide individual options in the Preferences under Browser Context Menu Preferences gt Formats R r Save Show the following items in the context menu General M Refresh Custom Icon Formats v Resort IPTCZEXIF Settings v Select All Slide Show General v Deselect Effects M Create Preview Misc Move Folders v Cut Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 v Copy Convert P Convert Text IPTC a aste Errors Time v Clear Icon Preview Index v Label submenu v Misc Browser Show the following speed values for Google Earth General Context Menu 0 1 0 5 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 Display General Display Thumbnails Function Keywords Misc Open Preview Tool bar we re vit Default J Undo Context menu options Help opens this manual Click Refresh to update the list for the current browser window This is useful when you have modified files and folders in other programs because GraphicConverter does not automatically recognize changes at the operating system level Resort sorts the preview pictures to correspond with the currently selected sort crite rion that you can select at the bottom left of the browser window from a pop up menu Select All selects all files in the current browser window This is useful when for examp le moving these files to another folder or browser
364. nel the Combine option appears in the con text menu You can use this option to create a picture that only consists of pixels that oc cur in both alpha channels This option is also available for batch conversion functions To blend images into one another like multiple exposed images from a camera use File Merge Folder into one Image Select a folder in the opening file selector All images of this folder are merged and displayed as one image you can save in a format of your choice The Image Calculator option allows you to fade pictures into each other with a formula see p 338 Image Calculator Effect Image Calculator allows you to calculate pictures using a definable formula This is used to calculate errors from telescope or microscope pictures caused by inter ference In this case first take a picture with the lens covered This picture should be total ly black Faults or similar may cause some pixels not to be black Compare the black pic ture with your actual picture to remove the faults 338 It is simpler if you open both of the pictures Select the required order of the pictures with the two pop up menus an operator like plus in the left hand pop up menu a factor like 1 0 and if necessary an additional value in the box next to the plus sign Image Calculator DSCN4152 JPG z rA DSCN4153JPG FA x 1 000 0 000 Result Per You can also use this option to create effects So th
365. ng and modifying the con tents of a package in the browser Packages are normally programs that can be damaged if modified 266 The Create log option creates a log each time you move or copy files with the browser Extended log also logs which image causes GraphicConverter to crash when it attempts to create a preview If this occurs send the picture to lemkesoft t online de Back to the context menu If you have installed the context menu extension for Gra phicConverter you can use GraphicConverter to open one or more selected images display them in the browser view them in a slide show or edit them with a batch The submenu for the batches lists all batches that you defined using the Convert dialog or the pop up menu in the browser This option is only useful in the Finder as you have direct access to the options via the icons From Mac OS 10 4 you can create a workflow in the Automator via the Automator menu using Create Workflow Additional settings can be made under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Prefe rences in Browser Preview Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Comert Text PTC Errors Time Preferences gt Formats Browser Preview Save i Geter m Create automatically Custom Icon O Add to file Formats M n PIC EXE _ As EXIF preview for JPEGs Settings Temporary for locked files Slide Show Always tempora General Effects Scan files up to MB fis mi Ignore size limit for movies c TaN Move Fo
366. ng several pictures with different pixel sizes you should select them relatively 309 and enter the spacing in percent so that the rectangle appears in the same place in all pictures Filter allows you to define filters or select existing ones For more information see the chapter on user defined filters on page 199 Flatten Alpha Channel overwrites the picture content with the content of the alpha channel to make it visible A transparency like an alpha channel can optionally be used If necessary make copies of the pictures to be edited before you use this batch The Gamma function specifies a gamma value For more information see page 195 Use the GIF Transparent function to define a color that can be made transparent see p 154 Grayscale converts a picture into the selected grayscale mode where dithering can take place For more information see page 161 If lets you define conditions that must be fulfilled before the task can be performed You can for example make it a condition that the source picture has to be available in portrait format to perform optional processing steps such as rotating the picture by 90 degrees or adding a margin Functions that come after If are always followed by a Conti nue Ignore even pages saves multi page image documents without the even number pages Use Insert PICT to insert a PICT graphic This function is useful if you want to put for ex ample a visible copyright symbol in the pictur
367. nsures fast printing when for example 600 dpi pictures are printed on a printer with only 300 dpi 97 Include subfolders also prints the pictures that are located in subdirectories of the se lected folder Sort folders separately prints the pictures from subfolders separately Print each folder on a new page ensures that a new page is started for each new fol der Rotate image for optimal paper usage turns portrait format pictures crossways and vice versa to make best possible use of the paper Show this dialog before printing always displays this dialog before printing so you do not have to call it up via the print dialog Use only default printer resolution normally 72 ppi allows fast printing in low qua lity Frame Thumbnails prints a thin one pixel line around the pictures so the image area can be seen even if there are light areas Text Frame color allows you to select a color for the text and frame Background color allows you to select a background color for the whole page Print all pages from multipage files prints all pages of images that have multiple pages Several pages are printed accordingly if all the pictures do not fit on one page During the calculation of the pages to be printed GraphicConverter shows how much space is required on the hard disk how many files are already edited which page is being created and how many pictures are printed Printing Catalog Press Command and Period to Cancel U
368. nt TIFF Complex format for all color depths The GraphicConverter can import and export the following types of compression uncompressed packpits Izw ccitt3 ccitt4 fax3 fax4 32 bit IEEE TIFFs are supported TIM PSX TN ATARI TINY format TRS 80 TRS 80 format VBM VFF Uses 4 bit per pixel VGS 8 Used by microscopes VITRONIC Vitronic Format Supports 256 grayscale VOXEL Format with 512 x 512 pixels for 256 grayscale VPB Quantel Videosystems format VPM WBIN MacWavelet 2d format MacWavelet 2d WBMP Format of the new WAP technology wbz Five variants are recognized wdb HD photo format from Microsoft Can only be imported with the UB version of GraphicConverter WinFax fxm Winmail dat All readable images it contains will be opened in a multiple page document WMF Windows Meta File Contains vector and bitmap graphics WPG Word Perfect graphic format Can contain vector and bitmap graphics X Face Supports 48 x 48 pixels for1 bit Used for small photos in newsgroups X11 Bitmap format X3F Format of the Sigma digital camera 436 Format Import Export Comment XCF e Non documented Gimp format Can be opened with GraphicConverter if ImageMagick Fink package is installed XBM e Black and white format coded in C XPM ASCII Bitmap XWD e Dump from X Windows YUV If the width and height cannot be determined automati
369. ntal strip 41 Multiscale allows you to scale images to different sizes by clicking them This is a useful tool for product photos that appear in online shops Multiscale to different sizes F Scale to 370 ix 535 pixel and sharpen 5 and add to the name x50 M Scale to 180 x 260 pixel and sharpen 5 and add to the name x60 M Scale to 275 x 398 pixeland sharpen 5 and add to the name x85 Scale to 85 x 123 pixel and sharpen 5 and add to the name x180 a M Scale to 60 x 87 pixeland sharpen 5 and add to the name x275 2 C M Scale to 880 x 1272 pixel and sharpen 5 and add to the name _x370 Scale to 50 x 50 pixel and sharpen 5 and add to the name x880 Scale to 0 x 0 pixel and sharpen 0 and add to the name Scale Algorithm Bicubie QuickTime 6 or later Append addition at the end C Append addition before last M Convert to sRGB E Use JPC for all sizes O Use GIF for first size and JPG for all others Cancel gt Ca Using as many lines as you require define the target size a sharpening value and a name extension You can specify whether the name extension should be added at the end of the name or in front of a specific character defined in the input box We recommend using Bicubic QuickTime 6 or newer as a Scale Algorithm Convert to sRGB needs to be enabled if you are creating pictures for the Internet You can specify whether only JPGs will be created with Use JPG for all sizes or whether to Use GIF for fir
370. ntent into IPTC caption only appears in this menu when a Descript ion file is selected These files are generated by the Windows software ACDsee and contain the IPTC data Please do not ask us why ACDsee writes this data in a separate file instead of writing it in the image files as is the standard Use this option to write IPTC data from the Descript ion file in the image files whenever necessary You will then no longer need the Descript ion file and can delete it Back to main context menu The following options are available under Date Set Creation to Modification Date is useful when you are editing files that for example have been given an incorrect creation date like 1904 by your scanning software since the modification date is set by the opera ting system and is therefore often correct Set Modification Date to Creation Date al lows you to transfer the date in the other direction 259 Set File Date opens a dialog where you can edit the creation date and the modification date Set File Date Set creation date to 14 01 2005 17 42 38 Uhr Set always to mod date v Set modification date to 14 01 2005 17 42 38 Uhr l Set always to creation date Add offset to each file o s Cancel 0K You can use Set always to mod date to change the creation date to the modification date Set always to creation date allows you to change the modification date to the cre ation date Add offset to each file allows you to select a
371. ntext Menu ALG Default lt Undo Leave Show content of Thumbs folders disabled if you do not want to display the images from this iPhoto Library folder in the slide show Key shortcuts for the slide show Key Combination Result Command G Shows the selected pictures in the browser as a slide show If nothing is selected subfolders are included TAB or Ctrl or Command Hide or display control 297 Key Combination Press cursor left or Shift click image Result Previous picture or start previous film Press cursor right or Enter key or Space or click image Next picture or start next film Cursor key up down Previous next picture the last picture is followed by the first one and vice versa The pause option can be assigned to the Cursor up key in the Slide Show Misc section of the preferences for example if you are using the Kensington Pocket Presenter Backspace Places the current picture in the Trash Command M Creates an alias in a specific folder you define under Preferences Slide Show General Command R Rename the current picture Command G Jump to a specific picture Alt Z Turn constantly counterclockwise Command Z Only turn counterclockwise while displayed Alt U Turn clockwise constantly Command U Only turn clockwise while displayed Command O Opens the current picture in GraphicConverter Command P Prints the current picture Command
372. o ther tool Framing a Picture Selecting a color from a picture with the eyedropper see above can produce great ef fects if you use the color to design other elements like text or a frame To create a frame around a picture hold down the mouse button and run the eyedropper across the pic ture As soon as a Suitable color for the foreground appears in the toolbox let go of the mouse button Select Edit Add Border The following dialog opens Add Border Where Inside Outside Straddling Size 2d aj pixel Cancel Ex Inside draws the border on the margin over the picture so that the image does not be come larger Outside adds the border around the outside of the picture Straddling 233 draws half of the border over the picture and add the other half on the outside Enter the required Width for your border and click OK If you do not like the color simply select a new color with the eyedropper or with the Color Picker and pour it into the margin with the fill tool amp Pattern Areas that you create with the filled rectangle rectangle with rounded corners and ellipse circle can be filled with a pattern The colored area above the foreground color in the toolbox Window Show Toolbox A tear off menu opens where you release the mouse cursor over the required pattern to select it Pattern Pull the mouse cursor further away to tear off the palette To select a pattern click it on the torn o
373. o 4 3 and your photo frame 16 9 a lot will have been trimmed off the image with the Crop option In this case it is better to select Letterbox to add black margins on the right and left of the image You can also specify the crop method yourself before you use this option by selecting Export Crop for Photo Ser vice Remember that some picture frames make a collage from several pictures or add mar gins so it is not absolutely necessary to edit images beforehand We recommend choo sing picture frames with a high resolution of approx 90 ppi and testing them beforehand at a store Only buy a frame with an aspect ratio of 16 9 if you are using a camera that can be set to this aspect ratio Upload file s opens a dialog via which you can copy the selected files onto a Web ser ver see p 90 Find duplicate files opens a dialog for finding and deleting duplicate files see p 299 Insert profile into selected JPEGs TIFFs will apply a profile to the selected images Select the profile file with the file selector Only set this profile file if it belongs to the images as the colors will otherwise be displayed incorrectly New Folder creates a new folder 263 Create Sort Folder creates a new folder called Sort Folder If you drag image files to a sort folder a rising index number will be added to the front of the name Dog becomes 0001 Dog This allows you for example to reorganize pictures from different cameras
374. o be recognized that are similar to those of the color surface enter a higher tolerance such as 10 or 20 The exact value must be determined based on the picture see p 117 Sound checks the value of the incoming audio and changes it based on your entry un der Output see p 160 Unsharp Mask provides an alternative to the Sharpen Edges option Video lets you leave the straight or non straight frames from video images on screen or to replace the Frames see p 209 White Point allows you to set the white point again Enter the required values for the red green and blue RGB color channels To calculate these values you can set the white point with the white point tool on a suitable sample picture by clicking an area of the image that should actually be white If you are happy with the result undo the correction with Command Z and calculate the color value at this point with the eyedropper Open the Detail palette to display the values or double click the foreground color in the tool box to display the values for R G and B on the RGB tab in the Color Picker 313 IPTC Document Information In the dialog for IPTC document information International Press Telecommunications Council professional graphic creators can enter their names as authors and copyright owners File Edit File Info IPTC File Info F Caption Keywords Categories Credits Origin Copyright Caption Community festival i Lorenzkirch Caption wri
375. o move items manually using the keyboard Pictures can be moved to the target folder with Command 1 or Command 2 In this case 0 stands for 10 The target fol ders set under Move Folder 2 or 3 can be accessed by pressing Command Ctrl 1 to 0 or Command Option 1 to 0 on the keyboard Copy files will leave the source files in their position and create a copy of the file in the Move Folder Create alias creates an alias in the Move folder The icon in the toolbar also creates an alias that is created in the special Alias folder see below Move files press option key to copy them also allows you to make copies of the files by pressing the Option key Automatically rename if the file exists adds a number to the filename for example 1 or _2 if the name already exists in the move folder You should leave Open files reduced faster but no zoom enabled as it speeds up opening without affecting the quality The Set Alias folder option lets you specify which folder to put the aliases in that you create with the toolbar see p 283 Select the folder you want and then click Select 293 Save Slide Show Settings allows you to save all settings for the slide show so you can use them again later on with Open Slide Show Settings This makes various settings quickly accessible for example for presentations or for sorting There are several options available under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Prefe rences Slide Show Eff
376. o use this option for several selected files and for complete folders Copy file name to caption copies the document name to the IPTC description Copy EXIF date to IPTC date simplifies your work if you want to transfer the EXIF date to the IPTC data You can use Copy Windows EXIF Tags to IPTC if you receive pictures that have been indexed by the Microsoft Windows Explorer Windows Explorer enters the keywords in a non standard EXIF section GraphicConverter recognizes these entries and moves them to the corresponding fields in the IPTC section with this option 257 Copy Spotlight comment to IPTC caption copies the spotlight comment to the IPTC caption In the same way Copy Spotlight comment to IPTC keywords copies the spot light comment to the IPTC keywords We do not recommend working with spotlight com ments since they are not included when you send a file by e mail for example General Change Resolution Value lossless lets you change the resolution for example from 72 dpi to 300 dpi without saving the picture again There is then no loss in quality You can rotate JPEGs in the browser without any quality loss using the context menu if the graphic width can be divided by 16 This means that you cannot open the graphic as you normally would Digital cameras create pictures whose width can be divided by 16 so that the automatic JPEG compression is optimized A message appears if the picture width cannot be divided by 16 I
377. oding BinHex Encoding Base64 UUEncode AppleSingle AppleDouble sample messagg Signature Default for account None at a GM red_02 jpg You cannot select this encoding type if you use AOL software Make sure you save the picture file in GraphicConverter without resource and send the file You will find this opti on in the file selection dialog when saving If this does not work you can dial up using another provider that does not require registration Then for example use one of the e mail programs mentioned Pictures for your mobile phone If you want to copy images onto your mobile phone so you can look at them and show them to friends at any time you should reduce them to the size that the camera in your phone creates The size of the pictures should be listed in the phone manual Otherwise you can take a picture with your phone import it into your computer and then determine the size in pixels by selecting Picture Size There are two ways to transfer an image file from your phone to your computer You can transfer the picture via Bluetooth or if your phone has a memory card remove it and ac 75 cess it with your computer via a card reader The structure of the Memory Stick Duo for the Sony Ericsson S700i is as follows h Dokumente fy Filme musik 259_5936 jpg 1MG 5858 jp9 1MC_6426 pq g IMG 6427 jp9 IMG_6527 Jpq IMG 6663 jpg IMG_6750 jpq IMG_7123 jp9 g IMG_7194 jpg IMG 7
378. of 1200 or better 2400 dpi is recommended as the lines will otherwise not be sharp enough If our example picture was printed out double size you would be able to simply sepa rate the pixels The pixels are in fact enlarged as there are no gaps between them Convert picture should be enabled if you want the picture to also contain more pixels when the resolution is increased or fewer pixels when the resolution is decreased Pictures from digital cameras are normally 72 dpi and have an enormous output size To change these pictures to approximately 10x15 cm with 300 dpi clear Scale Picture and enter 300 dpi as the resolution You can use the Batch option to convert several pic tures in one go see p 302 This is however normally not necessary as layout programs or photo services ignore the resolution given in the file head and only use the number of pi xels for the required output size Canvas Size Picture Picture Size Canvas Size allows you to enlarge the picture by adding margins that are more or less like a work area You can use this option for example if you want to add something to the right hand picture edge to make the picture wider Enter the new values for the Width and the Height in a selectable unit You can select the position of the previous image on the new larger work area with the radio buttons Color of added 105 area specifies the color of the added margin If the picture contains an alpha channel it will be s
379. of the file name Specify how many digits the numbering should have with Min digits If you spe cify five digits the first picture has the number 00001 For example if you specify three digits and the source pictures have a five digit numbe ring GraphicConverter will then delete the first two digits The Index sorting option ensures that the numbering is read logically and not alpha betically This is important if the filenames start with a number that does not have any preceding zeros For example 1_Name jpg 2_Name jpg etc Without this option the 10_Name jpg picture would directly follow the 1_Name jpg picture 52 The name within the files can be changed to a name that is entered with Use name The numbering within the filename remains unchanged unless you have enabled one of the other options For example if you enter Berlin in the box after Use name filenames such as 001_Funkturm jpg and 002_Funkturm jpg are renamed 001_Berlin jpg and 002_Berlin jpg The source pictures may also have a different name or may have just a number as the name In our example 001 jpg would become 001_Berlin jpg The Start index option attaches a consecutive index to all the files For example 001 The value for the first picture can be freely selected Specify how large the step to the next index value should be with Step A step size of 10 and a start index of 0 will give you the series 001 010 020 etc Work Environment When a pictur
380. often without realizing it Those affected are unable to read text in specific colors against certain colored backgrounds as is often the case on Internet pages To make sure that your Web pages and other documents can also be read by color blind people you can test the pages with GraphicConverter For ex ample save one of your pages as an image using a screenshot program and open the image in GraphicConverter The Mac OS Finder also has a snapshot option using Com mand Shift 3 The picture will be saved on the desktop Select Effect Color Blindness and then the color blindness type Protan from the sub menu The picture will then be displayed as seen by a color blind person If you can still read the text people with protan color blindness will be able to read the text Select Edit Undo and set the picture to the Deutan color blindness using the same submenu The text should be still be readable again 341 The following picture shows a Web site as normal and then as protan and deutan color blind people would see it In this case the white font is clearly visible against the red background You can avoid problems from the start by not using yellow fonts on green backgrounds or green on yellow Color Usage With expensive special colors printing shops sometimes need to know how much of the color is used in a picture Open the context menu on an open picture and then select Cal culate Color usage The eyedropper is automaticall
381. olor from the color table as transparent with all GIF pictures from version 89a If you select a color with the transparency tool the Transparent tool is en abled automatically and you are asked whether the transparency should be set for the current picture and all pictures in the animation The background can be seen through the transparent areas in the finished animation During editing a chess board pattern is shown unless it has been disabled in the dialog that opens when you double click the transparency tool You can define the transparent color for the whole movie if all of the individual pictures use the same color table You should always use the same color table for all pictures in a GIF animation so that the re sult is as small as possible each color table for 256 colors has 768 bytes Loop indicates how often an animation is played This information is not evaluated by some browsers The animation will be played infinitely as long as the value is greater than 1 Enter the required number for browsers that do evaluate this information The animati on will be played infinitely if you select the Endless option If you enable Apply changes to all Frames you can for example use the Brightness option to change all frames at the same time If you want to reverse the order of the pictures select Picture Invert and then Order of Frames from the submenu 193 Speed For technical reasons on slow computers an animation may be pl
382. on For more details see page 148 Select Lossless JPEG cropping if possible if you want to trim JPEG images without losses Lossless cropping is only possible with pictures that have not been modified in any other way For more details see p 144 onwards The Eraser deletes parts of the picture The current background color is always set For more details see page 229 The Pen allows you to draw a line or an arrow with a thickness set further down using Pen Size The current foreground color is used for the color For more details see page 227 The Eyedropper allows you to change the current foreground color by clicking a pic ture The color at the point you click is more or less picked up Hold down the Alt key to switch to the eyedropper when you are using another tool Double clicking the tool opens a dialog where you can select the size of the eyedropper If you set a value greater than 1 the average of the color values is displayed Pipette Radius 1 Pixel The Fill tool sets the current color for the pixel you clicked and all neighboring pixels with the same color To fill a larger area the tolerance normally needs to be set to a value around 60 For more details see page 227 56 You can draw lines with Line Select the color with the foreground color and the line thickness further down in the toolbox using Pen Size Holding down the Shift key allows you to draw only vertical or horizontal lines For more details see p
383. on your computer Please read the pa ragraph that applies to you below Possibility 1 You downloaded GraphicConverter from the Internet Double click the file which has been downloaded if a window with a volume image does not open automatically A volume image is a volume which can be used like a normal volume even though it only exists in the RAM The following volume image appears on the desktop GraphicConverter Double click the volume image to open it ann Craphk Converter re ES COC o nme GraphicConverter ovo BD asc 2 a ps GB sort ed E Aro rmm D om aT E i cm S e e b i a 5 Ompate 64 6 ME sertiyybar In Mac OS X drag the GraphicConverter folder into the Applications folder on your hard drive Installation is not complete To delete the volume image from the RAM click it and in Classic Mac OS press Command y or in Mac OS X Command E Eject Open the Programs folder on your hard drive and start the GraphicConverter program by double clicking To make opening GraphicConverter easy we recommend dragging the program file into the dock Alternatively you can drag the file to the Desktop while holding down the Command and Option keys to create an alias via which you can start the program Mac OS Classic only If the data is not automatically unpacked by your browser you can decompress it with the latest version of the Stufflt Expander freeware program
384. onel mages CLP Windows clipboard format cri CRW Canon cameras raw format csource Graphics as C source code CT Scitex color graphics CUR Cursor format CVG Calamus vector format 426 Format Import Export Comment CWK Apple Works document format All images contained are imported DCS C M Y K documents are combined in a complete CMYK image DCX Contains several PCX files DDS Format of some graphic cards DeltaVision DESR VFF DICOM Graphic format used in medical technology Direct icns Discus YUV Format from television production DJ1000 Camera format DL Animation format with 320x200 pixels for 8 bit Normally contains x rated elements DNG Digital Negative Doodle DPX Dr Halo Dr Halo program format with 256 colors Drawlt PDB Drawlt Palm OS Duotone PSD Import as grayscale ECW Only in Carbon Version of GraphicConverter Electronic Electric Image Format can contain animations Image EPSF Encapsulated Postscript Format GraphicConverter requires a plug in to open all EPSF files other than Photoshop EPS files see p 349 onwards ESM ESM format Facesaver 427 Format Favicon ICO Import Export Comment Format for pictures with 16x16 pixels that are displayed in the address bar in front of the URL Windows ICONS is used as the file format Adapt and insert the following HTML code in your Web sit
385. onitors are set to a resolution of 800x600 pixels Select the appropriate format for your slide show up to a maximum of 700x500 pixels width and height because the browser elements also require space One way to get a quick overview is to open an ave rage size picture then using Picture Picture size set the resolution to 72 dpi Scale pic ture enabled Then with the zoom set to 100 display the picture on your monitor If you switch the screen resolution back and forth between the default resolutions for 15 and 17 monitors in the Monitor and Sound control panel you can see the difference in size for the viewer depending on his or her resolution and screen size Copy all the graphics that are part of the slide show to a single folder so that you have a good overview To copy instead of move graphic files in the operating system that are in the same volume drive as the target folder hold down the Option key when you move the mouse Create a target folder where you can save the modified pictures before per forming the function Then in a final step you can add the modified pictures to the GIF animation 303 In the File menu select Convert amp Modify and then click Batch If there is already a batch function defined delete it first by selecting the entries in the right section and then clicking Delete 1 Select Bring to size in the left section and click Add Enter the target size you want in the lower section of the dialog
386. onsideration New features in GraphicConverter 5 9 4 In the text tool dialog that you open by double clicking the text tool you can activate a background color for the text to improve the legibility of the text You can convert a selection to grayscale using the context menu Individual EXIF tags can be deleted via the browser context menu if for example you do not want to pass on details about the white balance If RAW files contain metadata like for example IPTC data a file with the same name and the extension xmp will be created that enables other programs like Photoshop CS2 to access the metadata Feathering in the Effect menu allows you soften the outside edges of images Several copies of a file can be made at once via the browser context menu The ithmb format from the iPod Photo can be opened EXIF data can be saved in a text file via the context menu for import into databases Preview pictures are created faster in the browser only UB version The name of the folder for converted documents can be edited in the Convert Misc section of the preferences If your mouse has a scroll wheel or scroll ball you can use it to enlarge and reduce the image during the slide show In the Preferences under Browser Function you can specify that metadata is written to NEF files The histogram that is displayed with Picture Histogram shows the proportion of each color in percent New features in GraphicConverter 5 9 5
387. onvert them into PDF for mat If you only select one source image GraphicConverter will create a normal docu ment You can use New file after folder change to create a new if necessary multi page file in the source area after each folder change This setting is useful for multi page faxes that you receive as a compressed file by e mail if the fax is in the form of several files in a folder after unpacking WMF If you save graphics in WMF format you can choose either None or RLE for compression of 4 and 8 bit graphics WMF Compression None RLE4 RLES Cancel fox This type of compression is only supported by some Windows programs XBM For XBM format you can specify whether to save as version X10 or version X11 XBM Version X10 9 x11 Preferences The majority of the preferences dialogs are discussed in the manual where the correspon ding option is described The following list includes all preferences dialogs For those al ready mentioned a reference to the corresponding page is provided 371 You can open a selection of the most important preferences with GraphicConverter Preferences Basic Preferences We recommend this dialog if you prefer a simpler ver sion Settings made in the Basic Preferences are transferred to the Extended Prefe rences dialog Basic Preferences Window Default window zoom User defined zoom by v Show toolbox m Show footer Unit Metric Save v Store prev
388. onverter converts the pic tures correspondingly This conversion results in the print size A picture that has 600 dpi would be greatly enlarged for this setting as the pixels are more or less enlarged with double the width and height If information about the print size in the picture is in units such as cm this will be ignored The other way around pictures with 72 dpi are reduced by about a quarter for this setting You can specify the number of pictures to be placed in each row and column using Ar range Pictures with fixed Number The size is matched to this number accordingly This mode is very practical The size and form of the cells in which the pictures are printed ari se from the number of horizontal and vertical pictures Portrait format pictures are not re duced more than landscape format pictures if the cells are almost square The default of two columns and three rows allows this when you print on standard paper Arrange Pictures with fixed Size specifies that all landscape format pictures are prin ted with the Horizontal Width entered and all portrait format pictures with the Vertical Width entered The same horizontal and vertical width values must be entered if portrait and landscape pictures are to be reduced to the same degree Shrink images a bit to avoid printing directly next each other can be disabled to print the images without spacing This will save on expensive printer paper Reduce Resolution to Printer Resolution e
389. ood enough for viewing on a monitor Smaller images are sent and received much faster than large ones The smaller versions of the images are kept as invisible temporary files on your hard drive until they are sent If the extension jpg is missing GraphicConverter will add it automatically Select a JPG quality level for the pictures with Quality for scaled images 243 Delete all Metadata from JPEGs deletes the preview and the EXIF information along with all other metadata As the preview causes problems with some programs in Win dows we recommend this setting to increase compatibility Add Filename to Image adds a white area to the bottom of the image where the docu ment name is inserted You can select a font and size for the document name Mark images with a red cross adds a red cross to the pictures as copy protection so that they can only be used for demonstration purposes Use this option if you want to show your customers pictures that they can buy from you or you can license for them The source file is not changed Apply batch allows you to edit the images before export using a batch that you previ ously defined in the browser or in the Convert dialog You can add a copyright note for example Choose your e mail program from the pop up menu E Mail with and click E Mail to send the images at the chosen size to your e mail program If you choose a different size to Original temporary files will be created from the scaled im
390. oom levels have decimal places because the picture quality is particularly good on the screen with these values Most other values have to be rounded up This is why there can be unsharpness and step effects especially along diagonal lines This pro blem only affects the screen display and does not have an effect on the picture You get the best picture display with zoom level 100 You can zoom very quickly by pressing Command key and plus or Command key and minus If you want keep your right hand on the mouse you can zoom into the pic ture by holding down the Command key and spacebar and then clicking it You can then zoom out by clicking it while holding down the Option key and spacebar The View at Original Size option in the Zoom menu enlarges or reduces the picture so that it appears on the screen the same size as when printed out except for slight dif ferences However your monitor needs to be set to the respective standard resolution On a 15 inch monitor that would be 640x480 on a 17 inch 800x600 and on a 20 inch 1024x768 pixels To enlarge a picture to fill the screen select Picture Zoom View at Maximum Size The Picture Full Screen option is similar except that it hides everything but the picture The picture appears at the current zoom level on a black background You can quit this mode by clicking or pressing a key 158 The View as Proportional option opens a dialog where you can enter the required zoom level
391. operating system In the Line ending section you can choose for which operating system the line endi ngs should be compatible Finder Picture Mac OS Classic only After you open a CD by double clicking a window opens which dis plays the folders and files on the CD If As Icons is selected for display a graphic which is larger than a single file symbol can also be shown File symbols are also called icons To display a larger graphic several unnamed icons are placed next to each other Each icon contains part of the graphic To save you the trouble of separating and positioning the pictures the Finder Picture format is available in GraphicConverter GraphicConverter automatically separates the open graphic into small 32x32 pixel sections and saves it as an unnamed icon in the cor rect location This process was also used for the Lemke Software GmbH CD 8 is y Lemke Software n S E ER SN TE t vjl ASA mi vih SD LEMKE SOFTWARE E E E 3 3 3 GraphicConverter CADintosh FontBook HTTP WWW LEMKESOFT DE a Third Party a 351 Make sure that the source graphic is available in 72 dpi so that the size is correct Ar chive the source file carefully If the icon positioning is damaged accidentally for examp le when using cleanup options on the Mac OS you can repair the damage quickly by res aving the graphic as a Finder Picture In the Options dialog you can specify whether 4 Bit Icons should b
392. ors that are darker than 50 are set to black Always view 1 bit pictures with a zoom level of 100 if you want to judge the qua 163 lity as all other zoom levels hide the results too greatly This applies in particular for redu ced pictures Here is an example of a conversion with a 50 threshold value The result is more of an interesting distancing effect than a realistic photographic rep resentation If you like this effect you can find the best threshold value using Effect Black amp White Threshold Threshold Picture _ Before Zoom fico wv Full Screen Preview Cancel fox The dialog provides an overview in which a selection rectangle can be set and moved to display the before and after results Zoom is for the example section Please note that the best threshold value should take the important light parts of the picture as well as the dark areas 164 To optimize the quality we recommend enabling dither under Picture Colors Op tions A standard dither pattern is now created according to special rules that suggests grayscales as with a good color cast Alternatively you can use other dither patterns The Floyd Steinberg dithering creates particularly balanced pictures in which you can hardly see the structure You can access this option by selecting Effect Black amp White Floyd Steinberg It does not matter whether dithering is enabled in the Picture menu or not In our example picture
393. orted by Phil HarveysEXIFTool BoxesthatdonotbelongtotheofficialEXIFstandardandareonlyusedbyapar ticularcameramanufacturerarealsoshown Thiscould PNGandTIFFimageformats Whenyou usetheJP2andPNGformats themostimportantEX FinformationiswritteninthexMPsectionif thefilecontainsEXIFinformation 62 When opening images GraphicConverter evaluates the XMP data if the IPTC informati on is not readable as the XMP data also contains the IPTC information among other things When saving pictures the XMP data is also used to write the correct IPTC informa tion if it cannot be read upon opening You can disable this option in the Preferences un der Open XMP The comments contained in the picture are displayed in the Comment tab For examp le the program and the version number of the program that was used to save the picture are also included here You can modify the comments by clicking the text box on the palette and editing the text in the same way as you would in a word processing program You cannot however select the complete text with Command A In the tab GPS a world map is displayed If the selected image has geo data the position is shown by a small red cross Click somewhere on the map to show the positon in Google Earth Settings for the individual pictures frames for example for an animation can be made in the GIF Animation palette see p 191 O GIF Animation Delay s t lor Tat onion Transparent X al Color Ta Lo ly to al
394. oshop 7 You can therefore delete it using this dialog If you have problems with metadata you should disable the XMP op tion in the Open XMP of the Preferences The files are saved to the folder selected in the right hand list The XMP area can also contain one or several additional images Open the basic image and control or right click the image to open the context menu where you select Show XMP Thumbnail in new Window to open the contained image s APP14 is a marker in which some applications write data even though this marker should be kept empty The JFIF Header contains information on the resolution and possibly a preview Dele ting this header makes the file about 10 bytes smaller This is worthwhile with large file sizes if you are preparing pictures for the Internet First check a few sample images to see if they can still be displayed on the Internet All other APP markers are not normally written as they are not needed Some pro grams also write their names or copyright information in these markers 39 Merge Files opens a dialog as soon as you click Go where you can specify how many pictures should be used to create a new one by merging Merge Files Create a new image from 4 i source images Alternatively you can use the File Merge Folder into One Image option to overlap all images in a folder Calculate Mean creates a text file in which the mean values for the color channels RGB are listed This function i
395. otoshop CS2 as the labels can be set considerably faster in this way Enable Write IPTC data into NEF files if you want to write the IPTC metadata in your NEF files This can be useful if you want to pass on NEF files and if the recipient cannot read the XMP file with the metadata An XMP file is always created if you enter IPTC data In the Browser Open section you can specify whether the last browser or a specific browser defined with Select should appear when GraphicConverter is opened Preferences Custom Icon Formats Behaviour upon program launch IPTC co Settings _ Open no browser Side Sisu Reopen last browser General Effects Open the following browser Misc Move Folders Select Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 v Remember position in folders Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time Icon Preview Index Misc Browser General Display Function Keywords Misc Open Preview Toolbar vit Default Undo 276 If you scroll down when you are working in the preview area of the browser switch to a different folder and return to the first folder it is often useful if the area further below that was last displayed is shown Enable Remember position in folders for this If you would prefer to display the upper area each time you switch folders disable this option Use an alternative iPhoto library allows you to use an iPhoto library that is not in the default path The iPhoto albums are shown in the
396. ottom Esc Space bar with mouse click Removes a defined selection If a picture section is inserted this can no longer be moved Allows you to move the content of the window if the image is only partly visible Backspace or Delete The contents of a selection are deleted by being overwritten with the current background color 424 Return Initiates the Trim selection option if a selection is defined Help or Info Displays the picture information F1 Undo F2 Crop F3 Copy F4 Paste Shortcuts in Layout Windows Key Combinations Ctrl with a mouse click in the layout when there is no picture under the mouse Result A context menu appears that you can use to insert one of the open images in the layout Ctrl with a mouse click in the layout when there is an image under the mouse A context menu appears that you can use to change the size of the image under the mouse in the layout Supported Formats Format Import Export Comment D 320x200 pixel for 1 bit 8BIM Old Photoshop 2 0 format Supports 1 8 and 24 bit per pixel Acorn Sprite Contains sprites from Acorn computers AFP Variation of the TIFF format for 1 bit graphics ALIAS Alias Pix Format Supports 256 grayscale or 24 bit AMBER ARR Used by microscopes Supports 256 grayscale AMC Analyze Format from medical technology that is made up of two files hdr con
397. ou can for example use this option to create back ups before performing a multiple conversion Overview pictures are created with Catalog selected destination format i e sever al catalog pictures are obtained that have small previews and the names of the selected pictures in the selection list on the left The format selected at the bottom right of the di alog is used When you click this button a dialog opens where you can select settings such as size color depth color font etc for the catalog Catalog HTML for WWW usage is explained in detail in the chapter Photo Albums on the Internet from page 80 You can put pictures on the Internet as a download album with a few mouse clicks using the Catalog option Alternatively you can create and print catalogs with File Print Catalog see page 95 35 Several picture files can be put together to make a large picture file with Concat Se lect the files to be put together in the selection area on the left and click Concat A dia log opens where you can specify how many pictures should be put together next to each other in the first line of the new picture and how many lines the new picture should ha ve Concat Horizontal amp Vertical first image define part size Images per Row Images per Column 5 O Only Horizontal O Only Vertical Cancel OK Only Horizontal joins the pictures together horizontally i e next to each other Only
398. ou can also enter 4 6 or other aspect ratios 100 Crop for Photo Service Aspect ratio 2 3 3 Auto trim o M Crop JPEGs lossless will round selection Save as JPEG JPEG quality 95 vi Remove all Metadata Save in original format if possible Change resolution value to 72 0 ppi u Include images in subfolders __ Copy unknown files Save into subfolder Save into userdefined folder Cancel ox Choose Auto trim allows you to define the size of the selection rectangle Enter 2 for examp le to trim the edges slightly Enter 0 to disable this option You should enable Crop JPEGs lossless will round selection since further JPEG com pression which causes a loss in quality is not required despite the cropping When you scale the selection it will move in steps of 8 pixels as this is the only way to crop without losses The cropped pictures are saved in JPEG format or in the original format If GraphicCon verter can open the original format but cannot save that format the picture will be saved as a JPEG If you want to crop these types of pictures and save them in a lossless format you should first convert them into a format such as TIFF using the convert option see p 30 A JPEG quality of 95 allows both very good quality and a manageable file size The files are saved web ready without a preview or resource if Remove all metadata is en abled to maximize compatibility This
399. ou can only use SilverFast via the TWAIN interface with GraphicConverter If you install a scanner plug in the scanning program will only be available to the pro gram for which it was installed This system is highly recommended since scanner soft ware installed for the TWAIN interface is available to all programs that support the TWAIN interface If however your computer crashes when you scan via the TWAIN interface even after you have reinstalled the TWAIN and scanner software we recommend scan ning with a plug in 108 Plug Ins Under Classic Mac OS scanner plug ins need to be installed in or copied to the Plug Ins folder inside the GraphicConverter folder If however you are using the Carbon version of GraphicConverter in Mac OS 9 x with Carbon Lib installed copy the plug ins to the fol lowing path System Folder Application Support Plug Ins Under Mac OS X the Plug Ins folder is in the Application Support folder which is in the Library folder Plug Ins which should only be available to one user should have the following path Users Library Application Support The tilde character stands for the name of the user You can only set a different folder for the plug ins under Classic Mac OS via Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences in the General section by clicking Plug Ins In this dialog you can disable the Acquire again option Acquire again means that the scanning software starts again immediately after a
400. ou use the feathering option Save these images in JPG format Repeat Use Effect Repeat to copy an image several times besides and amoung each other so a pattern like tiles is generated Enter at least 2 in the dialog to get two images besides and amoung each other Repeat X Repeat 2 Y Repeat 2 335 The result could look like that eanA PR OSCNO741 JPG AGE Moving Picture Content Picture Shift allows you to move the picture content pixel by pixel to the left to the right up or down via the submenu or the shortcuts listed there The part of the picture pushed out over the edge of the picture is inserted again on the opposite side This opti on is mainly needed for creating icons 336 Merge all Frames in new Window Effect Channels Frames Merge all Frames in new Window allows you to display the individual images of a film next to each other If for example you open a GIF animati on or a medical image in analyze format the file will be displayed like a film el AX_T1_GD orig hdr 100 v ate a GP If you select Effect Channels Frames Merge all Frames in new Window a dialog opens where you can select the number of images per line Merge Frames in Window Frames per Row Cor C Cancel 337 The result with our example is as follows 00A AX_T1_GD orig hdr Frames Grayscale 50 v a Combining Pictures If two pictures are open with an alpha chan
401. ough To reduce hold down the Option key and click the pic ture You can also drag a rectangle across the area which is to be enlarged The zoom level is selected so that the rectangle content fills the window The rectangle therefore automati cally has the same proportions as the window If you select very high zoom levels such as 1000 to edit individual pictures it may be come difficult to see the individual pixels in single color areas You can therefore select the Show pixel bounds options in the General Edit section of the Preferences to dis play a thin black line around the edges of the pixels These lines are not part of the picture and are not saved in the picture file The maximum zoom is 5000 159 Levels Summary By selecting Picture Levels you can modify the levels for white black and midtones Picture Auto Levels has the same effect as clicking Both in the Levels dialog Each normal photograph contains lighter and darker areas The levels form the path between the lightest and darkest points The further these points are apart the better the picture looks Which brightness levels occur how frequently in the picture is shown in a diagram in the Levels dialog under Input Levels Levels Picture Before After Zoom D Input Levels fo 100 1255 Auto Both Black i White Tolerance 0 5 i Note Typed values will be Output Levels 0 255 applied about 2 seconds after the last key
402. ough www lemkesoft com to obtain a serial num ber Updates up to version 5 9 5 are free and can be downloaded at http www lem kesoft com en gc_oem htm GraphicConverter context menu or service extension Up to Mac OS 10 5 After starting GraphicConverter for the first time you are asked whether the GraphicConverter context menu extension should be installed If you install this extension you can open files or folders from the Finder using the context menu in GraphicConverter display them in a browser view them in a slide show or edit them with a batch You can also install the context menu extension later on via Preferences General Plug Ins using the Install GraphicConverter Contextual Menu Item Plugin button in the Users Library Contextual Menu Items folder The file is named GraphicCon verterCMI plugin To use the extension you will have to restart your computer or log off and on again For more information see p 20 From Mac OS 10 6 Services Apple has dropped the context menu extensions in Mac OS 10 6 Snow Leopard because the related crashes could also cause the Finder to crash Services can now be used instead of the context menu extensions Under Mac OS 10 6 or newer you can therefore install the service extension with the first start dialog after a new installation or later via Preferences General Plug Ins After restarting or logging in again you can use the GraphicConverter service options in the Finder by
403. ound color This option is only available for pictures with millions of colors Rotate You can rotate pictures in 90 or 180 degree steps without quality losses You will usually need this option when you scan a particularly large image and have turned it fit on the scanner Picture Rotate opens a submenu where you can selected a series of options for rotating The rotated A indicates the position of the picture or a selected part of the picture after it has been rotated Dd 90 Clockwise TER a 90 Counterclockwise R a 180 3 Other Value with Line E4 Other Value with Line Other Value with Live Rotation Other Value with Live Rotation Other Value X 7 Live Rotation Options If a picture is leaning slightly you should turn it in the scanner and scan it again to obta in the best possible quality If you no longer have the photograph or the picture was ta ken with a digital camera you can rotate it with the options at the bottom Other Value with Line changes the mouse cursor to a cross You can then drag a helper line along a line in the picture that is supposed to be straight Zoom into the section of the picture where you want to drag the line using the ma gnifying glass Drag the helper line from top to bottom for example starting at the cor ner of a house At the end of the helper line an arrow shows the direction in which the picture is turned The picture will be rotated as soon as you release the m
404. ouse The clo sest alignment is always selected when rotating The helper line does not stay in the pic ture Other Value with live Rotation is immediately shown rotated in a rough preview A grid made up of helper lines will be displayed for easier orientation Select Live Rotation Options from the same submenu to remove the grid or to change the Color and Dis tance of the lines Live Rotation Options Al Show Grid Distance 20 Pixel Color n can A 119 Click and drag a vertical line moving the mouse to the left and right until the edge of the house is straight and then let go of the mouse The houses in the following example are leaning to the left Choose a long vertical house wall Make sure it is as close to the center as possible be cause lines near the edges of the picture tend to be distorted by simple lenses and zoom lenses This effect is increased when you take pictures from above or below the subject 00909 E Willemstad 09 JPG cae MEL 100 w al a 120 The mouse cursor turns into a cross with a hole in the center Through this you can see whether your line is running along the edge from the brightness of the pixels Use this hole at the start and end of the helper line to rotate the picture as accurately as possible All angles on the helper line that deviate less than plus or minus 45 from vertical will be aligned vertically All angles that deviate less than plus or minus 45 from hori
405. ouse clicks 184 This stamp inserts the date or date and time from the EXIF information in one of the four corners of the picture Offset is the spacing from the edge of the picture Insert Date Time Options Font lucida Grande W Size 12 FA Position O Top left O Top right Bottom left Bottom right Offset x Y 20 Kind Only Date O Time and Date a The result will look like a picture from an analog camera with a data back Select the op tions you want and then click OK Open the context menu again and select Insert Date Time 50 vja ad If you cannot see the date or time you have probably set the font too small The text will appear in the current foreground color selected in the toolbox The date and time stamp is only available for pictures with EXIF information Median Faults can be removed using the median filter under Picture Median The extent can be selected using the radius between 1 and 5 If the radius is set to 2 the color of each pi xel is calculated from the surrounding pixels that are within a radius of 2 pixels Faults in the picture could be for example the film grain in enlarged pictures or the dither in a printed picture Always use the corresponding option in your scanner software 185 to remove the dither as more picture information is available during scanning than du ring further processing even with programs like Photoshop _ Picture Radius 3
406. out profiles When this option is enabled there is no query and all images are displayed without profiles Images from a digital camera with Adobe RGB for example are displayed in the wrong colors with this setting Image appears black If an image appears black this is normally caused by a faulty color profile Click the circle with the four colors at the bottom of the picture frame to disable ColorSync Now the faulty color profile is no longer applied and the image should be displayed correctly In this case delete the faulty color profile file and if necessary correct the settings in the File Edit Color Profile dialog You will find the color profile file in the folder User Library Application Support GraphicConverter Profiles The tilde stands for the name of the user If you cannot replace the deleted profile file with a backup open an image that contains the profile GraphicConverter automatically saves the profile in the Profiles folder Pictures for the Internet Whenever you are preparing pictures for the Internet you can leave ColorSync enabled if you enable the Merge color profile into image for web usage option when saving with the file selection dialog Internet browsers display images without profiles therefore you have to merge the profile corrections into the image How color profiles work It is easiest to understand how color profiles work if you imagine that a scanner makes the red hues too weak amon
407. overview by a rectangle You can move this rectangle with the mouse to change the section shown in the picture window The Detail palette shows the section marked as an enlargement If you work a lot with grayscale images you can change the color of the lines from black to another color so you can see the lines better Click the color table The Color Picker opens and you can se lect a color with more contrast The zoom factor can be selected in the upper left corner using the minus and plus but tons and is displayed next to the plus button You can change the size of the palette from Mac OS 8 5 using the handle at the bottom right 60 Keywords GraphicConverter supports certain Keywords entered on the Comment tab in the Infor mation window Some programs use these keywords to sort pictures or to search for pic tures The keywords should be entered in the Comment box as in the following example OWNER Thorsten Lemke COPYRIGHT 1998 DESCRIPTION Row of houses on canal bank The following table shows how the keywords should be entered in the GraphicConver ter Comment box and their counterparts in TIFF and VPB formats GraphicConverter Keyword TIFF VPB TITLE Not available Title OWNER Artist 315 Owner CATEGORY Not available Category DATE Date 306 Date TIME Not available Time DESCRIPTION Description 270 Description COPYRIGHT Copyright 0x8298 Not available HOST Host 316
408. ows as slide show from the context menu that opens when you control click one of the opened pictures Select File Slide Show with Find to display all pictures with for example the word Berlin Slideshow with Find Volume Orion EZ Folder Set Folder Current Search for Partial Name Berlir Type a enter to ignore Creator bast enter to ignore Label Any Start with file i Start with selection Random order Options This option may not seem useful at first but when you try it out you usually discover pictures that you forgot about You can search a volume or a folder and its subfolders If you know the Type and or Creator of the graphics you are looking for you can enter the appropriate abbreviation in the lower boxes 286 Instead of writing file extensions traditional Mac programs write the file type in all of the files it creates so that other programs can recognize that the file is for example a text or graphic file The abbreviation of the program that created the file is entered under Cre ator The abbreviation for GraphicConverter is Creator GKON The Type is dependent on the graphic format If you select a Label only pictures that have been assigned this label will be found Start with file allows you to start the slide show with a different file to the first one from the list of found files Random order shows the pictures found in a random order
409. ows you to specify that the Open button opens files in the default Open with applica tion that you set in the Browser Open with section 239 The Redirect Open button to Open with setting allows you to specify that the Open button opens in the default Open with application that you set in the Browser Misc section If you select Photoshop as the default Open with application the Open button will open the selected pictures in Photoshop Default is open in Graphic Converter The Open with icon has the same function You can also open pictures in the Open with application with Alt double click The other icons have self explanatory names The icons for the slide show and for scanning have a small triangle that you can click to select a variant of the option If you click the icon the setting that was last selected in the pop up menu will be used Using the pop up menus to the right of the icons you can convert the selected pictures and save them to a subfolder The pictures are saved in the format selected in the Format pop up menu You can select the options for the respective format by clicking the Op tions button in the dialog that opens Whether the pictures are saved web ready without resource depends on the setting in the Save As dialog Click the Start button to start the conversion In the Batch pop up menu you can also define a batch and specify where the conver ted pictures should be saved
410. pallet via the Window menu Browser Find Files Mi Search subfolders Cancel C Find gt v Ignore Resource Forks speeds up the search FA Ignore invisible files v Show results in a new browser Find all files starting from the current folder that match the following criteria s IPTC Keywords B contains Es Tor Alternatively you can use the extremely fast Spotlight search option from Mac OS 10 4 Tiger Enter your search term in the browser search box The pictures found will be dis played in the browser Spotlight creates a table of contents for all files on your hard drive after Mac OS 10 4 is installed The IPTC data from image files is also used If you entered Tom as the IPTC key word for a picture Spotlight will find this picture when you use Tom as a search term 316 If you open the dialog in the browser using the context menu or the Other button the IPTC dialog will appear but with a few differences File Info Keywords Categories Credits Origin Copyright Caption Gemeindefest 2006 in Lorenzkirch Caption writer TA Automatically Headline Title Event Remove XMP Gemera OK Remove EXIF Display font Geneva Save Open OK amp Previous OK amp Next Click the individual tabs to open the different sections Enable Remove XMP to delete the XMP information see p 63 OK amp Previous Next allows you to edit a seri
411. pe of the half attached to a horizon tal line Y Radius defines the shape of the half attached to a vertical line In the following example picture the top rectangle has an X Radius of 100 and a Y Radi us of 50 This is why the curve of the top left corner is long and flat in the upper part and the lower part is short and curved more Imagine a circle with a large or small radius 228 half diameter is placed on the inside of the respective curve The crossover point is mar ked with a red line The maximum value for the X and Y radius is 100 Eraser Any part of a picture can be deleted with the eraser Eraser Rectangle oval The eraser basically paints over the background color Set the background color to white to erase with white This procedure is particularly simple if you click the small black and white icon in the toolbar above the background color You can choose the shape and size of the eraser in a dialog In addition to various rectangles you can also select oval shapes 229 Grid Edit Grid Options allows you to define the square size for a grid onto which lines rec tangles and ellipses snap as you drag them open whenever the grid is activated with Edit Enable Grid Grid X Distance 20 Pixel Y Distance 20 Pixel v Display grid with color O While the option is enabled Disable Grid will appear in its place in the menu allowing you to deactivate the grid The grid is usefu
412. pi and 256 colors easily become grainy Graphics are converted to 256 colors when saved as GIFs as the GIF format supports a maximum of 256 colors Batch Possible Functions Batch Table Remove Alpha Cannel k rea Replace Color Table Add f Resolution Rotate Delete Scale Scale to Pixel Count Set Creator for Saving 0 Open Open and Append Resolution Save Show Alpha Channel y Delete All Sharpen Edges Value 24 fe Normal Diagonal 306 This batch function is now complete and should be saved by clicking Save to be on the safe side Under Mac OS X 10 3 the standard folder is User Library Application Support GraphicConverter Actions the tilde character stands for the name of the respective user Click OK and select the GIF format in the right section an Convert amp Modify Function Convert ey Go 3 Screenshots z3 gt Goal Folder cS D Exportformate von Frame jog D FileMakerexpart jpg D FrameMaker Fenster jpg D Coal Folder D Leiste fir Base jpg D MP Works jpg D Ulysses Aboutjpg D Word dokument jpg Filter All available Dest Format GIF GIF ir Use Batches Edit Batches _ Options Prefs Eject New Folder Select all files to be processed in the left section for example by clicking on any file and pressing Command A You can also select a folder In the Function pop up menu at the
413. picture is inserted see p 140 The Copy with opacity option allows you to enter a percentage that determines the opacity of the inserted picture If the opacity is 50 only half of the background is visible after the picture is inserted If you click Choose Picture a file selection dialog appears where you can select the picture you want to insert The selected picture is displayed after Name Plug In makes all installed plug in filters for processing pictures available in a pop up menu see p 197 Remove Alpha Channel deletes the Alpha Channel Replace Color Table allows you to load a color table and set it for all pictures that are modified by the batch 311 Resolution changes the resolution of a graphic The unit is ppi points per inch which is the same as dpi dots per inch Convert picture must be enabled if the graphic is to maintain the same output size see p 104 Rotate enables you to rotate pictures either along the three most common axes or any way you want The Error Correction option should be enabled to achieve optimal results see p 119 Use Scale to enlarge pictures by for example a factor of 2 to create a picture that is twi ce as large If a specific size is to be reached enter the appropriate height and width If the proportions should remain the same select Proportional and then enter the target width or the target height see p 103 Scale to Pixel Count If you know how many Pixels your pictur
414. pictures to the large pictures This should always be enabled as it never causes any harm and allows for intuitive operation of your Web site Open images with navigation creates pages with the large picture and links to the previous or following pages with large pictures Another link called Index takes you back to the overview 86 Open pictures without navigation creates pages with a direct link to the large picture This is then displayed in the browser window without links to other pages In this case surfers can return to the overview using their browser s Back option Open Images in a new window creates links that display the large picture in a new browser window Leave the target _blank entry in the entry box below it Only HTML experts should enter other commands here Set new window bounds to image bounds ensures that the new browser windows displaying the large pictures are the same size as the picture Addition to the body tag allows other information to be entered for search engines Determine how thick the border should be drawn around the preview pictures with Border This border shows that the picture is a link Normally Web designers do without this edge particularly as the color can be altered by the surfer s browser settings Add Tabs to HTML does not change the appearance of the HTML page but makes it clearer for editing the source text in HTML editors than the disabled lt TD gt lt TD gt in one
415. pise p i fenua Sofware i e merck ao D gt 9 Gaprecomverter_0 DS gatncowete dip J arsei kupte L T eseproter vA renstren re htu D gt 9 tetrortene z Bider 300 ae 200x1200 w fart By Name Blai bG nemn 2 selested of 4 total items If you would prefer to display just the starting picture you can specify this in the Prefe rences in the Browser Display Thumbnails section Movie files that are displayed without a picture in the middle section are normally sound files that can also be played on the right hand side Some digital still cameras can create movies that consist of two files A THM file with the same name is saved containing the information on date and camera type in addition to the actual movie file in AVI format GraphicConverter reads the THM file automatically and displays the information If you rename AVI or CRW files with the Rename option the THM files are also renamed automatically MP2 files can only be displayed if you purchase the MP2 add on for QuickTime from www apple com Turn left and Turn right rotate the image counterclockwise or clockwise slide show displays the selected images as a slide show Command G shows all of the images from the current browser window in a slide show You do not have to select the pictures Folders will be ignored If you select images and folders only they will be dis played in the slide show 242 The Print button allows you to print one or more selected pi
416. played with the current settings If you prefer working with the keyboard instead of the mouse you can switch between the tabs using Command Ctrl Tab or switch to a specific tab with Command 1 Index to Command 8 Replace The Uncheck all button allows you to clear all check boxes on all tabs if for example you want to start over again Another example Select Add Index if your files still have no index and you want to add one If the first picture is to be given number 0001 enter 1 as the Offset and a 4 after Di gits Select whether the index should be before or after the filename or whether it should be added as an extension Use Subtract Index from Offset to subtract the value entered for Offset from the in dex Furthermore the index is decreased by one with each file when 1 is entered as Step Remove existing Index deletes the index from the specified position in the filename Before Name places the index in front of the name if it previously came after the name or 44 in the extension After Name places the index after the name As Extension moves the index to the extension behind the period Insert separator allows you to insert one or more separators in front of or after the index You can select the separator yourself Special characters cannot be used if you have selected the UNIX and thereby Web compatible option under Charset In this case they will automatically be replaced by an underscore character Remove addition
417. possible It is therefore a good idea to sharpen the picture again after rotating see p 124 If the angle is not a multiple of 90 an even better way would be to scan the picture again placing it at the corresponding angle in the scanner Do not rotate the picture several times Return to the original version by selecting Edit Undo and try again The Other Value with Line and Other Value with live Rotation options do not open a dialog at present Drag the helper line across a line in the picture that should be 122 vertical or horizontal A dialog where you can check or modify the angle and the algo rithm opens Rotate p Angle ozm M Use QuickTime Use internal algorithm more accurate but much slower Error Correction A Al hanne M Auto crop white margins for small angles Values positive rotate counterclockwise negative rotate clockwise ye GraphicConverter s own algorithm is a lot slower but provides better results than QuickTime Enabling Error Correction allows it to be further optimized If you select Add Alpha Channel an alpha channel with the picture is created without the corners ad ded by the rotate action This alpha channel can be used in DTP programs to hide the cor ners against a colored background for example Auto crop white margins for small angles trims the picture automatically after small rotate procedures You can use Other Value to enter an angle by which the pictu
418. pply to all printing options individual pictures layouts and catalogs Show print dialog during Finder printing interrupts a multiple print job after each picture and displays the print dialog where you can for example change the number of copies General Digital Camera Display Content Display Windows Edit Memory Misc Monitor Plug ins Print Open General Correct amp Change IPTC More Save General Custom Icon Formats IPTC Settings Slide Show General Effects Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Y Preferences General Print Settings Margins Top 0 00 cm Right 0 00 cm Bottom 0 00 cm _ Show print dialog during Finder printing Print time stamp Ignore extensions in catalog printing separated by a space THM TXT HTM HTML EXE DLL P C PAS CC ASM COM SYS LST DOC XLS PST OST INI PPT INF SIT ZIP TAR MIM GZIP ARJ C Undo Cancel Eo Default Print time stamp prints the date and time on PostScript printers The Ignore extensions list contains all formats that should be ignored when catalogs are printed If there are also documents with the doc extension in your picture collection they will be ignored when you print a catalog 388 Open General Preferences Print ME Open General Settings Open General Misc BMP v Verify color table integrity Correct amp Change M Notify loss of information DICOM ECW ated Detect only clear formats FITS M Remember recent items
419. proves the appearance in the browser 270 Further options are available in the Browser Display General section If you want to hide the operating tools at the bottom of the window frame disable Show footer Preferences IPTC gt Formats Save General Custom Icon Formats IPTC EXIF Settings Slide Show General Effects Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time Icon Preview Index Misc Browser General Context Menu Display General Display Thumbrails Function Keywords Misc Open Preview Tool bar Al Show footer _ Show label rating inside large preview v Show preview info C Custom list Define Standard KA Mw Redirect Open button to Open with v Show tools l Overlap one line during page up down _ Show visible dividers for areas _ Show folders on desktop in left pane Mode Maximum preview count in preview area Default Undo J Show label rating inside large preview allows you to select whether the rating and label should be shown in the right hand column of the browser or not Show preview info hides and displays the text below the large preview Click Define next to Custom List to specify which IPTC and EXIF details should be displayed under the 271 larger preview picture on the right hand side of the browser in the next dialog You can add details to the list by clicking Add or by double clicking them
420. quickly see which pictures you have already used in your book 00e Beyonce Users hagenhenke Pictures 2002 08 August 2002 Kalix O Batch No Batch H Ge ES a i Open Turn left Turn right Slideshow Print Catalog E Mail Other Format PICT PICT PCT B Cop p F Music 4 4 vip Pictures T Originale p A 2000 p f 2001 v 2002 p 5 06 Juni 2002 v 08 August 2002 F 02DieFlutkommt dv J 24_08_2002u2v Flut 03 pai A Lorenzkirch f r DVD T Lorenzkirch Panorama T Luftbilder cut Luftbildercutkontras T Luftbilder f r DVD Luftbider_cut_heller_ T Mecus 27_08_02 p 3 R ckkehrLorenzkirch T Schwonkes20 08 20 T Schwonkes 27 8 02 tj gt Strehla T Vom Turm 300 dp T Von Anderer T Von der Kirche Strehl T VonStrehlaausNeum _ F Von Strehla Henke Y M 200x200 ww Sort By Label amp Name Y A B jaf ba A items schmiede bei flut B jpg schmiede bei flut C tif schmiede ber elbe jpg 1 0MB 4 4MB 4 7MB 22 06 2004 09 09 2002 02 03 2003 schmiedehof nach flut jpg 2 5MB 02 03 2003 Even if you can not display or assign labels under Mac OS X 1 and X 2 you can display and assign labels in GraphicConverter under these systems as files can contain labels in Mac OS X 1 and X 2 too In Mac OS X 3 Panther the labels can be displayed and assigned in the Finder again 250 Rating allows you to assign 0 5 stars to images in JPEG or TIF format This infor
421. r and no faults such as patterns 128 appear in colored areas Bright areas should not become white as can easily happen with portraits You should also avoid making a picture seem flat after brightening The left hand picture window shows the whole picture with the selection rectangle The center picture window shows the section selected with the rectangle enlarged The zoom level can be infinitely adjusted with the slider underneath The right hand picture window shows the picture section with the set brightness contrast and color values Click OK to display the whole picture with the new values Practice often shows that you can only determine the best values by trial and error It is helpful here if you can repeat this step for another picture once you have changed the brightness contrast or color Click Set Last Values to set all sliders in the dialog to the same position as in the last process In some cases you may have to make a picture darker Make sure here that dark picture areas do not become totally black unless you want to use this as stylistic effect If you want to keep an eye on the original image while changing the brightness you can open a copy of the image in a new window with Picture Duplicate before opening the brightness dialog If you arrange the windows next to each other you can compare them more easily You can use Saturation to intensify or tone down the colors If you want to make a picture postcard you
422. r ctettaribo T 14 Altargruepe p I5LoiPiarrhaare b 16 Loki Damn Mile p T 17 Lobi Kirche Konst bgs ws Bw T 194 va 20 J 204 T 204 O Siaustich pa p T Aussortiert 05 p T Autotuns Wagrrer P Biter Gemeinde 3 DLJ Cover p 7 Diy Backup 0055 T Diy Backup 0056 CRW_0521 9G oa 2004 pE Diverse p 9 Freende end Verwandte DE Fe ow Dd Grapes Covert baia ic 23 96 J Gteshedon 21 te 7004 eireas ZOO Feet ieren tach Mare Y V DD of 3S i Objekt 144 ser 253 Ob jiten markiert When you hide and display the drop area again the selection will be cancelled The number of files in the current folder is displayed to the right of the last icon If you have made a selection the number of pictures or objects selected is indicated to the right of the number of pictures Type the first letter of the filename to find the image more quickly The text you entered is displayed instead of the number of the files and the corresponding graphic is selected in the middle section of the browser 246 Tip If the right section with the large preview image is completely minimized in the bottom right hand corner you can reopen it by clicking the icon with the magnifying glass at the bottom of the window frame In the directory structure only folders that contain other folders have a triangle for opening folders All other folders do not have to be opened per se but are opened with a click The graphics they contain
423. r dialog opens where you can select which fields should be exported and whether the created file should be a normal text file or a CSV file that you can use in a database or in Excel The encoding can be changed from the normal ASCII to UTF8 Select UTF8 if the IPTC entries contain characters from foreign fonts like for example Chinese 38 IPTC Export Export fields v Filename m State v Filename with path Country v Caption wi Reference v Caption Writer v Category v Headline wi Sub Category v Special Instructions wv Keywords v By Line wi Copyright i By Line Title M Rating M Credit M Label v Source v Object Name vi Date Created M city Format O Textfile csv Encoding ASCII O UTF8 l Create a separate text file for each source file Cancel Eo When you click Go Remove Metadata from JPEGs opens a dialog where you can choose the metadata to be removed Remove Metadata from JPEGs Remove EXIF _ XMP l IPTC and Photoshop metadata M icc v Comment vi Delete everything after EO marker APP14 JFIF header lall other APP markers Note This function will also strip off the complete resource fork Also it ignores all files that do not end with jpg or jpeg XMP is an area in which other programs for example Photoshop CS write metadata like the IPTC information in XML format This additional information can cause faults when further processed in other programs such as Phot
424. r example no foreign characters ASCII Header M Add Width Height and Number of Colors Files Extension Red i Extension Green g Extension Blue b Extension Color Table pal Under Header you can specify that the width height and number of colors inserted in the file as numbers When saving color graphics with color tables four files are also created for the actual graphic which contain the graphic information of the red green and blue color channels and the color table Select an extension for these files under File The dot that separates the file extension is inserted automatically BMP BMP is the standard Windows bitmap format It is implemented directly in the operating system and supports 1 4 8 16 and 24 32 bit For 4 and 8 bit Run Length compression RLE can be used Use the BMP format to create graphics for Windows users or for users who do not own conversion software BMPs can always be opened in Windows Uncom pressed bitmaps can use a lot of memory Under Version you can set whether you want to save the bitmap for Windows or OS 2 BMP Version Windows O os 2 Compression O None RLE4 RLE8 PREIS Under Compression you can enable compression of 4 and 8 bit graphics This type of compression is only supported by some Windows programs 344 Deltavision In the Deltavision preferences dialog you can specify that a dialog for selecting the mini mum and maximum values for the
425. r picture folder where the year month and day fol der is to be created or already exists The pictures will be imported into the day folder ac cording to the creation date If you want to copy pictures from several days into a folder we recommend using 03 07 Mayers for example as the name Select the pictures enable the Download all images into the selected folder option and click Download A file selection dialog opens where you should create the destination folder called 03 07 Mayers New Folder 115 Add file icon and preview to images creates the high quality preview pictures that appear in the browser when the pictures are loaded You can select Delete images in camera after download to delete the pictures once they have been imported If Enter IPTC is selected the IPTC dialog where you can enter IPTC data like the key words for example will open after you click Download This data is set for all pictures du ring import We recommend using this function if you have a general term for all of the pictures like for example Christmas 2005 You can assign more pictures later on in the browser You can enable Embed Color Profile by clicking Select Profile to select a color pro file The selected profile will be attached to all images upon import as many cameras do not include the profile with the pictures to make the files smaller You do not need to em bed the sRGB profile as GraphicConverter automatically use
426. r pictures and also need the IPTC data in the XMP section because the person you are sending the pictures can only read the XMP section with his her software You can use Set XMP label depending on Finder file label if the label will only be set as a Finder label and should be recognized in other operating systems This requires that the software used under other operating systems evaluates the XMP data GraphicCon verter automatically sets the label in the XMP section too If you set the label for several files at the same time this will take a while because each file has to be opened internally In order to work faster this option can be disabled in the Preferences under the Browser Function section Then only the Finder label will be set Use Set XMP label depending on Finder file label to assign an XMP label to pictures that only have a Finder label The Transfer RAW exif date to JPEG option is intended for images from digital cameras that save a RAW and a JPEG file simultaneously If the JPEG files do not contain EXIF data you can transfer the date from the RAW files to the JPEG file using this option Transfer RAW exif record to JPEG allows you to transfer all EXIF data You can use Combine Folders to a single PDF to convert several image files into a PDF file The source files can have different formats and are deleted when the PDF file is crea ted All other file types like for example those from movies or Internet pages are not mo d
427. r quicker navigation and are part of the Mac OS You will find instructions in the documentation for your com puter or your Mac OS package Only up to Mac OS 10 5 If you have installed the context menu extension for Graphic Converter you can open one or more selected pictures via the Finder context menu dis play them in the Browser view them in a slide show create an icon or a preview re 20 move metadata or edit them with a batch The submenu for the batches lists all batches that you defined using the Convert dialog or the pop up menu in the browser see p 302 Open Open With b Print Get Info Move to Trash Duplicate Make Alias Create Archive of Phillip tif Slideshow Copy Phillip tif Color Label x e0000 GraphicConverter gt Automator gt Enable Folder Actions Configure Folder Actions Stuffit gt Open Show in Browser Show in Slideshow Create Icon and Preview Remove Metadata Batch Convert b If all of the options do not appear in the context menu you will have to re install the context menu extension Select Preferences General Plug Ins and click the Install GraphicConverter Contextual Menu Item Plugin button You will need to log off and on again or restart your computer before you can use the context menu extension Show Invisible Files displays invisible files that have been made invisible because you will probably never need to access them Mac OS X only If you w
428. r to draw around areas if you set the zoom level as high as possible and use a professional mouse that has a click lock function enabled in a control panel With this function you only need to click once let go of the button and then you can work as if you were holding down the button 146 When you move a selection made with the lasso one color can defined as transparent You can reach the corresponding settings dialog by double clicking the lasso in the tool box Lasso Transparent Color Fd X Set Back Color Copy Selection Transparent This field is empty because the color table is only available for pictures that use 256 colors or less colors Save to Preferences 7 E You will find detailed information on this in the chapter on transparent copying and pasting with a rectangular selection from page 140 as this works in exactly the same way Magic Pen The magic pen is the second down in the right hand column of the toolbox you may need to select Window Show Toolbox If you click this tool you can select all adjoining picture sections that have the same color with a single click To also select parts of the picture that are not joined use Shift click A tolerance value can be defined for the Magic Pen All pixels that do not differ from the clicked pixel more than the set tolerance value are selected Magic Pen Tolerance 60 0 255 In practice you will need to try a few times to find the r
429. re via File Acquire TWAIN Open Source if several scanners or other TWAIN devices are connected There is no need to do this if only one TWAIN device is connected Single click the black triangle for information on the currently clicked and thus selected TWAIN mo dule and the TWAIN version Select a TWAIN Data Source _ SampleDS __ ScanGear CS U 6 2 f Cancel o gt Y Details Name ScanGear CS U 6 2 Version 6 20 Protocol 1 9 Due to a bug in Mac OS X 10 5 the information which TWAIN Source was chosen cannot be saved Therefore you should select Ask for TWAIN source before aquire 10 5 or later only in the Preferences General Plug ins to get the dialog for selecting the source before every scan 110 Once the installation has been completed and you have selected the TWAIN source you can start the scanner software with File Acquire TWAIN Acquire and scan a picture The following dialog will look different depending on your scanner 8 o o ScanGear CS U Fmain N1240U Tone Color Mode Grayscale B Output Resolution 300 7 fA dpi Selection Width 3 87 a so Ll Height 2 92 Units inches ica Print size Width 3 87 Height 2 92 Scale 2 100 A Canon __ lt lt Simple Mode ED Grayscale iii 300 dpi T 3 87 tj 2 92 E 994K8 Please refer to the documentation that came with your scanner software for informati on on operation The picture will be available in
430. re or use them without changes Burn In Using Picture Size Burn in you can create a file from a picture as displayed on the screen enlarged or reduced If the current zoom level for display is 50 for example this option reduces the picture to half size The display is then set to 100 since the picture is then always displayed unzoomed This function is particularly useful if you want to quick ly reduce a picture to 50 for example You can only preview at print size before and af ter you use Burn in if the pictures have a resolution of 72 dpi and a zoom level of 100 before reduction The standard resolution also needs to be set for your monitor see p 158 We recommend using the Picture Size Scale option for pictures with different reso lutions for example 300 dpi The print size is displayed in the Scale dialog and the scaling can be easily entered in percent This is the only way to avoid an irritating screen display that differs from the print size Scale to main desktop size This option scales the current picture to the size of the desktop After scaling you should improve the sharpness slightly with Effect Sharpen Edges Picture Put Picture on Desktop places the picture on your desktop This option also scales the picture to the re quired size if necessary Scale to main desktop size is therefore intended for creating desktop pictures for other users or for use later on 107 Scale to pixel count If you know
431. re should be rotated The same dialog as for Other Value with Line opens see above Since positive values are used to indicate counterclockwise rotation in mathematics GraphicConverter also follows this principle Negative values for example 0 7 will there fore rotate the picture clockwise It is only worth rotating by an angle if you know the an gle Otherwise use the Other Value with Line option see above The picture quality is not affected if rotated 90 180 or 270 Larger pictures require longer processing times as new coordinates have to be calculated for each pixel You can only rotate JPEG pictures which you do not want to convert and edit without losses using the context menu browser Select File Browse Folder click the small picture preview and then Control click hold down the Control key and click the small picture preview The picture width needs to be a multiple of 16 This is normal however with pic tures made using a digital camera The width and height of pictures are swapped in the EXIF information upon rotation This is only important if the pictures are transferred back to a digital camera and then dis played on a television for example The loss of quality with JPEG pictures does not come from the rotation but from ope ning and saving again as a JPEG because the file has to be recompressed each time it is saved The compression process causes a loss in quality Therefore it is always best to s
432. re trimmed at the top and bottom or leaving the whole picture with white margins on the left and right You should decide for each individual picture Once you have chosen a trimming me thod it is a good idea to specify where the trim should be made Select the correspon ding aspect ratio from the None pop up menu Drag a rectangle across the picture and position it with the mouse if necessary by clicking the line between the handles Define User defined allows you to define an aspect ratio yourself User defined Aspect Ratio Ratio 4 3 Nee E Select User defined from the same pop up menu to use your self defined aspect ra tio Refer to the chapter Cropping for Photo Prints from p 99 For a 10x15 print your selection should be at least 1800 pixels wide portrait pictures should be 1800 pixels tall 1200 pixels will also do however The Position palette shows you whether the pixels are sufficient with the colors green yellow and red Yel 141 low e seh 771JPixel Indicates that the pixels are just about sufficient for the selected format When red ie msza NEE Pixel appears you should make the selection bigger and when green b Mi 4SIH NEBBO Pixe appears you ve got it and you can trim the selection by double clicking the selection or pressing Return In some cases you may want to set a color in the selection to transparent at its destina tion instead of fixing it like a sticker If for example
433. reator is used under Mac OS 9 to assign files to a program with which they are opened when you double click them GKON is the creator for GraphicConverter Change File Creator New Creator Attention Please use this function very carefully You can use Move to Destination if not an Image File to remove all files that are not images or damaged images from a source folder Enable the Delete source files after conversion option in the Convert Misc section of the preferences if you want to keep just the intact image files in the source folder Add TIFF Preview to EPSF allows you to attach a preview in TIFF format to EPFS docu ments Some programs can only display a preview of an EPSF file in this way Change TIFF directory offset can repair faulty TIFF files that will no longer open Add XMP file as ANPA resource writes the IPTC data from a separate XMP file to the ANPA resource of the corresponding image file Additional XMP files are written by Pho toshop CS2 if an image is saved in a format like DNG or RAW that does not support meta 48 data The XMP files have the same name as the image file but have the extension xmp As they are split into two files the image file will be easier to read in other operating sys tems under which there is not an ANPA resource However many programs in the Macintosh field in particular cannot read the IPTC data from a separate XMP file This is why GraphicConverter can write the IPTC data f
434. reen du ring the slide show To display the filename make the appropriate setting under Prefe rences In the bottom left hand corner of the screen there are several options available on a toolbar These options can also be accessed with the keyboard see below The tool bar can be hidden and inserted again with the tab key ojeli gt on m 6 JEL Rayer Ha Click the left double arrow to jump to the previous graphic and the right one to go to the next graphic You can also use the left and right arrow keys as well as Space and Shift Space to page forwards and backwards in the slide show And command option 5 6 can be used for back forward in the browser and slideshow if not defined as move folders in Preferences Slide Show Move Folders 3 To launch the slide show click the triangle which is the play button Click the double line to start and stop a pause during which you are viewing the current graphic a bit lon ger Click the square button or Command period to end the slide show Click File Continue Slide show to continue a slide show at the place you left off The Trash moves the current graphic file to the Mac OS trash This is why the slide show is useful for cleaning up large numbers of graphics that you need to see in full screen mode before you can sort them out The icon to the right of the trash creates an alias from the current graphic file in the fol der selected with Alias folder under Edit Mac OS X GraphicCon
435. rent exposure levels that each show one area of the whole picture correctly Open the images in GraphicConverter and select Effect DRIMaker to make fine adjustments in the dialog that opens DMaker Schreiwer Helligkes Kontrast Sie tangs i et ee pe Aberechen GOD If you are using a digital reflex camera we recommend folding away the mirror with the corresponding settings a while before taking the picture so that the mirror system cannot shake the image at all DRIMaker is aimed at compensating the technical weaknesses of cameras and is not intended to create artistic effects as is sometimes the case with HDR programs You will find further information and examples at the developer Jasper Grahl s website drima ker com Recording Points for Determining Measurements If you need the exact coordinates of the points in the graphics Ctrl click to open the con text menu and then select Record mouse clicks Now GraphicConverter records the co ordinates of each mouse click you make for example on the contours of a finding from an archeological dig Open the context menu again and select Stop recording to stop re cording if you for example want to continue editing the picture before you further pro cess the recorded points Or you can select Copy recorded mouse clicks to clipboard In the clipboard the X coordinate the Y coordinate with top left zero point and the Y coordinate with bottom left zero point are given for ea
436. res from a digital camera Flat creates folders that also contain the name of the month after the day date so there is one folder level less This option is particularly useful if you take pictures only once in a while Exten sion sorts the files into folders according to their extension In the Browser Function section of the Preferences you can select how many Digits for Index the source data has as this will be deleted from the name for the folder name 260 The Minimum file count specifies from what number of files a subfolder with the same name beginning should be created Preferences IPTC P Formate Sort folder create one with the context menu Save Digits for index General Custom Icon Sort files into subfolder context menu Formats IPTC EXIF Minimum file count 2 Settings Slide Show Maximum compare length 20 General Effects M Use lossless JPEG rotation mirroring Mise ri _ Don t modify EXIF data ove Folders Move Folders 2 Keep original file date Move Folders 3 Don t alert Convert Convert Text IPTC Keyboard prone M Space bar toggles between label none and label 1 con Preview Index M Tab key toggles between lists 5 Misc M Cursor keys loop selection at list bounds rowser General Rating and Label 0 7 set label control 0 Es Context Menu Display General Return Enter Return edit filename Ent Wy Display Thumbnails M Keep original file date after IPTC change Function Keywords _
437. res in a program like FileMaker by dragging and dropping as the picture data will otherwise not be trans ferred Limit Finder Drag amp Drop to 500 items prevents you accidentally copying too many items from a browser window to the Finder Enter all filename extensions in the Ignore extensions box that you want to ignore Files with these extensions are not displayed in the browser This option is useful for fol ders that contain Web pages or text in addition to graphics The excluded file types are also ignored when you search for double documents context menu Find duplicate files Allow extensions leave empty to ignore this list separated by a space allows you to just enter JPG JPEG TIF TIFF for example so that only files with one of these exten sions are displayed Use a space as the separator As soon as you enter one extension the ignore list will no longer count You therefore do not have to change the ignore list Only Mac OS X adds Folder Actions to the bottom of the context menu This is only useful for AppleScripts You can assign an AppleScript to a folder that is run when you drag files onto the folder 274 In the Browser Function section you can choose the settings for the sort folder see p 264 Preferences IPTC z ET Sort folder create one with the context menu Savo Digits for index General Custom Icon Sort files into subfolder context menu Formats IPTC EXIF Minimum file count 2 Sett
438. resolution to 72 dpi for the required picture with Picture Size Scale If the picture is in lands cape format set the height to the size of the vertical screen resolution If your screen re solution is 1024 by 768 for example set the height to 768 pixels in the second step of the dialog Percent or pixels can be used as the unit The Proportions should be kept Enable this option at the bottom of the dialog if it was not already enabled Call up this dialog a third time and note down the width of the pic ture in pixels Now subtract the horizontal screen resolution from this number The result is the value that you need to trim off the left and right sides as required with Picture Size Add Remove Margins Enter a minus sign in front of the value otherwise a mar gin will be added Save the picture in TIFF format without compression It can now be set as the desktop background under Classic Mac OS via the Appearance control panel with Place Picture in the Desktop section Under Mac OS X use Desktop in the System Pre ferences and select Choose Folder from the Collection pop up menu to select the pic ture from the set folder Practical tip Perhaps you can just opt for the quick method and trim off the left and right hand sides of landscape format picture with the selection rectangle and Edit Trim Selection to roughly obtain the monitor format and then select Picture Put Picture on Desktop Creating a GIF Animation A lot
439. right or Con trol clicking an image file or a folder Open the Services submenu at the bottom of the context menu The GraphicConverter service service extension is installed under the path Library Services The GraphicConverter program needs to be started before you can use the ser vices Installing Plug Ins The Carbon version of GraphicConverter only supports Carbon plug ins The Classic versi on of GraphicConverter only supports Classic plug ins If you want to scan with GraphicConverter using a plug in in Classic Mac OS copy the plug in into the Plug Ins folder in the GraphicConverter folder and restart GraphicCon verter if it was already running In Mac OS X copy plug ins into the Library Application Support GraphicConver ter Plug Ins folder and restart GraphicConverter if it was already running The plug ins 10 need to be carbonized i e suitable for Mac OS X Carbon plug ins are currently only available for some scanners Plug ins which should only be available to one user are co pied to the Users Library Application Support GraphicConverter Plug ins fol der The tilde character stands for the name of the respective user You can check your user name in the System Preferences in the Login section of the Login dialog tab It s in the Name box User plug ins are only available to the respective users Please see Scanning with GraphicConverter from page 108 for further information If you want to s
440. rmat from Fritz SFW e Seattle Filmworks photo on disk format Variation of the JPEG format SGI e Silicon Graphics Image format Supports 256 grayscale or 24 bit SHP Lighting Press or Printmaster graphic archive format Supports 1 bit per pixel SHS 434 Format Import Export Comment SIGMA SD10 RAW Format of the camera Sigma SD 10 raw Sinclair QL Sinclair QL format SIXEL VAX world terminal format SKETCH Variation of the MBM format smv Used by microscopes SNX Variation of the JPEG format Softimage Softimage format Supports 32 bit per image Used by video programs SPC Spectrum graphic format Supports 320 x 200 pixels for 512 colors SR2 Sony Raw ST X SBIG Supports 256 grayscale Startup Screen Graphics in this file format are displayed when your Mac is started if they are in the system folder SUN SUN Raster file format Supports 8 or 24 bit per pixel Super Hi Res Apple ligs graphics with 32000 colors 3200 SVG Import with Mac OS X only with ImageMagick as helper http www imagemagick org SWF Using QuickTime Macromedia Flash System 7 clip Clipboard format when copying or moving data on System 7 or higher TBCPlus TCL TCL format TealPaint PDB TealPaint Palm OS Save for PDB Select the format using the Options button TEX Texture TGA Truevision Targa format 435 Format Import Export Comme
441. rogram format Supports the Atari three color modes Icd5 RAW format of some iPod games ICO ICN Format of Windows file icons Windows XP icons are supported IFF LBM Default file format of Amigas Image gt Finder Supports all color depths Places an image in a folder where a Custom File Icon was created very useful when creating CD ROMs ImageLab Format with 256 grayscale PrintTechnic IMG XIMG GEM Draw file format Supports 1 to 8 bit per pixel The specifications of the 24 bit per pixel variation were never officially published IMQ Satellite image format IPLab ithmb iPod Photo format ISS j6i Variation of the JPEG format JBI Variation of the TIFF format JEDMICS C4 Used by NASA JIF New format based on the TIFF format JNG JPEG JFIF Supports 24 bit per pixel or 256 grayscale Compression results in a loss of image quality Supports EXIF document information for example from digital cameras Medical JPEGs with 12 16 bit per channel can only be opened 429 Format JPEG2000 jp2 and j2c Import Export Comment JPEG 2000 creates smaller files than JPG but has not established itself j2c is a variant of JPEG2000 format JPF Like gif but with zlib compression jpx JPEG variant KDC Kodak digital camera format You can only open these types of files on modern Macs with Power PC processors or later You can also open these file
442. rom the separate file in the ANPA resource In the list on the left of the Convert dialog select all images and XMP files and convert them to a format that supports IPTC data like TIFF and JPEG for example One advantage of the XMP data is that all content is encoded with Unicode which is useful for example for languages like Japanese GraphicConverter can read the XMP data from the resource fork of PNG files that were written by Photoshop CS 3 or newer The following diagram shows how image files are built on a Mac Data fork Picture jpg When you copy image files from a Mac to Windows the resource fork appears as a file of its own beginning with a _ as name When you copy image files from a Macintosh to Windows the resource fork appears as a separate file that starts with _ Delete source raw file if no jpg exists in dest folder In professional workflows RAW images are often imported from the camera and converted into JPG format Unusable 49 JPG images are deleted immediately This option allows you to delete all RAW files auto matically if there is no longer a JPG file with the same name except for the extension In the left hand list select the folder with the RAW images and the folder with the remai ning JPG images in the right hand list Add XMP record if only IPTC NAA record exists also writes the IPTC data in the XMP section This option is useful if you have already indexed you
443. rom iLife 08 or newer for direct access UB version of GraphicConverter or newer needed 272 The Default button resets all settings to the standard defaults Click the Undo option to reset all settings back to where they were the last time this dialog was open Under Misc browser preferences you can use the Select default Open with applica tion to select a program such as Photoshop that appears in the context menu for browser graphics using the Open with entry Select the corresponding program file in the file selection dialog that opens This program also applies for the Open with icon in the tool bar that you can display in the Browser Toolbar section Preferences IPTC al z gt Formats Select Default Open With Application Save o General L Redirect double click to Finder Custom Icon M Show path in window title Formats aa gt IPTC Open folders in same browser Settings Slide Show Drag amp Drop behavior General 0 h li a Effects Behave like the Finder Misc Move by default and copy with option key Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time jenn Preview Ignore extensions separated by a space Mise THM TXT HTM HTML EXE DLL P C PAS CC ASM COM SYS LST DOC XLS PST Browser OST INI PPT INF SIT ZIP TAR MIM GZIP ARJ _ Add complete image to drag Keep selection after drag amp drop copy Limit Finder Drag amp Drop to 500 items
444. row option The options are intended to keep the HTML files as small as possible Disable Add Tabs to HTML and enable lt TD gt lt TD gt in one row to minimize the file size of the HTML page created The effect is only slight however Enable Add Tabs to HTML and disable lt TD gt lt TD gt in one row to create HTML files that are clearly formatted so that they can be easily edited in the source text mode using an HTML editor If you only edit the pages with for example Dreamweaver in preview mode you will not need to format the source text tidily In this case select the smaller files by disabling Add Tabs to HTML and enabling lt TD gt lt TD gt in one row Choose whether the originals should be copied into a new folder in the destination di rectory with Create images folder These copies are intended as an administrational aid but do not have to be created You can also use the original folder for uploading to In ternet servers All uppercase letters in filenames are changed to lowercase letters with Make filen ames lowercase This may be required for UNIX servers on the Internet The Correct extension option changes the file extension to the correct extension If a JPEG picture has the incorrect tif extension this is changed to jpg Use Macintosh line ends and Use UNIX line ends set the different characters at the end of the line Use UNIX line ends if you want to edit the created HTML files under UNIX Web brows
445. rs Delete source files after conversion Move Folders 2 v Show warning Move Folders 3 Special Convert z Convert Text IPTC Convert PhotoCD images to folder with cD serial Errors Time __ Separate layers of Photoshop files _ Use layer name for file Icon Preview _ Add background layer ame Cl Allow conversion to same folder as source Browser Watch Mode will not delete original but change the label General Context Menu Name for Converted files subfolder Dokumente konvertieren Display General Display Thumbnails Function Keywords Misc Open mhie TIC Default Undo Cancel 0K Subfolders also includes the subfolders of a selected source folder in the multiple con version The source folder is recreated in the target directory together with its subfolders Change extension replaces an old format extension which may be included in the file name of the newly created files for example tiff with the extension for the new format The source files are not changed DOS filenames shortens the filenames of the files created in the target directory to 8 characters followed by a period and three other characters chosen as intelligently as pos sible so that the files can also be read under DOS DOS is an old operating system for IBM compatible computers You should only select Don t alert before overwrite if you are sure that pictures or text will not be lost with this option The last characters of a long f
446. rsion with Ctrl Z and reduce again with a more suitable percentage As soon as the size of the head fits the body in the other pic ture select the head with the lasso and copy it Using Command V paste the head into the other picture You can position it freely there Resolution Each picture file is made up of pixels and information on the size of the picture The pixels are square rectangular in a few formats To help explain this imagine a picture that is 300 pixels wide and tall The file also contains the information that the picture has a width and height of one inch One inch is 2 54 cm Our picture therefore has 300 pixels placed horizontally next to each other and also ver tically one below the other At this density the picture resolution is 300 dpi This abbrevi 104 ation stands for dots per inch Sometimes the abbreviation ppi points per inch is used This is exactly the same Resolution Horizontal 300 A ppi Resample Enter horizontal amp vertical EE ET E le kian Pictures normally have the same horizontal and vertical resolution The option of set ting different values for horizontal amp vertical can be used for example to convert pictures with different resolutions to a standard X and Y Resolution Basic rule The higher the resolution the better the picture quality Pictures used for printing magazines for example Macworld are normally at least 300 dpi For line dra wings however a resolution
447. rt options opens Download all files from your digital camera Select folder and download all images into the selected folder Y Download all images into folder 01 07 2008 Film 1 Sort images into subfolders depending on date v Leading spaces v Add month names O Sort images into subfolders depending on extension wv Add file icon and preview to images _ Delete images in camera after download Embed Color Profile Enter IPTC v Apply rename action Datum vor Namen x Select the Download all images into the selected folder option at the bottom of the selection dialog if you want to load all pictures into a folder Download into 30 11 2005 Film 1 creates a folder with the date and a film number into which the pictures are loa ded The date is always the date of the import Sort images into subfolders depending on date creates a subfolder in your picture folder with the structure year month day i e for example v 2004 v 01 Januar gt 03 Mayers von Johanna gt 03 07 Mayers If for example you require folder names without month names and a preceding zero for the month number when further processing in a php environment disable the With leading digits and Add month names options Sort images into subfolders depending on extension is helpful if your camera writes a RAW and a JPG file on every shot GraphicConverter creates a Folder for every format in the destination folder In the file selection dialog select you
448. rter of fers a series of options to help you print pictures Paper Format File Paper format opens the standard dialog for the printer selected in the Apple menu Select the inserted paper format so that GraphicConverter receives the correct informati on about the area to be printed If your printer can print certain formats without margins you need to select a special paper format for borderless printing Page Setup Settings Page Attributes H Format for i550 B Canon i550 A5 FH A4 ie JB5 p Orientation US Leter d US Letter US Legal US Letter borderless Paper Size Scale l 10 Envelope p DL Envelope E 4x6 gt sx7 C In our example we are using a Canon i550 For borderless printing select US Letter borderless or another format without margins In the Print Options dialog that is de scribed below you need to click the Use printer s minimum button to allow borderless printing Printing An opened picture can be printed with File Print If you have defined a selection in the picture only the selection will be printed File Print Selection will then appear in the menu The dialogs for printing are displayed by the Mac OS and look different depending on your version of the Mac OS 92 Classic Mac OS If the following dialog is not displayed select the GraphicConverter entry from the se cond pop up menu down Area All Q Content of window Margins Size Original si
449. rticularly useful with CMYK pictures if the pictures are being prepared or checked for offset print The individual channels are opened in separate image windows that show the content of the channel as a grayscale picture You can join these single images from the color channels to make a color image again by selecting Effect Channels Join 152 Effect Channels Swap Red and Green sets all red pixels green and all green pixels red This is sometimes needed for infrared photo processing Effect Channels Swap Red and Blue and Effect Channels Swap Blue and Green swap the colors accor dingly Effect Channels Optimize Blue Channel can improve the colors of some imported RAW pictures However if color pictures are to be printed by a printing shop for example using an off set machine they need to be available separated in CMYK mode Cyan Magenta Yellow Key Key means black Key was chosen instead of black to avoid confusion with blue In this mode the picture contains information on how much of each of the four printing co lors is printed at what point GraphicConverter can open and save pictures in CMYK mo de If you want to separate an RGB picture select the required profile under File Edit Co lor Profile with the CMYK Select Change button Edit Color Profile wv Use ColorSync color matching Source None Display HM204DA DTA You can change the display profile in the ColorSync control panel Printer
450. s Summary Select File Open then the target format in the File Save as dialog and sa ve 1 Open the picture to be converted with File Open If pictures have already been opened using this option they can be opened again quickly from the File Open Recent submenu 2 Select File Save as to convert the picture The file selection dialog may appear different in older Mac OS versions The necessary options are also available in the old file selection dialog however a PCX SCR PCX PDF portable documet format PDF PGM portable graymap file format PGM PGPF Sony Clie PRC PICS PICT Sequence PICS PICT PICT PCT PICT from Resource PNG PNG D FinalC ppat gc46bt PPM portable pixmap file format PPM f I Graphi PSD Photoshop PSD 2 Graphi PSION PIC 2 Graphi PSION 5 MBM MBM 2 Graphi RAW RAW 2 Graphi Resource RSRC Heimat RTF Rich Text Format RTF Ei uachw Scalable Vector Graphics SVG SVG y SGI SGI Slices HTML Softimage STAD PAC Startup Screen SUN Rasterfile SUN Saveo SWF Shockwave Flash Image SWF t O Savep System 7 Clipping CLP a Create TCL Image DAT F Set Foi TealPaint PDB PDB E Save TGA TGA Prefet Tiny Viewer PDB PDB TRS 80 HR VPB QUANTEL VPB i WBIN MacWavelet DAT Ese WBMP WBMP Windows Cursor CUR Windows Icon ICO WMF WMF gt Format
451. s Value can be set with the slider under the color circle The color permutations only change the color not the saturation and brightness Color Picker CMYK Crayon Original New Hue Angle i Saturation Value Cancel ox gt Chromatic Involution Chromatic Involution changes the colors in a picture in the same way as you transpose a piece of music from C major to F major on the basis of certain rules First of all here s a Malaysian beach as it was originally photographed 200 And after chromatic involution The contrast intervals and the color harmony are thus maintained The contrast inter vals are related to Brightness differences of colors Angle differences of colors on color circle Saturation differences of colors The chromatic involution is particularly interesting for artists art experts and perception psychologists You will find more information on the Internet at http math1 uibk ac at liedl 201 Color Rotation by 15 Degrees Clockwise All colors are moved 15 degrees clockwise in this color permutation The change compared with the original can hardly be seen but the effect is increased when you apply the filter several times Applying it five times results in a total rotation of 75 degrees and the changes become more noticeable Centric Involution Centric involution replaces all colors with their complementary colors As the values
452. s TWAIN say the inventors Under Mac OS X you do not need to install any extra TWAIN software since the code is integrated in GraphicConverter You only need to install the TWAIN driver for your scan ner 109 Mac OS Classic Please note the installation instructions for these components in the chapter Installing TWAIN on page 11 The TWAIN software may have already been in stalled by another program If the TWAIN software supplied with GraphicConverter is more recent you can replace the installed TWAIN components Make a backup of the old versions however You can tell the version of programs and extensions from the version number displayed in the About dialog or from the file date Click the file and call up the information on operating system level by pressing Command l Install the software for your scanner If you can install just the TWAIN driver for your mo del instead of the drivers for several models in a simplified installation make sure you do so as this will avoid problems Mac OS Classic only During installation make sure that the scanning software for the TWAIN interface is installed The TWAIN folder is located in the Preferences folder in the System Folder Most installation programs for scanner software also automatically install the scanning program for the TWAIN interface The TWAIN software is often installed si multaneously Before you scan for the first time you will need to select the required TWAIN softwa
453. s case you can use the D cor system extension If D cor is installed D cor will have been added to the Picture menu This transfers the current picture to D cor For further information please refer to the D cor documentation Back to the Put Picture on Desktop option The picture is enlarged disproportionally and is therefore distorted to adjust the picture to the screen format You can minimize this effect by changing the format of the picture to roughly the monitor format Cut off unimportant edges with the selection rectangle and the Trim option see page 139 and page 117 or use a different picture if you want For better orientation it is easier if you 188 maximize the picture window to the size of the whole screen and then drag the selection rectangle slightly larger but not right up to the left hand edge of the window because it is narrower on the left than on the other sides Now trim the picture and select Picture Put Picture on Desktop If you want to remove the picture from the desktop from Mac OS 8 you can delete it in the Appearance control panel in the Desktop section with the Remove Picture option You only use the Desktop control panel in earlier versions of the Mac OS You also can create a desktop picture by hand to the exact pixel if you are prepared to go to the trouble Determine your screen resolution under Classic Mac OS with the Moni tors and Sound or with Monitors in the Mac OS X System Preferences Set the
454. s displayed You do not have to click the picture O IPTC file information Tite M hle Author Renate Henke Author s position Frau Caption M hle Caption writer Copyright notice Renate Henke Vermerk Keywords Mahle Category Supplemental Date City Ringstedt State Niedersachsen Country Deutschland Credit Renate Henke Source Headline M hle Instructions Reference Urgency If you have to optimize the IPTC information for further processing in large picture data bases we recommend using the program SnapsCleaner which is also available from Lemke Software GmbH You can download a trial version at www lemkesoft de Like Gra phicConverter SnapsCleaner can delete metadata in a batch run and also correct IPTC entries in JPEGs by checking the record length for example and correcting it if necessary SnapsCleaner can also remove any Photoshop metadata from the IPTC information As the Photoshop metadata no longer corresponds with the official IPTC standard it is worthwhile removing it before you pass the pictures onto publishers who will manage the pictures in a large picture database Some publishers require that the pictures cor respond with the official IPTC standard because the database could otherwise be dama ged Depending on the contract the suppliers could be held liable for these damages Using the Convert dialog you can transfer the IPTC information from one file to another with the same name This is u
455. s source allows you to save the new files in the source folder upon conversion Enable Watch Mode will not delete original but change the label to ensure that the original files are not overwritten during automatic conversion Watch Folder Graphic Converter sets the first label for all files that have already been edited so you can see which files have been converted yet Name for Converted files subfolder allows you to define the name for folders that are automatically created for conversions 34 Back to the Convert amp Modify dialog 8 1 Q Convert amp Modify Function Convert B Go Jacobsthal i o Goal Folder B 4 _ _ EE ES D DSCN5330 jpg D DSCN5331 jpg D DSCN5333 jpg D DSCN5334 jpg D DSCN5337 jpg D DSCN5338 jpg D DSCN5339 jpg D DSCN5340 jpg D DSCN5342 jpg D DSCN5343 jpg D DSCN5344 jpg D DSCN5346 jpg D DSCN5347 jpg D DSCN5348 jpg D DSCN5350 jpg D DSCN5353 jpg D DSCN5356 jpg D DSCN5358 jpg D DSCN5359 jpg D DSCN5361 jpg D DSCN5362 jpg D DSCN5363 jpg D DSCN5365 jpg Filter All available H Dest Format TIFF TIF T _ Use Batches Edit Batches M www Ready Options Prefs gt E Eject New Folder Open Convert CRW to 48 Bit PSD file converts CRW images into 48 Bit Photoshop files CRW is the RAW format of some Canon Cameras Copy copies the source data into the destination directory without changes Y
456. s the corresponding profile when ColorSync File Edit Color Profile is enabled if it is included in the EXIF informati on of the image file as a color model You should only embed the profile if you want to use the image with a program that does not take the profile information from the EXIF information or if you are not sure about this point Apply rename action allows you to rename the images upon import All of the sets that you saved in the rename dialog are available You can open the rename dialog by Control clicking a preview in the browser or from the Convert dialog see p 43 Back to the process of importing A file selection window opens where you can select a folder for the pictures or create one Click Select Mac OS 10 2 or Open Mac OS 10 3 to import the pictures and display them in a new browser window If the pictures contain orientation information in the EXIF information portrait format pictures will be rotated without losses upon importing If the file date is not the same as the date in the EXIF in formation the date from the EXIF information is used for the file in the computer During import a dialog shows you how many pictures are on the camera memory card and how many have already been transferred Download Images from connected Digital Camera Camera Nikon Digital Camera E4500 Number of Objects 16 Current File DSCN1071 JPG Downloaded Files 2 O Downloaded 1306061 OK Bytes If you want to downlo
457. s useful for agencies whenever large numbers of pictures have to be viewed and sorted out if they are too bright or too dark Repair TIFF allows you to replace a faulty directory with an intact one This is practical if you have pictures from a digital camera that have an identical directory If you can still open one of the pictures use it as a master On the left hand side of the Convert amp Modify dialog select the corrupt pictures and se lect the Repair TIFF option Click Go and select the master file in the file selection dia log that opens Once you click OK the directory from the master file will be written to the corrupt pictures that you should then be able to open again Only use a picture file that is identical with the corrupt file as the master If in doubt create a backup of the image files beforehand Split JPEG data stream into single JPEGs creates a single image from each picture in a JPEG stream file The individual pictures are saved in the folder selected in the list on the left hand side If you select a Word file as the source file all pictures contained will be written to the destination folder as files Extract EXIF JPEG previews allows the EXIF preview to be extracted from files and sa ved as an image This is useful if you want to at least see which pictures you have lost when image files become damaged Before you delete the data on the memory card you should try to rescue it using a free recovery progra
458. s with Opening and Converting Files We won t leave you out in the cold GraphicConverter opens or converts almost every graphic If it doesn t work please contact us contact information can be found on page 15 We can adapt GraphicConverter as long as it is technically feasible and con forms to licensing requirements It has usually been possible to implement a new format within 24 hours Often the cause is a problematic graphic that is in a format that Graphic Converter can actually open The file cannot be opened because a different manufacturer created a new variation of the format for whatever reason Please describe your problem to us before you send us an example graphic We can often give you advice on how to sol ve the problem Send us an example graphic only if we request one We will analyze your example graphic and if necessary add it to the types of formats We will then provide you with a free update either per e mail or via download In the following section the most important formats and their options are described in alphabetical order Formats with no special features are described in a table starting on page 425 ASCII This acronym stands for the American Standard Code of Information Interchange the ex change format for text without formatting information originating from the early days of 343 word processing Graphics in ASCII format contain only characters from the ASCII table just like ASCII text and have fo
459. s with the X and UB version from GraphicConverter 6 Keynote PICT Variant of the PICT format created by Keynote KISS CEL Koala C64 Format Kodak DCS KONTRON Kontron microscope format Contains graphics with 256 grayscale LDF LuraDokument Format In the UB version of GraphicConverter LDF documents cannot be imported and exported as no SDKs are available If necessary use the X version of GraphicConverter under Rosetta Liberty IM LOGO Nokia telephone logos Lotus PIC Lotus vector format LuraDocument Document management format LWF LuraWave LuraWave Wavelet compression technology When saving the graphics size is limited to 800x600 pixels You can only save larger graphics after you have paid the licensing fee see p 359 onwards In the UB version of GraphicConverter LWF images cannot be imported and exported as no SDKs are available If necessary use the X version of GraphicConverter under Rosetta MacDraw MacPaint Black and white format with 576 x 720 pixels MAG MAKIchan graphic format MAYA IFF Variation of the IFF format 430 Format MBM Psion 5 Import Export Comment Graphics of the PSION 5 series MDC Meteosat 5 Meteosat satellite format MHT archive MonkeyCard Telephone logo format MonkeyLogo Telephone logo format Moov QuickTime animation MOS RAW format MP2
460. sed Disk Space 2 5MB Total Number of Files 9 Current Page 1 Files on current Page 8 In some cases large amounts of data need to be stored temporarily on the hard disk for the print out These temporary files are automatically deleted after printing If your hard disk does not have enough space for this you can select a so called Scratch folder which is located on an external hard disk for example in the Preferences under General Memory You can also select the hard disk directly Click the Scratch folder button and se lect a volume or a folder with the file selection dialog If a picture cannot be opened for example because it is corrupt or has an unknown for mat the preview will be used for printing This may result in a loss of quality 98 Print Folder To print all the pictures in a folder individually select File Print Folder Each picture is printed on one page Processing Pictures Editing is normally worthwhile whether you scan a picture or under Mac OS X import one from a digital camera using File Acquire Download images from connected ca mera In this section we will show you how to scale scan sharpen and your pictures and much more You will often want to try out a sequence of effects first Use Picture Duplicate to create a copy of the picture in a new window so you can try out a few ef fects In this way you will not modify the original and you can always compare the results with the first
461. seful if you have indexed low resolution versions of pictures and want to transfer the IPTC information to the high resolution versions For more infor mation see page 40 318 If you want to change part of the IPTC information for several pictures or for a large coll ection of pictures select them in the browser click Edit Find compare and replace and then Find and Replace IPTC Data in the submenu You can also select a folder for exa mple the picture folder on the left hand side All pictures in that folder and its subfolders will then be processed Find and Replace IPTC Metadata Find Cd Replace with Warning You can t undo this operation Please apply it only to a backup copy of your files Cancel Ok Therefore you can for example search for Agency X after your company name has changed and replace it with the new name Picture agency Y 319 A text conversion can be selected in the Preferences under Open or Save IPTC for sa ving and opening pictures with IPTC information Here are the options for saving pictures with IPTC information Preferences IPTC a Save IPTC EXIF gt Formats g Save Character encoding of IPTC NAA record General Custom icon Unicode UTF8 Formats Apple MacRoman IPTC EXIF m Settings O Windows Slide Show a Mi Always add IPTC as XMP Effect ie _ Keep EXIF maker note and user comment Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3
462. ses differs from camera model to camera model The colors in RAW images can only be displayed correctly if you have the color curves of the camera manufacturers These color curves are not published by the manufacturers however GraphicConverter therefore uses the color curves provided by the Mac OS X which is why it may display the colors slightly differently to the software supplied with the camera If the Mac OS does not support a RAW format the curves from dcraw by Dave Coffin will be used If you want to use dcraw exclusively you can disable the Use toolbox 10 4 or later if possible option in the Preferences under Open Formats Photo RAW RAW files contain the raw unprocessed data from the camera sensor If you select JPG format in your camera the camera processor will apply the color curves and other tech niques like automatic white balance to the image files and then save the data in a JPG image file RAW format is recommended for professionals who want to perform manual white balance and therefore take sample pictures of white or gray cards with the same expos ure You obtain slightly better results with RAW format even when you make exposure corrections afterwards RAW images mostly need some sharpening but show fuller and more natural colors As the files are at least twice the size we recommend RAW format just for professional use Metadata in RAW files RAW files except for NEF files may not contain any metadata apart fro
463. set for the picture with Open Lowercase changes all uppercase letters to lowercase letters for the files selected Press the Command key and the Lowercase button becomes Uppercase Uppercase changes all lowercase letters to uppercase letters for the files selected Insert Black Frame into Series creates an additional black image and saves it behind the source images In order to recognize a series you must enter how many characters of the filenames should be compared in the preferences under slide show Effects If for example you wanted to separate blocks of images from different photographers in a slide show you can create a black separating image using the Series detection This 47 requires that the filenames within the blocks have different characters at the beginning of the filenames If the blocks are like this Source Result IMG00001 jpg IMGO00001 jpg IMG00002 jpg IMG00002 jpg IMG00003 jpg IMG00003 jpg IMGZZ jpg and and DMA00001 jpg DMA00001 jpg DMA00002 jpg DMA00002 jpg DMA00003 jpg DMA00003 jpg DMAZZ jpg The new images are given the first three characters of the source files as their name and ZZ is added so the new images are sorted alphabetically according to the source images The new images are all black Three characters need to be defined in the prefe rences under slide show Effects for detection to work You can change the creator with Change File Creator The C
464. should be constantly monitored Click Go to enable this function All pictures that are copied to this folder for example by other users over a network are automatically converted by GraphicConverter to the selected format Any batch that has been defined is also applied You can specify a waiting time by selecting Convert Errors Time The files will only be converted after this waiting time An additional batch could for example involve the change of the resolution to 300 dpi The source picture is then overwritten in the source folder Never select the source folder as the target folder Select any other folder Nothing will be changed in this folder If you select a file format in the Filter pop up menu only pictures with this format are displayed All files are only displayed when you select All Available Different settings for example compression can be made for each target format using Options Note the information from page 343 and from page 371 32 Prefs calls up the Convert Miscellaneous dialog with preferences for multiple con version where you can carry out settings Preferences IPTC a Convert Misc Settings gt Formats Save v Subfolders General v Change extension Euston icon l DOS filenames Formats IPTC _ Don t alert before overwrite Settings _ Keep original date after conversion Slide Show i General __ Show hidden files Effects l Remove batch actions after quit Misc s z Move Folde
465. show sequentially with no ef fects 294 Click Select next to Userdefined QuickTime effect to select a QuickTime effect Select Effect gt Compositors z z v Transitions Percentage o to Cross Fade r i z 0 100 0 100 Explode Implode Zoom Y Wipes Gradient W _ Iris a Matrix Wipe Y TE For more contrast between the pictures you can set the screen to black for a defined time with Add black frame between images Series detection will show images as a series You can choose how many characters of the filename shall be compared Overlay logo lets you display a PICT picture of your choice as a watermark over the pic tures of the slide show Choose a low value for Opacy to make it hardly visible in one of the four corners The watermark does not stay in the picture Background sound allows you to select an audio file to be played during the slide show Click Select sound file to select an audio file in a format such as MP3 or AIFF that can be played by QuickTime Under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences Slide Show Misc select Change picture to set how long each picture is displayed This time can be exceeded if decompression takes longer for example for LZW compressed TIFF graphics Or you can enable after mouse click to display the picture until you click the mouse Click Back ground color to select a different background color in the color selector The font an
466. sion of GraphicCon verter on a PowerPC Mac with Motorola processor the preference file will be called com lemkesoft graphicconverter powerpc plist If you install additional Codecs for QuickTime for example to be able to view special vi deos QuickTime may save additional preference files named for example com lemkesoft graphicconverter intel videow plist Note down the serial number s in a safe place and make backups of the preference file on a regular basis In this way you will not have to enter all of your preferences again if you lose data or reinstall the operating system Since the Preference file can be damaged if your computer crashes you should save at least one environment using the Environment option from the GraphicConverter menu Classic Apple menu If problems occur with GraphicConverter close the program and delete the Preference file Open GraphicConverter and select the saved environment GraphicConverter will then write a new Preference file with your settings and any pro blems will have been rectified 14 Possibility 3 f you bought this manual without a license downloaded GraphicConverter from the Internet or obtained it from another source and use the program regularly but are not yet registered you can get the full version by registering with us In the unregistered version you cannot use the batches from the Convert amp Modify dialog GraphicConverter is share ware please feel free to test the pro
467. slider once you place the mouse cursor over that particular slider You can use Last values or the space bar to call up the values from the last picture again quickly if a picture needs a similar correction to the previous picture The image can be saved with File Save or Save as On large monitors a slider for the gamma value is also displayed Many pictures taken with digital cameras appear better if the gamma va lue is reduced to 0 97 or 0 93 Delete amp Continue deletes the current picture and goes to the next one Label shows the current label and allows you to select another label 130 Before you work with the operator you should select the settings by clicking Options Options wv Select current image in browser l Change label after save to Label 1 FH _ Next Previous save image if modified Save to source folder will overwrite original if same format Save into sub folder Save to source folder and copy original into sub folder Save onto desktop Format JPEG JFIF JPG JPEG B Options _ Show grid during rotation A Crop white areas of rotation before saving vi Resize window upon show hide of operator Select current image in browser helps you find the image you last edited in the brow ser if you have been working on several pictures You can use Change label after save to to recognize edited pictures more easily Back and Forward save image if modified allows you
468. sparent color if it is not in position 0 in the color table Click the color example for color 1 or color 2 and select the color in the table displayed for palette pictures in the bottom section of the dialog Note the further instructions for searching and replacing in the next chapter Find and Replace In pictures with single color areas it can be worthwhile replacing one color with another You can define a Search Color and a Replace Color by selecting Edit Find compare and replace Find and Replace Colors Position the dialog next to the picture and click the part of the picture containing the search or replace color using the eyedropper cursor Find and Replace Tolerance lo _ Search Color z Replace Color This field is empty because the color table is only available for pictures that use 256 colors or less colors f Cancel E Replace X 174 A bold frame indicates the color you are selecting Click the color box to switch between the Search color and Replace color The colors can also be selected by clicking the example field and using the Color Picker For palette pictures use the color table that is displayed at the bottom of the dialog Tolerance is used to specify how far the found color may deviate from the selected search color The greater the value the more hues are recognized In normal photos you can also create effects using this option that are similar to solari sation As a Searc
469. splayed upon saving Trimming will then be lossless If for example a database has written additional information into the resource fork this information is retained when modifying and resaving with GraphicConverter if the Copy original resources option is enabled 415 Save Settings Preferences General ME Save Misc Settings Digital Camera File creator Display Content Display Windows Use GraphicConverter GKON Edit r Sane Use original only available for Save Mise O Use default creator Monitor Plug ins Use GKON ie Don t Set Type Creator File Name Extension only General Save Save As with original date Correct amp Change IPTC __ Delete original file after Save As gt Formats _ Allow save for unmodified files Save Secure save on external disks General Custom Icon Formats _ Hide Extension active with Mac OS X 10 1 or later IPTC Settings Slide Show General Effects Misc Move Folders Move Folders 2 Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time v Default Undo File creator lets you select whether saved files are assigned to GraphicConverter If the graphics are assigned to GraphicConverter they are opened in GraphicConverter when you double click them Use original only save leaves the original file type when perfor ming a Save When you save with File Save as the GraphicConverter file type is gene rally used Creator G
470. st char of each sentence or each word uppercase New features in GraphicConverter 6 3 Export for digital picture frames via browser context menu Export Prepare for Picture Frame device The EXIF data is exported by Phil HarveysEXIFToolallowingmoredetailstobedisplayed You can now also measure an angle between two helper lines with the slide rule tool Click the tool and hold down the button to select the option The Format pop up menu is shortened when you save Select Show All to display all formats and open the pop up menu again You can copy the EXIF function to the XMP section by selecting Copy EXIF to XMP from the browser context menu Import JNG files In the Convert dialog you can combine several pictures in a photostrip You can select the background color in the shadow batch The bounds can be ignored during WMF import There is also 800 x 600 size for export for e mails A different batch can be selected for the preview pictures in HTML catalogs You can select the time zone of the photo location when setting GPS data from a GPX file You can enter the size of the stamp tool as a numerical value 445 New in GraphicConverter 6 4 Albums from iPhoto 7 or newer are displayed in the left section of the browser UB version only GPS tab in the palette Information Pictures from XMP can be opened via the context menu of an opened image Effect Repeat produces a pattern of the image like tiles SHS Format can be i
471. st size and JPG for all others Modify The following features of Convert modify the selected files without creating new ones to be saved in the destination folder You can therefore ignore the right hand part of the di alog The selected destination format is not valid The destination folder should not be the same as the source folder The content of the destination folder will not be changed The Insert IPTC option adds different or the same IPTC information from a text file in all the selected pictures This is exported from a database or can be created with an editor such as BBEdit Light You can only insert an IPTC in JPG and TIFF images Do not use the ASCII export for word processing You can also create this text file by exporting the IPTC information from one or more pictures see p 37 When you are working with smaller quantities of pictures it is easier to select the pic tures in the browser and modify the IPTC info via the IPTC dialog which you can call up with Command l Alternatively you can copy all of the IPTC information with Edit Copy Copy IPTC and paste it into one or more pictures with Edit Paste Paste IPTC 42 The Convert dialog however allows you to quickly enter different information in large amounts of pictures If the same text has to be entered over and over again organize the text file accordingly with several lines of the same content The text file should have the following structure Filename lt
472. start dragging open a circular selection roughly around the point in the picture marked with a white cross If you do not hit the right starting position the circle will be slightly outside the pic ture In this case try to get the size right and move the round selection to the right positi on by clicking just outside the line Trim the selection by double clicking it You can change the color of the white background by Shift clicking the corners with the Magic Pen If this does not work increase the tolerance of the Magic Pen by double clicking the tool Select the required color as the foreground color Once you have se 332 lected all four corners add the foreground color to the corners with Edit Fill Selection with Foreground Color oO Edges and Frames Effect Edges and Frames allows you to add a frame to an open picture Edge and Frame Effect Stat by wv Fill invisible parts with white Parry apee atanh a weed wit the perrrensat of Hardd ham http oige Com Cancel N Eo 333 Select a template on the left hand side and move the frame in the main area so that it fits perfectly The frame can be made smaller using the handles on the corners Fill invi sible parts with white allows you to color the completely black areas of the frame white Click OK to calculate the frame in the picture Feathering Feathering in the Effect menu allows you soften the outside edges of images
473. t com We recommend that you always use the latest version Download the latest GraphicConverter on a regular basis The file size is about 8 MB and downloa ding takes just over 10 minutes with modern hardware All updates are free with a few 12 exceptions Your registration and settings will be kept because they are saved in the Gra phicConverter preference file Under Mac OS X if you have selected licensing of all users on your computer the serial number will be entered in the GraphicConverter program file however In this case you will need to enter the serial number again after an update If you want to avoid this we recommend entering the serial number individually for each user Under Classic Mac OS If you work with plug ins open the Plug Ins folder in your old GraphicConverter folder and copy the contents into the Plug Ins folder in the new GraphicConverter folder If you have scripts open the GraphicConverter Scripts folder in your old GraphicCon verter folder and copy the contents into the GraphicConverter Scripts folder in the new GraphicConverter folder Make a backup of your old GraphicConverter folder for examp le on a Zip diskette or CD R and then delete it from your hard drive Drag the Graphic Converter folder into the Applications folder Under Mac OS X Make a backup of your old GraphicConverter folder If for example you have saved data in your GraphicConverter folder using the Catalog option you will have
474. t has been opened The background turns black while it is playing End playback with Command period The following film formats can be opened and played MOV files in QuickTime format ANI files Animated NeoChrome from the NeoChrome program FLI FLC FLH files from the Autodesk Animator program DLfiles normally X Rated Animated GIF files ANIM files animated IFFs PICS files animated PICTs BioRad animations You can play back many other formats if you install the free Perian plug in perian org Films from the Autodesk Animator program may run considerably slower than on an IBM depending on your computer as direct access to the screen is not permitted on Ma cintoshes Therefore each picture has to be copied to the window Saving a FLI FLC pic ture as a QuickTime film Moov will help here Put Picture on Desktop If you want to spend the day clicking your sweetheart s nose you can place a photo of him her on your computer s desktop The easiest way to do this is to open the picture and in the Picture menu select Put Picture on Desktop This will not trim any of the picture away Only the menu bar will cover the top of the picture slightly This may take a while as the picture needs to be converted to 72 dpi and adapted GraphicConverter transfers the picture to the Desktop Picture or Appearance control panel depending on your Mac OS version This is not possible with versions before Mac OS 8 5 In thi
475. t how large the picture should be Left Center and Right allow you to specify where the original pic ture is placed in the new picture If you select Left a strip is added to the right side only If you select Center a strip the same size is added to both sides Top Center and Bottom allow you to specify where the original picture is placed in the new picture after it is inserted If you select Top a strip is added to the top only If you se lect Center a strip is added to both the top and bottom if the original picture is smaller than the entered size Canvas Size allows you to enlarge the work area see p 105 Change Color Mode allows you to switch to another mode for example from RGB to CMYK However the profile selected under File Edit Color Profile is set for CMYK Change Color Profile allows you to assign a different color profile Change Format allows you to save the files in another format that you can select from a pop up menu Colors offers numerous options for setting the color Detailed information and an intro duction can be found in the Color chapter on page 161 Combine creates one picture out of two pictures from which the source picture needs to contain an alpha channel The source picture can for example be a cut out person who will be set against a color pattern from another picture as a background Enter the name of the background under Name of the image with the complete path If you want to combin
476. t negatively affected when inserting a comment with a batch function Continue can be used as a logical link and usually comes after the If functions see exa mple above in this section The Crop function crops the picture s margins until the set picture size is reached Both the right and lower margins are cropped If all margin edges or margin edges other than the right and lower ones should be crop ped use the Crop region function see below Crop region allows you to crop a little bit on all sides of a picture Enter the width of the area you want to crop from each side positive value Delete Original deletes the source file after the edited file has been saved Be careful when using this batch Dither allows dithering in a B W image like under Effect Black amp White Dither see p 167 Do not export prevents you from saving in specific cases that can be defined using the functions If Else Continue Stop Do not export if name see p 307 Else can be used as a logical link after the functions of an If condition see example later in this section Filled Rectangle inserts a rectangle in a color of your choice allowing you for example to cover a logo that appears in several pictures Left and Top sets the top left hand cor ner of the rectangle and Right and Bottom the bottom right hand corner Together they therefore define the size of the rectangle Click the color box to change the color If you are editi
477. t the Information Available Texts Selected Texts i Name without Extension i r TE TS Size Resolution Colors Frames Memory Usage File Format File Length File Creation Date File Modification Date Compression Req Time for Decompression Comment IPTC Title IPTC Author IPTC Author s position IPTC Caption v Cancel oK Enable Ignore alpha channel if you display images with alpha channels and they inter fere with the slide show You should leave Use QuickTime for scaling enabled as QuickTime guarantees fast and good quality scaling of the images 291 The Tile pictures option places the current picture in the top left just like tiles which are lined up next to and beneath each other until the screen is full The picture in the bot tom row in the far right column is usually cut off The Show errors option displays an error message when a defective file is displayed Enable this option to be informed of faults or problems You should leave Ignore incomplete JPEGs enabled so that faulty JPEG files do not appear during the slide show JPEG files can for example be corrupted when sent as e mail attachments Write protocol creates a text file on the desktop which lists when which image was shown The Navigation Services the file selection dialog which are available from Mac OS 8 5 do not let you sort files by date If you want to see the pictures in a slide show in chrono logical order under
478. t them JPGs only Change orientation value Rebuild EXIF preview PGs only Remove EXIF Preview JPGs only Edit or add EXIF data Delete Host amp Software correct File Date Export EXIF data into text file Delete EXIF tags PGs only Remove Maker Note and Comment Add or edit GPS values Copy EXIF to XMP Copy XMP IPTC to other IPTC records Copy Comment to IPTC Caption Copy IPTC Caption to Comment Copy filename to object name Copy filename to caption Copy EXIF date to IPTC date Copy IPTC Date to EXIF Date Copy Windows EXIF Tags to IPTC Copy Spotlight comment to IPTC caption Copy Spotlight comment to IPTC keywords Change Resolution Value lossless PGs only Extract JPG from Photo Raw PhotoRaw only Fix file length of recovered JPEGs JPGs only Remove Metadata Rebuild Metadata All options can be used for JPG files All options where JPGs only is specified can be used for the formats CR2 CRW EPS EPSF GIF NEF NRW PDF PNG PS PSD THM TIF TIFF PNG PDF and other formats that are indicated with R W at http www sno phy queensu ca phil exiftool in the Support column of the Supported File Types table EXIF Set Creation and Modification Date depending on EXIF overwrites the creation and modification date with the date that is entered in the EXIF information for the file Some digital cameras generate an incorrect creation and modification date but set the correct photo date
479. tab gt Caption lt tab gt Caption Writer lt tab gt Headline lt tab gt Special Instructions lt tab gt By Line lt tab gt By Line Title lt tab gt Credit lt tab gt Source lt tab gt Object Name lt tab gt Date Created lt tab gt City lt tab gt State lt tab gt Country lt tab gt Reference lt tab gt Category lt tab gt Sub Category lt tab gt Urgency lt tab gt Keywords lt tab gt Copyright lt return gt The Date Created box should have the following format yyyymmdd year month day The Sub Category and Keywords boxes can contain several words separated by space characters If another separator is needed you can enter it in the input box next to Sepa rator of IPTC keywords in the Convert Convert Text IPTC dialog box There should be a number in the Urgency box All entries in the text file should be in a line separated by a tab Line breaks are not allo wed All source pictures and the text file should be in the same directory Select the text file and click Go Further details about IPTC information can be found from page 314 Rename Files can be systematically renamed with Rename For example this option is useful if you want to use pictures that were individually saved using video software for another program Filenames such as DSCN5120 jpg consist of three parts The numbering is named the Index The first part is called Name and everything after the period is called Extension Select the files you want to rename in the list o
480. tains the header and img contains the image data ANI NeoChrome program animations animated windows cursor ANI ANPA Format with IPTC information Apple File Icon These files only contain the file icon By pressing Command in the operating system you can click and copy it in the dialog that opens before setting it for another file with Command V Apple Preferred Apple ligs graphic format ART First Publisher program format Supports 1 bit per pixel ARW 425 Format Import Export Comment ASCII Allows you to import and export graphics that contain only ASCII characters b3d 3D format Bio Bio Formats of medical devices and microscopes Glencoe SDK BioRad BioRad file format supports 256 grayscale BLD Mega Paint format BMP Standard Windows format supports1 4 8 15 and 24 bit per pixel BSB Format for maps BSP BUF Supports 32 bit BUM Variation of the BMP or PICT format Byte Array Image is converted to C source code e g for Header File H games console developers CALS CCITT 4 compressed black and white graphics CAM Casio QV 10 100 format a variation of the JPEG format CEL CEL format CGM Internationally standardized file format for exchanging vector and bitmap graphics Chyron The export option only covers the basic elements cicn Icons CINEON CISCOIpPh
481. tallation 6 Installing EPStoPICT 350 Installing Ghostscript 349 Intel Mac 6 Intel Mac 370 Intensity of difference 70 Invert 175 Invert Batch Function 311 Invert Black and White GIFs 215 Invert Direction in Storyboard 195 Invert Selection 148 Involution around the Red Green Axis 204 iPod Pictures on iPod 281 IPTC Document Information 314 IPTC window 264 Isothermal Involution 204 J JPEG format 355 K Key shortcut for the slide show 297 Keywords 43 89 L Label 250 Laplace 3x3 198 lasso 146 layers 223 layout 211 left handers 227 Levels 160 license key and registration 13 Line Drawer 227 line thickness 227 Link Sliders 128 list 214 List from Files 214 451 List from STR Resource 342 List Options 215 Local Color Table 192 Loop slide show 295 Lossless JPEG cropping 144 LuraWave format 359 LWF format 359 LZW 369 M Magic Pen 147 manual 16 Max Size Batch Function 311 measuring 58 Median 185 Memory Preferences 381 Merge Folder into one Image 338 Minimize Color Table 70 172 Minimize Color Table Batch Function 311 minimizing file size 66 minimizing GIF pictures 71 Mirror 175 Mirror Batch Function 311 Misc Settings Preferences 382 Monitor 384 MooV QuickTime Movie 360 Move by default and copy with Option key Browser 274 Move Folders 2 and 3 293 Multi function devices 11 Multi language 6 Multi page file creating 371 N Navigation Services 292 new pict
482. ted correctly The data of the image files is not changed Most digital cameras use the sRGB color model This color model is entered in the EXIF data of the images Even if a profile file is not atta ched to the picture GraphicConverter recognizes the color model and displays the image automatically with the sRGB profile The ColorSync profiles only of TIFF JPEG PNG and PSD format pictures are evaluated upon opening You should enable the Use ColorSync color matching option under File Edit Color Profile You can also enable and disable ColorSync in the lower frame of image win dows by clicking the circle with the four colors Edit Color Profile v Use ColorSync color matching gt Source None v Display HM204DA DTA You can change the display profile in the ColorSync control panel Printer None x Default profiles will be used if the file doesn t contain a profile but requires one sRGB Select Change J Orion Users hagenhen erter Profiles sRGB icc EXIF uncalibrated Select Change Orion Users hagenhen Adobe RGB 1998 icc RGB Select Change Orion Users hagenhen ed RGB Colorspace icc CMYK Select Change J Orion Users hagenhen rter Profiles CMYK icc Ask if the image has no profile HJ Conversion Priority Quick Z 135 If an image does not contain a profile nor EXIF information or if the EXIF information is Uncalibrated or does not have a stan
483. ted file size is only correct if you save Mw Show Preview the file without a resource fork i e custom icon Embed metadata if available M PTC Comments mi xmp F EXIF Vv ICC profile Vv Don t embed sRGB profile _ Show this dialog before saving JPEG files EXIF options C Store EXIF preview 200x200 pixel _ Store preview DCF compatible will reduce preview to 160x120 C Store EXIF maker note l Store EXIF user comment The EXIF Maker Note and User Comment may contain personal details like the owner name and serial number of the digital camera So maybe you want to remove this information before giving away a photo l Store EXIF date after EXIF directory Some old EXIF readers may need this to see the EXIF data C Store EXIF with original width and height This is useful if you want to get the full size values for reduced thumbnails l Store original unmodified EXIF data This is useful if you want to keep the original EXIF data with thumbnail undocumented camera settings v Write JFIF header You can uncheck the options to save some bytes in the filesize J Store JFIF after EXIF Some old JPEG readers may require this option to see the EXIF data Special filesize options will overwrite quality setting from top Enable special filesize use carefully Y Resize to reach filesize 512 KB Y Reduce quality to reach filesize 512 KB Split is only available for larger pictures and makes sev
484. ted in the folder where the images are located The source images are not modified OK amp Again carries out the cropping and the new file is written The starting image remains in the dialog however allowing you to crop further versions which will be saved with an index in the filename Click Ignore to go to the next picture without cropping the current one Cancel will end the crop function Choose OK for All to apply the current settings to all pictures selected You can see how many pictures have been cropped so far and how many you selected to the right of the OK for All button Toggle rotates the selection rectangle for portrait format pictures Change Ratio allows you to select the aspect ratio again If you also want to crop the picture on the left and right edges click one of the corners of the selection rectangle The aspect ratio will not change You can switch the selection rectangle from landscape to portrait format for example by clicking the top right hand corner and dragging it to the left without moving downwards 102 The size of the rectangle is shown in pixels next to the corner A high quality 4x6 inch sized print requires at least 1200 pixels For normal quality you will need 800 pixels If you have a portrait picture take these values for the height When the selection rectangle has been reduced in size you can move it in any direction over the picture You can send the pictures saved in the Cropped Images
485. ter TA Automatically Headline Mm Title Event Display font Geneva ES Save Open Cancel OK There are input boxes that correspond to the IPTC standards in six different areas This information is also used for quick searches in databases at large publishing houses Click the individual tabs to open the different sections Caption Event and Keywords Peo ple are fields that were added later on and do not belong to the official IPTC standard They are however used by the iView picture database If you select one image or several images in the browser and edit the IPTC information the images will not be saved again There are therefore no losses in quality with JPEG images for example The IPTC keywords allow you to use GraphicConverter like a picture database You can assign keywords as in a picture database GraphicConverter does not create a database file but instead writes the keywords in the IPTC information of the respective image file 314 The fastest way to assign keywords is using the keyword window that is displayed by selecting Window Show Keyword Window A browser window has to be open for this O Keywords Family Grands Friends Parents Holidays Children Party Grandchild Events Lorenzkirch 0 gt In the left hand column select a keyword and if necessary a sub keyword and drag the keywords to the required picture in the browser window to enter them in the IP
486. th a few test files You should be able to see what is in the picture Simply drag the created HTML file to your Web brow ser for an idea of how it will look on the Internet Then select the font for the filenames This is only valid for PICT catalogs that you can create alternatively On the File tab select PICT from the Format pop up menu to create a catalog page as a PICT picture instead of an HTML file You can use this option for exa mple to put together larger pictures in overviews We recommend using the File Print Catalog option for printing catalogs see p 95 Avoid using more than 10 pixels for the Size of the font as otherwise too much space will be required for longer filenames The font Color should be selected so that it is visible on the background A black font is not visible on a black background Display Name can be disabled In this case just the picture itself is a link In addition you can select whether the extension path IPTC caption dimensions and file size should be outputted Display text below or above image allows you to specify where the text should appear Background Image allows you to set a background image for the Web page you cre ate Click Select to select an image as the background image Specify whether pictures such as framed slides should be displayed in a square that is always the same size with Make Square on the right hand side of the dialog The color can be selected for these slid
487. th the name Unknown To use this option Show alert before opening files with same name needs to be enabled If the graphics are different but coincidentally have the same name and were saved in different places you should consi der renaming one of them in the Mac OS Disable Show alert before opening more than 10 files if you do not want to see a warning message when opening more than 10 documents at the same time 389 Ignore extensions separated by a space allows you to list file types that should not be modified by the settings in this dialog Open Correct amp Change Preferences General al Open Correct amp Change Digital Camera C tsi Display Content Shia Stes Display Windows Mw VGA 256 Colors salt F EGA 16 Colors Memory Misc M Atari 4 Colors Monitor Correct aspect ratio Plug ins Print Open _ Set resolution to 72 ppi General BMP Colors e M Calculate best color table ECW l Merge color profile into image data g g aed Remove transparent color s FITS GIF Change file type creator HPGL Correct movie type creator IPTC JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie lt lt Multi page v Default Undo VGA 256 Colors displays VGA images with for example 320x200 points with 320x240 points so that the proportions remain the same because the pixels in the source image are not square EGA 16 Colors displays EGA images with for example 640x350 points with 640x480
488. the Format pop up menu under File Save as 196 Gamma correction is also suitable for optimizing scanned pictures as some scanners do not use linear scanning Refer to your scanner documentation Plug in Filters Summary Any Photoshop compatible plug in filters installed in the plug ins folder will appear at the bottom of the Effect menu after you restart GraphicConverter If a plug in requires that Photoshop is on your computer you will not be able to install it Any filters self defined using a text file will appear under Effect Plug In Filter GraphicConverter supports Photoshop plug ins Plug ins are small auxiliary programs that provide additional functions for main programs They appear as options in the menu as if they were part of the main program Plug ins are also sometimes called add ons You can also use plug in filters like Kai s Power Tools which were actually developed for Pho toshop with GraphicConverter The plug ins need to be compatible with Photoshop 2 5 and should not access Photoshop options You can copy plug ins from your Photoshop folder into the GraphicConverter plug in folder Under Classic Mac OS Copy your plug ins to the Plug Ins folder in the GraphicConver ter folder and check whether the path for the plug ins is set to the right folder under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences General Plug Ins GraphicConverter recognizes all plug ins that are found up to one folder level down in th
489. the Internet 354 IFF IFF graphics can be saved uncompressed IFF Compression None RLE f Cancel E Uncompressed IFF graphics can however be processed by only a few programs We re commend using RLE compression for this reason RLE stands for Run Length IMG The IMG format is the standard Atari format A graphic with 16 7 million colors can be sa ved as 24 individual planes or as a single plane IMG XIMG 24 Bit 24 Planes s One Plane EEEE The selection is possible because Atari programs have implemented this format in diffe rent ways which means that the format is different depending on the program JPEG After GIF format JPEG format is the most common graphic format used on the Web be cause it achieves very high compression rates The quality of JPEGs decreases slightly each time you save them due to compression This means that you should save a master file for each JPEG graphic for example as a TIFF which you then process instead After you have made your modifications save a new version of the JPEG graphic for example for the Web The further development of the JPEG format is called JPEG 2000 However it has not been able to establish itself as the increasing speed of Internet connections means smal ler files are no longer needed In scientific applications however JPEG 2000 format is used for pictures of Mars for example which have a size of approximately 400 MB but re quire 5
490. the World Wide Web Pic tures in the LuraWave format LWF can only be displayed if a plug in has been installed in your browser This is why this format is not used much The plug in can be downloaded free of charge from http www luratech com All four formats are heavily compressed so that the Internet pages are displayed quickly to the viewer Pictures in JPEG format can either have 16 7 million colors or 256 graysca les JPEG format is therefore particularly suitable for photos GIF format can only display 2 to 256 colors and is specialized in achieving higher compression rates for pictures such as pictograms symbols and all pictures with sharp edges for example comics When preparing pictures for the Internet you should leave ColorSync enabled Please remember though to enable the Merge color profile into image for web usage option when saving with the file selection dialog Internet browsers display images without pro files therefore you have to merge the profile corrections into the image Display Picture from Top to Bottom There are different types of JPEG format as there are with GIF and PNG formats that you can select in the Save as dialog with Options All three formats provide the option for pictures to be opened progressively from top to bottom in the browser with the final resolution Alternatively the display can be selected from unsharp to sharp with the complete picture being shown straightaway 65 Set the Ro
491. the aperture and the exposure time with the focal length Enable Focal length calculated to 35 mm if you want to display the focal length calculated as a value for a camera with 35 mm film A flash symbol will appear if a flash was used TIFF JPG mode compression and profile slows the browsing is intended for the preprinting stage so you can find pictures that are not separated do not have profiles or for which the LZW compression was accidentally enabled 269 Show hidden files and folders shows hidden files and folders Treat files with at beginning as hidden is useful if you receive files from other operating systems where the percentage sign at the beginning of the file name means hidden Treat files with at the end as hidden is already enabled so that the respective files from other operating systems are not displayed Frame preview puts a frame around the previews if custom colors are defined You should enable Show long filenames as help tags if you are working with long filenames If Show tooltips is enabled via the Help menu long filenames will be shown in a bubble Multi frame preview for movies shows four pictures from the movie instead of the first picture as a preview which helps organization and is particularly helpful if the first picture is black It can take a moment to create the multi frame preview Use shadows creates a shadow below and to the right of the preview pictures This sim ply im
492. the graphic is saved uncompressed with 24 bit grayscale If you select RGB RLE the graphic is compressed with Run Length compression and saved with 24 bit color depth StartupScreen classic Mac OS only For a StartupScreen file there is a PICT in the file s resource fork If the StartupScreen is in the system folder and has the exact name StartupScreen it is displayed when you start your Macintosh StartupScreen format offers the following options StartupScreen C Add Border Width 1152 Points Height 870 Points Cancel OK A black border appears around the graphic if it is smaller than the specified width and height and if the Add Border option is enabled The StartupScreen is a PICT which is why the ditherCopy command is usually used The result is that the PICT is for example dithered in color in Word when displayed redu ced in size The disadvantage is that it takes longer to open and display the PICT TGA If you save graphics in TGA format you can choose either None or RLE for compression TGA Compression None RLE f Cancel 368 TIFF TIFF format is the standard format in the publishing industry Because image setters can sometimes not handle LZW compression we recommend asking your service center first before printing LZW compression can be disabled in the file selection dialog under File Save as using Options Both the GIF and the TIFF LZW formats use LZW
493. the pictures Simply place the mouse cursor over the picture to display the IPTC information O IPTC file information Tide M hle Author Renate Henke Author s position Frau Caption M hle Caption writer Hagen Henke Copyright novice Renate Henke Keywords M hle Category Supplemental Date 2003 11 05 City Ringstedt Mate Niedersachsen Country Deutschland Credit Source Headline M hle instructions Reference Urgency Show Drop Area inserts a drop area at the bottom of the browser where you can drag pictures from different folders so you can send them from there by e mail using the con text menu for example Hide Favorites hides the favorites area at the bottom left Fullscreen preview window on second screen can only be selected if a second moni tor is connected to your computer The fullscreen preview is shown on the second moni tor Preferences opens the preferences under Browser General where you can select the sorting criteria the sorting direction and the Font for displaying the file information Using Sort folders separately you can select whether the folders are displayed first and 265 then the files as is standard in the Mac OS or whether folders and files are displayed as equals based on the selected criteria Sort Top Down reverses the sort method Preferences General al Browser General Settings Correct amp Change IPTC Text display Font Geneva Hy gt Formats e Save Siz
494. the proportion will be maintained You can move the selection to the desired position with the mouse and the arrow keys Select Picture Content selects just the actual picture without any single color margin This kind of margin is often created when the rectangle used in the scanner software to select the area to be scanned is made larger If the picture has a different structure than a picture with a typical black margin for example an error message will be issued The background color is used as the search color for the margin In the context menu you can use Count Pixels of Selection to display the number of pixels in a selection Selection Tool Rectangular selections can be made with the selection tool at the top right of the tool box If you cannot see the toolbox you can call it up by selecting Window Show Tool box from the menu Hold down the mouse button and drag the cursor to form a rectan gle Older computers or slower graphics cards will need a short time to draw the rectan gle If necessary wait a moment at the target position An elliptic selection can be made with the Elliptic Selection tool which is under the lasso Holding down the shift key at the same time creates a circular selection The size and thus indirectly the position of a rectangular selection can be changed using the handles Hold down the Command key to scale the contents of the selection If you hold down the Shift key at the same time the selection
495. the right reduce the intensity while deviations to the left intensify the brightness or color The gray shading on the edge of the grid shows that the lower or left hand sections of the curve are responsible for the dark areas of the image and the upper or right hand sections of the curve for the light areas of the image Open allows you to use PhotoShop compatible ready made curves or to open curves that you yourself have saved You can also correct the colors in the Picture Brightness Contrast dialog Either set the Saturation higher or lower or adjust the color balance with the individual sliders for the Hue To remove a color cast you normally have to clear the Link Sliders option Try setting the slides to various different positions There is no single ideal mixture A pic ture with too much red can sometimes be rescued best using the sliders for green and blue depending on the character of the picture Small values less than plus or minus 10 nor 134 mally suffice For a better overall impression try the function a few times If you do not like the results you can reverse the change with Edit Undo Color Profile with ColorSync The ColorSync program which needs to be installed as a system extension under Classic Mac OS is responsible for the correct reproduction of colors on screen and on print outs ColorSync is part of the system in Mac OS X Color profiles change the colors so that they are displayed and prin
496. the size of the phone picture in the dialog for the aspect ratio On the 700I it is 1280 x 960 User defined Aspect Ratios Ratio 1 c 3 Ratio 2 1280 960 Ratio 3 1 n 2 Ratio 4 2 z l Open a picture from your hard drive which you took with a digital reflex camera for ex ample Select a section with the selection tool and crop it by double clicking inside the rectangle or by pressing Return Now reduce the picture to 1280 x 960 with Picture Size by entering one of the values The other value will be calculated automatically if Keep Proportions is enabled If this va lue is smaller than required due to rounded edges enter another value If the other value is slightly higher you can trim off the extra pixels in the next step with Picture Size Add Remove Margins If you reduce the pictures to the size of the display diagonal lines become too jagged and the whole picture seems too blurred The S700i display size is 320 x 240 pixels Pic tures with such a small size can mostly not be sharpened properly Therefore it is better to use the size of the photo images from your mobile phone If a picture with the large size appears too sharp on the phone you can use a smaller version On the S700i the small versions have the advantage that a mini preview is displayed in the overview Turn the landscape format pictures with Picture Rotate Rotate 90 Counterclock wise to use the display optimally Save the pi
497. the source file If moved source files have to be searched for in a network it may take a while Leave the option enabled if you want to ensure that for example the source files and not the aliases are used when you drag files to a burning program like Toast Clear Show script menu change requires restart if you do not want to display the script menu and restart your computer The script menu appears to the left of the Help menu as an S shaped scroll in the menu bar It is worthwhile disabling the script menu if 383 you use a cross system script menu that you can display with the AppleScript services program Enable the Show Script Menu in menu bar option for this 860 AppleScript Utility Default Script Editor i Script Editor 2 1 1 B GUI Scripting Enable GUI Scripting Enabling GUI Scripting will also enable access for assistive devices See Universal Access preferences for more information Universal Access Folder Actions Set Up Actions F Show Script Menu in menu bar v Show Library scripts Show application scripts at O top bottom General Monitor This option is only available when there are two or more monitors connected to your Macintosh In this dialog you can specify which monitor you want to display the picture 384 on and which monitor you want to display additional information on during a slide show The slide show will always be displayed as a main window
498. ther Spool The Compression options and the options all the way at the bottom under General are described in the previous chapter in the PICT format section With Document creator you can specify the file creator which is then written to the re source fork when saving a PICT This option is for example useful if you want to open the file by double clicking from ResEdit The creator is a standard abbreviation made up of four characters that is invisible to the user It identifies the program used to create a file so that the file is opened by the correct program when double clicked GraphicConverter uses the creator GKON The type depends on the graphic format A Resource can be added to a PICT file Instead of using the original index you can also use a defined start index or an index that is created based on the original name The part of the filename not included in the index can be entered after Name PNG PNG format is one of the formats used on the Internet It can contain a gamma value that optimizes the brightness and contrast of graphics created on the Mac but displayed in Windows if the program used to display the graphic can interpret this information see p 196 PNG format has other advantages Compression is lossless with most large files compared with JPG files with a quality of approximately 80 All color depths are possible and alpha channels are supported 364 Graphics in PNG format can be saved with None under Int
499. ther color values or grays are in between If the histogram is very unbalanced for a normal photo this indicates poor quality Histogram Red Green Blue AN Level Count Pixels 121407 Red 38 46 Green 30 91 Blue 28 73 Gow To read the exact values move the mouse cursor over the diagram The number of pi xels is displayed next to Count The value next to Level is a simplified representation of the number as smaller values are easier to read You can use the Red Green and Blue tabs to display the histogram for this color channel The histogram cannot be modified in this dialog You need to use the Picture Levels option for this see page 160 Full Screen Picture Full Screen enlarges the picture to the full height or width of the screen All pro grams are hidden and the background is set to black The display parameters are taken from the settings for the slide show Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences Slide Show As soon as you move the mouse the cursor will appear as a small mouse icon on the screen This means that you can switch back to normal mode by single cli cking You can also press any key to return to the normal display 187 The Full Screen mode is particularly suitable if you want to obtain an overall impressi on of the current picture without the distraction of controls and the program user inter face Play This option under Picture allows you play an animation or a film tha
500. this option to open graphics that otherwise cause problems C Scan bitmaps for resolution If you select Change scaling an additional dialog appears when opening graphics in PICT format This dialog allows you to change the PICT graphic scaling 407 Click Scan bitmaps for resolution to open graphics that otherwise cause problems Open PSD Preferences pees S Ask for layers Lotus Pic Import only background hia ig import active layers Multi page import with QuickTime PCD PDF Photo Raw PICT PSD QuickTime TIFF WMF Save Custom Icon General Settings Slide Show Effects General af Default A Undo X Misc v Ne If you select Ask for layers you can choose which layers of a PSD graphic are imported Import only background imports only the background layer Import active layer ignores deactivated levels Import with QuickTime opens with QuickTime In this case the picture is always con verted into the sRGB color model which can lead to display problems for example su persaturated colors with some images If this occurs select the Import active layers op tion as all three other options use the GraphicConverter import routines so that the origi nal color model is kept 408 Open QuickTime Preferences a v Use QuickTime importer HPGL as GREE v Limit width Lotus Pic Import resolution Metafile Movie Use file settings Multi page co A PCD Always 72 ppi PDF O Use 300 ppi Photo Raw
501. thwhile keeping the originals as even if you are experienced you may occasionally increase the contrast and saturation etc too much In such cases it is best if you open the original and save it in the parent folder after editing it again You can use File Save or Save As to save the preferences from the Operator The pic ture is not saved here for technical reasons If you close the window you will need to click Don t Save in the subsequent warning message The picture will have been saved howe ver Color Correction Picture Curves allows you to correct the colors and contrast of an image Curves Channel All B Reset Cancel Ew 132 The following example picture has a blue cast Bjona Blaustich jpg RGB 40 va Viv Pe 133 In the pop up menu select the curve for blue click the centre and drag the centre to the right slightly down towards the lower right corner Select the curve for green and also reduce the green level slightly The result looks warmer and more realistic 000 jona Blaustich jpg RGB CO Gradationskurven Channel Blau E ffnen Sichern Reset Abbrechen 0K 40 wife aw 7 cs If you select All you can set the contrast of the image Add further points to the curve as necessary by clicking to create for example an s shaped curve Deviations from the diagonal starting line towards
502. ting but can be published on the In ternet or on CD ROM Otherwise why don t you show your video and other digital pictures in a slide show at a party Refer to the chapter Slide Show from page 282 for information on how to display pictures on your hard drive one after the other against a black background in a slide show Normal video camcorders can more or less be used as cheap digital cameras using vi deo in solutions The advantage is that you can select the best moment to press the shutter release later on using your computer The downside however is that the picture quality is considerably poorer than with a digital still camera If you leave the picture in its original size the 72 dpi will not provide sufficient sharpness If you reduce the picture so that the resolution is 300 dpi it will be too small The people who defined the video standard didn t think about the needs of future ge nerations Here is a section from an example picture with 72 dpi and the whole picture at 300 dpi below it 210 If you want to make the most of all advantages use a digital camera that can take fast picture series with around 3 pictures per second You can then select the best shot from the pictures with the optimum picture quality Some digital cameras also have a video function However this only produces a video in normal video quality Digital cameras with around 3 mega pixels supply printed pictures in 10x15 cm format 4x6 inches
503. tion must be set for your screen For a 15 Monitor the default resolution is 640x480 pixels for a 17 800x600 pixels and for a 20 1024x768 pixels You can achieve this display setting for graphics that are already open using the zoom setting Print size Picture Zoom Always use 100 scroll large images always displays graphics at 100 when opened Shrink to fit screen displays pictures in landscape format so that they take up the enti re width of the screen Portrait pictures take up the entire screen height User defined zoom allows you to select the zoom level at which graphics are displayed when opened Fill screen shrink or expand to fit zooms pictures so that landscape images take up the entire width of the screen Portrait pictures take up the entire screen height Shrink to fit constrain zoom ratio to select the highest possible zoom level at which the quality is very high and the entire graphic fits on the screen 377 With frame of adds a frame around the picture within its window Enter a value for the size of the frame in the pixel box This is practical if you have to focus on the picture or you want to see the exact dark border pixels Otherwise the window border has a distrac ting effect Fit to window after resizing selects the zoom level so that the picture fits in the win dow after the size has been changed Display image with alpha channel mask displays the alpha channel with a mask that might be in
504. tly larger The edges of the picture will then need to be trimmed In GraphicConver ter it is best to use the selection tool at the top right of the toolbox If you cannot see the toolbox you can call it up by selecting Window Show Toolbox from the menu O WK Je Use the selection tool to place a rectangle as accurately as possible around the section of the picture that should be left after trimming The pixels behind the line also belong to the selected area Use the handles on the selection lines to adjust the rectangle You can adjust the rectangle very accurately by using the center handles between the corners as they only move one edge 117 You can work most precisely when the picture is zoomed to at least 100 Finally trim the selected area by selecting Edit Trim Selection Command Y The parts of the pic ture not enclosed in the selection rectangle will be cut away The picture will be displayed in a correspondingly minimized window You can delete a selection by pressing Escape or selecting Edit Unselect Command Shift A from the menu The Edit menu also contains the Smart Trim command This trims any single color margins leaving you with the actual picture If the scanned picture has a white margin you can use this option to easily cut off the scanned edges without having to set a selec tion rectangle Click the center of the picture section which is to be kept Note that GraphicConverter searches for the color
505. to Build your workflow Phorm TI Tunes Getting Started To view the actions for an application click the application To shew all the artions click the Applications folder To find an acthon enter word of phrase in the search field To add an action to the workflow drag It into the workflow To open a saved workflow from the library dowble lt lick it o ike a Yas Start Automator and select GraphicConverter in the Library The available actions are shown in the Action column The number of available actions will be increased If you require a specific action please send us an e mail You will find information on using Automator in the Help function of Automator Quit This option in the File menu allows you to quit GraphicConverter Any changes you made to preferences are automatically saved You are prompted to save the contents of any open windows that are not yet saved Troubleshooting If you have problems with GraphicConverter we recommend closing GraphicConverter and 421 under Classic Mac OS moving the GraphicConverter preference file from the Preferences folder which is located in the system folder Under Mac OS X from version 10 2 the preference file is called com lemkesoft graphicconverter plist and has the path Users Library Preferences The tilde character stands for the name of the respective user Do not delete the preference file as if your problem is not solved with this
506. to open the file because inter preting PostScript information is very intensive If a different module has been set to open EPSF graphics you can change this setting to Ghostscript in the same dialog 349 Installing EPStoPICT Load the EPStoPICT program from the Web site http www artage com to your compu ter On the homepage of the manufacturer Art Age click Products and then download on the next page by EPStoPICT Start your computer with the Classic Mac OS or start the Classic environment and install EPStoPICT Please note that EPStoPICT costs US 24 95 if you want to continue using it after the 30 day trial period After installation you can use EPStoPICT to open EPSF graphics in GraphicConverter by opening an EPSF graphic and then selecting the EPStoPICT program file in Find in the Select dialog that opens If a different program has already been set as the module for opening EPSF graphics you can change this under Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Preferences in the Open EPSF section with EPStoPICT Installing macps2pdf Download macps2pdf from http www kiffe com macghostview html and double click the file to unpack it Move the new folder MacGhostView Folder to your program folder Select macps2pdf in the Preferences Open EPSF Settings dialog as the module for EPSF pictures and click Select Application Select the macps2pdf program with the file selection dialog Saving EPSF Graphics It is not necessary to use
507. to other users at http www lemkesoft com content 166 scripts html Example If you want to put a slide show on the Web you can save the pictures as a GIF animation and then put the GIF on a Web site just like any other GIF To perform the same function for several pictures at the same time we recommend using a batch function Let s assume that not all pictures in the planned slide show have the same format Some pictures are in portrait format For GIF animations you usually see the pictures behind the ones in the front if they are smaller than the ones in the back As a result all pictures used in our slide show that are smaller than the largest picture should be given a border with a uniform color so that they are just as big as the largest picture This border should be the same color as the background color of the Web site so that it is not visible Because sur faces with uniform colors can be tightly compressed these additions do not pose any problems with respect to file size First you have to decide which format the slide show pictures should have The bigger the pictures the longer it takes to display the next picture With GIF animations however you have the advantage that the first picture is already displayed when the others are still being loaded As a result you can select a slightly larger format Ultimately the goal of a slide show is the uninterrupted viewing of the pictures You can assume that most com puter m
508. to save and scroll to the next picture even if you are moving backwards through a folder You can also use Save amp Next to save and switch to the next picture Select the Format and whether you want to save to the source folder If the target format is this same as the source format the source image will be overwrit ten Saving to a sub folder avoids overwriting originals Save to source folder and copy original into sub folder first copies the original into a subfolder named Original Files and then saves the edited version in the source folder Save onto desktop saves the files on the desktop Disable Show grid during rotation to hide the grid while rotating images Crop white areas of rotation before saving trims the image to a centered rectangle before saving The cropped version is not displayed If you would rather crop by hand you can rotate the picture with one of the rotate options under Picture Rotate and then crop it The rotate options under Picture Rotate allow you to rotate images more than 10 degrees 131 Resize window upon show hide of operator enlarges the bottom of the window by the height of the operator when you display it The window is made correspondingly smaller when it is hidden To quickly access the edited versions of your pictures via the left hand column of the browser we recommend copying the originals into a subfolder before editing and then overwriting the files in the parent folder It is wor
509. top left select Convert and click Start Use Batches needs to be enabled The files con verted with this batch function are saved in the target directory Create a GIF animation from these GIF files as described starting on page 189 or page 194 The Individual Batch Functions Add text to filename allows you to identify the converted files with a name extension upon conversion This is useful if for example you reduce images for the Internet and want to save them in the same folder In this case add _thumbnail_1 to the end for exa mple The command Do not export if name can then be used to edit all source files again in a second run through for example to create an even smaller _thumbnail_2 version without editing the files even though they are selected in the left hand list Add delete margin adds a margin with a selected color for positive values Margins are deleted for negative values see p 106 307 Assign Slice File allows you to assign a file with slice information Auto level has the same effect as Picture Auto Levels see p 160 Brightness Contrast changes the brightness the contrast the color hue and the color saturation to match the entered values that you determined using an example with the Picture Brightness Contrast dialog see p 128 Bring to size adds borders with an adjustable color to pictures that are smaller than the target size you entered so that all pictures are uniform in size You can selec
510. u 6cee C file tocathost onverter US boehringen 1 htm You can create Internet pages that show the pictures as a small preview using the brow ser and the Catalog option The picture name appears under each picture Click it and a larger version of the picture will be displayed on its own page at 300 dpi for example You can download the picture by Ctrl clicking it and selecting the save option in the context menu Windows users can access this option by right clicking Downloaded pictures can be printed using the GraphicConverter print option and many other programs Make sure the image filenames do not contain any special characters such as commas or foreign characters Only letters numbers space characters periods and underscores are allowed in the names of the source files All source pictures are copied to a new folder and renamed so that they can be read on UNIX Internet servers when you create Internet pages Space characters are replaced by underscores Uppercase characters are changed to lowercase characters Special characters lead to error messages This is why they should be replaced beforehand In the first step you need to select the pictures for your Internet photo album If you have already collected the pictures in a folder skip the next paragraph If you want to use pictures from different folders in your album you first need to copy them into a new folder We recommend using the GraphicConverter browser
511. uld therefore leave the radius at 1 in most cases If you increase the Threshold the sharpness is reduced because the contrast of neigh boring pixels is only increased if they are more different than those at the edges There fore keep the standard value of 0 for normal pictures On slow computers we recommend deactivating the Full Screen Preview while you adjust the slider for the value The Before After display helps you find the best sharpening value The After window shows the effect of the current setting In the Picture window you can change the pic ture section displayed in the Before After windows The function has been given a name from traditional printing which may not seem ap propriate The sharpness is optimized using a mask which more or less masks off the un sharpness 125 Sharpen Edges Effect Sharpen Edges allows you to set the extent of sharpening with a percentage va lue Select a value at which you think the picture is sufficiently sharp without spoiling the picture If the sharpening is too high lines are formed on the edges of color areas for ex ample Try a high value like 90 first and then a low one like 15 and then keep trying until you find the best Keep the character of the picture in mind so that the sharpened picture is not totally different to the original This rule does not apply to unfocussed pictures If the photo graph is blurred sharpen it as much as possible You will rarely ne
512. unction IPTC Export When IPTC data is exported to a text file the fields can be selected individually CSV format is also available for databases in addition to ASCII format Many other improvements and corrections New features in GraphicConverter 5 9 1 The preferences can be saved for different types of work see p 372 Picture Invert Color Table allows you to invert the color table 1 1 for palette pictures Batches can be called up with an AppleScript allowing the use of hotfolders see p 419 Remove all metadata and Create Icon and Preview are now also available in the Finder context menu If necessary you can re install the context menu extension with Preferences General Plug Ins 438 The preview is displayed with profile and printer profile in the print dialog You can disable the option for also writing labels in the XMP section so that you can set labels faster Preferences Browser Function The position under the mouse cursor can be centered when you zoom with the scroll wheel Preferences General Edit The transparency for all frames in a GIF animation can be disabled in the new film palette New features in GraphicConverter 5 9 2 The new Edges and Frames option allows you to add a frame to an open picture see p 333 When creating HTML catalogues for the Internet you can insert colored arrows for navigation on the HTML Basic tab in the Catalog dialog GraphicConverter can be called
513. up with a command line UB version Automatic preview creation runs as background thread UB version New option for adding an EXIF preview instead of the resource preview browser In the browser context menu you can Rebuild EXIF preview in the JPEG submenu see p 256 In the browser context menu you can Set Creation Date depending on EXIF in the JPEG submenu see p 256 New context menu option for counting pixels in a selection The rating can be selected as a sort criteria in the browser The Convert dialog now supports over 32766 documents per folder under Mac OS X Rename can insert the name of the parent folder in the Name tab IPTC export supports the Event People and Location special boxes New features in GraphicConverter 5 9 3 New context menu item for converting a layout into an image New context menu item for renaming open documents Browser preview can show four images from movies Preferences Browser Display Thumbnails The AppleScript menu can be disabled in the Preferences if for example a system wide AppleScript menu is used see p 418 439 The operator supports the new option Save to source folder and copy original into sub folder Pictures can be sorted according to rating and date in the browser The slide show and browser now use a standard shortcut for rating and label New Esc Option key shortcut rebuilds the preview in the browser The slide show with search can also take the label into c
514. upported In the Save IPTC section of the Preferences you can use Always add IPTC as XMP to also write the IPTC data in the XMP section This allows programs that only search for IPTC data in the XMP section to read the data The pop up menu in the Convert dialog contains the new Add XMP record if only IPTC NAA record exists option This option writes the IPTC data also in the XMP section This is useful if your pictures have already been indexed and also need the IPTC data in the XMP section because the person you are sending the pictures to can only read the XMP section with his her software You can select the Composite Operation Core Image Filter from the Filter menu Two pictures need to be open when you use this New formats tex Texture and Sony RAW can be imported The pen color and thickness can be remembered for a new window Preferences General Edit Remember last settings for new windows In the browser the Rename dialog can also be used via the context menu for a single file If the browser context menu is too big for you you can hide individual options in the Preferences under Browser Context Menu In the HTML Catalog the filenames can optionally be shown above the images Individual frames can be moved in the Movie Options palette In Rename dialog The index number in filename can be reduced to a selectable number of digits if the index is very long like for example 00001234 In the Convert dialog F
515. ure 226 None aspect ratio selection 141 Normal Sharpen Edges 126 Not available 20 0 Odd Field 209 Only Frame in Layout dialog 211 Open EPSF Settings Preferences 393 Open FITS Preferences 404 Open General Preferences 397 Open GIF Preferences 397 Open HPGL Preferences 397 452 Open JPEG Preferences 399 Open Lotus PIC Preferences 400 Open Metafile Preferences 401 Open PCD Preferences 404 Open Photo Raw 406 Open PICT Preferences 407 Open PSD Preferences 408 Open QuickTime Preferences 409 Open TIFF Preferences 410 Open WMF Preferences 412 Open Film Preferences 402 Open folders in same browser 273 Open only one window 64 Open Recent 24 Open Slice 79 Open with 253 opening pictures 16 Optimize Color Table 173 optimizing filenames for the Internet 80 Options 25 Options for Color Reduction 173 Ordered Dither 166 Organizer formats 6 Other Value rotating a picture 123 Other Value with Line 119 Outlook Express 4 5 72 Outlook Express 5 73 Overview 60 P painting 227 Painting with GraphicConverter 224 Palette 47 Paper Format 92 Paste 216 Paste at Position 220 Paste Frame 220 Pattern 234 pattern selection 227 PDF open 405 perspective unskew 178 Photoshop plug ins 197 PICT Batch Function 310 PICT format 363 PICT Resource Graphic Clip 364 picture size 103 159 Picture with Clipboard 216 pictures in e mails 71 Play 188 pl
516. ure data needs to be encoded when you send pictures as e mail attachments sin ce only normal letters and numbers are allowed in e mails 7 bit A series of normal let ters and numbers should be used for all other characters Different standards have establis hed themselves here and are not compatible with each other Luckily you do not usually have to worry about this with modern e mail software as the programs rectify the problem Drag and drop your picture files into the e mail window or use the option for adding attachments Folders are then only allowed if they have been compressed for example with Stuffit From a browser window you can transfer images to an e mail program and shrink them automatically Use the context menu or the e mail button to send images to an e mail program see p 243 If your e mail program does not automatically decode the pictures you receive Gra phicConverter can still open it as long as it is encoded using one of the following stan dards Mac Binary Mime UUencode yEND or Binhex HQX If a Mime file contains several images GraphicConverter will save these files in a temporary folder and show them in a new browser window Move or copy the files to a normal folder if you want to save the images permanently You should reset the encoding to the corresponding mode in your e mail program if the recipient cannot open the pictures for example because he uses an older e mail pro gram or another operatin
517. use the Automator software to automate work procedures Install RCWebColorPicker installs an additional tab in the MacOS color selection dia log with which the hexadecimal values of colors can be displayed for Internet use The color selection can be limited to the old technology of Web safe colors This has howe ver not been necessary for a while thanks to modern monitors Install SmartCrashReporter installs an extension that sends error descriptions to us after crashes to help us further develop GraphicConverter 17 Click Continue to move onto the next dialog Initial Setup 2 of 2 Display kind of the graphical file browser Standard Digital lightroom mode iia at irnn PARN meang 7 Browser preview kind with two connected monitors Open preview window fullscreen Open preview window normal Use last default settings Check the Internet weekly for new version l Change file type and creator upon opening files KA Show first steps dialog Note You can change all in the preferences too Display kind of the graphical file browser allows you to choose between the stan dard mode and the photographer mode with dark background Photographers prefer a dark gray background You can change the colors later on under Preferences Browser Display General Browser preview kind with two connected monitors allows you to show the preview image fullscreen on the second monitor or normal in one w
518. using QuickTime decompression Open from file is slightly slower than Open from memory but it is more compatible with problematic graphics Display content of unknown tags displays the content of additional tags in the com ment window This option is useful when debugging repairing graphic files After clicking Save in the file selection dialog Always display compression settings when saving opens the Options dialog where you can select the compression level and hence the picture quality Show Notification for incomplete JPEGs displays an error message when an incom plete JPEG is opened 399 Open Lotus PIC Preferences Print Open DICOM ECW EPSF EXIF FITS General GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page PCD PDF Photo Raw PICT PSD QuickTime TIFF WMF f Open Lotus Pic Settings Color 0 Color 1 Color 2 Color 3 Color 4 Color 5 Color 6 Color 7 Ti JU M Use colors Default Color 8 Color 9 Color 10 Color 11 Color 12 Color 13 Color 14 Color 15 nda Undo Cancel In this dialog you can specify the colors of the 16 pens of a Lotus PIC file if it is to be im ported as a color image Click in a color field and the default dialog for selecting colors appears Use colors creates a color image The specifications for the Lotus PIC format do not in dicate whether it is a color image or a black and white image To keep the file size o
519. utton and drag across the picture to smudge crease lines in scanned photos or documents for example Another example for use would be smudging license plates that you do not want to show when publishing photographs of your car Smudging with the water drop is more subtle than coarsening with large pixels as is done when you select Filter Stilize CI Pixelate see p 183 onwards The Slice tool defines several areas for a picture that will have different links on the In ternet For more details see page 78 58 The Red Eye tool allows fast correction of red and other colored eyes for example that occur on animals that were photographed with a flash pm a a a Click the eyes with the tool to color them black You can adapt the size of the tool witha slider on the lower edge of the window If you have not installed system extensions like USB overdrive you can change the size of the tool with Shift and the scroll wheel To retain reflections on the pupil when removing red eyes you should use the Effect Red Eye option instead of this tool see p 149 onwards This option cannot however be used for different colored eyes on animals since it searches for red tones to be colored dark gray The White Point tool allows you to re apply the white point of an image if the image has a color cast Using the White Point tool click the lightest area of the image that should actually be white The colors will then be corrected
520. vel can be selected for JPEG compression The Sharpen preview option sharpens the quality of the preview using an average va lue when saving as this is usually necessary The pnot resource defines the preview of a file This resource should be completed with a nil indicator in accordance with NIM However some programs will not be able to re cognize the preview As a result this option can be switched on and off with pnot with nil If the Info string option is enabled the text GraphicConverter is written to the gra phic s resource fork If this is the case the Finder generates a message when GraphicCon verter is not available and the graphic cannot be opened with it Select the FLI FLC FLH to movie option if your FLI and FLC graphics should begin with the first picture after the last one is shown If you do not enable this option you may have problems when converting these files into an animation The Format of picture option can be selected if you want to preset the picture format or if the Last format saved should be set for Save as For animation and presentation programs the optimal Color table can be saved in the resource fork in addition to the file You can choose either Add pltt resource or Add clut Resource Enable Always recompress JPEGs if you work with the selection rectangle for lossless trimming or the Crop for Photo Service option with lossless trimming enabled and still want the JPEG quality dialog to be di
521. version when up loading your data to an older server that cannot manage long filenames All filenames are then automatically shortened to 8 3 characters as logically as possible Numbers at the start are not changed but are not always allowed there You may not have problems with filenames when you test them on your computer However uppercase names etc will not be recognized once you copy your data to a ser ver on the Internet UNIX servers differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters Note that for UNIX servers the filenames House on Canal Bank jpg and house on canal bank jpg are considered to be different files Links to files are always case sensitive A server may be able to handle a special character but a certain browser cannot when displaying data from the Web Proceed as follows Preferences Convert Misc DOS filenames Photo Albums on the Internet Catalog You should consider offering your pictures for download on the Internet if you do not want to deal with repeat orders of photos GraphicConverter automatically creates the re quired pages and pictures for this with just a few clicks of the mouse Collect all source pictures in a folder that you show as a small preview on the Internet and want to offer for download for example in larger printable versions Pictures that have been downloaded 80 can be forwarded to photo labs who will print your pictures on photographic paper and send them to yo
522. verter Preferences Slide Show General This makes it easy to collect your favorites to use at a later time 283 without actually moving the files GraphicConverter also displays a slide show if a folder with alias files is selected The next icon to the right allows you to change the filename via the dialog below Old Name Renate auf Grabstein New Name Renate auf Grabstein f gt ye Cancel OK The icon to the left of the bent arrow opens a file list that displays a list of the graphic fi lenames in the current window You can scroll through the list and click the graphic you want to continue the slide show with O Abzweig_Lorenzkirch jpg Cottewitz_01 jpg Cottewitz_02 jpg Cottewitz_Loki01 jpg B Cottewitz_Loki_02 jpg Cottewitz_Loki_03 jpg Cottewitz_Loki_04 jpg Cottewitz_Loki_O5 jpg Cottewitz_Loki_06 jpg Gohlis_01 jpg b Pressing the G key during a slide show opens a dialog that allows you to pick a picture to continue the slide show with Goto Image Goto Image 1 of 205 The bent arrow button on the left rotates the picture 90 degrees in a counterclockwise direction Command Z The button on the right rotates it 90 degrees in a clockwise direc tion Command vU Rotating in this way does not modify the file Hold down the Alt key to rotate the image also in the file or use Alt Z and Alt U instead of the buttons JPEGs are rotated without any loss of quality In the Slide Show M
523. w O VMS Gms General ne z pe Effects Atari Atari Misc Move Folders i Move Folders 2 Separator of IPTC keywords Move Folders 3 Convert Convert Text IPTC Errors Time Icon Preview Index Misc Browser General Context Menu Display General Display Thumbnails Function Keywords Misc Open Preview Tool bar v C Defaut Undo Cancel 0K Create one IPTC text file for each file Specify the format of the source text under Source and the required destination format under Destination You can use Convert Line Endings to convert just the ends of the lines A dialog where you can select the target format opens Convert Line Endings To Mac OS UNIX O DOS Cancel Ee Export IPTC exports the IPTC information from the pictures selected on the left to a text file created in the destination folder This text file is called metadata txt The source pictures are not modified If you want to create a text file for each image file you can se lect it under Preferences Convert Text Conversion When you click Go a dialog opens where you can specify that the Comments should be exported instead of the IPTC 37 information The option for creating a separate text file for each source file is also availa ble in this dialog Extract IPTC information O Comments l Create a separate text file for each source file Cancel OG If you select the IPTC information anothe
524. w Order to normal for picture build up from top to bottom independent of the format versions 87a and 89a for GIF format The Progressive option must be disabled for JPEG format The No Row Order option needs to be selected for PNG pic tures Display Content from Low to High Resolution Surfers normally prefer pictures to appear complete as soon as sufficient data has been transferred and appear initially at a low resolution The pictures gradually become finer as the data is transferred ANTATANIAN A all ELIAN NIIE im i ih Most Web designers prefer this method as an overall impression quickly emerges after you open a page and the constantly refined pictures have the effect of an animation to a certain extent Note that there are limitations when the Web site uses tables as tables are usually only displayed when they have been completely transferred Save your pictures for this display type in JPEG format and enable the Progressive option in the Save as dialog under Options or in GIF format and switch the Row Order option to Interlaced in the Save as dialog under Options or in PNG format and enable the Adam 7 option in the Save as dialog Note that not all WYSIWYG HTML editors can process every variant when you are crea ting Web sites Minimizing the File Size The size of a file can be affected by different factors File format and compression rate Scope of the color palette Picture size
525. w like the Build image from layout option You can move pictures anywhere in a layout with the mouse or with the cursor keys The size of pictures in a layout can be changed using the handle at the bottom right hand side Click the picture frame and move the small black square as required While you scale the picture the size and zoom value in percent appear next to the handle If you want to keep the proportions hold down the Shift key while scaling To set a non proportional scaled picture back to proportional Control click the picture and select Resize Picture proportional from the context menu You can also use this menu to Remove Pictures or to set the layout to a specific zoom level If pictures are partly overlapped it is sometimes preferable to change the order in which the pictures are layered Bring Image to the front allows you to move a picture to the front Send Image behind all others sorts a picture to the back 212 You can use Build image from layout if for example you want to save a layout as a JPG image to send it by e mail The whole page is saved as an image Help Remove Picture Resize Picture proportional View at 10 View at 25 View at 50 View at 100 View at 200 View at 300 View at 400 Bring Image to the front Send Image behind all others Insert IMG_18104 jpg Options Build image from layout There are further Options at the bottom of the context menu and under Special
526. wards Open Formats displays the formats for which settings can be made Open Formats BMP Preferences General Digital Camera Display Content Display Windows Edit Memory Misc Monitor Plug ins Print Open General IPTC BMP DICOM ECW EPSF EXIF FITS GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Multi page Movie Correct amp Change i Import 15 16 bit BMPs as 15 or 16 bit depending on file settings Q 15 bit 16 bit Default Undo Cancel ox BMP format was created by Microsoft but has never been standardized For this reason there are 15 and 16 bit pictures If you have problems opening the files select 15 bit and 391 if there are still problems select 16 bit 15 or 16 bit depending on file settings tries to find the information on the data depth Open DICOM Preferences General Open DICOM Digital Camera y F i 7 Display Content 0 Use file values for default window if available Display Windows O Calculate default window with min max check Edit Memory Misc Monitor Plug ins Print Open DICOM ECW EPSF EXIF FITS General GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile 4 Default gt Undo Movie v N Most DICOM images provide 65 000 grays Mac OS can display only up to 256 grays Choose whether you want to use file values for default window if available or whether you would prefer to calculate default window with minimum maximum ch
527. ways make a backup for example on an external hard drive and make sure that you have sufficient hard drive space We recommend FoldersSynchronizer as a good low cost solution for backups the upcoming TimeMachine from Mac OS 10 5 and as a professional solution Retrospect from www emcinsignia com previously Danz We recommend managing large image stocks on external hard drives If you define the target folder on a different drive to the source drive during conversion the speed increases as the write read heads do not cons tantly have to change position If you move files or folders in the Finder you will need to refresh the lists in the Convert dialog by clicking the circular arrow in the upper left corner The dialog can be enlarged by dragging the lower right corner to display long filen ames in full If you select a folder as the source GraphicConverter creates a file with the name of the source folder in the target directory and if necessary saves the converted files in subfol ders A new folder is not created in the target folder if one or more files are selected as the source In this case the converted files are saved straight to the target directory Select the format you require for the conversion under Dest Format Start the multiple conversion by clicking Go In the pop up menu between the lists you can choose further functions Auto Convert Watch folder mode specifies a folder in the selection list on the left that
528. will be scaled proportionally Selections that were scaled out of proportion are then set proportionally again 140 You can edit the contents of the selection for example with the Brightness and Shar pen Edges options or cut copy delete or move the selection In the Edit menu you can choose whether one of the colors should be transparent You will normally want to select a section of a picture and overwrite existing picture content when you move it to its destination as if you were fixing a sticker there The se lection will appear semi transparent translucent while you move it to help you find the position This function can be disabled via Edit Mac OS X GraphicConverter Prefe rences in the General Edit section The selection is then displayed as a frame while you move it If you want to copy the selection as you move it click the contents and only then press and hold down the Option key Prior selection of an aspect ratio for the selected area is intended for editing of pictures from digital cameras in particular You can set a specific aspect ratio at the bottom of the toolbox using the None pop up menu Pictures taken with digital cameras normally have the same aspect ratio as a monitor i e about 3 4 Prints from photo labs like the ones you can order on the Internet have the standard aspect ratio of 2 3 as with postcard format photos for example 10x15 cm Some labs therefore offer you the choice of having the pictu
529. window opens where a larger preview of all the pictures can be displayed Open a picture in GraphicConverter by double clicking one of the preview pictures For further information see the chapter Browser on page 235 Tip You can use File Reopen to reopen All Recent Windows All Files or All Browser Folders that were open last time GraphicConverter was exited The program Default Folder from www stclairsoft com is a useful enhancement for the file selection dialog as it shows an enlarged preview under the file selection dialog in all programs Use the All available filter to display all files and folders If you select a format from the Filter pop up menu only pictures with this format are displayed Classic Mac OS only The preview can be switched off with Hide Preview The preview can be switched on again with this button if it is hidden The button then has the text Show Preview The document icon is displayed double the size if required if no preview is available The message Not available appears in the window if this is also not available The technical document information for the selected picture is displayed below the preview picture The documentation information is shown and hidden together with the preview picture If a picture does not contain a preview you can create one with Create Preview Enlarge Preview enlarges a small preview picture if possible The options in the upper part of the file selection dialog are used fo
530. without having to install another program You will need to load and install UNIX gx or Ghostscript for older versions of the Mac OS The URLs are given in the dialog If you select Try to decode Photoshop EPSF files without helper app Gra phicConverter will try to open the image with its own routines for Photoshop format If you click Options the following dialog appears Ghostscript Options TA Add showpage command Mi Add only if no showpage l Let gs crop depending on BoundingBox M Add q command Add showpage command completes EPSF files at the end with the showpage command which is necessary for correct rendering If problems occur use the function Add only if no showpage 348 Choose Let gs crop depending on BoundingBox if the cropping of the edges is not working fine EPSF pictures all have got edges which must be cropped You should only enable Add q command if you are not able to open EPSF files Installing UNIX gs Ghostscript Mac OS X UNIX gs Ghostscript is free and only available for Mac OS X Once it has been installed other programs can also access the library Installation is no problem with a standard in staller Store a copy of the installer in a safe place as you will have to reinstall the library if you ever have to reinstall your system Download the file espgs 7 05 5 0 ppc dmg from http gimp print sourceforge net MacOSX php3 and double click the file A volume imag
531. x768 4 Base 1024x1536 16 Base 2048x3072 gt 64 Base 4096x6144 _ 312 f Cancel R If you define margins in the input boxes the framed section is displayed as a preview Click Full to display the whole picture again 404 Open PDF Preferences Display Content a Bestia Display Windows Edit Open with resolution of 360 ppi Memory Misc Open with bit depth of 1 bit Monitor Plug ins Q 8 bit Print alpen 32 bit General Correct amp Change IPTC YV Formats BMP Deltavision DICOM ECW EPSF EXIF FITS GIF HPGL JPEG Lotus Pic Metafile Movie Multi page PCD PDF Photo Raw z PICT v Default Undo Cancel J 0K Open with resolution of x ppi lets you choose a resolution for PDF files when opened Open with bit depth of allows you to select 1 bit B amp W 8 bit grayscale or 32 bit color PDF files and PDF pictures can be opened under Mac OS X only v Show dialog on opening Show dialog on opening allows you to select the resolution and color depth each time you open an image in PDF format PDF import settings Open with resolution of 360 Open with bit depth of 1bit O 8 bit 32 bit C Don t show again You can show the dialog again with the preferences open pdf Cancel Eo 405 Open Photo Raw Preferences EPSF a Open Photo Raw EXIF J FITS Gamma Red Scale 1 00 GIF HPGL Brightness 1 30 Blue Scale 1 00 IPT
532. y assigned to the images instead it defines the color model to which the image is converted This is the only way to minimize light and bright colors becoming pale when you switch the mode to CMYK The profile is attached to the pic tures automatically upon saving The profile selected here is also used for CMYK images that do not have a profile If ano ther profile belongs to the picture the colors will be displayed incorrectly We therefore recommend the setting Ask if the image has no profile If in doubt ask which profile should be used with the image and select it in the Assign Color Profile dialog You should only change the Priority if you are familiar with special color management issues Mac OS 9 The Edit Color Profile is only available if you are using ColorSync 2 6 1 or newer under Classic Mac OS You will find the latest version of ColorSync on the Mac OS 9 system CD If you only want to install ColorSync and not the whole of System 9 you do not have to boot from the system CD as is necessary for full installation Instead open the Software Installation folder then the ColorSync folder and start the ColorSync installer You will find the Software Installation folder in the bottom section of the CD window by scrolling down Please see the ColorSync documentation for further information on wor king with ColorSync Selection Modifications are often only applied to part of a picture In these cases you need to defi ne a sele
533. y selected as the tool Click one point in the picture where the color can be seen A dialog opens where the size of the area using the selected color is shown in percent Color Usage Color Ss Percentage 43 92 List from STR Resource Under File New select List from STR Resource to create a list of the contents of an STR Resource When printing ResEdit only prints the window contents of this resource and not all strings First select the file in the file selection dialog GraphicConverter checks whether this file contains STR resources If there are none an error message appears In the next dialog select the STR resource from which to create a list 342 Important Formats A list of all formats that GraphicConverter can read and write can be found on page 425 In this chapter we provide information on the most important formats and their features To save a picture in a specific format select File Save as and then select the target format you want from the pop up menu see p 24 To select the format specific options click Options in the file selection dialog The wide selection of formats is a result of constantly changing graphic format require ments and technical advances Inadequate long term planning and the pressure of com petition have also led to the creation of new formats This is slightly reminiscent of the language confusion that occurred at the Tower of Babel Moses 1 Chapter 11 Problem
534. you copy a red Z which is on a white background the white can be defined as a transparent color As a result as soon as you start moving it the white background around the Z in the selection becomes transpa rent and you can see the picture behind it Even after pasting in the required position only the red Z remains The white background is no longer there To achieve this effect open the following dialog in the target image by double clicking the selection tool in the toolbox Select the Transparency tab and enable the Copy Se lection Transparent option Selection Transparency Selection Preferences Transparent Color a Set Back Color l Copy Selection Transparent m Copy with other Opacy 50 This field is empty because the color table is only available for pictures that use 256 colors or fewer __ Save to Preferences Note You can access the tabs from keyboard with _ _ command 1 3 Cancel You can call up a similar dialog by double clicking the elliptic selection tool Use Transparent Color to select the color which should be set to transparent when you move and paste the selection Click the color box to pick the color with the color se lector or click outside the dialog on a picture section with the color The mouse cursor will automatically turn into the eyedropper With pallet pictures the color can be selected in the displayed pallet If the color set to transp
535. z C VLINK a __ Make filenames lowercase C ALINK a m Correct extension Title Glaubenskurs 2 Use Macintosh line ends _ Create link from thumbnails to images Use UNIX line ends Open images with navigation l With CR O Align Thumbnails TOP Open mages without gavi gaton Open images in a new window target _blank Align Thumbnails MIDDLE Align Thumbnails BOTTOM Charset iso 8859 1 a Navigation Pink Arrows B _ Click on image moves to the next m Set new window bounds to image bounds Open Save Cancel 0K A folder with this name is created in the destination directory The preview pictures are saved in this folder Next to Picture Path enter a folder name or leave the default name images A folder with this name is created in the selected destination directory The source pictures are co pied to this folder so that they remain unchanged at their original location HLINK specifies the color for links that have not yet been clicked If you produce Web sites for older browsers you should use the older HTML tag LINK VLINK specifies the co lor for links that have already been clicked Click the boxes to the right of the options to change the colors see p 224 Title specifies the title of the HTML page that is shown in the window frame and ap pears as a bookmark when users create a bookmark a favorite for the page Create link from thumbnails to images creates links from the preview
536. ze Left Q Enlarge reduce area to fit page Resize area ree O Print display information C Print only name and comment BAP s wh inte Behavior for printing images that are Top 2 68 cm Right 2 66cm Bottom 2 68 cm larger than the page Position Ask always aa Q Scale image to fit page a a Q Trim image O00 Print on more pages J Smart Trim before printing J Smart print orientation Mac OS X The following dialog opens with a preview that takes the picture profile into considerati on Print Options Area Comment of Window Size Original Sire C Print display information Print only neme sad comment S Print with daie L Print IPTC caption if available fons Caneva a Size of Header TEE Behavior for printing images that are Larger than the page Scale image to fit page A Smart Trim before printing F Smart print onentation iv Show preview Margins Left 0 000 cm Right 0 000 cm Top 0 000 cm Bonom 0 000 cm Use peretter s minemum Position Absolute centered o Cnc GD Mac OS classic and X The following instructions apply to both Mac OS versions 93 Area specifies whether the whole picture All or only the visible Content of window should be printed Select whether the picture should be printed in the original size enlarged reduced to fit the paper format or resized to 200 for example next to Size Enter the value in a di alog that opens after sel
537. zontal are aligned horizontally You can therefore also choose a line in the picture that should actu ally be horizontal De Willemstad 09JPG wk v ad The edges of the picture may need to be cropped after rotation as the corners will now stick out over the original frame GraphicConverter enlarges the picture automatically so that the white borders can be added You can freely select the color for the borders with the background color Use the selection lines to mark out the picture area to be trimmed and double click inside the rectangle or press Return Selecting File Trim Selection see Trimming page 117 also has the same results Trimming loses parts of the picture This cannot be avoided Select the area to be trim med carefully so that you do not cut out any important parts of the picture 121 This is our finished rotated and trimmed picture Please note that horizontal lines only really need to be horizontal if they have been photographed head on Objects are usually depicted at an angle from the side In our ex ample picture the front roofline of the houses and the edge of the quay are on a line that should not be rotated to horizontal Therefore you should use mainly vertical lines as ori entation points Furthermore when using the Rotate option note that picture quality and sharpness is lost on angles that are not 90 or a multiple of 90 You should only rotate low resolution pictures by 90 or 180 if

This Manual - Lemke Software GmbH

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents